Tech-note

UniOP User's Manual

Updated for Designer 6.05 and UniOP firmware 5.50

Contents
1 Welcome........................................................................................................................... 6
2 Quick Start........................................................................................................................ 7
2.1 Quick Start Tutorial Introduction.......................................................................... 7
2.1.1 Development Environment Setup ....................................................................... 7
2.2 Quick Start Tutorial.............................................................................................. 8
3 Installation ...................................................................................................................... 14
3.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 14
3.2 Assumptions...................................................................................................... 15
3.3 Conventions ...................................................................................................... 15
3.4 System Requirements ....................................................................................... 15
3.4.1 Free hard disk space......................................................................................... 16
3.4.2 RAM Memory .................................................................................................... 16
3.4.3 Supported Operating Systems: ......................................................................... 16
3.5 Previous Versions ............................................................................................. 16
3.6 Software Installation .......................................................................................... 16
3.7 Connecting the Panel to the PC........................................................................ 18
3.8 Solving Installation Problems ............................................................................ 19
3.9 How to Report a Bug ......................................................................................... 19
3.10 Technical Support ............................................................................................. 19
3.11 Contact Information ........................................................................................... 19
3.12 Designer Software License ............................................................................... 20
3.12.1 SOFTWARE LICENSE...................................................................................... 20
3.12.2 Grant of License ................................................................................................ 20
3.12.3 Limitations ......................................................................................................... 21
3.12.4 COPYRIGHT ..................................................................................................... 21
3.12.5 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY ........................................................................... 21
3.12.6 DISCLAIMER (Limited Warranty)...................................................................... 21
4 Reference ....................................................................................................................... 22
4.1 File Menu........................................................................................................... 22
4.1.1 File Menu........................................................................................................... 22
4.1.2 New ................................................................................................................... 23
4.1.3 Open.................................................................................................................. 23
4.1.4 Close ................................................................................................................. 24
4.1.5 Save .................................................................................................................. 24
4.1.6 Save As ............................................................................................................. 24
4.1.7 Print ................................................................................................................... 25
4.1.8 Print Preview ..................................................................................................... 25
4.1.9 Print Setup......................................................................................................... 25
4.1.10 Designer Print Setup ......................................................................................... 26
4.1.11 Export to tag database ...................................................................................... 28
4.1.12 Export Strings.................................................................................................... 29

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 1
Tech-note

4.1.13 Import Strings .................................................................................................... 30

4.1.14 Recent Files ...................................................................................................... 31
4.1.15 Exit..................................................................................................................... 31
4.2 Edit Menu .......................................................................................................... 31
4.2.1 Edit Menu .......................................................................................................... 31
4.2.2 Undo .................................................................................................................. 32
4.2.3 Redo .................................................................................................................. 32
4.2.4 Cut ..................................................................................................................... 32
4.2.5 Copy .................................................................................................................. 32
4.2.6 Paste ................................................................................................................. 32
4.2.7 Select All ........................................................................................................... 32
4.2.8 Align................................................................................................................... 33
4.2.9 Make Same Size ............................................................................................... 34
4.2.10 Fonts.................................................................................................................. 35
4.3 View Menu......................................................................................................... 38
4.3.1 View Menu......................................................................................................... 38
4.3.2 Zoom In ............................................................................................................. 38
4.3.3 Zoom Out .......................................................................................................... 39
4.3.4 Status Bar.......................................................................................................... 39
4.3.5 Toolbars............................................................................................................. 40
4.3.6 Workspace ........................................................................................................ 42
4.3.7 Full Screen ........................................................................................................ 42
4.3.8 Graphics Library ................................................................................................ 43
4.3.9 Layers................................................................................................................ 46
4.4 Insert Menu ....................................................................................................... 49
4.4.1 Insert Menu ....................................................................................................... 49
4.4.2 Text.................................................................................................................... 50
4.4.3 Bitmap ............................................................................................................... 50
4.4.4 Data Fields ........................................................................................................ 52
4.5 Color Attributes.................................................................................................. 98
4.6 256 Color Attributes........................................................................................... 99
4.6.1 Touch Cells ..................................................................................................... 116
4.6.2 Shapes ............................................................................................................ 150
4.6.3 Trend Window ................................................................................................. 151
4.6.4 Meter Instrument ............................................................................................. 163
4.6.5 Trend Time Field ............................................................................................. 175
4.6.6 Recipe Menu ................................................................................................... 178
4.6.7 Special Characters .......................................................................................... 182
4.6.8 Import Bitmap Graphics................................................................................... 182
4.7 Page Menu ...................................................................................................... 190
4.7.1 Page Menu ...................................................................................................... 190
4.7.2 Insert Page ...................................................................................................... 190
4.7.3 Add Page......................................................................................................... 190
4.7.4 Delete Page..................................................................................................... 190
4.7.5 Go to Page ...................................................................................................... 191
4.7.6 Previous Page ................................................................................................. 191
4.7.7 Next Page........................................................................................................ 191
4.7.8 Page Options................................................................................................... 191
4.7.9 Recipe Configuration....................................................................................... 193
4.7.10 Special Pages and Page Modes ..................................................................... 196
4.8 Project Menu ................................................................................................... 198
4.8.1 Project Menu ................................................................................................... 198
4.8.2 Configure Controller ........................................................................................ 199
4.8.3 Panel Setup..................................................................................................... 204
4.8.4 Network Setup................................................................................................. 218
4.8.5 Panel Controller Interface................................................................................ 228
4.8.6 Report on Panel Printer................................................................................... 237

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 2
Tech-note

4.8.7 Keyboard Macro Editor.................................................................................... 251

4.8.8 Passwords ....................................................................................................... 289
4.8.9 Alarms ............................................................................................................. 295
4.8.10 Languages....................................................................................................... 311
4.8.11 Next Language ................................................................................................ 312
4.8.12 Configure Tag Dictionaries.............................................................................. 313
4.8.13 Tag Validation ................................................................................................. 314
4.8.14 Trend Buffers................................................................................................... 315
4.8.15 Memory Use .................................................................................................... 322
4.8.16 Time Scheduled Triggers ................................................................................ 323
4.9 Transfers Menu ............................................................................................... 326
4.9.1 Transfers Menu ............................................................................................... 326
4.9.2 Download ........................................................................................................ 327
4.9.3 Upload ............................................................................................................. 327
4.9.4 Download to SSFDC ....................................................................................... 328
4.9.5 Options ............................................................................................................ 330
4.9.6 Get Panel Resources ...................................................................................... 339
4.9.7 Check Firmware Versions ............................................................................... 341
4.9.8 Switch to Operation mode ............................................................................... 341
4.9.9 Switch to Configuration mode ......................................................................... 341
4.9.10 Remote Passthrough....................................................................................... 342
4.9.11 Dial .................................................................................................................. 343
4.9.12 Hang Up .......................................................................................................... 343
4.10 Tools Menu...................................................................................................... 343
4.10.1 Tools Menu...................................................................................................... 343
4.10.2 Tag Editor........................................................................................................ 344
4.10.3 Font Editor....................................................................................................... 364
4.10.4 Keypad Designer............................................................................................. 373
4.10.5 Customize ....................................................................................................... 391
4.10.6 Options ............................................................................................................ 401
4.10.7 Advanced ........................................................................................................ 404
4.10.8 Replace Images .............................................................................................. 407
4.11 Window Menu.................................................................................................. 410
4.11.1 Window Menu.................................................................................................. 410
4.11.2 New Window ................................................................................................... 411
4.11.3 Cascade .......................................................................................................... 411
4.11.4 Tile Horizontally............................................................................................... 411
4.11.5 Tile Vertically ................................................................................................... 411
4.12 Application Menu............................................................................................. 411
4.12.1 Application Menu............................................................................................. 411
4.12.2 Restore ............................................................................................................ 412
4.12.3 Move................................................................................................................ 412
4.12.4 Size.................................................................................................................. 412
4.12.5 Minimize .......................................................................................................... 412
4.12.6 Maximize ......................................................................................................... 412
4.12.7 Close ............................................................................................................... 412
5 Workspace.................................................................................................................... 413
5.1 Workspace ...................................................................................................... 413
5.2 Graphics .......................................................................................................... 414
5.3 Objects ............................................................................................................ 415
5.4 Project ............................................................................................................. 416
5.4.1 Project ............................................................................................................. 416
5.4.2 Data Transfer .................................................................................................. 416
6 Basics ........................................................................................................................... 418
6.1 Basics .............................................................................................................. 418
6.2 Designer Screen.............................................................................................. 419

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 3
Tech-note

6.2.1 Designer Screen.............................................................................................. 419

6.2.2 Menu Bar......................................................................................................... 420
6.2.3 Toolbars........................................................................................................... 420
6.2.4 Project Screen................................................................................................. 422
6.2.5 Right-Click Menus ........................................................................................... 422
6.2.6 Tooltips ............................................................................................................ 423
6.2.7 Getting Help .................................................................................................... 423
6.3 Designer Setup................................................................................................ 424
6.3.1 Designer Setup................................................................................................ 424
6.3.2 Transfer Settings ............................................................................................. 424
6.3.3 Controller Selection and Setup ....................................................................... 425
6.3.4 Panel Selection and Setup.............................................................................. 426
6.4 Creating a Project............................................................................................ 428
6.4.1 Creating a Project............................................................................................ 428
6.4.2 Creating a New File......................................................................................... 428
6.4.3 Selecting a Font .............................................................................................. 428
6.4.4 Inserting Page Objects .................................................................................... 429
6.4.5 Saving a Project File ....................................................................................... 429
6.4.6 Memory Used by the Project File .................................................................... 429
6.5 Printing ............................................................................................................ 430
6.6 Project Upload and Download......................................................................... 430
6.7 Simple Data Fields .......................................................................................... 430
6.8 Simple Touch Cells ......................................................................................... 431
7 Advanced...................................................................................................................... 432
7.1 Alarms ............................................................................................................. 432
7.1.1 Alarms ............................................................................................................. 432
7.1.2 Configuring Alarms.......................................................................................... 433
7.1.3 Alarms and the Keyboard Macro Editor .......................................................... 433
7.1.4 Alarms Safety Issues....................................................................................... 435
7.2 Automatic Firmware Upgrade Procedure........................................................ 436
7.2.1 Automatic Firmware Upgrade Procedure........................................................ 436
7.2.2 Procedure to Upgrade the Internal Flash Memory.......................................... 436
7.2.3 Check Firmware Versions ............................................................................... 437
7.2.4 Designer Firmware Files Directory.................................................................. 438
7.3 Double Protocol............................................................................................... 439
7.3.1 Double Protocol............................................................................................... 439
7.3.2 Enabling Multiple-Protocol Configuration ........................................................ 440
7.3.3 Controllers Setup............................................................................................. 441
7.3.4 Placing Fields on a Page................................................................................. 442
7.3.5 Downloading Uploading and Getting Panel Resources .................................. 443
7.3.6 Configuring UniNET Networks ........................................................................ 444
7.4 Interlock Mailbox ............................................................................................. 445
7.4.1 Interlock Mailbox ............................................................................................. 445
7.4.2 Enabling the Internet Mailbox.......................................................................... 446
7.4.3 Structure of the Mailbox .................................................................................. 447
7.4.4 Interlock Mailbox Commands.......................................................................... 449
7.4.5 Mailbox Programming ..................................................................................... 459
7.5 Networks ......................................................................................................... 461
7.5.1 UniNET Networks............................................................................................ 461
7.5.2 General Characteristics................................................................................... 462
7.5.3 Network Configurations ................................................................................... 466
7.5.4 Network Types ................................................................................................ 469
7.5.5 Connecting Panels to the Network.................................................................. 472
7.5.6 Network Setup................................................................................................. 477
7.5.7 Advanced Network Programming ................................................................... 479
7.5.8 Network Examples .......................................................................................... 485
7.6 Panel Fonts ..................................................................................................... 489

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 4
Tech-note

7.6.1 Panel Fonts ..................................................................................................... 489

7.6.2 Installing New Panel Fonts.............................................................................. 490
7.6.3 Downloading Panel Fonts ............................................................................... 492
7.6.4 Compressing Panel Fonts ............................................................................... 493
7.7 Printing ............................................................................................................ 494
7.7.1 Printer Setup ................................................................................................... 494
7.7.2 Reports ............................................................................................................ 495
7.7.3 Printer Setup Example .................................................................................... 496
7.8 RDA ................................................................................................................. 498
7.8.1 RDA ................................................................................................................. 498
7.8.2 Keyboard Update Area.................................................................................... 500
7.8.3 Panel Status Area ........................................................................................... 500
7.8.4 Panel Status Area ........................................................................................... 500
7.8.5 Controller Update Area.................................................................................... 504
7.9 Recipes............................................................................................................ 508
7.9.1 Recipes............................................................................................................ 508
7.9.2 Working with Recipes...................................................................................... 509
7.9.3 Inserting Recipe Data Fields ........................................................................... 509
7.9.4 Configuring Recipe Parameter Sets................................................................ 509
7.9.5 Recipes and Control Variables........................................................................ 510
7.9.6 Recipes and the Keyboard Macro Editor ........................................................ 511
7.9.7 Recipe Menu ................................................................................................... 511
7.9.8 Recipes and the Interlock Mailbox .................................................................. 515
7.9.9 Multipage Recipe Support ............................................................................... 516
7.9.10 Recipes and Events Backup in Flash.............................................................. 517
7.9.11 Recipe Example .............................................................................................. 519
7.10 Tags................................................................................................................. 525
7.10.1 Tags................................................................................................................. 525
7.10.2 Tag Dictionaries .............................................................................................. 526
7.10.3 Tag Editor........................................................................................................ 527
7.10.4 Using Tags in Designer ................................................................................... 529
7.10.5 Tag Validation ................................................................................................. 530
7.10.6 Tag Example ................................................................................................... 530
7.11 Trends ............................................................................................................. 533
7.11.1 Trends ............................................................................................................. 533
7.11.2 Trend Buffer .................................................................................................... 534
7.11.3 Trend Window ................................................................................................. 536
7.11.4 Internal Panel Control Variables ..................................................................... 539
7.11.5 Trend Macros .................................................................................................. 539
7.11.6 Trend Printing.................................................................................................. 539
7.11.7 Mailbox ............................................................................................................ 540
7.11.8 Trend Limitations............................................................................................. 540
7.12 Working with Graphics .................................................................................... 540
7.12.1 Working with Graphics .................................................................................... 540
7.12.2 Simple Shapes ................................................................................................ 541
7.12.3 Graphics Libraries ........................................................................................... 542
7.12.4 Objects Libraries ............................................................................................. 544
7.12.5 Color Boxes..................................................................................................... 546
7.13 Multilanguage .................................................................................................. 547
7.13.1 Overview ......................................................................................................... 547
7.13.2 Code Pages..................................................................................................... 549
7.14 Ethernet Connectivity ...................................................................................... 551
7.14.1 Assigning IP Address to Panel........................................................................ 551
7.14.2 Selecting Ethernet Communication in Designer ............................................. 556
7.14.3 Pick Panel: The Ethernet Control Panel.......................................................... 556
7.14.4 Clock Synchronization with the SNTP Protocol .............................................. 559
7.14.5 Using UniDataExchanger ................................................................................ 559

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 5
Tech-note

7.14.6 Basic Ethernet Diagnostic with Ping ............................................................... 562

7.15 Getting Started with B Series Panels .............................................................. 563
7.15.1 The New Hardware Platform for UniOP Panels.............................................. 563
7.15.2 Support for 64K Colors.................................................................................... 563
7.15.3 The FW60 Memory Architecture ..................................................................... 564
7.15.4 The Internal Memory ....................................................................................... 565
7.15.5 Video Input Option........................................................................................... 567
7.15.6 Backlight Dimming........................................................................................... 573
7.15.7 Compatibility Issues ........................................................................................ 574
8 Index............................................................................................................................. 576

1 Welcome

Developing applications for a UniOP panel is quick and painless when using Designer
software. The common functionality found among many Windows applications can also be
found in Designer. This familiar interface style helps new users to quickly learn the Designer
software.

A completed project file of format *.dpr contains all the information needed to display your
page images and controller data values in the formats you selected while creating your project
file. The panel hardware will handle all of the underlying communications necessary to
transfer data to and from the controller, leaving you free to concentrate on the appearance and
functionality of your data and display pages.

Note: Depending on the particular configuration of your project, one or more additional files
may be necessary to convey all the necessary information about a project. These additional
files may contain information about Keypad Designer, UniSSFDC, Font Editor, Nice Font
Editor, etc. The project file itself may, in certain cases, not be sufficient to contain all the
information necessary to reproduce the application.

Designer makes it possible to work in a natural and intuitive way using the logic behind your
control application to guide you through development. You can use Designer to create one or
more display pages that outline and control your applications. The multiple page capability of
each panel allows any application to be broken down into as many pages as you want,
depending only on the amount of memory in your target system. Completed projects can be
recalled from disk or from the panel itself for further modification.

For information regarding hardware operation, please see the UniOP Installation & Operation
Guide

(Internal Manual Code: 05.006)

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 6
Tech-note

2 Quick Start

2.1 Quick Start Tutorial Introduction

The Quick Start Tutorial shows how the Designer software is used to develop applications for
the UniOP panel.

Though the chosen example is very simple, it goes through all the steps that are normally used
to develop normal applications, even the most complex ones.

At the end of the tutorial you will not be able to perform the single steps in detail, you will not
know all the Designer features, how and when to use them. What you will have is a general
feeling of what is required to develop an application, which tasks have to be performed and
how easy is their execution thanks to the Designer software.

Note: The tutorial assumes that you have already installed the software.

2.1.1 Development Environment Setup

The above figure shows a typical, complete setup for the development of applications.

Users develop their applications with the Designer software and download them into the
UniOP panel. The panel in turn is connected to one or more Controllers (PLCs).

The developed applications can display the Controller(s) I/Os on the UniOP panel and also
can send commands to the connected Controller(s).

The UniOP contains a software simulated Demo Controller that allows the development and
testing of applications even when real Controllers are not available.

To the Quick Start Tutorial

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 7
Tech-note

2.2 Quick Start Tutorial

Connect the programming cable from the PC to the panel.

Connect the controller's communication cable to the panel.

Locate the Designer icon on your PC desktop and click on it.

Once the Designer is open, create a new project file by selecting New from the
File menu.

Give the new project a name, select a file location,

and click OK.

Select Project - Configure Controller.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 8
Tech-note

The currently selected controller is displayed.

Click on the "..." button to select a different driver, if necessary.

Press the Controller Setup button to select the particular controller model being
used. For this first example it is better to select the DEMO Controller.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 9
Tech-note

If required, set up the panel-to-controller communication parameters by

pressing the PLC/Drive Comm button (you don't need to perform this step if
you selected the DEMO Controller).

Set the parameters, then click on OK to confirm your selections and close the
open dialog boxes.

Select Project - Panel Setup. Select the type of display representative of your
UniOP panel.

This step could be eliminated by placing the panel in Configuration Mode and
selecting Get Panel Resources from the Transfers menu.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 10
Tech-note

You are now ready to begin designing the project page. Click somewhere on
the project page and, using the PC keyboard, type the words "This is a data
value =" on the first page of the project.

Select Insert - Data Fields - Numeric/ASCII. The cursor will turn into crosshairs.
Use the cursor to define the boundaries of a small box following the phrase
you typed on the page.

The Properties dialog box will appear on the screen.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 11
Tech-note

Click the "…" button under Reference.

The Data Field Properties dialog box will appear on the screen.

Fill in the Data Field Properties dialog box with the appropriate data. The data
reference MUST already exist in the controller. Keep in mind that this dialog
box is controller specific.

Click on the OK button in order to confirm the controller information.

Click on the OK button in order to confirm the numeric field properties and
create the data field. The following figure shows the resulting screen.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 12
Tech-note

Select Save from the File menu.

Select Transfers - Options - Serial Ports

Choose the communications port that Designer will use to communicate with
the panel. Ports that are unavailable will be grayed out. Under normal
circumstances, use the following parameters to communicate with a panel:
38400 baud, no parity, and 1 stop bit.

Power up the UniOP panel and make sure it is in Configuration Mode. The
panel must be in Configuration Mode to communicate with the Designer
software! When the unit is in Configuration Mode, the words
CONFIGURATION MODE will appear on the panel. If you do not see the
words CONFIGURATION MODE displayed on the panel:

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 13
Tech-note

Hold down the Enter key or touch an empty spot on the screen until the
command menu appears.

Use the arrow keys to highlight CONFIG or CFG and press Enter again.

Select Transfers - Download from Designer to send the project to the panel.

If the default setup of the Designer software has not been changed, the
project will start automatically after being downloaded.

After a short pause, check the display:

The text that was typed in previous step should be visible, along with the
data value read from the controller.

The Fault light should be off.

The Com and Run lights (if present) should be on. A blinking Com light
indicates a communications error.

3 Installation

3.1 Overview

This section provides:

the assumptions and conventions used in this documentation,

system requirements for using Designer,

software installation instructions,

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 14
Tech-note

instructions for solving installation problems,

basic instructions for connecting a UniOP panel to the PC,

contact information,

technical support contacts,

instructions for reporting a bug,

compatibility information for previous versions and

software license and disclaimer.

3.2 Assumptions

We assume that those reading this manual are using the Designer software to design control
panel applications to run on UniOP panels.

We also assume that you have a basic understanding of PCs, Microsoft Windows , and the
type of network environment in which you will run the application.

3.3 Conventions

Names of menus and commands on menus are shown in bold type, as are the names of dialog
boxes. For example, "A new project may be created by selecting New from the File menu." If
the name of the command or menu is highlighted, it is linked to another topic in the help text.
For example, "Select Get Panel Resources from the Transfers menu."

Keyboard keys that you should press are shown in bold, as in "Press Enter." If two keyboard
keys are to be pressed at the same time, they are shown in bold with a plus sign (+) between
them, as in "Press Ctrl+F2."

Text that you are to type into a box appears in bold in a different font (Courier), for example,
"Type D:\setup in the box."

3.4 System Requirements

The following hardware / software is required to use Designer.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 15
Tech-note

3.4.1 Free hard disk space

Designer, once installed, takes around 70 MB of hard disk space. The installation procedure
(only at installation time) requires twice as much (i.e. 140 MB).

3.4.2 RAM Memory

Designer runs on systems with at least 32 MB RAM memory.

3.4.3 Supported Operating Systems:

Windows 98

Windows NT version 3.51 and above

Windows ME

Windows 2000

Windows XP

3.5 Previous Versions

It is not necessary to remove previous versions of Designer from your PC.

Designer does not write over previous versions. Any previous versions will remain on your PC
alongside the new version.

Note: Previous versions of Designer used the file format .prj. This version of Designer
generally uses the file format .dpr. However, this version of Designer can also open and use
.prj files to maintain compatibility with previous versions of the software.

3.6 Software Installation

Note: Microsoft Windows must be installed before installing the Designer software.

To install Designer:

Close all other programs.

Insert the CD-ROM into CD-ROM drive. If your system has Autorun enabled,
the Designer installation will start automatically. If so, skip to step 5.

Click on the Start button and select Run from the popup menu.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 16
Tech-note

Type D:\setup in the box (if your CD-ROM drive is not drive D, substitute the
appropriate letter).

Follow the on screen prompts.

The default location for the Designer software is "c:\Program Files\Exor\Designer 6". If you
prefer to have the software at a different location on your hard drive, you have that option.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 17
Tech-note

There are two types of setup available with the Designer software. They are:

Typical - The Designer software is installed with the most common options.
This is recommended for most users.

Custom - You may choose the options that you want to install. This is
recommended for advanced users.

The installation procedure will create a program group entitled "Designer" within Windows .
A Designer icon will be added to your desktop. Designer also appears on the Windows start
menu under Start-Programs-Designer.

3.7 Connecting the Panel to the PC

Your UniOP panel should be set up according to the instructions in the UniOP Installation &
Operation Guide. However, most panels are quite simple to set up. General setup instructions
include:

Place the panel on a stable surface.

Connect one end of an appropriate connection cable to the appropriate port on

the panel.

Connect the other end of the connection cable to the appropriate port on the
computer.

Connect one end of the power cable to the panel.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 18
Tech-note

Connect the other end of the power cable to the power source.

If the panel was never programmed before, it should power up in Configuration

Mode.

See Panel Setup for information on how to initialize and set up the panel.

3.8 Solving Installation Problems

The installer will report various types of errors if it encounters any during the installation.

If necessary, contact Technical Support to determine the cause of these errors.

3.9 How to Report a Bug

The Designer development team is proud to present a high quality program with minimal bugs.
Despite their best efforts, however, bugs do occasionally appear in the software. Should you
notice a problem with the software that you think may be a bug, please report it to:

[email protected]

Please include as much information as possible, including a description of the irregularity, the
type of PC and panel that you have, any other software that was running when the problem
occurred, and the sequence of steps that led to the problem.

3.10 Technical Support

For questions about the Designer software, contact EXOR by sending an email to the following
address:

[email protected]

3.11 Contact Information

EXOR world-wide locations are listed hereafter:

EXOR Electronic R&D Inc.

10150 International Blvd.
Cincinnati, OH 45246
USA

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 19
Tech-note

http://www.exor-rd.com

EXOR Bediensysteme GmbH

Westring 218
D-42329 Wuppertal
Germany
http://www.exor.de

EXOR R&D UK Ltd.

Unit BG9b, Belgreen House,
Belgreen Street
Macclesfield, Cheshire
SK10 1JH – England
http://www.exor-rd.co.uk

Sitek SpA
Via Monte Fiorino 9
San Giovanni Lupatoto (VR)
I-37057
Italy
[email protected]

3.12 Designer Software License

This is a legal agreement between you (either an individual or a single entity) and EXOR for
the Designer SOFTWARE, which includes computer software and may include associated
media, printed materials, and "on-line" electronic documentation.

By installing, copying, downloading, accessing, or otherwise using the Designer SOFTWARE,

you agree to be bound by the terms of this License. If you do not agree to the terms of this
agreement, do not install or use the Designer SOFTWARE; you may, however, return it to
your place of purchase for a full refund.

3.12.1 SOFTWARE LICENSE

The Designer SOFTWARE is protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties,
as well as other intellectual property laws and treaties. The Designer SOFTWARE is licensed,
not sold.

3.12.2 Grant of License

With this License EXOR grants you the non-exclusive right to use the Designer SOFTWARE
in accordance with the following terms:

You may install, use, access, display, run, or otherwise interact with ("RUN") one copy of the
Designer SOFTWARE on a single computer, workstation ("COMPUTER"). The primary user
of the COMPUTER on which the Designer SOFTWARE is installed may make a second copy
for his or her exclusive use on a portable computer.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 20
Tech-note

You may also store or install a copy of the Designer SOFTWARE on a storage device, such as
a network server, used only to RUN the Designer SOFTWARE on your other COMPUTERS
over an internal network; however, you must acquire and dedicate a license for each separate
COMPUTER on which the Designer SOFTWARE is RUN from the storage device. A license
for the Designer SOFTWARE may not be shared or used concurrently on different
COMPUTERS.

The initial licensee of the of the Designer SOFTWARE may make a one-time permanent
transfer of this License and the Designer SOFTWARE only directly to an end user. This
transfer must include all of the Designer SOFTWARE (including all component parts, the
media and printed materials and this License). The transferee of such one-time transfer must
agree to comply with the terms of this License, including the obligation not to further transfer
this License and the Designer SOFTWARE .

3.12.3 Limitations

You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the Designer SOFTWARE, except
and only the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding
this limitation.

The Designer SOFTWARE is licensed as a single product, its component parts may not be
separated for use on more than one COMPUTER.

3.12.4 COPYRIGHT

All title and copyrights in and to the Designer SOFTWARE (including but not limited to any
images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music and text incorporated into the Designer
SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed materials, and any copies of the Designer are owned
by EXOR or its suppliers. If this Designer SOFTWARE contains documentation which is
provided only in electronic form, you may print one copy of such electronic documentation.
You may not copy the printed materials accompanying the Designer SOFTWARE.

3.12.5 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY

The Intellectual Property of the Designer SOFTWARE (including but not limited to any
images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music and text incorporated into the Designer
SOFTWARE) is owned by EXOR.

3.12.6 DISCLAIMER (Limited Warranty)

The Designer SOFTWARE is provided "as is" and without warranty of any kind, express,
implied or otherwise, including without limitation, any warranty of merchantability or fitness
for a particular purpose.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 21
Tech-note

In no event shall EXOR be liable for any special, incidental, indirect or consequential damages
of any kind, or any damages whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether or
not advised of the possibility of damage, and on any theory of liability, arising out of or in
connection with the use of the Designer SOFTWARE.

4 Reference

4.1 File Menu

4.1.1 File Menu

The File menu contains familiar Windows commands for managing files and printing.

New

Open

Close

Save

Save As

Print

Print Preview

Print Setup

Export to TagDB

Export Strings

Import Strings

Recent Files

Exit

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 22
Tech-note

4.1.2 New

A new project may be created by selecting New from the File menu, by clicking the New File
icon, or by pressing the Ctrl+N keys. This opens the New Project dialog box.

Enter a name for the new project and select the file location on the PC where the project file is
to be stored. Click on an icon to identify the type of project file to be created. Unless otherwise
specified, Designer files are assumed to have the .dpr extension.

When a new Project file is created, the current project configuration is carried over for use with
the new project. This approach relieves you from having to reset the panel and controller
parameters each time a new project is created. The latest configuration is saved on exit for use
the next time Designer is started.

When you switch between two projects with different configurations, the latest project to be
opened overrides the previous and becomes the new default state for the Designer.

To prevent accidental reset of the configuration parameters, you are prompted to confirm the
New operation if there are pending modifications that have not been saved.

4.1.3 Open

To open an existing project, select Open from the File menu, click the Open icon on the
toolbar, or press the Ctrl+O keys. The Open Project dialog box will appear, providing a list of
the file names in each directory.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 23
Tech-note

Enter the name of the file to be loaded or use the list box to select from the existing files. If an
extension is not specified, .dpr is assumed.

4.1.4 Close

To close a currently open file, select Close from the File menu.

Files may also be closed by clicking on the lower of the two "X"s in the upper right-hand
corner of the Designer window, by selecting Close from the Designer menu, or by pressing
Ctrl+F4.

4.1.5 Save

To save a project, select Save from the File menu, click on the Save file icon on the toolbar, or
press the Ctrl+S keys.

The cursor may be momentarily replaced with an hourglass while the file is saved.

If the application has not been named, the Save As dialog box will appear instead.

4.1.6 Save As

If an application to be saved has not been named, the Save Project As dialog box appears. Or,
you may select Save As from the File menu. This option can also be used to save a project
under a different name.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 24
Tech-note

The Save Project As dialog box shows the current directory path and the current file name. A
new name and path may be entered or the ones presented may be accepted.

Files may be saved as file format "*.dpr" (Designer files) or "*. rom" (Designer ROM files). If
no extension is specified, "*.dpr" is assumed.

If the file already exists in the selected directory, you are prompted to confirm the Save As
operation in order to overwrite the existing file.

Note: Previous versions of Designer used the file format .prj. This version of Designer
generally uses the file format .dpr. So when opening a .prj file Designer will not automatically
save the corresponding .dpr file but will prompt the user upon closing the application.

4.1.7 Print

The Print command in the File menu refers to printing from the Designer software, whereas the
print items in the Project menu are used to set up print functionality in the UniOP panels.

Selecting Print from the File menu (or pressing the Ctrl+P keys) brings up the Designer Print
Setup dialog box, from which the Designer project information may be printed.

4.1.8 Print Preview

Selecting Print Preview from the File menu brings up the Designer Print Setup dialog box,
from which the Designer project information may be previewed for printing.

4.1.9 Print Setup

Selecting Print Setup from the File menu brings up the familiar Windows Print Setup dialog
box, from which printer properties may be selected.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 25
Tech-note

Note: The Print Setup command in the File menu refers to printing from the Designer
software, whereas Project - Report on Panel Printer - Printer Setup is used to set up print
functionality in the UniOP panels.

4.1.10 Designer Print Setup

Designer contains a vastly improved printing routine for printing project file information. This
new module is able to print graphical previews of the project pages, variable cross-references
and much more!

This new printing routine is enabled automatically whenever Designer is installed.

Selecting File-Print or File-Print Preview will bring up the following dialog box.

Print (or Print Preview)

Start (or view) the print operation.

Printer Setup
Open the standard Windows Printer Setup dialog box. Printer to use, page size, page
orientation, etc. can be selected from this dialog box.

Cancel
Close the dialog box without executing the print operation.

UniOP Page Range

Define which panel pages need to be included in the printout.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 26
Tech-note

All pages All data on all panel pages are printed.

Pages Only the data that is inside the selected pages are printed.
To specify the panel pages to print, the user needs to enter the page sequence
to print. A page sequence is a page range separated by commas (i.e. 4-5, 8,
13-20). Valid ranges are a single page only, i.e. 8, or consecutive pages, i.e. 4-
5.

Without page breaks

Any new data section starts a new page. By selecting this checkbox, all data will be
compressed on as little number of pages as possible.

Suppress all cover pages

This checkbox should be selected if the user wants to suppress the cover pages.

Hide empty tables

Use this checkbox if the user wants to avoid printing tables relative to data sections that were
not configured inside the project.

Save change on exit

When this checkbox is marked, the selected Report Data Set will be saved for future use.

Report data sets

This section of the print dialog box contains the list of project data that could be printed. For
any items that are listed, a checkbox gives the user the possibility to enable or disable the table
printout.

Project information
Generic project information. It contains the project name, panel type and name of the
controller being used.

Project Summary
Contains some statistical information such as the project file size, number of pages, number of
used pictures, etc.

UniOP page layout description data

List of page objects.

UniOP Page description

Description of the pages in the project.

Panel Key Macros

Local macro keys.

Pictures
Static images.

Touch Cells
List of graphic components: Object-oriented touch cells, Trends, Gauges.

Data Fields
List of PLC data field items.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 27
Tech-note

Recipes
Recipe data set values.

Global Key Macros

Global macro keys.

Trend Buffers
Trend buffer parameters.

Recipes
Table with list of recipes that have the Multipage flag set.

Data Transfer
Data transfer jobs.

Reserved Data Area

RDA parameters.

Alarms
Alarm table with messages.

Designer Setup

Panel Printer and Reports

Printer setting and print report table parameters.

Panel Setup
List of panel capabilities and setup configuration

Controller and Network Setup

List of controller drivers connected on the panel network.

Remote Pass through

Remote Pass through parameters.

Password
Table with list of all defined passwords and their parameters.

Cross Reference
List of Pages, Pictures and Controller references with page references.

Report Contents
Table of the Report Contents with page numbers

4.1.11 Export to tag database

This option is used to export all the tags defined in the currently opened project to a database
specified by the user. If the project doesn't have any tags associated with it, this option will be
disabled.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 28
Tech-note

4.1.12 Export Strings

Strings used in a project can be exported into a CSV (Comma Separated Values, a data format
used by various applications, e.g. Microsoft ExcelTM) file by selecting Export Strings from
the File menu.

This opens the Export Strings dialog box.

The information stored in the file has the following format:

#-------------------------------------------------------------------
# Filename: DemoFul2.csv
# Created: Friday, May 03, 2002 - 10:49
# Project: C:\Designer Projects\DemoFul2.dpr
#-------------------------------------------------------------------
2,"""English - Default""","""French"""
PG-1,"""Main Menu""","""Menù Pri."""
ST-1-1,"""Created by EXOR""","""Créé par EXOR"""
ST-1-2,"""UniOP Project Functionality""",""""""
ST-1-3,"""Tech Support Tel. ...""","""Tech Support Tel. ..."""

The first section contains information about the exported file: its name, the date of creation and
the original project file.

The second section specifies the number of languages and their names.

The third section contains a line for each string in the project. Each line contains a string
identifier (not to be modified), then the string value for each one of the different languages
supported by the project.

This way it is possible to modify the strings stored in a given project.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 29
Tech-note

ANSI / Unicode Encoding is supported.

Using Unicode feature characters of different languages can be added in the projects page by
editing the string value of the exported file.

Restrictions
Unicode character is defined using two bytes, this means we can have until 65.536 different
characters. UniOP panel, instead, can manage 256 characters code. Using the Unicode feature
you have the possibility to mapping a subset of 256 Unicode characters inside the UniOP
panel.

Typical application
To enable Unicode support it is necessary modify the panel font file to have some Unicode
characters inside. For example you can use ANSI characters inside the first 128 bytes and
Russian (Unicode) characters inside the other 128 bytes. Then you have to configure the new
2unicode parameter inside the display32.ini file to define the ANSI code (256) <-> UniCode
(65.536) character correspondence. Example is shown below:
[RUSSO Font]
BargraphStart=226
BoxChars=218,191,192,217,196,179,196,179,180,194,193;201,187,200,188,205,186,205,186,
0,0,0
BigCharStart=128
Linefeed=127
2Unicode=0x8F,0x0444;0x90,0x0438;0x91,0x0441;0x92,0x0432;

Note: Modifying the string length has an effect on the real state occupied by that string on the
screen.

4.1.13 Import Strings

It is possible to upload to a project the strings previously saved in a CSV (Comma Separated
Values, a data format used by various applications, e.g. Microsoft ExcelTM) file by selecting
Import Strings from the File menu.

This opens the Import Strings dialog box.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 30
Tech-note

Note: the Import Strings operation may upload a set of strings into the project that are either
incompatible or have problems. Before attempting this operation it is recommended to
save/backup the strings currently in use by calling the Export Strings function.

4.1.14 Recent Files

The most recently opened files are listed under the File menu as a shortcut. Click on the name
of a file to reopen it.

4.1.15 Exit

Selecting Exit from the File menu can be used to terminate the Designer program. You are
prompted to confirm the operation if the current application has not been saved.

4.2 Edit Menu

4.2.1 Edit Menu

This section provides information about the Edit menu. The Edit menu contains many familiar
Windows commands for working with text and objects on the page.

Cut

Copy

Paste

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 31
Tech-note

Align

Make Same Size

Select All

Fonts

4.2.2 Undo

The Undo command reverses the last action. This action can also be activated by pressing the
Ctrl+Z keys.

4.2.3 Redo

The Redo command reapplies the actions that were previously canceled by the Undo
command. This action can also be activated by pressing the Ctrl+Y keys.

4.2.4 Cut

The Cut command removes the selected item from the current page and places it on the
Windows clipboard. This action can also be activated by pressing the Ctrl+X keys.

4.2.5 Copy

The Copy command makes a copy of the selected item from the current page and places it on
the Windows clipboard. This action can also be activated by pressing the Ctrl+C keys.

4.2.6 Paste

The Paste command places items from the Windows clipboard onto the current page at the
current position of the cursor. This action can also be activated by pressing the Ctrl+V keys.

4.2.7 Select All

The Select All command selects all of the various items on a page. This makes it easy to cut,
copy, or paste a group of objects.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 32
Tech-note

4.2.8 Align

Align

Use the Align commands on the Edit menu to arrange objects/items on a page.

Select an object or item by single-clicking on it, then hold down the Shift key while clicking
on other objects or items to be aligned with it. When all of the objects or items to be aligned
are selected, choose one of the commands in the Align submenu.

Left

Horiz Center

Right

Top

Vert Center

Bottom

Note: Objects/items are aligned with the last created or inserted object/item.

Left

Aligns the left sides of the objects/items with the left edge of whichever object/item was
selected first.

Horiz Center

Aligns the horizontal center points of the objects/items with the horizontal center point of
whichever object/item was selected first.

Align Right

Aligns the right sides of the objects/items with the right edge of whichever object/item was
selected first.

Align Top

Aligns the top edges of the objects/items with the top edge of whichever object/item was
selected first.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 33
Tech-note

Align Vert Center

Aligns the vertical center points of the objects/items with the vertical center point of whichever
object/item was selected first.

Align Bottom

Aligns the bottom edges of the objects/items with the bottom edge of whichever object/item
was selected first.

4.2.9 Make Same Size

Make Same Size

Use the Make Same Size commands from the Edit menu to match the size of objects/items on a
page.

Select an object or item by single-clicking on it, then hold down the Shift key while clicking
on other objects or items to be resized. When all of the objects or items to be resized are
selected, choose one of the commands in the Make Same Size submenu.

Width

Height

Both
Note: Objects/items are resized to match the size of the last created or inserted object/item.

Make Same Size Width

Resizes objects/items so that the width matches the width of whichever object/item was
selected first.

Make Same Size Height

Resizes objects/items so that the height matches the height of whichever object/item was
selected first.

Make Same Size Both

Resizes objects/items so that both the width and height matches the width and height of
whichever object/item was selected first.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 34
Tech-note

4.2.10 Fonts

Fonts

Designer makes it easy to select a font that will appear to advantage in a particular project.

There are two types of fonts in Designer: Panel Fonts and Objects Fonts.

Panel fonts are character based type of fonts and are supported by all type of panels.

Object Fonts are based on bit maps and are supported only by graphics panels.

Panel Font

Panel Fonts

It is possible to have up to four (4) different panel fonts on certain UniOP panels. The Select
Font dialog box lets you select a font for onscreen text from a pull-down list.

Note: If a project file contains panel font components, switching to a standard font (not an
enhanced font) will erase all of the panel font components in the project.

Font Name

Font Size

Font Name

Select a panel font for the on-screen text from the pull-down list.

Font Editor

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 35
Tech-note

Installing New Panel Fonts

Font Size

The Font Size buttons can be used to change the character size of any text or variable field.

Font size choices include Regular, Regular, Large or Extra Large. Regular characters are
simply a single character.

Double characters are twice the size of a regular character (2x2). Large characters are four
times the size of a regular character (4x4).

Extra large characters are eight times the size of a regular character (8x8).

Note: When the area defined for a text box is too small, only the sizes that can fit inside the
selected area are enabled.

Objects Font

Objects Font

The Font dialog box lets you select the default font for all graphic objects (meters, trends) and
the touch cells.

Font

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 36
Tech-note

Font Style

Size

Effects

Sample

Script

Objects Font Font

Choose a font from the pull-down list. New fonts may be added just like any other True-Type
font; by opening Fonts from the Windows Control Panel and using the Install New Font
command from the File menu. (This is the Windows Control Panel File menu, not the
Designer File menu.)

Objects Font Style

Text may be bold, italic, or both.

Objects Font Size

Select a font size, in points.

Objects Font Effects

Text may be displayed as strikeout or underlined. It is also possible to display text in various
colors.

Objects Font Sample

The sample window gives a preview of the selected text settings.

Objects Font Script

Western and various other scripts (Hebrew, Greek. Cyrillic, etc.) are available.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 37
Tech-note

4.3 View Menu

4.3.1 View Menu

This section provides information about the View menu. The View menu lets you set the
screen to view the project in the most comfortable manner for various tasks. Commands on the
View menu include:

Zoom In

Zoom Out

Status Bar

Toolbars

Workspace

Full Screen

Graphics Library Manager

Layers

4.3.2 Zoom In

Zoom In enlarges items on the screen, although the whole project page may no longer be
visible.

This is useful for checking fine details. You can also access this feature by pressing the Ctrl
key with the + key of the numeric keypad.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 38
Tech-note

Users can define the view size as a % of the panel size as shown in the above figure. They can
pick the percentage from the combo box or pick the best fit or specify any % (within valid
range). Zoom size will be changed to best fit once the Panel setup is changed.

4.3.3 Zoom Out

Zoom Out makes more of the screen area visible, although items on the screen will appear
smaller. This is useful for getting an overall view of the page. You can also access this feature
by pressing the Ctrl key with the - key of the numeric keypad.

4.3.4 Status Bar

The status bar across the bottom of the Designer screen provides interactive information on
various screen items.

If Status Bar is checked in the View menu, the status bar will be visible across the bottom of
the screen. To hide the status bar, uncheck it under the View menu. To make it visible again,
simply check it again.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 39
Tech-note

4.3.5 Toolbars

Toolbars

Lists the various toolbars displayed for the current project. These may include the following:

Primary toolbar - typically provides shortcuts to commonly used Windows -

type commands.

Secondary toolbar - typically provides shortcuts to Designer project-level

commands

Full Screen toolbar - typically provides shortcuts to viewing preferences

Tools toolbar - typically provides shortcuts to user-specified tools

TouchScreen toolbar - typically provides shortcuts to touchscreen-specific

commands

Commands available from the Toolbars dialog box include:

Toolbar Name

Shows the name of the selected toolbar.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 40
Tech-note

Show Tooltips

Provides a short description of a toolbar icon when the cursor pauses above the icon.

Cool Look

Gives the buttons on the toolbars an invisible edge, making for a smoother appearance on the
toolbars.

Large Buttons

Makes the buttons appear twice as large as normal for easier viewing and use.

New

Reset/Delete

The Reset button returns the toolbars to their default state.

If you have added any toolbars, the Reset button becomes a Delete button so that user-added
toolbars can be removed.

Default

Click the Default button to align and dock the toolbars to the installed state. It also reloads all
buttons on the toolbar.

New

The New button brings up the New Toolbar dialog box, where you may enter the name of a
new toolbar to be created.

The new toolbar may then be placed in a location of your choice in the toolbar section of the
Designer screen.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 41
Tech-note

4.3.6 Workspace

The status bar to the left of the main Designer screen provides information on project pages
and lists various graphics and objects that can be placed in a project. If Workspace is checked
in the View menu, the workspace will be visible.

The default position of the workspace is to the left of the main Designer screen, however the
workspace can be moved anywhere on the Designer screen. To hide the workspace, uncheck it
under the View menu. To make it visible again, simply check it again.

Note: Right-clicking in the frame of the workspace box brings up a number of options for
viewing the workspace. Select Allow Docking to dock the workspace against any of the four
sides of the application. If the check box is removed, then the workspace will act as a mini-
window, which can be placed anywhere and resized. On the other hand, clicking Float in main
window causes the workspace to occupy the entire application window and minimize the
graphics view.

4.3.7 Full Screen

The Full Screen command in the View menu (and the Full Screen icon) enlarges the Designer
screen to occupy the full screen size.

A small toolbar remains on the screen with Full Screen, Zoom In, and Zoom Out icons to let
you easily select other viewing options.

Clicking on the Full Screen icon again takes Designer out of Full Screen view.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 42
Tech-note

4.3.8 Graphics Library

Graphics Library Manager

The Graphics Library Manager dialog box provides an easy way to work with graphics
libraries.

The dialog box has three tabs:

Project - shows the graphics libraries currently used in the project

Library - shows the graphics libraries currently installed and accessible to

Designer

Disk - allows to work with file system to load, save graphic files.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 43
Tech-note

Project

This tab allows the user to see how many graphic symbols are present in the project and, if
needed, to change their names.

The button Import puts the currently selected graphic symbol into the Project Screen area.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 44
Tech-note

Library

This tab allows to modify/update the contents of the graphics library.

The tab contains a toolbar providing access to the familiar Windows commands of cut,
copy, paste, rename, delete, and insert folder for graphics management. A Properties icon
leading to a dialog box with the properties of the currently selected graphic symbol is also
available.

Users, if needed, can change the name of the graphic symbols used in the project.

The button Import puts the currently selected graphic symbol into the Project Screen area.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 45
Tech-note

Disk

This tab allows to select a new graphic symbol (a new picture) from the file system.

The button Import puts the currently selected graphic symbol into the Project Screen area.

4.3.9 Layers

Layers

Each UniOP page is actually divided into layers. Layers define a set of planes, stacked along
the Z-axis of the screen, i.e. the axis that goes form the screen to the eye of the user/observer.
Thanks to layers it is possible to control in an easy way the Z-ordering (that is the position
along the Z-axis) of a group of objects and graphics. For instance, by changing the position of
a layer relative to the others, also the position of all the objects and lines belonging to that layer
are modified.

Objects and graphics are inserted into the currently active layer. The active layer can be
selected by using the layers toolbar (usually positioned at the bottom of the work area).

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 46
Tech-note

The layers dialog controls how layers are displayed, allows to create new layers, delete them
and change their reciprocal order.

These are the available commands:

Insert

Delete

Move Item Up

Move Item Down

Show and Lock Active Layers

Only Show Active Layers

Note: Layers are a Designer feature introduced to easily configure the Z-ordering of objects
and graphics on the panel screen. The UniOP panel only supports the relative Z-ordering of
objects and graphics (no layers).

Insert

Inserts a new layer.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 47
Tech-note

Delete

Deletes the selected layer.

Move Item Up

Moves the layer occupied by an item forward.

Move Item Down

Moves the layer occupied by an item downward.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 48
Tech-note

Show and Lock Active Layers

The Show option controls if a given layer can be displayed or not.

The (Un)Lock option controls if a layer can be moved.

Only Show Active Layers

This option makes Designer show only the active layers.

4.4 Insert Menu

4.4.1 Insert Menu

This section provides information about the Insert menu. The Insert menu gives you the means
to easily place text and/or objects onto a project page. Some of these objects, such as numeric
fields or bar graphs display information from the controller. Other objects, such as the various
types of touch cells, allow a panel user to interact with the panel.

Text

Bitmap

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 49
Tech-note

Data Fields

Touch Cells

Shapes

Trend Window

Meter Instrument

Trend Time Field

Recipe Menu

Special Characters

Import Bitmap Graphics

4.4.2 Text

To insert a Text Field, either click on the Text icon in the toolbar or select Text from the Insert
menu. Use the cursor to specify the location of the text box. Once a text box is created, click to
place the cursor inside the text box and type the text that is to be inserted.

Note: The text uses the font selected in the Select Font dialog box. This dialog box can be
accessed by clicking on the Font icon in the toolbar or by selecting Edit - Fonts - Panel Font.
The font must be specified before the text is created. If the font is too large for the selected
area, Designer will not allow the text to be entered.

To edit a text field, select the field by left-clicking on it, then right-click on the text field to
bring up an edit menu for the text field. Text can be cut, copied, or pasted, edited, foreground
and background colors can be set, or text can be resized.

4.4.3 Bitmap

To insert a custom bitmap image, either click on the Bitmap icon in the toolbar or select
Bitmap from the Insert menu. Use the cursor to specify the location of the bitmap image. The
Bitmap Editor dialog box then appears.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 50
Tech-note

A sliding bar lets you zoom in or out for easier editing. Familiar Windows drawing tools are
available to create a custom bitmap image.

On invoking the Foreground color and Transparency color button of Bitmap editor dialog will
popup a palette with 16 colors and a "More Colors ... " button as shown in the below figures.

On invoking the More Colors button a 256 color palette (If 256 colors are supported) dialog is
shown. From the this the user can select the required palette. When the mouse is over a
particular color box RGB values of the same is shown as tooltip as shown in the following
figure.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 51
Tech-note

4.4.4 Data Fields

Data Fields

Data fields are those items that the Designer software uses to display information from the
controller.

These dynamic data items come in the form of numeric fields (which can be displayed in
numeric format or in ASCII format), bargraphs, message fields, attributes, dynamic graphics,
time, and date fields.

These fields can be created by either selecting one of the seven types of fields from the Data
Fields submenu in the Insert menu or by clicking on the various data field icons in the toolbar.
This brings up the data Field Properties dialog box for the appropriate data field type.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 52
Tech-note

Numeric/ASCII

Numeric/ASCII Data Fields

This option is used to add a numeric data field or an ASCII data field to the current page. A
numeric data field reflects a numeric value read from the controller. An ASCII data field
displays a character string read from the controller. (An ASCII data field differs from a plain
text field in that an ASCII data field interacts with the controller whereas plain text is a static
screen item.)

A numeric/ASCII data field can be created by either clicking on the Numeric Field icon in the
toolbar or by selecting Insert - Data Fields - Numeric/ASCII. Use the cursor to specify the
location of the item.
Once the numeric/ASCII field is created, the Numeric Field Properties dialog box will appear.

A number of items can be configured from this dialog box. They are grouped in the following
tabs:

General

Text

Range

Scaling

Attributes

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 53
Tech-note

An external small window allows to Preview the data files. A placeholder of 9's is used to
indicate the presence of an numeric data field in Designer, while a placeholder of A's indicates
an ASCII data field.

Preview

If a numeric format is chosen, the field will be represented by 9's the panel. If an ASCII format
is chosen, the field will be shown as A's on the display. If Reference is set to Variable, the field
is shown as C's on the display. If Reference is set to Recipe, the field is shown as R's on the
display.

General

General tab

The Style, Format, and Size portions of this dialog box are not controller specific. These areas
are used to instruct the panel in the manner in which to display the data.

The Reference area is controller specific.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 54
Tech-note

Style

You can choose a numeric data field that displays numbers or an ASCII data field that displays
ASCII characters.

Format

Format

The Format area allows you to format the data field. These choices will vary according to the
capabilities of your controller.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 55
Tech-note

Format choices for Numeric/ASCII data fields include

Decimal/Hexadecimal

Signed/Unsigned

Fixed Point Placement.

Decimal Hexadecimal Base

You can choose between a decimal base (base 10) or a hexadecimal base (base 16).

Note: When the Reference is set to Recipe, the initial values entered for a particular Recipe
data field will be in the format specified for that data item. For example, if a numeric format of
Hexadecimal is entered for a Recipe data field, then all the values entered in the Recipe
Configuration dialog box for this Recipe data field will be in hexadecimal. A value of 10
entered in a Recipe Configuration dialog box under these circumstances will be interpreted as
10 hexadecimal.

Signed / Unsigned

Options are Signed or Unsigned data format. Supposing the variable's data area has a length of
N bits, if the Unsigned option is chosen the variable is interpreted as an integer ranging from 0
to 2N - 1. If the Signed option is chosen the variable is interpreted as a two complement
integers ranging from - 2N-1 to 2N-1 - 1. These choices are only active when the specified
controller supports signed/unsigned data format.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 56
Tech-note

Fixed Point Placement

The fixed point option permits you to select how many decimal points, if any, are displayed on
the panel. This feature parallels with scaling. Enter the number of decimal places to be
displayed in the Placement box.

Note: Keep in mind that the decimal point will take up one position in the field (i.e., a field
with a width of four and a placement of 1 can display at most the number 99.9).

Size

This is the width and height of the field. Each number or letter is one unit wide. Numbers are
one unit high as well.

Note: The field width/height cannot exceed the width/height of remaining panel from the
current cursor row/column position.

Note: Size is adjusted depending on the current font size. Double font takes twice the
width/height of regular font size, etc.

Reference

Reference

The Reference area is the memory location in the controller to be used, and is dependent upon
the type of controller selected. The field data type, data format, and address reference are all
configured in this area. Only the items pertaining to the controller type and file type will be
configurable.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 57
Tech-note

Reference choices for numeric data fields include PLC, Variable, Recipe, and Index. Index
references are not available for ASCII data fields.

Data Field Properties

This feature can be accessed by selecting the "…" button whenever a PLC, Variable, or Recipe
reference is set. (If Index is selected, a similar box named Indirect Addressing Fields appears.)

The contents of the Data Field Properties dialog box will vary depending upon the type of
controller being used and the type of reference specified. Elements to be configured may
include the File or Data Type, the Data Format, File or Page Number, Element, Offset, and
Left/Right Byte. These options let you configure responses to the controller memory location.

PLC

The internal PLC (programmable logic controller) installed on a UniOP panel is conceptually
speaking a special UniNet node. The appearance of the PLC Data Field Properties dialog box
depends on the internal controller setup but will always be according to the UniNet
configuration style.

To configure the PLC data field properties, either click on the appropriate icon in the toolbar or
select Numeric/ACSII, Bargraph, Message, Attribute, or Dynamic Graphics from Insert - Data
Fields, then use the cursor to specify the location of the item. In the Properties dialog box click
the PLC radio button under Reference and then click on the "…" button.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 58
Tech-note

See Data Field Properties for more information regarding the configuration of data field
properties.

Variable

Variable

Control variables are special data items stored in the UniOP panel memory that offer a means
of controlling and monitoring recipes. You can control certain operations of the panel by
modifying the values held in these internal variables. Elements to be configured include the
data type, the data format, page number, and address. These options allow you to configure
responses to the controller memory location.

To configure Variable data field properties, select Numeric/ACSII, Bargraph or Message under
Insert - Data Fields, then use the cursor to specify the location of the item. The Properties
dialog box appears. Click the Variable button under Reference and then click on the "..."
button to configure the data field properties for control variables.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 59
Tech-note

Note: To change properties of an existing variable data field, right-click on the data field and
select
Properties.

There are various types of control variables:

Recipe File Status

Recipe Parameter Set Selection

Recipe Action

Data Entry Status

Data Entry Field Number

Language

Password

Recipe Key

Recipe Page for Selection

Passthrough Status

Internal Variable

Recipe/Event Backup

PLC Port Mode

PC/Printer Port Mode

PLC Port Module Number

PC/Printer Port Module Number

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 60
Tech-note

Recipe File Status

In the UniOP panel memory there is a single memory location that is used to store the status of
the entire recipe data in the panel. This memory location is called the Recipe File Status.

The Recipe File Status cannot be modified by the panel's user; it is controlled by the internal
logic in the panel.

The Recipe File Status can take on only 2 values, 0 or 1. A value of 0 indicates that all of the
recipe data for every page in the project is valid. A value of 1 indicates that an error in some
part of the recipe data was found. This means that the integrity of the recipe data is
compromised. It is very rare for this to happen, but it can feasibly occur if the UniOP panel is
powered off while the user is modifying the value of a recipe data field.

If the Recipe File Status has a value of 1, the panel's user must physically change the value of
one of the recipe data items to reset the Recipe File Status to 0. Until this occurs, the user will
not be able to perform recipe transfers.

Recipe Parameter Set Selection

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 61
Tech-note

The UniOP panel reserves a separate memory location for the Recipe Parameter Set Selection
for each recipe page. The Recipe Parameter Set Selection memory location stores the numeric
identifier of the currently selected recipe parameter set for the recipe page.

Recipe Parameter Set Selection data fields can be used to visually display the currently
selected recipe parameter sets of the various recipes in the project. When these data fields are
added to a project, they must specify which recipe is to be monitored by the data fields. This is
done by specifying the page number that contains the required recipe in the Data Field
Properties dialog box.

For example, a project might contain three recipes, one on page 2, one on page 3 and the other
on page 7. To monitor the currently selected recipe parameter sets of these three different
recipes, three Recipe Parameter Set Selection data fields must be added to the project. One of
these data fields will be used to monitor the recipe on page 2, one to monitor the recipe on
page 3 and the third to monitor the recipe on page 7. These three Recipe Parameter Set
Selection data fields could all be placed on any page of the project. Regardless of where they
are placed in the project, the address of the first data field would be Recipe Parameter Set
Selection 2, the address of the second data field would be Recipe Parameter Set Selection 3
and the address of the third data field would be Recipe Parameter Set Selection 7.

You can also change the parameter set of a recipe on a particular page by modifying the value
held in the Recipe Parameter Set Selection variable. This is done in the same way as changing
the value of a normal controller data field. For example, to make recipe parameter set number
3 the current parameter set, enter a value of 3 in the appropriate Recipe Parameter Set
Selection variable. In order to do this, the Recipe Parameter Set Selection variable must be set
as a Read/Write variable on the Range tab of the Properties dialog box under Insert - Data
Fields - Numeric/ASCII, Bargraph, or Message.

Recipe Action

For each page that contains a recipe, the UniOP panel reserves a separate memory location for
the Recipe Action for that recipe page. The Recipe Action memory location stores the current
status of operation of the recipe for the page.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 62
Tech-note

Recipe Action data fields can be added to the project. These data items can then be used to
visually display the current state of the various recipes in the project.
When these data items are added to the project, they must specify which recipe is to be
monitored by the data item. This is done by specifying the page number that contains the
required recipe in the Data Field Properties dialog box.

A Recipe Action data field can take on only 3 values: 0, 1 or 2.

A value of 0 indicates that the recipe is in its normal state of operation. In this mode of
operation, the values of the recipe data fields are displayed on the screen of the panel and the
values of the recipe data fields can be modified.

A value of 1 indicates that the recipe data for the currently selected parameter set is being
transferred to the controller. When the transfer is complete the value is automatically reset to 0.

A value of 2 indicates that the recipe data for the currently selected parameter set is being
transferred to the panel. When the transfer is complete the value is automatically reset to 0.

You can start a recipe transfer by entering a value of 1 or 2 for the Recipe Action data item. By
entering a value of 1, you can force the UniOP panel to send the recipe data for the currently
selected parameter set to the controller. By entering a value of 2, you can force the controller to
transfer the recipe data for the currently selected parameter set to the panel.

Data Entry Status

This control variable will be set to a 1 while the UniOP panel is in Data Entry Mode. In all
other modes it will be set to 0.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 63
Tech-note

Data Entry Field Number

This control variable simply contains the field number of the selected data entry field
whenever the panel is in Data Entry Mode.

Language

In order to change the language that the project file uses once it has been downloaded to the
UniOP panel, you can create a control variable with a data type of Language. Make sure that
this field is created as read/write so that it can be edited.

To change the language that is being used, you will need to increment or decrement this field.
This can be done in one of two ways. One way is to simply edit the field and enter the number
of the language that you want to use The other way is to program a key or a touchcell using the
macro command Step Control Variables. You could program one key (or touchcell) to step up
the value of the language control variable field, and another key (or touchcell) to step down the
value of the language control variable field.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 64
Tech-note

Password

The Password field is an ASCII field, and is only available under Insert - Data Fields -
Numeric/ASCII when ASCII is chosen as the Style.

Recipe Page for Selection

The purpose of the Recipe Page For Selection field is to show the number of the page
containing the actual recipe data referred to by the Recipe Menu.

It can be placed on the same page with a Recipe Menu field to show the recipe page number. It
can also be edited to change the page for which the Recipe Menu field displays information. If
the Recipe Page For Selection contains the page number of a page without a defined Recipe
Name field, the Recipe Menu field will display asterisks ("*"). After powering up the UniOP,
the Recipe Page For Selection is set to zero.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 65
Tech-note

Recipe Key

The Recipe Key field is an ASCII field, and is only available under Insert - Data Fields -
Numeric/ASCII when ASCII is chosen as the Style. The Recipe Key field displays the
currently selected Recipe Parameter Set name for the referred page.

Note: The page to which a Recipe Key field refers in the Data Field Properties dialog box
must have a defined Recipe Name field. This is done by adding a Recipe data field with an
ASCII display format on the page where the recipe is located and filling the Recipe Item
values in the Recipe Configuration box with an ASCII name for each parameter set. This
ASCII field is called a Recipe Name field. If the referred page has no Recipe Name field
defined, the Recipe Key field will display asterisks ("*").

Passthrough Status

When passthrough mode has been activated, the UniOP panel does not communicate with the
controller and the dynamic data displayed on the screen may no longer be correct. It may be
useful to inform the user when the passthrough option is active.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 66
Tech-note

A new control variable has been defined for this purpose. The control variable name is
Passthrough Status. This variable can take on two values; zero, meaning that passthrough is not
active, or one, meaning that passthrough is active.

Internal Variable

The internal panel control variables associated with trending can be defined and used from the
trend viewer. Alphanumeric values of these variables can be displayed on the UniOP.

To access these variables, it is necessary to create a numeric data field with a reference type
Variable.

Select the UniOP variable from the Data Field Properties Type list box. This will show the list
of variables that have already been defined. The meaning of these variables can be found
inside the trend viewer.

Recipe/Event Backup

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 67
Tech-note

On some UniOP panels, it is possible to back up recipe data and the event list into flash
memory inside the UniOP. Even if the UniOP panel loses power AND the backup battery is
discharged or missing, the recipe data and the event list will be preserved.

Please note that selecting this feature uses memory within the UniOP panel that is normally
reserved for the project file. Therefore, the amount of memory available for the project file is
reduced by the amount of memory reserved for the entire backup of both recipe data and the
event list, which is 128 KB.

When this feature is enabled, recipes are copied to flash memory automatically from the
UniOP after any recipe backup or recipe upload operation. The event list is copied to flash
memory any time one event happens. A new macro can be used to perform a manually backup
operations.

During the write operation to flash memory the panel LED #65 will flash to indicate that a
write operation is in progress. Some UniOP panels do not have this LED. For those UniOP
panels that do not have this LED, the control variable Recipe/Event Backup can be used to
give feedback to the operator on the status of the backup operation. This control variable can
assume the values listed below.

Recipe/Event Backup:
0 = Standby
1 = Backup operation in progress

The S12 bit of the RDA area is used to communicate to the controller when a backup operation
to flash memory is in process. The UniOP will set this bit to 1 just before the backup operation
begins. When the backup operation is complete, UniOP will set this bit to 0.

PLC Port Mode

This variable provides information about the status of the PLC Port assignment.

Value Assignment
0 Assigned to Panel

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 68
Tech-note

1 Assigned to Internal Controller - User Mode

2 Assigned to Internal Controller - Service Mode

PC Printer Port Module Number

This variable provides information about the status of the PC/Printer Port assignment.

Value Assignment
0 Assigned to Panel
1 Assigned to Internal Controller - User Mode
2 Assigned to Internal Controller - Service Mode

PLC Port Module Number

This variable provides information about the status of the PLC Port Module Number
assignment.

Value Assignment

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 69
Tech-note

7 Assigned to Panel
SCM03 Module Number Assigned to Internal Controller - User Mode
SCM03 Module Number Assigned to Internal Controller - Service Mode

Note: The SCM03 Module Number is the SCM03 Module address as displayed in the UniOP
panel System Menu.

PC Printer Port Mode

This variable provides information about the status of the PC/Printer Port Module Number
assignment.

Value Assignment
7 Assigned to Panel
SCM03 Module Number Assigned to Internal Controller - User Mode
SCM03 Module Number Assigned to Internal Controller - Service Mode

Note: The SCM03 Module Number is the SCM03 Module address as displayed in the UniOP
panel System Menu.

Recipe

Data may be stored inside a panel in data retentive memory. The amount of data retentive
memory available varies depending on the panel model. This data retentive memory can be
used to permanently store data for use by an attached controller. This data can be written to the
controller, and, conversely, the data can be read from the controller and then placed in the data
retentive memory. This concept is termed "Recipes" and offers a powerful way to extend the
capabilities of the controller. This is especially true for controllers that have a limited amount
of internal memory. Some panel models do not support non-volatile recipe storage; please refer
to specific product datasheets for more information. Einige Panelmodelle haben keinen Nicht-
Flüchtigen Rezepturspeicher. Bitte schauen Sie im Datenblatt des jeweiligen Panel für weitere
Details

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 70
Tech-note

Recipes are configured by adding the required controller data items to a page as recipe data
fields. A recipe can be associated with a particular page and is composed of all the recipe data
items on that page. Recipe data items contain all the information associated with normal
controller data items, but rather than the data being read and written directly to the controller
during the course of normal operation, the data is instead read from and written to the panel
memory that is reserved for the data item. Only when you explicitly ask the panel to write data
to the controller is the data sent to the controller. Similarly, only when you explicitly ask the
panel to read data from the controller is the data actually read from the controller.

To configure recipe data field properties, either click on the appropriate icon in the toolbar or
select Numeric/ACSII, Bargraph or Message from Insert - Data Fields, then use the cursor to
specify the location of the item. In the Properties dialog box click the Recipe radio button
under Reference and then click on the "..." button. See Data Field Properties for more
information regarding the configuration of data field properties.

Note: In order to create a recipe for a data field, the Reference for that data field must be set to
Recipe.

The Interlock MailBox offers a powerful way to control the operation of recipes from the
controller. There are seven mailbox commands available to function with recipes:

Start Recipe Download

Start Recipe Upload

Recipe Status

Get Parameter Set Number

Set Parameter Set Number

Get Recipe Transfer Priority

Set Recipe Transfer Priority

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 71
Tech-note

The mailbox commands allow the choice of the recipe page and also of the parameter set. All
mailbox commands related to recipes return a completion code describing the results of the
operation. The mailbox interface to recipes is particularly useful if it is necessary to transfer a
sequence of recipes to and/or from the panel.

A simple recipe example and a more complex recipe example are provided. Additional
information about recipes is available.

Index

Index

Indexed addressing mode lets you reference many controller memory locations from a single
numeric field. This enables you to monitor the values of many memory locations while using
only one field. An example of using indexed addressing is given.

To configure the indexed data field properties, either click on the appropriate icon in the
toolbar or select Numeric/ACSII, Bargraph or Message under Insert - Data Fields, then use the
cursor to specify the location of the item. In the Properties dialog box click the Index radio
button under Reference and then click on the "..." button.

The Indirect Addressing Fields dialog box appears.

Indirect Addressing Fields

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 72
Tech-note

The Selector area lets you specify which controller memory location's contents will be
displayed when a particular value is written. Please note that the memory locations are
controller specific.

The Count determines the total number of locations listed, and Min (minimum) is the value of
the first location listed.

The Reference section is similar to the Data Field Properties dialog box.

Indexed Addressing Example

Indexed Addressing Example

For this example, assume we have a plant in which industrial equipment is washed. The wash
process is comprised of three stages. We want to be able to monitor the water temperature, the
water pressure, the amount of time the equipment is in a particular stage, and the stage the
process is in as shown in the figure below; all without pressing a key on the panel.

The numeric values will be written into the controller by the machine and will change
constantly. The controller memory locations and their contents that we will use for this
example are as follows:

DB10 DW0 Temperature in Stage 1 (ranges between 0 and 9999)

DB10 DW1 Temperature in Stage 2 (ranges between 0 and 9999)
DB10 DW2 Temperature in Stage 3 (ranges between 0 and 9999)
DB10 DW3 Pressure in Stage 1 (ranges between 0 and 9999)
DB10 DW4 Pressure in Stage 2 (ranges between 0 and 9999)
DB10 DW5 Pressure in Stage 3 (ranges between 0 and 9999)
DB10 DW6 Time in Stage 1 (ranges between 0 and 9999)
DB10 DW7 Time in Stage 2 (ranges between 0 and 9999)
DB10 DW8 Time in Stage 3 (ranges between 0 and 9999)
DB10 DW9 The stage the process is currently in (ranges between 1 and 3)

Note: The memory locations are controller specific; those listed above are done so only to be
able to more easily explain the procedure of using indexed addressing. This example assumes
that we have a Simatic S5 controller (set under Project - Configure Controller).

This example can be broken down into four basic steps:

Creating the Stage numeric field,

Creating the Temperature indexed addressing field,

Creating the Pressure indexed addressing field, and

Creating the Time indexed addressing field.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 73
Tech-note

These fields are all related in that the values that are displayed within them are dependent upon
the stage of the process. The indexed fields will be addressed in such a manner that whenever
the field number is written into the Stage numeric field location (DB10 DW9), the
corresponding information will be displayed in each of the indexed fields. For example, when
a value of 2 is written into DB10 DW9, each of the indexed fields will display the
corresponding data: the temperature in stage 2, the pressure in stage 2, and the amount of time
spent in stage 2.

Creating the Stage Numeric Data Field

Type the text labels (shown in black) onto a blank project page to resemble the
figure above.

To insert the Stage, we must create a numeric data field on the screen to
display the stage number. Select Insert - Data Fields - Numeric/ASCII, or click
on the Numeric Field icon in the toolbar.

Use the cursor to define an area where the data field will be placed next to the
text Stage Number.

The Numeric Field Properties box appears.

Under Size on the General tab set the field width to 1, since this field only
needs to display a single digit.

Set the Reference as PLC and click the "…" button to specify the controller
location.

In the Data Field Properties dialog box, set the address to DB10 DW9.

Click OK to return to the Numeric Field Properties dialog box.

Click OK to close the dialog box and return to the project page where a single
9 now appears next to Stage Number as a placeholder.
Creating the Temperature Indexed Field
Next we need to create a field on the screen where the temperature
information for the process can be displayed. Select Insert - Data Fields -
Numeric/ASCII, or click on the Numeric Field icon in the toolbar.

Use the cursor to define an area where the data field will be placed below the
Temp label.

The Numeric Field Properties box appears.

Under Size on the General tab set the field width to 4, since the maximum
value of this field is 9999.

Set the Reference as Index and click the "…" button to specify the controller
location.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 74
Tech-note

The Indirect Addressing Fields dialog box appears. Since there are three
temperature values that we wish to monitor, enter the Count as 3. In the
Selector list box on the left side of the Indirect Addressing Fields dialog box,
three memory locations will be listed with the values 0, 1, and 2 (since we left
the Min value as 0). They will all initially show the same memory location of
DB10 DW0.

Since we want the first value to display the temperature in stage 1 (with value
located in DB10 DW0), the value of entry 0 is referenced to the default value of
DB10 DW0.

Since we want the second value to display the temperature in stage 2 (with
value located in DB10 DW1), the value of entry 1 (the second entry) is
referenced to the value of DB10 DW1. Enter the address DB10 DW1 into the
Address Reference portion of the dialog box.

Click on entry 1 in the Selector list. The memory location for entry 1 changes to
DB10 DW1.

To display the temperature in stage 3, enter the address DB10 DW2 into the
Address Reference portion of the dialog box.

Click on entry 2 in the Selector list. The memory location for entry 2 changes to
DB10 DW2. The dialog box will resemble that shown below.

Click OK to return to the Numeric Field Properties dialog box.

Click OK to close the dialog box and return to the project page where “Is” now
appears under the Temp label placeholders.
Creating the Pressure Indexed Field
Next we need to create a field on the screen where the pressure information
for the process can be displayed. Select Insert - Data Fields - Numeric/ASCII,

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 75
Tech-note

or click on the Numeric Field icon in the toolbar.

Use the cursor to define an area where the data field will be placed below the
Pressure label.

The Numeric Field Properties box appears.

Under Size on the General tab set the field width to 4, since the maximum
value of this field is 9999.

Set the Reference as Index and click the "…" button to specify the controller
location.

The Indirect Addressing Fields dialog box appears. Since there are three
pressure values that we wish to monitor, enter the Count as 3. In the Selector
list box on the left side of the Indirect Addressing Fields dialog box, three
memory locations will be listed with the values 0, 1, and 2 (since we left the
Min value as 0). They will all initially show the same memory location.

To display the pressure in stage 1, enter the address DB10 DW3 into the
Address Reference portion of the dialog box.

Click on entry 0 in the Selector list. The memory location for entry 0 changes to
DB10 DW3.

To display the pressure in stage 2, enter the address DB10 DW4 into the
Address Reference portion of the dialog box.

Click on entry 1 in the Selector list. The memory location for entry 1 changes to
DB10 DW4.

To display the pressure in stage 3, enter the address DB10 DW5 into the
Address Reference portion of the dialog box.

Click on entry 2 in the Selector list. The memory location for entry 2 changes to
DB10 DW5. The dialog box will resemble that shown below.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 76
Tech-note

Click OK to return to the Numeric Field Properties dialog box.

Click OK to close the dialog box and return to the project page where “Is” now
appears under the Pressure label placeholders.
Creating the Time Indexed Field
Finally, we need to create a field on the screen where the time information for
the process can be displayed. Select Insert - Data Fields - Numeric/ASCII, or
click on the Numeric Field icon in the toolbar.

Use the cursor to define an area where the data field will be placed below the
Time label.

The Numeric Field Properties box appears.

Under Size on the General tab set the field width to 4, since the maximum
value of this field is 9999.

Set the Reference as Index and click the "…" button to specify the controller
location.

The Indirect Addressing Fields dialog box appears. Since there are three time
values that we wish to monitor, enter the Count as 3. In the Selector list box on
the left side of the Indirect Addressing Fields dialog box, three memory
locations will be listed with the values 0, 1, and 2 (since we left the Min value
as 0). They will all initially show the same memory location.

To display the time in stage 1, enter the address DB10 DW6 into the Address
Reference portion of the dialog box.

Click on entry 0 in the Selector list. The memory location for entry 0 changes to
DB10 DW6.

To display the time in stage 2, enter the address DB10 DW7 into the Address

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 77
Tech-note

Reference portion of the dialog box.

Click on entry 1 in the Selector list. The memory location for entry 1 changes to
DB10 DW7.

To display the time in stage 3, enter the address DB10 DW8 into the Address
Reference portion of the dialog box.

Click on entry 2 in the Selector list. The memory location for entry 2 changes to
DB10 DW8. The dialog box will resemble that shown below.

Click OK to return to the Numeric Field Properties dialog box.

Click OK to close the dialog box and return to the project page where “Is” now
appears under the Time label placeholders.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 78
Tech-note

Text tab

The Text tab allows you to set the font size and color, and the background color and
transparency of a data item. Designer will not let you select a size that is too large to be
displayed in the designated area. If Transparent is selected then text background colors are not
available.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 79
Tech-note

Range

Range tab

The Range tab lets you specify whether access to the project will be read only, or if read/write
access will be allowed. If read/write access is allowed, then you can also specify the minimum
and maximum value range.

Access

This determines if the data field is to be read only or read/write. Keep in mind that if read only
is selected, the field can only monitor the data in the controller. If read/write is selected, you
can monitor data in the controller, as well as write data to the controller.

Range

Minimum and maximum values can be configured for the read/write field only. These are
lower and upper bounds to the data. If a value occurs outside of this range, asterisks will
appear on the panel, and the previous value of the field will be displayed.

It is possible to attach the minimum and maximum values to memory locations in the
controller. When dynamic references are required for the minimum/maximum values, then
select Reference under Range. Upon doing so, the Data Field Properties dialog box appears,
allowing you to specify the memory location.

Note: Once you have decided to use dynamic variable references for the min/max values, all
the variables associated with the dynamic references must be assigned to memory locations in
the controller.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 80
Tech-note

When using dynamic variable references for the min/max limit settings, you can select how the
UniOP panel retrieves these values. Selecting Project - Panel Setup and clicking on the
Settings index tab will reveal a checkbox called Update PLC References. If this checkbox is
marked, the dynamic variable references will be updated on a continuous basis. If this
checkbox is unmarked, the dynamic variable references will be updated only after a page
change when the destination page contains variable reference fields.

Note: When the continuous mode is used to get dynamic variable references from the
controller, communication performance can be reduced due to the increasing number of
variables being transmitting through the communication channel between the UniOP panel and
the controller.

Scaling

Scaling tab

Scaling lets you change the appearance of the values being displayed onto the panel. For
example, if the controller is reporting values in Celsius but the operator is familiar with
Fahrenheit, performing a scaling operation on the data can convert it, with the result being
displayed in Fahrenheit. With this option, any data from the controller can be manipulated
however you wish.

The scaling equation is defined as:

y = (A1 / A2 ) x + B

Where,

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 81
Tech-note

y = Scaled value displayed

x = Controller data value
A1, A2, B = Scaling operators (these are the three entry boxes located within the scaling
equation)

There are two important concepts to understand about scaling. First and foremost, the scaling
operators (A1, A2, and B) are 16 bit integers. Internal calculations are done using 32 bit
arithmetic, which allows the panel to report a more precise result than if it were using only 16
bit arithmetic.

Secondly, the maximum and minimum fields refer to the scaled value, not the value that is in
the controller.

Two examples of using scaling are provided. The first is an example in which a user has a
Celsius temperature in the controller and wishes to display a Fahrenheit temperature on the
UniOP panel. The second is an example in which a user has a controller memory location that
can range in value from 0 to 4095. Depending upon the value in the controller, you may wish
to display that value as a percentage of the maximum possible value on the panel.

Scaling Examples

Scaling Example 1

Assume that we have a controller that displays the temperature of a motor in Celsius. The
person operating the UniOP panel is only familiar with temperatures in the Fahrenheit scale.
By using scaling, we can have the Celsius temperature from the controller appear as a
Fahrenheit temperature on the display panel.

Select Insert - Data Fields - Numeric/ASCII, or click on the Numeric Field icon
in the toolbar.

Use the cursor to define an area where the data field will be placed.

The data field Properties box appears.

On the General tab, select the Reference as PLC and click the "…" button to
specify the controller location.

Click OK to return to the data field Properties dialog box.

Click the Scaling tab.

We know that to convert a value from Celsius to Fahrenheit, we need to

multiply the Celsius temperature by 9/5 and add 32 to the result. Consider the
scaling equation: y = (A1/A2) x + B. Since x is the Celsius temperature in the
controller, this is the value we want to multiply by 9/5. To do this, we would
need to set A1 equal to 9 and A2 equal to 5. Make sure that the Constant

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 82
Tech-note

button is checked for all values, and enter the value 9 for A1 and the value 5
for A2.

Adding 32 to this value can be done by setting B equal to 32, so enter 32 as

the value for B.

Click OK to confirm this operation. The value displayed on the panel will be in
Fahrenheit, while the controller data will be in Celsius.

Scaling Example 2

Assume that we have a controller memory location for which the numeric value can range
from 0 to 4095. We want to display the actual value in the controller as a percentage of the
maximum value.

Select Insert - Data Fields - Numeric/ASCII, or click on the Numeric Field icon
in the toolbar.

Use the cursor to define an area where the data field will be placed.

The data field Properties box appears.

On the General tab, select the Reference as PLC and click the "…" button to
specify the controller location. Click OK to return to the data field Properties
dialog box.

Click the Scaling tab.

Since we want to display the actual value in the controller as a percentage of

the maximum value, we need to use scaling. If the actual value in the controller
is 0, then the panel should display 0. If the actual value in the controller is
4095, the panel should display 100. Simply divide the value in the controller by
the maximum possible value and multiply this result by 100 to turn it into a
percentage. Make sure that the Constant button is checked for all values, and
enter the value 100 for A1, 4095 for A2, and 0 for B.

Click OK to confirm this operation. The value displayed on the panel will be a
percentage of the actual numeric value.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 83
Tech-note

Attributes

Use this tab to control the display / print attribute of the Numeric/ASCII Data Field.

Numeric Data Field Example

Select Insert - Data Fields - Numeric/ASCII, or click on the Numeric Field icon
in the toolbar.

Use the cursor to define an area where the data field will be placed.

The Numeric Field Properties box appears.

On the General tab, select the Reference as PLC and click the "…" button to
specify the controller location. Click OK to return to the Numeric Field
Properties dialog box.

Click OK.

A placeholder of 9's appears.

ASCII Data Field Example

Select Insert - Data Fields - Numeric/ASCII, or click on the Numeric Field icon
in the toolbar.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 84
Tech-note

Use the cursor to define an area where the data field will be placed.

The Numeric Field Properties box appears.

Under Style select ASCII.

On the General tab, select the Reference as PLC and click the "…" button to
specify the controller location. Click OK to return to the Numeric Field
Properties dialog box.

Click OK.

A placeholder of A's appears.

Bargraph

Bargraph Data Fields

Bargraphs provide a visual representation of a controller value. To create a bargraph field,

either select the Bargraph icon from the toolbar or select Insert - Data Fields - Bargraph. Then
use the cursor to define the area in which the message field is to be placed. The Bargraph Field
Properties dialog box will appear.

A number of items can be configured from this dialog box. These include:

Style (vertical or horizontal)

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 85
Tech-note

Display format

Field dimensions

Reference

Text properties

Data access (read only, read/write field)

Min. & max. values (read/write field only)

Data scaling

The Bargraph dialog box lets you create a bargraph and specify the controller memory location
that the bargraph is to monitor. The maximum value of the field is represented when the
bargraph is full. Likewise, the minimum value is represented when the bargraph is empty.

An external small window allows to Preview the Bargraph.

Bargraph Preview

The bargraph Preview dialog box displays a basic bargraph of the appropriate orientation
(horizontal or vertical) and size (width and height).

General

General tab

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 86
Tech-note

The Style, Format, and Size portions of this dialog box are not controller specific. These areas
are used to instruct the panel in the manner in which to display the data. The Reference area is
controller specific.

Style

Bargraphs can be presented either vertically or horizontally.

Format

The Format area allows you to format the data field. The availability of Format options will
vary according to the capabilities of your controller.

Options are Signed or Unsigned data format. Supposing the variable's data area has a length of
N bits, if the Unsigned option is chosen the variable is interpreted as an integer ranging from 0
to 2N - 1. If the Signed option is chosen the variable is interpreted as a two complement
integers ranging from - 2N-1 to 2N-1 - 1. These choices are only active when the specified
controller supports signed/unsigned data format.

Size

These entry boxes define the size of the bargraph field.

Note: The field width/height cannot exceed the width/height of remaining panel from the
current cursor row/column position.

Note: Size is adjusted depending on the current font size. Double font takes twice the
width/height of regular font size, etc.

Reference

The Reference area is the memory location in the controller to be used, and is dependent upon
the type of controller selected. The field data type, data format, and address reference are all
configured in this area. Only the items pertaining to the controller type and file type will be
configurable.

The address chosen in the Reference section is dynamically linked to the bargraph. In other
words, the value of the register corresponds to the fill level of the bargraph.

Reference choices for bargraph data fields include PLC, Variable, Recipe, and Index.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 87
Tech-note

Bargraph Example

Assume we want to simulate the fill level of a tank. In this case, a transparent graphic of a tank
could be used along with a bargraph to simulate the fill level. The procedure is as follows:

Click on the Graphics tab in the workspace.

Select Tanks from the pull-down list at the top of the workspace.

Click on the image of a tank and drag it to the project page.

Select Insert - Data Fields - Bargraph.

Use the cursor to outline an area on top of the tank for the bargraph.

Select Vertical as the bargraph Style.

Select PLC as the Reference type and click on the "…" button to set the
memory location for the fill level value in the Data Field Properties dialog box.

Click OK to return to the Bargraph Field Properties dialog box.

Click on the Text tab and make sure that Transparent is selected.

Click OK.

The bargraph now appears on top of the tank and will reflect the fill level value.

Message

Message Data Fields

Message fields can be used instead of numerical values to inform the user that an event is
occurring. For example, assume the message "Voltage too high" is attached to the value 32.
Whenever the value of the register in the controller reaches 32, the message will be displayed.
In this manner, a text message is displayed on the panel, which is often more beneficial and
meaningful to the operator than displaying a numerical value.

Note: The maximum number of messages that can be displayed is 1024.

Message fields can be created in one of two ways. Either select the Text Message icon from
the toolbar or select Insert - Data Fields - Message, then use the cursor to define the area in
which the message field is to be placed. Once the message field is created the Text Message
Properties dialog box will appear.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 88
Tech-note

A number of items can be configured from this dialog box. These include:

Style

Field dimensions

Reference configuration

Text properties, and

Messages

An external small window allows to Preview the Message.

Preview

The message field is represented by M's in the panel.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 89
Tech-note

General

General tab

The Style and Size portions of this dialog box are not controller specific. These areas are used
to instruct the panel in the manner in which to display the data. The Reference area is
controller specific.

Style

Message is the only style choice available.

Size

These entry boxes define the size of the message field. The width and height of the field is
equivalent to the maximum number of characters the message field can contain.

Note: The field width/height cannot exceed the width/height of remaining panel from the
current cursor row/column position.

Note: Size is adjusted depending on the current font size. Double font takes twice the
width/height of regular font size, etc.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 90
Tech-note

Reference

The Reference area is the memory location in the controller to be used, and is dependent upon
the type of controller selected. The field data type, data format, and address reference are all
configured in this area. Only the items pertaining to the controller type and file type will be
configurable.
Reference choices for message data fields include PLC, Variable, Recipe, and Index.

Messages

Messages tab

Message parameters (minimum and number of messages) can be configured on the Messages
tab, and the messages can be entered.

The Minimum setting determines the Value of the initial message. Once the parameters are
configured, begin entering messages for the different data values.

Minimum

The Minimum setting determines the Value of the initial message.

Number of Messages

The number of messages to be displayed is set by the Messages value.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 91
Tech-note

Message Table

Once the parameters (minimum and number of messages) are configured, begin entering
messages for the different data values.

Toolbar Options

Message Toolbar

Various icons on the messages toolbar keep tools within easy reach. They include Copy, Paste,
Special Characters, and Languages.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 92
Tech-note

Copy

The familiar Windows features Copy and Paste are available for use in editing messages. If
you have several messages that are similar, you can use the Copy and Paste features to copy
messages and then make any necessary changes.

Simply select which messages to copy by highlighting them. If you want to copy several
messages that are in successive order, click on the first one and drag the mouse down until the
last one is highlighted and release the mouse button. If you have several messages to copy that
are not in successive order, hold down the Ctrl key, click on each of the messages that you
want to copy, and release the Ctrl key. All of these methods will select the text to be copied.
Next, click on the Copy icon to copy the messages into Windows Clipboard. Then use the
Paste feature to copy the messages into their new locations.

You can also use a Windows -based text editor, such as Notepad, to create a list of messages.
To do this, place each message on a separate line. Use the copy function of the editor to copy
the text to the clipboard and then use the paste feature to copy the messages into their new
locations.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 93
Tech-note

Paste

The familiar Windows features Copy and Paste are available for use in editing messages. If
you have several messages that are similar, you can use the Copy and Paste features to copy
messages and then make any necessary changes.

First Copy a message as described in the Copy section. Highlight the message number where
you want to paste the first message and click on Paste to copy the message into its new
location.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 94
Tech-note

Special Characters

Special characters may be added to text by clicking on the Special Characters button. This will
bring up the Special Characters dialog box in which you can select the character(s) to be used
by double clicking on them or by single clicking on them and pressing Insert. The characters
will appear in the last position the cursor was in before entering the special characters dialog
box.

Select Language

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 95
Tech-note

Select a language from the pull-down list. If the language you wish to use is not in the list, it
may be created by clicking the Languages icon on the toolbar or by selecting Languages from
the Project menu.

Message Example

Select Insert - Data Fields - Message.

Use the cursor to outline an area for the message.

Select PLC as the Reference type and click on the "…" button to set the
memory location for the messages in the Data Field Properties dialog box.

Click OK to return to the Message Field Properties dialog box.

Click on the Text tab and set the fonts and colors.

Click on the Messages tab. Set the number of messages.

Enter the messages.

Click OK.

Attribute

Attribute Data Fields

Occasionally it is necessary to draw attention to a particular part of the screen or to indicate the
increased importance of a message or data field. For these instances, dynamic and static
attributes are provided.
To create an Attribute field, either select the Attribute icon from the toolbar or select Insert -
Data Fields - Attribute. Then use the cursor to define the area in which the attribute field is to
be placed. The Attribute Properties dialog box will appear.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 96
Tech-note

A number of items can be configured from this dialog box. These include:

Style (static or dynamic)

Static Attributes (static attributes only)

Field dimensions

PLC Reference (dynamic attributes only)

Style

Static attributes and dynamic attributes are the two choices available.

Static Attributes

If Static is selected as the Style, any combination of the blink, reverse, and highlight attributes
may be used. These attributes let you make an area of the screen stand out by highlighting the
area, reversing the area, or making the area blink.

Dynamic Attributes

If Dynamic is selected as the Style, the screen attribute will be fixed to a value of a word or bit
in the controller.

The address of the controller's memory location can be entered in the PLC Reference area.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 97
Tech-note

If the attribute is referenced to a word, the attribute will be dependent upon the three least
significant bits in the controller's memory location.

Decimal Value Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Attribute

0 0 0 0 Normal
1 0 0 1 Blinking
2 0 1 0 Highlight
4 1 0 0 Reverse

If the attribute is referenced to a bit, there will be no attribute displayed when the bit has the
value of 0. The blink attribute will be displayed whenever the bit has a value of 1.

Note: Keep in mind that not all attributes are supported on every panel.

4.5 Color Attributes

All color panels support a new type of dynamic attribute field that will allow the user to
dynamically control the color of an area on the display. The color attributes have been
introduced as an extension to the existing monochrome dynamic attributes (blink, reverse and
highlight).

The word in the controller memory referenced by the dynamic attribute will be interpreted as
shown in the table below.

Bit 0, 1, 2 Monochrome Attribute

Bit 3 C (this enables color attribute mode)
Bit 4, 5, 6, 7 Not used
Bit 8, 9, 10, 11 = B0-B3 Background color
Bit 12, 13, 14, 15 = F0-F3 Foreground color

C is the bit that enables the color attribute mode. The Color attributes are interpreted according
to the table below.

C=0, Color Attributes Disabled

C=1, Color Attributes Enabled

Decimal Value Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Color

0 0 0 0 0 Black
1 0 0 0 1 Dark Red
2 0 0 1 0 Dark Green
3 0 0 1 1 Dark Yellow
4 0 1 0 0 Dark Blue
5 0 1 0 1 Dark Magenta
6 0 1 1 0 Dark Cyan
7 0 1 1 1 Dark Gray
8 1 0 0 0 Light Gray
9 1 0 0 1 Red
10 1 0 1 0 Green

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 98
Tech-note

11 1 0 1 1 Yellow
12 1 1 0 0 Blue
13 1 1 0 1 Magenta
14 1 1 1 0 Cyan
15 1 1 1 1 White

Note that the Foreground color and the Background color can be independently controlled.

UniOP firmware 4.20 or later is required to support dynamic color attributes.

4.6 256 Color Attributes

Panel firmwares 4.30 and greater are supporting the 256 colors mode for the dynamic
attributes. The 256 colors mode can be enabled by setting to 1 the bit 4 of the LS Byte of the
color attribute. When this bit is set panel read a double word, instead of a word only, to retrieve
the entire colors information.

Below tables show the correspondence from the color index to use inside the color attribute
and the RGB color to show on the panel.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 99
Tech-note

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 100
Tech-note

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 101
Tech-note

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 102
Tech-note

Example:

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 103
Tech-note

Note: 256 colors mode can be use only when the “256 Colors support for Object” is enabled
(on the setting tab of the panel setup dialog box)

Warning:
Transparent text objects overlapped with dynamic color attributes are not supported. To avoid
unexpected results, text objects over dynamic color attributes should no be transparent.

Size

These entry boxes define the size of the static or dynamic data field.

Note: The field width/height cannot exceed the width/height of remaining panel from the
current cursor row/column position.

Note: Size is adjusted depending on the current font size. Double font takes twice the
width/height of regular font size, etc.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 104
Tech-note

PLC Reference

The Reference area is the memory location in the controller to be used, and is dependent upon
the type of controller selected. The field data type, data format, and address reference are all
configured in this area. Only the items pertaining to the controller type and file type will be
configurable. PLC is the only reference option.

Attribute Example

Select Insert - Data Fields - Attribute.

Use the cursor to outline an area for the attribute.

Select Dynamic as the Style.

Click on the "…" button under PLC Reference to set the memory location in the
Data Field Properties dialog box.

Click OK to return to the Attribute Properties dialog box.

Click OK.

Dynamic Graphics

Dynamic Graphics Data Fields

This feature lets you display graphics based upon a numeric value in the controller. For
example, a user may want to display two graphics, one when a blower is on and one when a
pump is on. Depending upon which machine is on, the respective graphic will be displayed at a
single screen location. If neither machine is on, then no graphic will be displayed. In another
scenario, a user may wish to have a graphic appear at a different location on the screen,
depending upon which machine is on. Examples of both situation 1 and situation 2 described
above are given.

It is possible to position dynamic graphics fields over static background bitmaps to create
animated images. Transparent and three-dimensional touch cells can be defined over static
bitmap images. To place a dynamic graphic over a static bitmap image, import a static bitmap
image into a project, then create the dynamic graphic fields over the static bitmap.

Dynamic graphics may be inserted by either selecting Insert - Data Fields - Dynamic Graphics
or by selecting the Dynamic Graphics icon from the toolbar. Use the cursor to specify the
location of the item.
Once the dynamic graphics field is created, the Dynamic Graphics Properties dialog box will
appear.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 105
Tech-note

A number of items can be configured from this dialog box. These include:

Style,

Field dimensions,

PLC Reference, and

Frames properties.

An external small window allows to Preview of the Dynamic Graphic

Note: Dynamic graphics cannot fully overlap static bitmaps. The first columns cannot overlap
at all.

Note: Dynamic graphics fields and the bitmaps under them must snap to the page's character-
based grid.

Note: It is not possible to overlap two dynamic objects, since both items are dynamically
changed by the controller. For example, a numeric field cannot be placed over a dynamic
graphic field.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 106
Tech-note

Preview

Provides a snapshot view of an individual dynamic graphic frame.

General

General tab

The Style and Size portions of this dialog box are not controller specific. These areas are used
to instruct the panel in the manner in which to display the data. The Reference area is
controller specific.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 107
Tech-note

Style

Dynamic Graphic is the only possible choice.

Size

The width and height of the graphic box, in pixels.

Note: The field width/height cannot exceed the width/height of remaining panel from the
current cursor row/column position.

Note: Size is adjusted depending on the current font size. Double font takes twice the
width/height of regular font size, etc.

Frames

Frames Properties

The Frames tab of the Dynamic Graphic Properties dialog box lets you configure the
individual frames that comprise the dynamic graphic.

Enter a number in the Min box to establish the number of the first frame. Set the total number
of frames in the Frames box. Users may toggle through the frames by using Display Previous
Frame / Display Next Frame. To see the frames in a continuous loop, click the Play button.
The play speed may be set by sliding the indicator or by entering a value in the box. Click the
Stop button to stop the Play display.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 108
Tech-note

Click the Edit button to edit the individual dynamic graphic frames.

Edit Dynamic Graphics

Edit Dynamic Graphics

The Dynamic Graphics dialog box allows users to edit dynamic graphic frame. This box can be
accessed by clicking the Edit button from the Frames tab of the Dynamic Graphics Properties
dialog box.

Dynamic graphics may be selected from either the library of graphics provided with Designer
as shown on the Library tab, or from another file on your system as shown on the Disk tab. An
image selected from either source will appear on the Panel / Original tabs, where it may be
renamed if necessary using the Name field. The Original tab displays the image in its original
form for reference purposes, while the Panel tab displays the image as it will appear on the
panel.

The various frames making up the dynamic graphic are displayed on the right side of the box.
Three commands are available.

Modify Dynamic Graphic Frame is enabled when a user clicks on a frame that contains a
dynamic graphic.
Replace Dynamic Graphic Frame is enabled when a dynamic graphic has been selected and is
displayed in the Panel / Original tabs. When the Replace Dynamic Graphic Frame icon is

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 109
Tech-note

clicked, the dynamic graphic currently displayed in the Panel / Original tabs is inserted into the
currently selected frame to replace the current contents of the frame.
Delete Dynamic Graphic Frame is enabled when a user selects a non-empty dynamic graphic
frame. Clicking on the Delete Dynamic Graphic Frame icon removes the dynamic graphic
from that frame.

A number of familiar Windows commands are available in the Dynamic Graphics dialog
box. These include Cut, Copy, Paste, Rename, Delete, and Insert Folder. An additional icon is
available to edit the Properties of dynamic graphics, including Image and Panel properties.

Image

The Image tab of the dynamic graphics Properties box lets you change image properties such
as the type of dither, the contrast and brightness, to smooth, sharpen or blur the image, to
invert, flip or mirror the image, or to size the image to fit the preview box. Close the box by
clicking on the X in the upper right corner to accept the changes. The Reset button returns the
graphic to the default settings.

Panel

The Panel tab of the dynamic graphics Properties box lets you set panel color preferences.
Close the box by clicking on the X in the upper right corner.

Dynamic Graphics Examples

Dynamic Graphics Example 1

In this example, assume a situation in which there are three possible occurrences in the same
area of the screen: a blower can be on, a pump can be on, or neither can be on. A graphic will
be displayed on the panel to reflect the situation. This can be accomplished by referencing the
graphics to a single register in the controller. A value of 0 in this register indicates that neither
the blower nor the pump is on. A value of 1 in this register indicates that the blower is on. A
value of 2 in this register indicates that the pump is on.

Select Insert - Data Fields - Dynamic Graphics, or click on the Dynamic

Graphics icon in the toolbar.

Use the cursor to define a box where the graphic is to be displayed.

The Dynamic Graphic Properties dialog box appears.

Click on the "…" button under PLC Reference to set the memory location in the
Data Field Properties dialog box.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 110
Tech-note

Set the data field properties, then click OK to return to the Dynamic Graphic
Properties box.

Select the Frames index tab.

We have three different values being written into the controller: 0, 1, or 2.

Therefore, our minimum value is 0 and the number of frames is 3. Enter 0 in
the Min box and 3 in the Frames box.

Click on the Edit button.

This will bring up another dialog box in which you can associate a graphic with
a value. The three frames are shown on the right of the dialog box, with their
assigned values (0, 1, and 2).

Since we do not need a graphic for the value of 0 (remember, a 0 indicates

that neither the pump nor the blower is operating), leave this frame blank.

Frame 1 needs to have a graphic associated with it to indicate that the blower
is on. Click in frame 1 to select it. Since we are using graphics that are
available from the Graphics Library Manager, click on the Library tab. If the
graphics were not located in the Graphics Library Manager, we would need to
click on the Disk tab and select the proper location of the graphic, as well as its
filename.

Click on the graphics folders to open them, and select a graphic to represent
the blower. (You can preview the various graphics by clicking on their
filenames in the list. The image will appear in the preview window in the center
of the dialog box, with the graphic name listed below. The Panel tab in the
preview window shows how the graphic will appear on your panel, while the
Original tab shows the appearance of the original file graphic.) Click on the
Replace Dynamic Graphic Frame icon above the list of frames to select a
graphic to represent the highlighted frame (frame 1). The graphic will be shown
in the frame for frame 1.

Repeat Step 11 for frame 2, and select a graphic to represent a pump. Click on
OK to return to the dialog box in which the address and number of frames were
selected.

Click on OK from within this dialog box to complete the procedure and return to
the project page.

Dynamic Graphics Example 2

In this example, we want to have a graphic appear in one of three different locations on the
screen, depending upon what is happening. Assume there are four possible occurrences: a

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 111
Tech-note

blower can be on, a pump can be on, both can be on, or neither can be on. If there is nothing
on, the display screen will be blank. If the blower is on, the graphic of the blower will appear
in the second screen location. If the pump is on, the graphic of the pump will appear in the
third screen location. This can be accomplished by using a different memory location for each
graphic that is to be displayed. If both the blower and the pump are on, then both will appear in
their respective screen locations.

Since there is to be nothing displayed on the screen when neither the pump nor the blower is
on, we only need to create two dynamic graphics fields in the project file - one field for the
graphic of the blower and the other field for the graphic of the pump.

To create the first dynamic graphic field for the blower, select Insert - Data
Fields - Dynamic Graphics, or click on the Dynamic Graphics icon in the
toolbar.

Use the cursor to define a box where the graphic is to be displayed.

The Dynamic Graphic Properties dialog box appears.

Click on the "…" button under PLC Reference to set the memory location in the
Data Field Properties dialog box.

Select the Frames index tab.

There are two different values that may be written into the controller: 0, 1.
(Either the blower is off or it is on.) Therefore, our minimum value is 0 and the
number of frames is 2. Enter 0 in the Min box and 2 in the Frames box.

Click on the Edit button.

This will bring up another dialog box in which you can associate a graphic with
a value. The two frames are shown on the right of the dialog box, with their
assigned values (0 and 1).

Since we do not need a graphic for the value of 0 (remember, a 0 indicates

that neither the blower nor the pump is operating), leave this frame blank.

Frame 1 needs to have a graphic associated with it to indicate that the blower
is on. Click in frame 1 to select it. Since we are using graphics that are
available from the Graphics Library Manager, click on the Library tab. (Note
that if the graphics were not located in the Graphics Library Manager, we
would need to click on the Disk tab and select the proper location of the
graphic, as well as its filename.)

Click on the graphics folders to open them, and select a graphic to represent
the blower. (You can preview the various graphics by clicking on their
filenames in the list. The image will appear in the preview window in the center
of the dialog box, with the graphic name listed below. The Panel tab in the

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 112
Tech-note

preview window shows how the graphic will appear on your panel, while the
Original tab shows the appearance of the original file graphic.) Click on the
Replace Dynamic Graphic Frame icon above the list of frames to select a
graphic to represent the highlighted frame (frame 1). The graphic will be shown
in the frame for frame 1.

Click on OK to return to the dialog box in which the address and the number of
frames were selected.

Click on OK from within this dialog box to complete the procedure and return to
the project page.

Repeat Steps 1-12 for the pump in a different location on the page.

Time

Time Data Field

This option is used to add a time data field to the current page in the format HH:MM:SS. To
insert a time data field click on the Time Field icon from the toolbar, select Insert - Data Fields
- Time, or use the Ctrl+T keys, then use the cursor to define the area in which the time field is
to be placed. Once the time field is created a dialog box will appear where the text may be
configured for displaying the time data field.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 113
Tech-note

To change the time display from 12-hour format to 24-hour format, or vice versa, choose Panel
Setup from the Project menu. Under the Settings tab there is a Time Format field where this
setting may be changed.

Time Data Field Example

Select Insert - Data Fields - Time.

Use the cursor to outline an area for the time data field.

Set the fonts and colors.

Click OK.

The time data field appears on the project page.

If you wish to change the time format, choose Panel Setup from the Project
menu, and select the Settings tab. Make a selection from the Time Format list.

Date

Date Data Field

This option is used to add a date data field to the current page. To insert a date data field click
on the Date Field icon on the toolbar, select Insert - Data Fields - Date, or use the Ctrl+D keys,
then use the cursor to define the area in which the date field is to be placed. Once the date field
is created a dialog box will appear where the text may be configured for displaying the date
data field.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 114
Tech-note

This field may be displayed in one of two formats: month/day/year or day/month/year. To

change the date display format, choose Panel Setup from the Project menu. Under the Settings
tab there is a Date Format field where this setting may be changed.

Date Data Field Example

Select Insert - Data Fields - Date.

Use the cursor to outline an area for the date data field.

Set the fonts and colors.

Click OK.

The date data field appears on the project page.

If you wish to change the date format, choose Panel Setup from the Project
menu, and select the Settings tab. Make a selection from the Date Format list.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 115
Tech-note

4.6.1 Touch Cells

Touch Cells

A touch cell allows a panel user to interact with the panel. The user is able to touch a panel in
an indicated position and receive a visual cue. The various types of touch cells available and
their functionality are:

Panel Key Button: Used for creating a touch cell as a panel key (i.e., Enter). Panel keys
represent all of the function keys, numeric keys, and arrow keys, as well as the help key, the
clear key, the enter key, the +/- key, and the decimal point key.

ASCII Key Button: Used for creating a touch cell as an ASCII character.

Push Button: Used for creating a touch cell as a push button. These push buttons mimic
mechanical push buttons in that one logic value represents open contacts and another logic
value represents closed contacts.

Illuminated Push Button: Used for creating a touch cell as an illuminated push button. The
only difference between an illuminated pushbutton and a pushbutton is that the face of the
illuminated pushbutton can reflect the status of a bit in the PLC.

Selector Switch: Used for creating a touch cell as a 2, 3 or 4 position selector switch.

Indicator Light: Used for creating an indicator lamp.

Generic Command Button: Used for creating a touch cell as a panel key (i.e., Enter), macro
command (i.e., show alarm list), or ASCII character.

To insert a touch cell click the appropriate touch cell icon on the toolbar or select a type of
touch cell from the Touch Cells submenu in the Insert menu, then use the cursor to define the
area in which the touch cell is to be placed. A dialog box will appear where the touch cell may
be configured.

An example of using a touch cell to write to a controller is provided.

Note: To aid in programming, whenever a user touches a read/write numeric field, a keypad
will appear, allowing them to enter data.

Note: Transparent and three-dimensional touch cells can be defined over static bitmap images.

Touch Cell Preview Window

The Preview window lets you see how the touch cell will look before it is actually created and
placed into a project file.

Clicking the left mouse button on the touch cell in the preview window simulates pressing the
touch cell.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 116
Tech-note

Touch Cell / Keyboard Macro Editor Example

In this example, we will configure a touch cell to write a value to the controller. For this
example, we will create a touch cell to simulate panel key F21. Then we will use the Keyboard
Macro Editor to program the panel to write a value to the controller when panel key F21 is
pressed.

Note: It is suggested that touch cells be programmed with a reversed attribute when they are
pressed so that the operator will have immediate feedback.

Select Insert - Touch Cells - Panel Key Button.

Use the cursor to outline an area on the page where the touch cell will appear.

In the Panel Key Button Properties dialog box, select Rectangle as the Style.

Under Action, click on the "…" button to identify the Key that will control the
touch cell action.

Click on key F21 to select it.

Click OK.

Select the Attributes tab and select Reverse to have the touch cell reverse
color when it is pressed.

Select the Layout tab and select Red as the color for On, and Yellow as the
color for Off.

In the Label box, type Write to Controller.

Click OK.

Select Keyboard Macro Editor from the Project menu.

On the Page n tab, select key F21. This will allow the touch cell to perform its
assigned function only on this page in the project.

Make sure that Pressed is selected as the Key State.

Select the Attribute icon from within the Commands toolbar. Select the
Reverse attribute. Since we already highlighted the area in which this attribute
is to occur, the dimensions are set automatically.

Click OK.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 117
Tech-note

The command "Attribute reverse at (location)" is listed for panel key F21.

It is necessary to set a small delay before turning off the attribute in order to
give the panel user time to see the attribute. Select Wait from the Commands
toolbar.

Enter a 3 in the dialog box that appears. This will add a 3/10 second delay.

The command "Wait for a 3/10 of a second" is listed.

Now we need to turn the attribute off. From the Commands toolbar, select
Attribute again. Make sure that none of the attributes (Reverse, Highlight,
Blink) are checked.

Click OK.

The command "Attribute clear at (location)" is listed.

From the Commands toolbar, select Write to Controller.

Specify the memory address in the Data Field Properties dialog box.

Click OK.

Enter a value to be written to the controller.

Click OK.

The command "Write value to Controller memory" is listed.

The macro screen should appear similar to that shown below.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 118
Tech-note

Click OK.

The result should resemble the figure below. When the panel user presses this touch cell, the
value 25 will be written to the controller.

Panel Key Button

Panel Key Button

Panel keys represent all of the function keys, numeric keys, and arrow keys, as well as the help
key, the clear key, the Enter key, the +/- key, and the decimal point key.
To insert a panel key touch cell, click on the Panel Key Button icon from the toolbar or select
Insert - Touch Cells - Panel Key, then use the cursor to define the area in which the touch cell
is to be placed. The Panel Key Button Properties dialog box will appear where panel key
button touch cells may be configured.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 119
Tech-note

There are four tabs in the Panel Key Button Properties dialog box. They are: General, Layout,
Attributes and Custom.

The General tab lets you select the style of panel button and the panel key that is to be
represented.

The Layout tab lets you select the colors, font, languages, etc., to be used.

The Attributes tab lets you indicate the attributes to be associated with the panel key button.

The Custom tab is only selectable when a Custom style button is selected on the General tab. It
enables you to create a custom button.

A panel key touch cell example is provided.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 120
Tech-note

General

General

The General tab of the Panel Key Button Properties dialog box lets you select the style of panel
button and the panel key that is to be represented.

Style

Within the General index tab, you can specify the appearance of the touch cell by making a
selection from the Style list. Selections include round and rectangular buttons, whether flat or
3D. It is also possible to insert a Windows button (a touch cell with a look similar to the
standard buttons you find in a typical Windows application) or to create and insert a Custom
button. Selecting the Custom style activates the Custom tab.

Action

The panel key that the touch cell is to represent is indicated in the Key box under Action. To
select a panel key, click on the "…" button to bring up the Change/View Panel Key
Assignment dialog box.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 121
Tech-note

Layout

Note: This page is used to show the Layout tab for all the Touch Cells.

The Layout tab lets you select the colors, font, languages, etc., to be used.

The upper Toolbar portion of the box contains a Special Characters icon, a Languages icon,
and label placement buttons.

Clicking on the Special Characters icon brings up the Special Characters dialog box that can be
used to enter a special character into the touch cell label.

It is possible to integrate multiple languages within the same touch cell. Clicking on the
Languages button brings up the Languages dialog box that lets you choose the language in
which you wish to work.
The label placement icons lets you place the label either above the touch cell or centered on the
touch cell.

Note: Fixed font text may only be placed above a touch cell.

The top portion of the Layout box includes commands to create and customize a label on the
touch cell. For instance, rather than displaying the label F1, a panel key could read Pressure. A
toolbar includes icons to customize the label on the touch cell by inserting a special character
or by selecting a particular language, and label placement.

The Label box lets you specify the text that is placed either on or on top of the touch cell.

Note: The label must be entered after the key has been selected under the General tab,
otherwise the default key label will override any label entered in the Label box.

Clicking on the Font button lets you select the font to be used for a particular touch cell. Once
a font is selected, it will continue to be used for all touch cells that are subsequently created.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 122
Tech-note

Note: This font is not a global font and may be changed at any time without affecting any of
the previously created touch cells. It is possible to use different fonts on all of the touch cells in
a single project file.

Text indicates the color of the touch cell text. Text Bkgd indicates the background color of the
touch cell text. This color will only be seen when the Transparent checkbox is not marked,
otherwise the background of the touch cell text will appear either in On or in Off color for
centered text and in the Background color if the text is on top.

The bottom portion of the Layout box lets you choose the colors to be displayed on the touch
cell.
Line color is the color of the lines in the touch cell. Background color is the color of the touch
cell background. The touch cell background is a part of the rectangle around the circular or
elliptical touch cell not covered by the cell. Rectangular touch cells have no background if the
touch cell text is centered, but if it is positioned on top, a strip of background appears above
the cell.

On shows the color that the touch cell will be when it is pressed, while Off indicates the color
that the touch cell will be when it is in the not-pressed state.

Attributes

Note: This page is used to show the Attribute tab for all the Touch Cells.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 123
Tech-note

When the button is pressed you can set it to Blink, or for the colors to Reverse.

Custom

Note: This page is used to show the Custom tab for all the Touch Cells.

The Custom tab is only selectable when a Custom style button is selected on the General tab. It
enables you to create a custom button.

Custom buttons can be created for both Off and On states. Click the Load button to import a
graphic from the Graphics Library Manager.

Clicking on the Edit button brings up the Enter Bitmap Dimensions dialog box. The button
width and height can be specified. Color options may also be selected, according to the
selected panel's support of colors.

The Enable Indicator checkbox is available with Custom buttons. This checkbox allows you to
place an indicator light on the button.

Panel Key Button Touch Cell Example

In this example, we will create a touch cell to simulate panel key F21.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 124
Tech-note

Note: It is suggested that touch cells be programmed with a reversed attribute when they are
pressed so that the operator will have immediate feedback.

Select Insert - Touch Cells - Panel Key Button.

Use the cursor to outline an area on the page where the touch cell will appear.

In the Panel Key Button Properties dialog box, select Rectangle as the Style.

Under Action, click on the "…" button to identify the Key that will control the
touch cell action.

Click on key F21 to select it.

Click OK.

Select the Attributes tab and select Reverse to have the touch cell reverse
color when it is pressed.

Select the Layout tab and select Red as the color for On, and Yellow as the
color for Off.

Click OK.

ASCII Key Button

ASCII Key Button

The ASCII Key Button Properties dialog box is used to create touch cells as ASCII characters.
To insert an ASCII button touch cell, click the ASCII Key Button icon from the toolbar or
select Insert - Touch Cells - ASCII Key Button, then use the cursor to define the area in which
the touch cell is to be placed. A dialog box appears where an ASCII button touch cell may be
configured.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 125
Tech-note

There are four tabs in the ASCII Key Button Properties dialog box. They are: General, Layout,
Attributes and Custom.

The General tab allows you to select the style of button and the ASCII key that is to be
represented.

The Layout tab lets you select the colors, font, languages, etc., to be used.

The Attributes tab lets you indicate the attributes to be associated with the ASCII panel key
button.

The Custom tab is only selectable when a Custom style button is selected on the General tab. It
lets you create a custom button.

An ASCII touch cell example is provided.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 126
Tech-note

General

General tab

The General tab of the ASCII Key Button Properties dialog box lets you select the style of
ASCII Key Button and the ASCII key character that is to represent the action.

Action

The ASCII character that is to be transmitted when the touch cell is pressed is entered in the
Character box under Action.

Touch Cell Panel Key Button Example

In this example, we will configure an ASCII key as a touch cell.

Note: It is suggested that touch cells be programmed with a reversed attribute when they are
pressed so that the operator will have immediate feedback.

Select Insert - Touch Cells - ASCII Key Button.

Use the cursor to outline an area on the page where the touch cell will appear.

In the ASCII Key Button Properties dialog box, select 3D Rectangle as the
Style.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 127
Tech-note

Under Action, enter the character that will control the touch cell action.

Select the Attributes tab and select Reverse to have the touch cell reverse
color when it is pressed.

Select the Layout tab and select Red as the color for On, and Yellow as the
color for Off.

In the Label box, type ASCII Key.

Adjust the Font if necessary.

Click OK.

The screen should appear similar to the figure below.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 128
Tech-note

Push Button

Push Button

The Push Button Properties dialog box is used to create touch cells as push buttons. These push
buttons mimic mechanical push buttons in that one logic value represents open contacts and
another logic value represents closed contacts.

To insert a push button touch cell, click the Push Button icon on the toolbar or select Insert -
Touch Cells - Push Button, then use the cursor to define the area in which the push button
touch cell is to be placed. A dialog box will appear where the appearance and action of a push
button touch cell may be configured.

There are four tabs in the Push Button Properties dialog box. They are: General, Layout,
Attributes, and Custom.

The General tab lets you select the style of push button and the action that is to be represented.

The Layout tab lets you choose the colors, font, languages, etc., to be used.

The Attributes tab lets you indicate the attributes to be associated with the push button.

The Custom tab is only selectable when a Custom style button is selected on the General tab. It
lets you create a custom push button.

A push button touch cell example is provided.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 129
Tech-note

General

General tab

The General tab of the Push Button Properties dialog box allows you to select the style of push
button, the push action, and the button reference location.

Push Action

The Push Action section allows you to select the action of the touch cell button. The different
radio buttons within this group box represent the attribute that the touch cell will have
whenever it is pressed.

Note: The press indicator can be used with touch cells that have graphics associated with
them; however, attributes can best be seen on touch cells that are not associated with graphics.

Note: When Off is selected as the push action there will be no attribute associated with the
touch cell when it is pressed. You will not be able to tell when the key has been pressed.
Therefore, this option should be used only when there are graphics associated with a touch cell.

Button

The memory location that the push button affects can be set up in the Button section. The Ref
entry box shows the currently selected memory location. Clicking on the "…" button brings up
the Data Field Properties dialog box, which lets you select the exact memory location to be
written to. You also have the option to disable the cyclic refresh.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 130
Tech-note

Push Button Touch Cell Example

In this example, we will configure a push button touch cell.

Note: It is suggested that touch cells be programmed with a reversed attribute when they are
pressed so that the operator will have immediate feedback.

Select Insert - Touch Cells - Push Button.

Use the cursor to outline an area on the page where the touch cell will appear.

In the Push Button Properties dialog box, select 3D Round as the Style.

Under Push Action, select the desired push button action.

Click on the "…" button to identify the controller reference location that will be
mapped to the touch cell.

Select the Attributes tab and select Reverse to have the touch cell reverse
color when it is pressed.

Select the Layout tab and select Red as the color for On, and Yellow as the
color for Off.

In the Label box, type Push Button.

Adjust the Font if necessary.

Click OK.

The screen should appear similar to the figure below.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 131
Tech-note

Illuminated Push Button

Illuminated Push Button

The Illuminated Push Button Properties dialog box is used to create a touch cell as an
illuminated push button. The only difference between an illuminated push button and a push
button is that the face of the illuminated push button can reflect the status of a bit in the PLC.

To insert an illuminated push button touch cell, click the Illuminated Push Button icon from
the toolbar or select Insert - Touch Cells - Illuminated Push Button, then use the cursor to
define the area in which the illuminated push button touch cell is to be placed. The Illuminated
Push Button Properties dialog box will appear where the appearance and action of an
illuminated push button touch cell may be configured.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 132
Tech-note

There are four tabs in the Illuminated Push Button Properties dialog box. They are: General,
Layout, Attributes and Custom.

The General tab allows you to select the style of push button, the action that is to be
represented, and the memory location that has its status shown on the face of the button.

The Layout tab lets you select the colors, font, languages, etc., to be used.

The Attributes tab lets you indicate the attributes to be associated with the illuminated push
button.

The Custom tab is only selectable when a Custom style button is selected on the General tab. It
enables you to create a custom button.

An illuminated push button touch cell example is provided.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 133
Tech-note

General

General

The General tab allows you to select the style of push button, the action that is to be
represented, and the memory location that has its status shown on the face of the button.

Button

The memory location that the illuminated push button affects when it is pressed can be set up
in the Button section. The Ref entry box shows the currently selected memory location.
Clicking on the "…" button brings up the Data Field Properties dialog box, where you can
select the exact memory location to be affected. You also have the option to disable the cyclic
refresh.

Light

The Light section enables you to set the colors for On and Off stages of the illuminated push
button. The Ref entry box shows the memory location that is reflected by the Light. Clicking
on the "…" button brings up the Data Field Properties dialog box, which allows you to select
the exact memory location to be reflected.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 134
Tech-note

Illuminated Push Button Example

In this example, we will configure a push button touch cell

Note: It is suggested that touch cells be programmed with a reversed attribute when they are
pressed so that the operator will have immediate feedback.

Select Insert - Touch Cells - Illuminated Push Button.

Use the cursor to outline an area on the page where the touch cell will appear.

In the Illuminated Push Button Properties dialog box, select 3D Round as the
Style.

Under Push Action, click on the "…" button to identify the controller reference
location that will be mapped to the touch cell push action.

Under Light, click on the "…" button to identify the controller reference location
that will be mapped to the touch cell light.

Select Red as the color for On, and Green as the color for Off.

Select the Attributes tab and select Reverse to have the touch cell reverse
color when it is pressed.
Select the Layout tab and in the Label box, type Illuminated Push Button.

Adjust the Font if necessary.

Click OK.

The screen should appear similar to the figure below.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 135
Tech-note

Selector Switch

Selector Switch

The Selector Switch Properties dialog box is used to create a selector switch of N states (where
N represents an integer from 2 through 4).

To insert a selector switch touch cell, click the Selector Switch icon from the toolbar or select
Insert - Touch Cells - Selector Switch, then use the cursor to define the area in which the touch
cell is to be placed. A dialog box will appear where the appearance and action of a selector
switch touch cell may be configured.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 136
Tech-note

There are three tabs in the Selector Switch Properties dialog box. They are: General, Layout,
and Custom.

The General tab allows you to select the style of selector switch, the number of states and the
memory location in the controller that is affected by each state.

The Layout tab lets you select the colors, font, languages, etc., to be used.

The Custom tab is only selectable when a Custom style button is selected on the General tab. It
lets you create a custom button.

A selector switch touch cell example is provided.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 137
Tech-note

General

General

The General tab of the Selector Switch dialog box allows you to select the Style of selector
switch and the Action.

Style

Within the General index tab, you can specify the appearance of the touch cell by making a
selection from the Style list. Selections include round and rectangular buttons, both flat and
3D. It is also possible to create and insert a Custom button. Selecting the Custom style
activates the Custom tab.

Action

In the Action section you can set the number of states. The minimum number of states is two
(2), and the maximum number of states is four (4). You can also configure which memory
location in the controller is affected by each state of the selector switch, as well as the color
scheme for each state.
The Ref entry box shows the currently selected memory location. Clicking on the "…" button
brings up the Data Field Properties dialog box, which allows you to select the exact memory
location to be written to.
You also have the option to disable the cyclic refresh.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 138
Tech-note

Layout

The Layout tab of the Selector Switch Properties dialog box lets you select the colors, font,
languages, etc., to be used. Select the tab with the number of the state to be configured.
The upper Toolbar portion of the box contains a Special Characters icon, a Languages icon,
and label placement buttons.

Clicking on the Special Characters icon brings up the Special Characters dialog box that can be
used to enter a special character into the touch cell label.
It is possible to integrate multiple languages within the same touch cell. Clicking on the
Languages button brings up the Languages dialog box that lets you choose the language in
which you wish to work.
The label placement icons lets you place the label either above the touch cell or centered on the
touch cell.

Note: Fixed font text may only be placed above a touch cell.

The top portion of the Layout box includes commands to create and customize a label on the
touch cell. For instance, rather than displaying the label F1, a panel key could read Pressure. A
toolbar includes icons to customize the label on the touch cell by inserting a special character
or by selecting a particular language, and label placement.
The Label box lets you specify the text that is placed either on or on top of the touch cell.

Note: The label must be entered after the key has been selected under the General tab,
otherwise the default key label will override any label entered in the Label box.
Clicking on the Font button lets you select the font to be used for a particular touch cell. Once
a font is selected, it will continue to be used for all touch cells that are subsequently created.

Note: This font is not a global font and may be changed at any time without affecting any of
the previously created touch cells. It is possible to use different fonts on all of the touch cells in
a single project file.

Text indicates the color of the touch cell text. Text Bkgd indicates the background color of the
touch cell text. This color will only be seen when the Transparent checkbox is not marked,
otherwise the background of the touch cell text will appear either in On or in Off color for
centered text and in the Background color if the text is on top.

The bottom portion of the Layout box lets you choose the colors to be displayed on the touch
cell.
Line color is the color of the lines in the touch cell. Background color is the color of the touch
cell background. The touch cell background is a part of the rectangle around the circular or
elliptical touch cell not covered by the cell. Rectangular touch cells have no background if the
touch cell text is centered, but if it is positioned on top, a strip of background appears above
the cell.
On shows the color that the touch cell will be when it is pressed, while Off indicates the color
that the touch cell will be when it is in the not-pressed state.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 139
Tech-note

Custom

The Custom tab is only selectable when the Custom style is selected on the General tab. It
enables you to create a custom selector switch.
Custom selector switches can be created for multiple states, defined under the Action section
of the General tab. Click the Load button to import a graphic from the Graphics Library
Manager.
Clicking on the Edit button brings up the Enter Bitmap Dimensions dialog box. The width and
height can be specified. Color options may also be selected, according to the selected panel's
support of colors.

Selector Switch Touch Cell Example

In this example, we will configure a selector switch with two (2) states.

Select Insert - Touch Cells - Selector Switch.

Use the cursor to outline an area on the page where the touch cell will appear.

In the Selector Switch Properties dialog box, select 3D Round as the Style.

Under Action, set the number of states to 3.

For state 1, click on the "…" button to identify the controller reference location
that will be mapped to state 1. Set the color for the first state to Red.

Click on the tab for state 2, and click on the "…" button to identify the controller
reference location that will be mapped to the state 2. Set the color for the
second state to Yellow.

Click on the tab for state 3, and click on the "…" button to identify the controller
reference location that will be mapped to the state 3. Set the color for the third
state to Green.

Select the Layout tab and in the Label box for state 1, type State 1.

Click the tab in the Label box for state 2 and type State 2.

Click the tab in the Label box for state 3 and type State 3.

Adjust the Font if necessary.

Click OK.

The screen should appear similar to the figure below.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 140
Tech-note

Indicator Light

Indicator Light

The Indicator Light Properties dialog box is used to create a touch cell as an indicator light.

To insert an indicator light touch cell, click the Indicator Light icon from the toolbar or select
Insert - Touch Cells - Indicator Light, then use the cursor to define the area in which the touch
cell is to be placed. A dialog box will appear where the appearance and action of an indicator
light touch cell may be configured.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 141
Tech-note

There are three tabs in the Indicator Light Properties dialog box. They are: General, Layout,
and Custom.

The General tab allows you to select the style of indicator light, the number of states and the
memory location in the controller that the indicator light is to reflect.

The Layout tab lets you select the colors, font, languages, etc., to be used.

The Custom tab is only selectable when a Custom style button is selected on the General tab. It
enables you to create a custom button.

An indicator light touch cell example is provided.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 142
Tech-note

General

General

The General tab of the Indicator Light Properties dialog box lets you select the style of panel
button, the number of states, and the memory location for each state.

Style

Within the General index tab, you can specify the appearance of the touch cell by making a
selection from the Style list. Selections include round and rectangular buttons, whether flat or
3D. It is also possible to insert a Custom button. Selecting the Custom style activates the
Custom tab.

Action

In the Action section you can set the number of states. The minimum number of states is two
(2), and the maximum number of states is four (4). You can also define the color scheme for
each state. Note that the indicator light can be configured to handle up to four (4) different
states. A different color can be assigned to each state in order to reflect the contents of the
memory location in the controller.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 143
Tech-note

Assign

You can also configure which memory location in the controller is reflected by each state of
the indicator light. The Ref entry box in the Assign section shows the currently selected
memory location. Clicking on the "…" button brings up the Data Field Properties dialog box,
which allows you to select the exact memory location to be reflected.

Layout

The Layout tab lets you select the colors, font, languages, etc., to be used.
The upper Toolbar portion of the box contains a Special Characters icon, a Languages icon,
and label placement buttons.

Clicking on the Special Characters icon brings up the Special Characters dialog box that can be
used to enter a special character into the touch cell label.

It is possible to integrate multiple languages within the same touch cell. Clicking on the
Languages button brings up the Languages dialog box that lets you choose the language in
which you wish to work.
The label placement icons lets you place the label either above the touch cell or centered on the
touch cell.

Note: Fixed font text may only be placed above a touch cell.

The top portion of the Layout box includes commands to create and customize a label on the
touch cell. For instance, rather than displaying the label F1, a panel key could read Pressure. A
toolbar includes icons to customize the label on the touch cell by inserting a special character
or by selecting a particular language, and label placement.

The Label box lets you specify the text that is placed either on or on top of the touch cell.

Note: The label must be entered after the key has been selected under the General tab,
otherwise the default key label will override any label entered in the Label box.

Clicking on the Font button lets you select the font to be used for a particular touch cell. Once
a font is selected, it will continue to be used for all touch cells that are subsequently created.

Note: This font is not a global font and may be changed at any time without affecting any of
the previously created touch cells. It is possible to use different fonts on all of the touch cells in
a single project file.

Text indicates the color of the touch cell text. Text Bkgd indicates the background color of the
touch cell text. This color will only be seen when the Transparent checkbox is not marked,
otherwise the background of the touch cell text will appear either in On or in Off color for
centered text and in the Background color if the text is on top.

The bottom portion of the Layout box lets you choose the colors to be displayed on the touch
cell.
Line color is the color of the lines in the touch cell. Background color is the color of the touch
cell background. The touch cell background is a part of the rectangle around the circular or

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 144
Tech-note

elliptical touch cell not covered by the cell. Rectangular touch cells have no background if the
touch cell text is centered, but if it is positioned on top, a strip of background appears above
the cell.

Custom

The Custom tab is only selectable when the Custom style is selected on the General tab. It
enables you to create a custom indicator light.
Custom indicator lights can be created for multiple states, defined under the Action section of
the General tab. Click the Load button to import a graphic from the Graphics Library Manager.
Clicking on the Edit button brings up the Enter Bitmap Dimensions dialog box. The width and
height can be specified. Color options may also be selected, according to the selected panel's
support of colors.

Indicator Light Touch Cell Example

In this example, we will configure a selector switch with two (2) states.

Select Insert - Touch Cells - Indicator Light.

Use the cursor to outline an area on the page where the touch cell will appear.

In the Indicator Light Properties dialog box, select 3D Round as the Style.

Under Action, set the number of states to 3.

Set the color for the first state to Red.

Click on the tab for state 2, and set the color for the second state to Yellow.

Click on the tab for state 3, and set the color for the third state to Green.

Under Assign, click on the "…" button to identify the controller reference
location that will be mapped to the indicator light. Select the Layout tab and in
the Label box, type Indicator Light.

Adjust the Font if necessary.

Click OK.

The screen should appear similar to the figure below.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 145
Tech-note

Generic Command Button

Generic Command Button

The Generic Command Button dialog box is used to create a touch cell as a generic command.

To insert a selector switch touch cell, click the Generic Button icon from the toolbar or select
Insert - Touch Cells - Generic Command Button, then use the cursor to define the area in
which the touch cell is to be placed. The Generic Button Properties dialog box will appear
where the appearance and action of a generic command button touch cell may be configured.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 146
Tech-note

There are four tabs in the Generic Button Properties dialog box. They are: General, Layout,
Attributes and Custom.

The General tab allows you to select the style of generic command button, and the action to be
reflected.

The Layout tab lets you select the colors, font, languages, etc., to be used.

The Attributes tab lets you indicate the attributes to be associated with the generic push button.

The Custom tab is only selectable when a Custom or Windows Custom style button is selected
on the
General tab. It enables you to create a customized button.

A generic command button touch cell example is provided.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 147
Tech-note

General

General

The General tab of the Generic Button Properties dialog box lets you select the style of button
and the action that is to be represented.

Style

Within the General index tab, you can specify the appearance of the touch cell by making a
selection from the Style list. Selections include flat or 3D round and rectangular buttons, no
graphics, Windows and Windows Custom buttons, and Custom buttons. Selecting the Custom
or Windows Custom style activates the Custom tab.

The option No Graphics can create a touch cell that is entirely invisible. For example, you may
have a graphic that encompasses the entire screen of a control process in a factory. It contains
images of flow control valves, motors, and blowers. You can create touch cells on the separate
images and configure them to perform certain tasks. For instance, if you press the touch cell
that is on the image of the motor, the motor may turn on. If you press the touch cell that is on
the image of a valve, the valve may close, etc. All that will be seen on the screen is the image
of the process; the touch cells will be invisible.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 148
Tech-note

Action

To define the functionality of the touch cell, select one of the three radio buttons under the
Action portion of the dialog box. The action can be a Panel Key, an ASCII Key, or a Macro
Command.
If Panel Key is selected, clicking on the "…" button brings up the Change / View Panel Key
Assignment dialog box where you have a list of panel keys to choose from.
If ASCII Key is chosen, simply enter the character to be sent in the box beside of the ASCII
key radio button.

Macro commands represent all of the elementary macro commands that are available from the
Keyboard Macro Editor. The touch cells can be programmed using the Keyboard Macro Editor
to perform a vast array of functions, such as changing pages of the project file, scrolling down
a line, entering Data Entry Mode, and writing a value to the controller. If Macro Command is
chosen the Macro button brings up the Define / Edit Macro Command dialog box where
Keyboard Macro Editor commands are available.

Enable Indicator

The Enable Indicator checkbox is available with Windows, Windows Custom, and Custom
style touch cell buttons. This checkbox allows you to place an indicator light on the button.

Custom

By choosing Custom, you can select the source of the graphic that is to be used on the face of
the touch cell. This feature gives you the ability to import separate graphics for the pressed and
not pressed states. These graphics can be imported either from an external file or from a
library.

Generic Command Button Touch Cell Example

In this example, we will configure a custom generic touch cell button.

Select Insert - Touch Cells - Generic Command Button.

Use the cursor to outline an area on the page where the touch cell will appear.

In the Generic Button Properties dialog box, select Windows Custom as the
Style.

Under Action, set the Action as Panel Key.

Click on the "…" button to select a panel key to associate with the button.

Check the Enable Indicator box to place an indicator light on the button.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 149
Tech-note

Identify the controller reference location that will be mapped to the button.

From the Layout tab, enter a label for the button, adjust the Font if necessary,
and select colors for the Off and On states.

On the Attributes tab check Reverse.

On the Custom tab (visible only when a Custom button style is chosen) you
can either press the Edit button and create your own button face, or press the
Load button and load an image from a file.

Create a button face, then click OK.

The screen should appear similar to the figure below.

4.6.2 Shapes

Shapes

It is quite easy to add simple shapes using the Designer software, including SVG line, lines,
SVG rectangle, rectangles, and ovals. The Shapes submenu under the Insert menu offers these
options, or you may click on the individual shape icons in the toolbar.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 150
Tech-note

Line / SVG Line

To insert a line / SVG Line, click on the Line / SVG Line icon in the toolbar, or select Insert -
Shapes - Line / SVG Line. Place the cursor where the line is to begin, click once, then move
the cursor to where the line is to end and click again. The line will appear. SVG Line can be
drawn in any angle.

SVG Line icon is enabled only for firmware version 4.50 and above. The 'Pixel and Vector
graphics' option should be enabled under the Panel Setup -> Settings tab.

Rectangle / SVG Rectangle

To insert a rectangle / SVG rectangle, click on the Rectangle / SVG Rectangle icon in the
toolbar, or select Insert - Shapes - Rectangle. Place the cursor at one corner of the rectangle,
click once, then move the cursor to the opposite corner of the rectangle and click again. The
rectangle will appear.

SVG Rectangle icon is enabled only for firmware version 4.50 and above. The 'Pixel and
Vector graphics' option should be enabled under the Panel Setup -> Settings tab.

Note: A rectangle can be used to place a border around a bargraph.

Oval

To insert an oval, click on the Oval icon in the toolbar, or select Insert - Shapes - Oval. Place
the cursor at one side of the oval, click once, then move the cursor to the opposite side of the
oval and click again. The oval will appear.

Oval icon is enabled only for firmware version 4.50 and above. The 'Pixel and Vector graphics'
option should be enabled under the Panel Setup -> Settings tab.

4.6.3 Trend Window

Trend Window

The trend window displays the trend buffer.

Note: Before creating a trend window you must define the Trend Buffer.

To create a trend viewer, select the Trend Viewer icon from the toolbar, or select Trend
Window from the Insert menu. Use the cursor to define an area for the trend window. Once the

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 151
Tech-note

trend window is defined, double-clicking on the trend window brings up the Trend Window
Properties dialog box.

The Trend Window Properties dialog box may also be accessed by right-clicking on the trend
field area and selecting Properties.

Within the Trend Viewer Properties dialog box you can define the main trend viewer
properties for the X-Axis, the Y-Axis, and the overall layout.

A list of trend window limitations is provided.

Trend Window Limitations

Max number of trend windows inside the same page 10

Max number of curves inside the same trend window 10
Total number of curves that can be use inside the same page 20
Max number of global trend buffers sampled in background 20
Cyclical sampling period 1-9999 sec

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 152
Tech-note

The total memory reserved for trend buffer 20 KB

Available memory area in the PLC for storing trend buffers 60 bytes

Preview

The Preview window allows you to see how the trend window will look before it is actually
created and placed into a project file.

Y-Axis

Y-Axis

Selecting the Y-Axis index tab will allow you to select the trend buffers (curves) to be
displayed inside the trend viewer. You can also set the appearance of the Y-Axis and configure
the trend cursor.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 153
Tech-note

Curves

Selecting the Y-Axis index tab will allow you to select the trend buffers (curves) to be
displayed inside the trend viewer. Use the Add and Delete buttons to add or remove trend
buffers. The Add button opens a dialog box that contains a list of all the active trend buffers
that can be used. To remove a previously inserted curve, select it from the Curves list and click
the Delete button.

Note: Once a curve is added to the trend viewer, you will only be able to add additional curves
of the same sampling method to that particular trend viewer.

Appearance

Appearance

For any curve, you can choose the appearance properties such as

Line Type.

Line Style.

Line Size.

Line Color.
Type
Curve type. Can be Line, Step or Filled bar graph.
Style
Curve style. Can be Solid, Dotted, Dashed, Dash Dot or Dash Dot Dot.

Note: The style type is applicable only when curve is line type.
Size
Curve size. Can be Thin, Medium or Thick.
Color
Curve color. The basic 16 colors are supported.

Cursor

Cursor

This variable can be used to display the value of the curve at a point on the Y-axis. The Y-
Cursor can be activated, and the Y-Axis Minimum and Maximum values can be set.
Use the trend macros to activate the trend cursor.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 154
Tech-note

Y Cursor

This variable can be used to display the value of the curve at a point on the Y-axis. Use the
trend macros to activate the trend cursor.

Y Axis Minimum

The minimum value of the defined Y-axis. To the right of the dialog box you can define the
default value (Y-axis range) that will be used when the trend viewer is displayed. If you put
this internal panel control variable on the UniOP as a read/write field its value can be modified
on-line, allowing you to dynamically change the Y-axis range.

Y Axis Maximum

The maximum value of the defined Y-axis. To the right of the dialog box you can define the
default value (Y-axis range) that will be used when the trend viewer is displayed. If you put
this internal panel control variable on the UniOP as a read/write field its value can be modified
on-line, allowing you to dynamically change the Y-axis range.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 155
Tech-note

X-Axis

X-Axis

Use this index tab to define the X-axis properties (Style, Scrolling and Cursor) of the trend
viewer.

Note: A single X-Axis exists for all of the curves that have been inserted inside the same trend
viewer window.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 156
Tech-note

Style

Style

The format of the X-Axis (Time, Samples or On PLC) is defined from the curves that are
inside the trend viewer. When no curves are defined, all of these radio buttons are disabled.
After adding one or more curves, only the appropriate radio button is enabled.

Time

The X-axis range is time defined. This will be enabled when the trend buffers inside the trend
viewer are sampled cyclically from the panel.

Samples

The X-axis range is defined by a maximum number of samples. This will be enabled when the
trend buffers inside the trend viewer are sampled on PLC events.

On PLC

The X-axis range is defined by a maximum number of samples. The number of samples must
be defined inside the PLC memory.

Scrolling

Scrolling

The scroll parameters (direction and auto scroll control) defines how much the trend viewer
will be shifted upon each scroll operation. The scroll parameter can be a fixed amount of time
or a fixed number of samples.

Scroll Direction

This parameter defines the direction of the curve. The curve can be drawn Left to Right, Right
to Left, Up to Down or Down to Up.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 157
Tech-note

Enable Auto Scroll Control

Use this checkbox to enable a trend viewer shift when the trend viewer becomes full.

Cursor

Cursor

This variable can be used to display the value of the curve at a point on the X-axis. The X-
Cursor can be activated, and the X-Axis Minimum and Maximum values and color can be set.
Use the trend macros to activate the trend cursor.

X Cursor

This variable can be used to display the value of the curve at a point on the X-axis. Use the
trend macros to activate the trend cursor.

X Axis Minimum

This variable contains the minimum value of the defined X-axis. You can put this variable on
the panel by selecting the Time/Date icons located on the toolbar.

X Axis Maximum

This variable contains the maximum value of the defined X-axis. You can put this variable on
the panel by selecting the Time/Date icons located on the toolbar.

Cursor Color

Color used to draw the X-axis cursor.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 158
Tech-note

Layout

Layout

Options in the Layout section define the visual appearance of the trend viewer window, such as
the title and window. A layout toolbar is also available.

Layout Toolbar

Layout Toolbar

The layout toolbar contains icons to keep frequently used commands easily accessible. These
include the following commands

Special Characters

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 159
Tech-note

Clicking on the Special Characters icon brings up the Special Characters dialog box that can be
used to enter a special character.

Select Language

It is possible to integrate multiple languages. Clicking on the Select Language button brings up
the Languages dialog box that allows you to choose the language in which you wish to work.

Alignment.

Title alignment. Can be Left, Right or Center.

Special Characters
Clicking on the Special Characters icon brings up the Special Characters dialog box that can be
used to enter a special character.
Select Language
It is possible to integrate multiple languages. Clicking on the Select Language button brings up
the Languages dialog box that allows you to choose the language in which you wish to work.
Alignment
Title alignment. Can be Left, Right or Center.

Title

Title

In the Title section you can enter title text and format the appearance of the title by setting the
font, foreground and background colors, and title height.

Text

The text that will be the trend window title or label.

Font

Title font.

Height

Height of the area reserved for the trend viewer title, as a percentage of the trend viewer.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 160
Tech-note

Foreground (FG)

Title foreground color.

Background (BG)

Title background color.

Window

Window

In the Window section you can format the appearance of the window by setting the frame color
and width, the background color, and to enable a horizontal or vertical grid, set the horizontal
grid color or vertical grid color, and set the horizontal grid marks or vertical grid marks.

Frame

Trend frame color.

Width

Trend frame width as a percentage of the trend window. Set to 0 for no frame.

Background Color

Trend frame window background color.

X Grid

Check the box to enable a horizontal grid in the viewer window.

X Grid Color

Color of the horizontal grid.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 161
Tech-note

X Grid Marks

Number of horizontal grid lines.

Y Grid

Check the box to enable a vertical grid in the viewer window.

Y Grid Color

Color of the vertical grid.

Y Grid Marks

Number of vertical grid lines.

Trend Window Example

A trend buffer must be created before a trend window can be created. Select
Trend Buffers from the Project menu.

Click on the Insert Item button above the buffers list.

Name the new buffer.

Click OK to accept the default settings for the trend buffer and return to the
project page.

Select Trend Window from the Insert menu.

Use the cursor to define an area for the trend window.

In the Trend Window Properties dialog box click on the Add button.

From the Choose Trend Buffer list select the trend buffer that you created in
steps 1-4.

Click OK to return to the Trend Window Properties dialog box.

Select the Layout tab.

Enter a label for the trend window in the Text box.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 162
Tech-note

Click OK to accept the trend window settings and return to the project page
where the trend window is now displayed.

4.6.4 Meter Instrument

Meter Instrument

Meter instruments are simple instruments, such as gauges, that display numerical values by
moving a needle to the appropriate position over a labeled scale. The look of a meter
instrument can be changed to suit your the needs. Up to ten (10) meter instruments can be
displayed on a single page within a project.

To insert a gauge in Designer, click on the Meter Instrument icon and use the cursor to define
an area where the gauge is to appear, or select Meter Instrument from the Insert menu. The
Meter Instrument Properties dialog box will appear where the appearance and action of a meter
instrument may be configured.

There are five tabs in the Meter Instrument Properties dialog box. They are: General, Layout,
Gauge, Needle, and Background.

The General tab allows you to select the style and range of the meter gauge, the memory
location that is to be represented, and scale the output if necessary.

The Layout tab lets you select the colors, font, languages, etc., to be used.

On the Gauge tab you can set the rotation direction, format the ticks on the dial, and set the arc
colors.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 163
Tech-note

The Needle tab allows you to customize the color and size of the gauge indicator needle.

The Background tab lets you insert a custom background if you wish.

An external small window allows to Preview the Meter Instrument.

Preview

The Preview window allows you to see how the gauge will look before it is actually created
and placed into a project file.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 164
Tech-note

General

General

Within this index tab, you can enter the main properties that define the gauge, such as the style,
range, reference location and any necessary scaling.

Style

The style of gauge to be inserted (full circle, half circle, etc.). Custom gauges may also be
created.

Range

Range

The minimum and maximum scale values, the number of value labels to be shown on the
gauge, and the gauge precision.

Minimum

Minimum and value on the gauge scale.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 165
Tech-note

Maximum

Maximum value on the gauge scale.

Count

The number of values (in addition to zero) to be shown on the gauge. The values shown will be
computed by dividing the maximum value by the count.

Precision

The precision, or number of digits to the right of the decimal point that are to be displayed on
the gauge. A value of zero means that only integer values will be displayed.

Reference

Defines the variable that is to be graphically represented. Variables can be PLC references or
internal panel variables. Clicking on the "…" button for PLC references brings up the Data
Fields Properties dialog box where the reference location may be set.

Scale

The scaling parameter may be used to perform a linear transformation on the value to be
displayed. Specify the scaling operators A1, A2, and B for the equation Y=A1/A2*X+B in the
boxes.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 166
Tech-note

Layout

Layout

The parameters within this index tab are used to define the layout of the gauge.

These include the Title text, the Title X size, the Title Y size, the Labels, the Gauge X size, the
Gauge Y size, the overall gauge Size, the Title color and Font, the Labels color color and Font,
the Frame color, the Rim color, and the Background color.

A Layout Toolbar keeps the Special Characters and Languages commands handy.

Layout Toolbar

The Layout Toolbar keeps the Special Characters and Languages commands handy.

Layout Properties

Title

This is the title for the gauge.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 167
Tech-note

Title X

The position of the title on the x-axis. A value of 50% is in the middle of the box area, 0% is
on the left border and 100% on the right border.

Title Y

The position of the title on the y-axis. A value of 50% is in the middle of the box area, 0% is
on the upper border and 100% on the bottom border.

Labels

The position of the numeric labels on the gauge. A value of 100% is on the gauge scale circle.
Greater than 100% is outside the scale and less than 100% is inside the scale.

Gauge X

The position of the gauge on the x-axis. A value of 50% is in the middle of the box area, 0% is
on the left border and 100% is on the right border.

Gauge Y

The position of the gauge on the y-axis. A value of 50% is in the middle of the box area, 0% is
on the upper border and 100% is on the lower border.

Size

The size of the gauge as a percentage (0-100%) of the smallest side of the box.

Title Color

The color in which the title text will be displayed.

Title Font

The font in which the gauge title will be displayed. (Can be selected from installed
Touchscreen fonts).

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 168
Tech-note

Labels Color

The color in which the title text will be displayed.

Labels Font

The font in which the numeric labels on the gauge will be displayed. (Can be selected from
installed Touchscreen fonts).

Frame

The color of the box frame around the gauge.

Note: A frame color is not used when the background is a custom bitmap.

Rim

The color of the gauge scale and ticks.

Note: A rim color is not used when the background is a custom bitmap.

Background

The background color of the gauge box.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 169
Tech-note

Gauge

Gauge

On the Gauge tab you can format the Rotation and Ticks on the dial, and set the Arc Colors.

Rotation

Rotation

Under the Rotation section you can set the rotation direction, the origin point, start position,
and range.

Direction

The rotation direction of the gauge needle. Can be clockwise or counterclockwise.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 170
Tech-note

Origin

The position of the gauge origin point (zero). Choices are East, North, West and South.

Start

Scale start angle. It can be from 0° to 360°.

Range

Scale range. It can be from 0° to 360°, with 0° being a single point and 360° a full circle.

Ticks

Ticks

In the Ticks section you can set the style for the ticks, the number of major and minor ticks,
and the size of the ticks.

Style

The position of the ticks on the gauge scale. Can be Outside or in the Middle of the scale.

Major

Number of major ticks on the scale.

Note: If a number less than the Range count is entered, the Range count becomes the default
value.

Minor

Number of minor ticks (ticks between major ticks) on the scale.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 171
Tech-note

Size

Size, in percentage of the gauge circle, of major ticks. Minor ticks are generally half the size of
major ticks.

Arc Colors

These parameters are used to define different colored zones on the gauge. To define a color
range on the gauge, enter the Begin and End label values in the boxes provided. Select a color
for that zone. Boxes for an additional zone are created whenever a value is entered in existing
boxes. To delete a color zone, remove the label values from the Begin and End boxes.

Needle

Needle

On the Needle tab you can format the needle Style, Length, Tail size, tail Thickness, Center
size, Needle color and Center color.

Style

The style of needle to be used. Choices include Thick, Triangle, and Filled Triangle.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 172
Tech-note

Length

Needle length expressed as a percentage of the gauge radius.

Tail

Needle tail length expressed as a percentage of the gauge radius.

Thickness

Needle thickness expressed as a percentage of the gauge radius.

Center

The circle that highlights the needle rotation point. The size of this circle is defined as a
percentage of the gauge diameter.

Needle Color

Color of the needle body.

Center Color

Color of the needle center.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 173
Tech-note

Background

Check the Custom Background checkbox to enable the custom background commands. This
lets you enter a custom bitmap as the background for the gauge.

The bitmap can come from an external file or from the Graphics Library Manager that is
supplied with Designer.

Select the image source to be used, select the bitmap and click the Load image button. Use the
Edit button to edit the bitmap size and colors.

Meter Instrument Example

From the Insert menu select Meter Instrument.

Use the cursor to define an area for the meter instrument.

From the Meter Instrument Properties dialog box select Full Circle as the meter
Style.

Under Range, insert 10 in the Count box to have labels at 10, 20, 30, etc.

Select the Layout tab and enter a Title for the meter.

By default the title is in the center of the meter. Slide the Title Y selector to a
value of 85% or 90% to place the title towards the bottom of the meter window.

Adjust the Size of the gauge as necessary to fit the area defined in step 2.

Select the Gauge tab.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 174
Tech-note

Under Ticks, enter a value of 10 for Major and 10 for Minor. This puts a major
tick at each of the 10 labels, and a minor tick at each whole value.

Select the Needle tab.

Set the Needle and Center colors to red.

Set the Center value to 15%.

Click OK to accept the meter settings and close the Meter Instrument
Properties dialog box.

The meter instrument appears on the project page.

4.6.5 Trend Time Field

Trend Time Field

Trend Time Field is a panel internal control variable related to trend components. It shows the
trend sampling time used on the x-axis.

To insert a trend time field in Designer, click on the Trend Time Field icon and use the cursor
to define an area where the field is to appear, or select Trend Time Field from the Insert menu.
The Trend Time Field Properties dialog box will appear where the contents and layout of a
trend time field may be configured.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 175
Tech-note

There are two tabs in the Trend Time Field Properties dialog box. They are General and
Layout.

The General tab allows you to select the style and contents of the trend time field, and the
memory location that is to be represented.

The Layout tab lets you select the colors, font, etc., to be used.

An external small window allows to Preview the Trend Time Field.

Preview

The Preview window shows how the field will look on the panel screen.

General

General

The General tab includes commands (Style, Contents and Assign) that let you customize the
appearance of the trend time field.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 176
Tech-note

Style

The Style section lists several options for the appearance of the trend time field. These include
Date - Time, in which the date is followed by the time in a horizontal format, Time - Date, in
which the time is followed by the date in a horizontal format, Date / Time, in which the date is
listed above the time, and Time / Date, in which the time is listed above the date.

Contents

Checkboxes allow you to include seconds, minutes or hours in the time, and days, months or
years in the date. You also have the option of specifying an AM/PM format for the time.

Assign

Choose the appropriate control variable from the list.

Text

The Text tab allows you to set the Panel Font, the text, text background, and background
colors, or to make the background transparent.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 177
Tech-note

Trend Time Field Example

Select Trend Time Field from the Insert menu.

Select Time - Date as the Style.

Remove the checkbox from the Years box to display only the days and
months. The date display format is now DD-MM. Assume that we wish to have
the date displayed as MM-DD. This will be set in step 6.

Under Assign, select a Control Variable.

Click OK to accept the settings and return to the project page where the new
trend time field is now displayed.

To change the date display format, select Panel Setup from the Project menu.

Select the Settings tab.

Under Date Format choose the setting MM/DD/YY.

Click OK.

The trend time field date is now displayed as MM-DD.

4.6.6 Recipe Menu

Recipe Menu

A recipe menu is a feature that simplifies recipe parameter set selection on UniOP panels
through a user-friendly interface. It provides a menu-like field that can contain names to
describe the parameter set instead of using numbers. Each name represents one recipe
parameter set. To add a recipe menu select Recipe Menu from the Insert menu, or press
Ctrl+R.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 178
Tech-note

The Recipe Menu Properties dialog box appears containing two tabs; General and Text. The
General tab controls the size and appearance of the recipe menu while the Text tab controls the
appearance of the text.

Note: In order to use the Recipe Menu, each Recipe Parameter Set must be given a name. This
is done by adding a recipe data field with an ASCII display format on the page where the
recipe is located and filling the Recipe Item values in the Recipe Configuration box with an
ASCII name for each parameter set. This ASCII field is called a Recipe Name field. This field
is not a field type name; it only describes the field's purpose.

A set of keyboard macro commands support recipe menus:

The Go To Recipe Menu macro jumps to a specified page and sets the value
of the Recipe Page For Selection.

The Scroll Recipe Menu macro is used to move the selection in the recipe
menu field. This is the way that a new recipe parameter set name is chosen
from the list.

The Confirm Recipe Menu Selection macro changes the current recipe
parameter set to the one selected in the recipe menu field.

Note: If a control variable data item set as Recipe Page For Selection contains the page
number of a page without a Recipe Name field defined, the recipe menu field will display
asterisks ("*").

An example of adding a recipe menu field is provided.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 179
Tech-note

General

General

The General tab allows you to set the recipe menu style, attributes, size, and includes the
option to show the record numbers.

Style

Recipe Menu is the only choice available.

Attributes

The currently selected Recipe Parameter Set may be indicated using user defined attribute
combinations (blink, highlight, reverse).

Size

The size (in pixels) of the Recipe Menu display.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 180
Tech-note

Display

Click the Show Record Numbers checkbox to show record numbers (which are just the
parameter set numbers) together with the recipe name.

Text

The Text tab allows you to set the font size and color, and the background color and
transparency.

Designer will not let you select a size that is too large to be displayed in the designated area.

If Transparent is selected then text background colors are not available.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 181
Tech-note

4.6.7 Special Characters

Special characters may be added to text by clicking on the Special Characters button. This will
bring up the Special Characters dialog box in which you can select the character(s) to be used
by double clicking on them or by single clicking on them and pressing Insert. The characters
will appear in the last position the cursor was in before entering the special characters dialog
box.

4.6.8 Import Bitmap Graphics

Import Bitmap Graphics

When using a UniOP graphics-capable panel you may import, display, and manipulate
graphics in a project file. Once the graphic is imported into the project file, it may be easily
moved or resized.

Click on the Import Graphics icon on the toolbar, or select Import Bitmap Graphics from the
Insert menu. The Open dialog box appears with a list of files or folders.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 182
Tech-note

Select a graphic image to import and click on the Open button.

The Bitmap Settings dialog box appears showing a preview of the image, with two tabs labeled
Image and Panel.

Options are available for changing the appearance of the image on the panel. Image shows the
original image, while Panel shows how the image will appear on the panel.

Note: Only files in supported image formats may be imported using the Import Bitmap
Graphics box i.e.

Windows and OS/2 Bitmaps(*.bmp, *.dib,*.rle)

JPEG *.jpeg
AutoCAD files (*.dwg, *.dxf, *.dwf)
Scalable Vector graphics *.svg
Windows Metafile *.wmf

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 183
Tech-note

Enhanced Metafile *.emf

Windows Icons and Cursors (*.ico;*.cur)
TIFF (*.tif;*.tiff)
Adobe Photoshop *.psd
WordPerfect *.wpg
Portable Network Graphics *.png
Kodak PhotoCD *.pcd
Kodak FlashPix *.fpx
ZSoft PCX and DCX (*.pcx;*.dcx)
TARGA *.tga
Encapsulated Postscript *.eps
Macintosh PICT *.pct
Sun Raster *.ras
MacPaint *.mac
GEM Image *.img
Gerber *.gbr
Computer graphics metafile *.cgm
DRW *.drw
Intergraph Microstation Format *.dgn
ESRI shape format *.shp

A graphic can be moved or resized once it is imported. To move a graphic, simply single click
the left mouse button over the graphic and move it to the desired location. To resize a graphic,
single click the left mouse button once on the graphic and use one of the selection handles that
will appear around the edge of the graphic.

Note: Resizing a graphic image by using the selection handles may distort the image.

To duplicate or copy a graphic within the same page, left-click on the image then click on the
Copy icon, select Copy from the Edit menu, or right-click on the image and select Copy. Click
where the copy of the image is to be placed, then click the Paste icon or select Paste from the
Edit menu, or right-click and select Paste.

To delete a bitmap graphic, left-click on the graphic to select it and press the Delete key or
click on the Cut tool, or right-click on the image and select Cut.

Right-click on a bitmap image and select Edit to open the Bitmap Editor dialog box.

Right-click on a bitmap image and select Properties to view the image properties, such as the
image file name, the image height and width in pixels, and the image resolution.

Dynamic graphics and transparent and three-dimensional touch cells may be placed over static
bitmaps.

A bitmap graphics example is provided.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 184
Tech-note

Import Bitmap Graphics Example

The following steps are used to import a bitmap file:

Select Import Bitmap Graphics from the Insert menu. This will open a dialog
box from which you can select a file.

Check the Preview box to view files before selection. Select the filename that
is to be used and click on Open.

The Bitmap Settings dialog box, shown below, appears. From this dialog box
you can change the name of the file and change its appearance.

Click OK.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 185
Tech-note

The graphic appears in the upper left corner of the project page. You can then
move it to the desired position on the project page, or resize it. To move a
graphic, simply single click the left mouse button over the graphic and move it
to the desired location. To resize a graphic, single click the left mouse button
once on the graphic and use one of the selection handles that will appear. To
duplicate or copy a graphic within the same page, hold the Ctrl key down and
click on the graphic. Drag the duplicated graphic to a new location and release
the mouse button. To delete a bitmap graphic, click on the graphic to select it
and either press the Delete key or click on the Cut tool.

Preview

The bitmap graphics preview image has two tabs, labeled Panel and Original. The Panel tab
displays the way the image will appear on the panel, while the Original tab displays the
original image appearance for reference. The image file name appears under the preview
window.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 186
Tech-note

Panel

Sets the number of colors for the image display on the panel, for example black/white or 16
colors.

Properties

Right-click on a bitmap image and select Properties to view the image properties, such as the
image file name, the image height and width in pixels, and the image resolution.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 187
Tech-note

Image

Image

There are a number of controls available to change the appearance of the image. They include:

Dither

Contrast

Brightness

Smooth

Sharpen

Blur

Size to Fit

Invert

Flip

Mirror

Reset

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 188
Tech-note

Dither

Various methods to dither the image are available, including Floyd-Steinberg, Bayer, etc.

Contrast

A sliding bar lets you adjust the image contrast.

Brightness

A sliding bar allows you to adjust the image brightness from darker to lighter.

Smooth

Smooths jagged pixel edges in the image.

Sharpen

Sharpens the image.

Blur

Blurs the sharp lines in the image.

Size to Fit

Sizes the image to fit the available space.

Invert

Produces a negative image.

Flip

Turns the image upside down.

Mirror

Turns the image backwards.

Reset

Resets the image appearance to the default settings.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 189
Tech-note

4.7 Page Menu

4.7.1 Page Menu

This section provides information about the Page menu. The Page menu contains commands
that let you easily move from one project page to another, and to configure the various pages
within a project.

Insert Page

Add Page

Delete Page

Go to Page

Previous Page

Next Page

Page Options

Recipe Configuration

Special Pages and Page Modes

4.7.2 Insert Page

This option lets you insert a blank page in front of the page that you are currently viewing. For
example, if you are on page 3 of a project file and select Insert Page, the present page 3 would
become page 4, and a blank page would be inserted as page 3. You can also access the Insert
Page command by pressing the Alt+Ins keys.

4.7.3 Add Page

Selecting this command adds a new page to the end of the project file. You can also access the
Add Page command by pressing the F7 function key.

4.7.4 Delete Page

Selecting this command deletes the currently selected page within the project file. You will be
prompted to confirm the operation. The pages of the project file will automatically be
renumbered. You can also access the Delete Page command by pressing the Shift+F7 keys.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 190
Tech-note

4.7.5 Go to Page

This dialog box is one method available for selecting a page in a project. Select a page from
the pull-down list in the Go to page dialog box, or type the page number in the entry field
provided.
Other methods for selecting a particular page in a project include selecting a page from the
pull-down Current page list on the toolbar, double-clicking on a page from the Project tab in
the workspace, or by pressing the Ctrl+G keys.

4.7.6 Previous Page

Selecting this option displays the previous page in the project. Pressing the Page Up key also
displays the previous page.

4.7.7 Next Page

Selecting this option displays the next page in the project. Pressing the Page Down key also
displays the next page.

4.7.8 Page Options

Page Options

The Page Options dialog box lets you:

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 191
Tech-note

Select a page from a page list,

Access tools from a convenient toolbar,

Link to other pages, and

Enable page scroll.

Page List

This section lists all the pages in the current project. You can rename a page by single-clicking
on the page name, then typing a new page name.

Toolbar

The toolbar includes icons that allow you to cut, copy, paste, insert special characters, and
select a language.

Link

Link the current page to the previous page or to the next page.

Scroll

This command enables a page scroll frequency and the number of lines to scroll. This allows
you to see lines that may be off the screen without having to use the arrow keys to scroll
through the information.
When pages are linked, the left and right arrow keys on the display panel may be used to scroll
between pages. By default, the current page is linked to both the previous page and the next
page.

Note: If you are having problems using this feature, check the RDA setup under Panel
Controller Interface in the Project menu. Make sure that the PR box within the section entitled
PLC is unchecked.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 192
Tech-note

4.7.9 Recipe Configuration

Recipe Configuration

A recipe is associated with a particular page and is composed of all the recipe data fields on
that page.

However, there can be a number of different parameter sets for a recipe.

The Recipe Configuration dialog box is accessed by selecting Recipe Configuration from the
Page menu.

The Recipe Configuration dialog box lets you:

Specify the number of parameter sets for the recipe on the current page.

Specify default values for all recipe data items on the current page.

Note: Recipe data items must be defined on the current page before the Recipe Configuration
dialog box can be activated. To do so, insert a Numeric/ASCII, Bargraph, or Message data
field and select Recipe as the Reference.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 193
Tech-note

Number of Parameter Sets

Indicate the number of parameter sets. That number of columns is activated in the Recipe
Parameter Set section.

Multipage Recipe

Data which are logically part of a single recipe can be scattered over several project pages and
still be selected, downloaded or uploaded with a single command. A recipe spanning several
pages is called "Multipage Recipe".

Note: Multipage recipes are supported by UniOP firmware versions 4.20 and later.

Set As Recipe Name

A Recipe Name should be defined for all of the pages containing recipes that are going to be
handled using the Recipe Menu. It is also necessary for the pages that are referred to by
Recipe Key field(s).

The Recipe Name is defined by adding a Numeric/ASCII data field of ASCII style on the page
with recipes and filling the recipe data field values with a name for each parameter set.

After the recipe data field values have been inserted, click the row number button to select that
row, then click the Set As Recipe Name button. An asterisk will appear next to the Recipe Item
to indicate it has been selected as a Recipe Name.

Note: This ASCII field is not an internal variable in the panel memory. It needs to be
addressed to a physical location in the PLC memory. The amount of memory required depends
on the length of the ASCII string: one byte per character.

A Recipe Name definition example is provided.

Cut

Cut deletes all Recipe Parameter Set entries beyond the position of the cursor.

Copy

To copy, highlight a Recipe Parameter Set entry and click the Copy button. Clicking the Paste
button pastes the copied entry into the box currently occupied by the cursor.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 194
Tech-note

Paste

Clicking the Paste button pastes the copied entry into the box currently occupied by the cursor.

Recipe Values

Recipe Values

The recipe values section is in the form of a spreadsheet. Each row is associated with a
particular recipe data field. The controller address of the recipe data item is displayed at the far
left hand side of the row, enabling you to tell which row is associated with which recipe data
item.

Each column is associated with a particular parameter set of the recipe. Each parameter set is
identified by a number. The first column corresponds to parameter set 1, the second column to
parameter set 2, and so on.
The initial values for a particular parameter set can be fully specified by entering a value for
each row in the column. The first column corresponds to parameter set 1, the second column to
parameter set 2, and so on.

The number of columns activated in the spreadsheet corresponds to the number entered for
Number of Parameter Sets.

Recipe Item

The number of rows activated on the spreadsheet corresponds to the number of recipe data
fields defined on the page.
An asterisk next to a Recipe Item indicates that the item has been set as a recipe name.

Recipe Parameter Set

A parameter set is a specific block of data within a recipe. A recipe parameter set is created by
assigning particular values to the recipe data fields on a page. With Designer, it is possible to
create many different parameter sets within a single recipe. Depending upon the panel model,
there can be up to 1024 parameter sets of a single recipe. Not only is a block of memory in the
panel reserved for every recipe; separate blocks of memory are also reserved for each of the
parameter sets contained within a particular recipe. All the parameter sets of a particular recipe
always contain the same recipe data items but the values of these recipe data items vary
between the different parameter sets.
These different recipe parameter sets can control different processes. One set may be used to
configure the controller to control the production of 2 mm screws, another set may be used to
configure the controller to control the production of 5 mm screws, and yet another to control
the production of 7 mm screws. Each set of parameters is stored in a different parameter set
within the same recipe.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 195
Tech-note

Note: The default values entered for a particular recipe parameter set item are in the format
that was specified in the Field Properties dialog box for that data item. For example, if a
numerical format of hexadecimal was entered in the data Field Properties dialog box for a
recipe data field, then all the values entered in the Recipe Configuration dialog box for that
recipe data field would also be in hexadecimal. If you specify a numeric data format of
hexadecimal (base 16) for a recipe data item, and then enter a value of 10 in the Recipe
Configuration dialog box, the 10 will be interpreted as 10 hexadecimal. Likewise, if ASCII is
the specified style, then the entry must be in ASCII text.

4.7.10 Special Pages and Page Modes

Special Pages and Page Modes

The items located within the Special Pages and Page Modes portion of the Page menu include

Data Entry Screen

Command Menu

System

Password

Direct Access

Direct Page Selection

Time & Date

Alarm Page

Event Page

Current Page Mode.

This allows you to place any combination of static text and touch cells on these pages. These
items should be placed on the lower portions of the page, since these modes reserve some of
the area contained in the upper portions of the page for display information.

Whenever the panel enters Password mode or Data Entry Mode, a default numeric keypad will
appear on the screen. In all of the other modes, a row of default keys will appear that contains
the arrow keys, an Enter key, and a Clear key.

Note: If you create a screen in any of the special page modes, the default keys for that mode
will not be displayed.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 196
Tech-note

Data Entry Screen

This screen will appear whenever you begin Data Entry Mode. When using a UniOP
touchscreen panel, a numeric keypad will appear by default. If anything is placed on this
screen, the default numeric keypad will not appear.

If this screen is modified, make sure that an Enter key is defined somewhere in this screen so
that the panel user can always get out of Data Entry Mode.

Command Menu

This is the menu that appears when the panel user presses the Enter key on a touchscreen panel
and holds it for a period of three to four seconds.

In the case of the keyless touch panel, this menu will appear whenever the user presses any
area of the screen where there is no touch cell configured. You will not be able to write in the
two topmost lines. The reason for this is that the panel reserves this area for the Command
Menu itself.

System

This page will appear when the System option is selected in the Panel Command Menu.

This page allows the panel user to adjust the contrast or brightness (on some panels) and to see
if there are good communications between the panel and the controller.

Password

This page is displayed when the panel user selects Passwords from the Panel Command Menu.

Direct Access

This page is in essence a snapshot of the controller's memory. This page will show all of the
memory locations contained within the controller.

This menu can only be accessed when using a panel that contains a 16-line display or a 25-line
display.

Direct Page Selection

In this menu, you can scroll through a list of page names and select the page to be displayed.

With this option, it is possible to see every page of a project file, even if the links to a
particular page are broken.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 197
Tech-note

Time and Date

This area lets you set the time and date on the panel. This information is used in the Alarm
List, the Event List, and whenever you insert time fields or date fields into the project file.

Alarm Page

This page will appear on the panel whenever there is an active alarm present, providing the C2
bit in the RDA is not set.

If the C2 bit is set, the default alarm page will not appear.

Event Page

This page lists the previous 256 (some models up to 1024) events in sequential order on the
panel. When more than 256 (1024) events have occurred, the older events will be removed in
order to make room for the newer events.

Current Page Mode

This mode displays the page that you are currently on in the project file. This mode is the most
often used when editing the project file.

4.8 Project Menu

4.8.1 Project Menu

This section provides information about the Project menu. The Project menu allows you to
configure the panel, the controller, the network, and your project to work together seamlessly.
Commands on the Project menu include:

Configure Controller

Panel Setup

Network Setup

Panel Controller Interface

Report on Panel Printer

Keyboard Macro Editor

Passwords

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 198
Tech-note

Alarms

Languages

Next Language

Configure Tag Dictionaries

Tag Validation

Trend Buffers

Memory Use

4.8.2 Configure Controller

Configure Controller

Designer supports many different controller manufacturer types.

By selecting Configure Controller from the Project menu (or by clicking on the Configure
Controller icon on the toolbar, or by pressing the Ctrl+Alt+P keys), you can access the
Configure Controllers dialog box and select the controller mode and the brand of controller
with which you will be working. You can also enable double protocol if desired.

Note: Designer uses the current controller setup and applies this setting to all subsequent
projects until changed.

Controller Mode

Indicate whether external, internal, or both internal and external controllers will be used.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 199
Tech-note

Note: The appropriate choices for your system are activated during system initialization.

Enable Double Protocol

A single UniOP panel can communicate with Controllers simultaneously using different
communication protocols. When configuring the UniOP to communicate with controllers
simultaneously using two different communication protocols (double protocol configuration),
distinction must be made between the first communication driver (used to communicate using
the first protocol) and the second communication driver (used to communicate using the
second protocol).

The Configure Controllers dialog box contains a checkbox for Enable Double protocol.
Checking this box lets you specify a second controller. Under the Controller 1 box another box
will appear where you can specify Controller 2.

Designer will issue a warning if an illegal combination is chosen and will not close the dialog
box until an allowable configuration is selected. If a configuration is specified in which a
switch to new driver(s) was made, Designer will prompt the user to accept the change. If both
drivers are changed, Designer will prompt twice.

If at least one of the drivers is a serial driver, the decision which driver will be set as the
Controller 1, and which one as Controller 2 is important. Controller 1 will use the PLC port,
and the Controller 2 will use the PC/Printer port. If one of drivers is using the current loop, it
must become Controller 1 to ensure that it uses the PLC port because the current loop
capability is only implemented on this serial port. Also, as the PC/Printer and the PLC port
connectors are of different genders, careful selection of Controller 1 and Controller 2 can make
cabling easier and less expensive.

There is no major difference in configuring UniNET networks for single protocol applications
and for double protocol applications. However, if one of either network type "Single Server,
Multiple Clients" or "Multiple Server, Multiple Clients" is selected, all the UniOP network
server nodes will inherit the current configuration of the project. In other words, if the project
in which the network is being set up is currently configured for single protocol, all the UniOP
node servers in the UniNET network will be configured to use only this protocol. If the project
is configured for double protocol, all the UniOP node servers will be configured to use both
protocols.

It is important to remember the following rules for serial drivers:

The first driver always communicates with the controllers over the PLC port
.
The second driver always communicates with the controllers over the
PC/Printer port.

Of course, if any of the protocols is a non-serial protocol, its driver will use the AUX port
instead.

There are a few hardware restrictions when two communication protocols are used:

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 200
Tech-note

If the communication driver is using both serial communication ports - the PLC
and the PC/Printer port - it cannot be used in multi-protocol configurations.

If two communication drivers are both serial, there will be no ports left to
connect the serial UniNET network. (You can still use the Ethernet-based
UniNET, of course.)

Since only one communication module can be plugged into the panel, a
combination of two communication drivers, each requiring such a module,
cannot be supported.

As the Ethernet protocol is supported by a communication module, a

combination of one Ethernet-based communication driver and a driver
requiring any other communication module cannot be supported.

The internal controller module plugs into the same socket as the
communication modules. Thus, if an internal controller is plugged into the
panel, it not possible to plug in a communication module. Therefore, a
communication driver requiring a custom communication module (including
Ethernet-based) cannot be supported.

Note: Two Ethernet-based communication drivers can normally be used simultaneously

because they will both communicate through the same Ethernet communication module.
Ethernet-based UniNET can also be used in addition to one or two Ethernet-based
communication drivers.

Controller

The currently selected controller(s) is listed. If this is not correct, click on the "..." button to
activate the Select Controller dialog box.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 201
Tech-note

Select Controller

Select Controller

Pick the brand of controller to be used from the list provided. Buttons within this box allow
you to remove controllers from the list, refresh the list, or activate the Controller Setup dialog
box.

Remove

Clicking the Remove button removes the highlighted controller driver from the list.

Refresh

Clicking the Refresh button refreshes the list of available controllers DLLs.

Controller Setup

Controller Setup

The entries and selections in the Controller Setup dialog box are customized for the particular
type of controller selected. Indicate the particular controller model number, if necessary, and
any other information necessary to customize the setup for your selected controller. This may
include Slave ID, Access Multiple PLCs , PLC ID, etc.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 202
Tech-note

The Access Multiple PLCs checkbox will allow the panel to exchange data with more than one
controller. You must also enter the slave IDs of the different controllers from which the panel
will be accessing data. This option is not available with all controllers.

Click the PLC/Driver Comm button to configure communication parameters for this particular
controller.

Communications Parameters Setup

Communications Parameters Setup

The communication parameters for any particular controller are set automatically when the
selection is made.

However, if there is a need to change the default settings, press the PLC/Driver Comm button
in the Controller Setup dialog box. This will bring up the Communications Parameters Setup
dialog box where you can configure the baud rate, parity, data bits, and stop bits for
communication.

Baud Rate

This option specifies the baud rate to be used in communication between the panel and the
controller.

Parity

Specifies the parity to be used in communication between the panel and the controller.

Data Bits

Specifies the number of data bits to be used in communication.

Stop Bits

Specifies the number of stop bits to be used in communication between the panel and the
controller.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 203
Tech-note

4.8.3 Panel Setup

Panel Setup

Panels come in many different types with different capabilities. The Panel Setup dialog box
lets you specify the appropriate panel type and the amount of target memory in the target
panel.

Panel selection can be made manually or it can be obtained directly from the UniOP panel
itself by using the Get Panel Resources command. This command retrieves the information
directly from the UniOP panel that is connected to the PC.

To access the Panel Setup dialog box, select Panel Setup from the Project menu or click the
Panel Setup icon on the toolbar. The tabs in the Panel Setup dialog box include:

Panel Model,

Settings,

External Devices,

Passthrough, and

Miscellaneous.

Recognition of Old Panel Models

Designer recognizes a model code that is inside the panel or inside the project file.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 204
Tech-note

When using an older panel or an older project file, the model code may not be found. In this
case, Designer tries to "guess" the panel model that was initially used by comparing the panel
capability information stored inside the panel device or inside the project file with the panel
capabilities that are defined inside the panel database within Designer.

It is possible that Designer will find more than one panel that fits the available capability
description. In this case, Designer will show a warning message to advise you to manually
enter the model in the Panel Setup dialog box.

When Designer cannot determine the UniOP model associated with a project file, the
GENERIC panel model will be selected. In this mode, all of the available panel capabilities
will be enabled.
It is also possible to manually select the GENERIC panel model. This is useful if you have a
new UniOP panel that has not been defined within the Designer panel database.

Panel Model

Panel Model

Use the Panel Model tab to directly select the UniOP model being used. On the right side of
the dialog box a preview picture of the currently selected UniOP panel is displayed. You can
select the panel model, the panel memory, and the firmware version.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 205
Tech-note

Panel Model

To choose a new panel model, choose a panel from the drop-down list under Panel Model. The
page editor workspace will change in order to reflect the available screen area on the selected
model.

Note: The panel model may be changed at any time during development. However, be aware
that some restrictions apply regarding the screen area. You can change the display from a small
screen size to a larger screen size without affecting the contents of the project. However,
changing from a large screen size to a smaller screen size may delete some data fields if they
are beyond the new screen boundary. If this occurs, you will be given the chance to cancel the
operation before any fields are deleted.

If you are unsure of the UniOP model being used, or if you have a new UniOP panel that has
not been defined within the Designer panel database, select the GENERIC panel model. In this
mode, all of the available panel capabilities will be enabled.

Note: When using the GENERIC selection, you must specify all the panel definitions.

Panel Memory

Appropriate memory choices for the specified Panel Model are listed. Select the amount of
memory available in the panel.

Firmware Version

Choose the appropriate version of the panel firmware. If you have a panel with a newer
firmware version that is not yet defined inside the Designer package, please select the highest
Designer firmware version. Selecting the All firmware version will enable only the basic panel
capabilities that are supported with all panel firmware versions.

Preview

The Preview area shows a typical panel screen for the selected Panel Model.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 206
Tech-note

Settings

Settings

The Settings tab shows the capabilities of the selected model. Some capabilities are fixed and
cannot be changed by the user. Others have a checkbox or a list box and can be modified.
These settings will vary depending upon the panel model specified.

The Settings tab lists various information about the project, such as the memory type, the
amount of project memory, the trend buffer memory setting, the recipe size, the available
alarms, the event size list, and the number of colors.
This tab also allows you to specify the time and date format for Time and Date data items.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 207
Tech-note

Settings List

Settings List

The left side of the Settings index tab lists the capabilities supported by the selected panel. You
can modify these selections when they are supported by the currently selected UniOP model.

Commonly selectable items include:

Buzzer,

Disable Battery LED,

Events Backup,

Firmware Download,

Recipe Backup,

Touch Screen, and

Update PLC References.

Buzzer

Enables/Disables the panel buzzer (when available)

Disable Battery LED

Enables/Disables the battery LED indicator.

Events Backup

Enables/Disables the events log backup inside the internal FLASH memory. This is used by
the Recipes and Events Backup macro.

Firmware Download

New panels that contain the T2000 board (units of the group 58) have the ability to manage
firmware downloads from within Designer (without using the UniDataExchanger utility). This
flag will be checked for panels that support this firmware download feature.
Firmware Download may be enabled manually from the Settings index tab within the Panel
Setup dialog box for certain situations. Manual settings are necessary when a real panel is not
physically connected to the PC and a Get Panel Resources command cannot be executed.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 208
Tech-note

Recipe Backup

Enables/Disables the recipe backup inside the internal FLASH memory. This is used by the
Recipes and Events Backup macro.

Touch Screen

When touch screen is not enabled, the display window can be scrolled down to line 32. When
touch screen is enabled, the display window has the same size as the panel display and cannot
be scrolled.

Update PLC References

When the UniOP panel supports referencing the data field min/max range settings to a memory
location in the controller (PLC Reference), this field determines the field update rules. If this
field is checked the PLC Reference will be updated continuously, otherwise they will be
updated only when the page is activated.

Memory Type

Can be FLASH for UniOP models with internal memory only or SSFDC for UniOP models
with a removable SSFDC memory card.

Project Memory

Internal memory reserved for project file.

Trend Buffers.

Memory assigned to trend buffer can be set here. The trend buffer size parameter can be
increased /decreased with step of 32k.

Recipe Size

Internal memory reserved for recipe data.

Available Alarms

Number of available alarms.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 209
Tech-note

Event List Size

Number of available events.

Colors

Number of supported colors. This list box is enabled only for panels that support 256 colors.
For those models that do not support 256 colors, a fixed value is shown.

Time Format

Specify whether the panel will display time data fields in a 24-hour format (for example 20:10)
or a 12-hour format (for example 10:10pm).

Date Format

Specify whether the panel will display date data fields in a month/day/year format or a
day/month/year format.

External Devices

External Devices tab

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 210
Tech-note

Under Panel Setup, the options available under the External Devices index tab can be used to
specify the presence of the TCM10 communication module (Ethernet Board) and assign an IP
address to it.

For firmware 5.00 and above the External Devices tab will have an additional property button
as shown in the below dialog

On clicking the property button Ethernet Settings dialog will be displayed as shown below

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 211
Tech-note

The above dialog box allows to specify network parameters such as Network Mask and
Gateway Mask.

IP Address

Enter the board's IP address in the entry box. The IP address used has to be chosen according
to the overall Ethernet configuration.

This address will be disabled when the Network Setup configuration is used. In that case the
panel node IP Address and the protocol must be selected from the Network Configuration
dialog box.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 212
Tech-note

Passthrough

Passthrough

The Passthrough tab lets you configure the panel passthrough feature parameters. This lets you
remotely put a UniOP panel into either Configuration Mode or Operation Mode. In this
manner, you can remotely upload or download a project file, start the panel, or use passthrough
mode to access the programming port on the PLC and issue commands.

The communication parameters for any particular controller are set automatically when the
selection is made. However, if there is a need to change the default settings, you can do so by
changing the port settings under the Passthrough tab in the Panel Setup dialog box.

Note: The UniOP panel must contain firmware version 4.10 or later to use this feature.

Note: The PC/Printer port cannot be used for printing when passthrough is configured.

Port Settings

Port Settings

Different models of controllers require different parameters in order to communicate properly

with the operator interface panel.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 213
Tech-note

Configure the passthrough serial line parameters. If the optimum settings for baud rate, parity,
data bits and stop bits to be used for communication between the target panel and the controller
differ from those shown under the Port Settings, you can change the settings.

Note: All UniOP panels are capable of communicating with a PC at a speed of at least 9600
baud. Some panels will communicate at speeds of 19,200 baud and 38,400 baud. With some
Pentium-based computers, a speed of 19200 baud may prove to work more efficiently than
38,400 baud.

Baud Rate

This option specifies the baud rate to be used in communication between the target panel and
Designer.

Parity

Specifies the parity to be used in communication between the target panel and Designer.

Stop Bits

Specifies the number of stop bits to be used in communication between the target panel and
Designer.

Mode

Mode

Define the passthrough activation mode. The available choices are Hardware or Remote
Hardware.

Hardware

Panel passthrough mode can be activated locally by the panel by using a macro or a mailbox
command.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 214
Tech-note

Remote Hardware

Panel passthrough mode can be activated remotely by sending a string command through the
serial line. To configure Designer for remote passthrough via a modem, select Remote
Hardware passthrough from the Passthrough tab under Panel Setup.

Note: Remote Hardware passthrough should be selected only if passthrough mode is to be

used locally and not via a modem.

When Remote Hardware passthrough is selected in Panel Setup, the Remote passthrough entry
becomes available in the Transfers menu. This entry lets you select one of three remote
passthrough commands: Configuration Mode, Start and Stop.

Commands

Commands

In this section, you can define command strings to manage the passthrough feature.
Enter the commands to put the panel into Configuration Mode, to send the start command and
to send the stop command in the Request boxes. Likewise, enter the responses to be received
back from the panel in the Response boxes.

Note: The Commands section is only activated if Remote Hardware is selected as the Mode.

Start

Command and response string to be used to send the start command.

Stop

Command and response string to be used to send the stop command.

Cfg Mode

Command and response string to put panel in configuration mode.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 215
Tech-note

Miscellaneous

Miscellaneous

The Miscellaneous tab lets you configure several different panel parameters. Selecting any of
the checkboxes enables the entry boxes associated with those selections. These selections
include:

Display Page on Comm Error

Time Out for Panel Menu

Time Out for Data Entry

Time Out for Field Selection

LCD Screen Saver

Panel Upload Protection

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 216
Tech-note

Command Menu Access

Display Page on Communication Error

This lets you specify a page for the panel to go to whenever a communication error is reported
or communications between the panel and PLC are lost.

Time Out for Panel Menu

The period of time the panel will wait for a keystroke before returning to normal operation.
This lets you return to Operation Mode from the Panel Command Menu if there are no keys
pressed for the specified amount of time.

Time Out for Data Entry

The period of time the panel will wait for a keystroke before returning to normal operation.
This lets you return to Operation Mode from the Data Entry screen if there are no keys pressed
for the specified amount of time.

Time Out for Field Selection

The time period the panel will wait for a field selection to be made before returning to normal
operation. This lets you return to Operation Mode from Data Entry if there are no fields
selected within the specified amount of time.

LCD Screen Saver

This option lets you turn off the back-lighting on an LCD panel when no keys or touch cells
have been pressed for a certain amount of time.

Panel Upload Protection

This feature lets you password protect the project file so that unauthorized uploads cannot
occur. You can enter a case-sensitive password of up to eight characters. When this field
contains a value, the defined password will be requested in order to upload the project file from
the panel.

Once this password is specified, every time you attempt to upload the project from the panel
onto your computer, Designer will ask you to enter the password. If the password that you
enter matches the one that was defined in the project file, the upload operation will be
performed properly.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 217
Tech-note

However, if you enter a password that doesn't match the one that was specified in the project
file, the panel will not start the upload process.

Note: Your panel must contain firmware version 4.10 or later to use this feature.

Command Menu Access

The time out for access to Command Menu is programmable.

This feature requires firmware 5.02 and above. Access to Command Menu can be disabled and
manually handled by means of a macro command.

4.8.4 Network Setup

Network Setup

The UniNET Network is a feature of the operator panels that enables them to be connected
together and to communicate with each other. It is possible to connect two or more panels (the
maximum number is 32) with either a Serial (RS485) connection or an Ethernet connection.
This offers the ability to display on one panel either the data from the controller attached to the
panel itself, or data from other controllers attached to other panels on the network.

Information about UniNET networks, clients and servers, connecting operator panels to the
network, advanced network programming, and network setup is available.

An example is provided that describes the steps required to set up a UniNET network
composed of a single server operator panel connected to a controller and two client operator
panels which will access the controller data via the server through the network services.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 218
Tech-note

If a network is not defined for a project, selecting Network Setup from the Project menu (or by
clicking the Network Setup icon on the toolbar) brings up the Network media & protocol
selection dialog box. If a network type is already defined for a project, selecting Network
Setup takes you directly to the Network Configuration dialog box.

Network Media and Protocol

Network Protocol

The first step in configuring the network is selecting the network type. The Designer software
supports two types of UniNET network: an RS485 network, or an Ethernet-based network.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 219
Tech-note

Select the type of network, click the Next> button, and the Network Selection dialog box
appears.

Ethernet

The networking capabilities of the UniOP operator panels include connections to Ethernet-
based networks. Ethernet is becoming a popular communication support for cell-level
industrial controllers. There is no standard set in the industry for the application level protocol,
but there are several non-compatible protocols. As the only common point, they are all based
on the TCP/IP or UDP/IP protocols.

There are two main classes of applications where Ethernet networking capabilities can be
successfully used:

Direct connection to Ethernet-based PLC networks

Extending the UniNET network

Note: UniOP panels can be successfully connected to an Ethernet-based PLC network only if
the specific application layer protocol has been implemented.

The UniOP UniNET network is able to use Ethernet, when available, as the communication
media.

The advantages of this type of network, as compared to conventional UniNET technology, are
the ability to use existing network cables and a more effective solution for connecting a
computer to the UniNET network.

Information is available on the TCM10 board (required to connect a UniOP panel to an

Ethernet network), the UniNet OPC Server, and configuring Ethernet networks.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 220
Tech-note

RS485

This network type must be used if the optional TCM10 board is not built into the panel. In this
type of network, panels are interconnected using simple RS-485 cables.

Please refer to the Connecting Panels to a RS485 Network section to see how to build your
RS485 UniNET Network.

Network Selection

You may choose between the three network types:

Single Server, Multiple Clients

Multiple Servers, Multiple Clients (same controller types)

Mixed Multiple Servers, Multiple Clients (different controller types)

The parameters for the network are automatically configured if it is selected to be of either the
Single Server, Multiple Client type or of the Multiple Server, Multiple Client type. However,
Designer lets you make modifications to the network parameters by clicking on the Configure
button.

If you chose Mixed Multiple Servers, Multiple Clients, you must specify all of the
configuration parameters for the network by clicking on the Configure button.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 221
Tech-note

Network Configuration

Network Configuration

The parameters for the network are automatically configured if it is selected to be of either the
Single Server, Multiple Client type or of the Multiple Server, Multiple Client type. However,
Designer lets you make modifications to the network parameters by using the Network
Configuration dialog box.

If you chose Mixed Multiple Servers, Multiple Clients, you must specify all of the
configuration parameters for the network.

The Network Configuration dialog box may be accessed by clicking on the Configure button in
the Network Selection process, or by selecting Network Setup from the Project menu (or
clicking on the Network Setup icon on the toolbar) after a network has been configured for a
project.

When the Mixed Multiple Servers, Multiple Clients option is selected, you must click on the
Configure button to access the Network Configuration dialog box and explicitly enter all of the
parameters for the required network.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 222
Tech-note

The Network Configuration dialog box contains a number of commands, including: Maximum
Node Number, Enable UniNET Network, Broadcast Periodic Clock Synchronization
Messages, a list of the Configured Nodes, an Add button, a Delete button, a Properties button,
a Net Comm button, an Export button, and an Import button.

Maximum Node Number

The Maximum Node Number is the node number of the highest node that will be allowed to
receive the network token. Nodes that have a node number higher than this value will not be
able to communicate over the network. The Maximum Node Number should be set as low as
possible to minimize the amount of time that will be required for token rotation.

Disable Undeclared Client Access

When checked, this box specifies that partners of the UniNET network cannot be accessed by a
client not expressly declared to be a member of the network.

Note: this field is only available when the UNiNET Network employs Ethernet Connectivity.

Note: A general configuration where the UniOP UniNET node is set to 1 and several servers
are configured with a different IP address is allowed if it corresponds to several UniNET
networks, each one composed of only one panel working as a server. These UniNET networks
are part of the same Ethernet network; the UniOP servers are independent from each other and
the use of a similar layout is useful when a UniNET client running on a PC may be required to
collect data coming from several different controllers.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 223
Tech-note

UniNET TCPIP

Represents the port number from which the UniNET protocol services respond. The default
value is normally correct. However, it may be changed in case the default port is already
assigned to another service.

Note: this field is only available when the UNiNET Network employs Ethernet Connectivity.

Enable UniNET Network

Click the Enable UniNET Network checkbox to activate (enable) the configured network
configuration. If the UniNET network is enabled then the panel to which the project file will be
downloaded will act as part of the network. If it is disabled the panel will function as a normal,
non-networked panel. If the UniNET network is enabled then one of the already configured
nodes can be selected, thus assigning the node number for the current project file and for the
panel to which the project file will be downloaded.

A checkmark appears next to a node number when the UniNET Network is enabled. This is
used to determine which UniNET node is assigned to the current project. Right mouse click on
the name and then Set as Current Panel node.

Broadcast Periodic Clock

If the UniNET network is enabled then you can specify whether the panel is to broadcast
periodic real time clock synchronization messages across the network. The purpose of these
messages is to synchronize the clocks in the different panels attached to the UniNET network.
If the check box Broadcast Periodic Clock Synchronization Messages is checked then the panel
will broadcast a clock synchronization message across the network every 60 minutes. If the
check box is not checked then the periodic clock synchronization messages will not be
broadcast by the panel.
The best way to ensure clock synchronization across the UniNET network is to configure only
one panel as the broadcaster of the periodic clock synchronization messages.

Note: The check box Broadcast Periodic Clock Synchronization Messages only controls the
periodic clock synchronization broadcasts. However, every panel in the UniNET network,
regardless of the setting of this check box, will always broadcast a one-off clock
synchronization message to the network whenever the time and date menu is exited on the
panel and whenever the panel receives a mailbox command instructing it to perform a clock
synchronization.

Net Comm

Pressing the Net Comm button displays the Communication Parameters Setup dialog box
where you can configure the communication parameters for the network. To obtain the best
results the highest baud rate possible should be used.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 224
Tech-note

Note: Network communications parameters need to be set for an RS-485 network only. The
Net Comm button is not activated for Ethernet networks.

Export

Click on the Export button to save the existing network configuration to a file. Network
configuration files have the extension .NET.

Import

Any network configuration may be saved for later use or for sharing between multiple project
files designed for the same network. Click on the Import button to load an existing
configuration. Network configuration files have the extension .NET.

Configured Nodes

Configured Nodes

This is list of the already configured network nodes. Each node in the list is described by its
node number, controller driver and model.

Node Number

The node number of the node being selected for configuration. It must be a number greater
than 0 and smaller or equal to the Maximum Node Number.

Controller Driver

During the configuration process all the client panels must be assigned the Network Client
protocol, and all the server panels must be assigned the protocol of the controller they are
directly attached to.

Controller Model

The controller panel model.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 225
Tech-note

Add

Click this button to add a new node to the list of configured nodes, using the Add/Edit Panel
Node dialog box. To activate the Add button, change the Maximum Node Number.

Properties

Properties

To modify an existing node you must first select the required node from the list of already
configured nodes.

Click Properties from the Network Configuration dialog box to view the network properties
associated with that node as listed in the Add/Edit Panel Node dialog box, or click Add to add
another node to the list.

A number of items can be specified in the Add/Edit Panel Node dialog box. These include the
Panel Node, the IP Address, the Printout Node, the Number of Communication Retries, the
Communication Time Out setting, whether to Enable Double protocol, and the controller
setting.

Panel Node

Represents the UniNET node of the panel. Ethernet networks are still based on the UniNET
application layer protocol.

More than one panel can have the same panel node. The configuration corresponds in this case
to several different UniNET networks that cohabit on the same Ethernet line. Each time two
partners are configured with the same UniNET node and they reside together on the same

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 226
Tech-note

Ethernet network, they are conceptually part of distinct UniNET networks. This concept allows
users to put more than 32 UniNET nodes on the same UniNET Ethernet based network.

Note: A general configuration where the UniOP UniNET node is set to 1 and several servers
are configured with different IP address is allowed if it corresponds to several UniNET
networks, each one composed of only one panel working as server. These UniNET networks
are part of the same Ethernet network; the UniOP servers are independent from each other and
the use of a similar layout is useful when a UniNET client running on a PC may be required to
collect data coming from several different controllers.

IP Address (Ethernet network only)

Represents the IP address assigned to the UniNET node. This must be unique in the Ethernet
network.

Comm Port (for Network RS-485 network only)

Specify the port that the network will use for communication.

Printout Node

Node number of the node to be used for the network printout function.

Num Comm Retries

Number of times a network message is retried in case of communication errors.

Comm Time Out

Value of the time out interval used in the network communication.

Delete

Click the Delete button to remove the currently selected node from the list of configured
nodes.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 227
Tech-note

4.8.5 Panel Controller Interface

Panel Controller Interface

The Panel Controller Interface allows you to set parameters for RDA Setup, the Interlock
Mailbox, Panel I/O.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 228
Tech-note

RDA Setup

RDA Setup

The RDA Setup tab lets you specify the Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) address for the
RDA (Reserved Data Areas).

The RDA can be left as a continuous block of memory, in which case the PLC address for the
start of the RDA can be specified. Alternatively, the elements of the RDA can be placed in
different memory locations. In this case, the PLC starting address for each of the different
elements can be specified. It also lets you enable or disable the individual elements of the
RDA.

A more detailed description of the RDA is available.

Keep RDA Continuous

Check the Keep RDA continuous box to leave the RDA as a continuous block of memory.
Specify the PLC address for the start of the RDA by indicating the Reference type and
location.

Note: The Keep RDA continuous option is not supported for internal controllers. The
checkbox should always be always left unchecked when an internal controller is specified.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 229
Tech-note

Enable RDA

It is not necessary to have a full working knowledge of the reserved data areas to complete a
project. It is entirely possible to toggle bits in the controller, display messages and controller
data, edit read/write fields, etc. without having any areas of the RDA enabled. For this reason,
the RDA is disabled by default. This also helps to optimize communication between the panel
and the controller. There are, however, several functions that are only available through the
RDA.

Note: If you are having trouble establishing initial communication with your panel, disabling
the RDA is recommended. Make sure the check box entitled Enable RDA is not checked. If it
is, uncheck it and re-download your project.

RDA References

RDA References

Each UniOP panel may use up to three small reserved areas of controller memory to establish
an interface with the controller. These three reference areas are: Keys, Panel, and PLC. You
can select the starting address of each of these areas.

Each of the three reference areas lists References, Update Cycles, and RDA Elements.
Clicking on the "…" button under References brings up the Data Field Properties dialog box
where reference information can be specified. The cycle time may be set as necessary under
Update Cycles. The various RDA Elements that pertain to the Keys, Panel, and PLC reference
areas are discussed under those headings.

Keys

This reserved area is formatted to contain flags for each key on the panel and extended
keyboard, up to a maximum of 64. (The maximum number must be a multiple of 16, as in
essence the maximum number of keys tells the UniOP panel how many words of the Keyboard
Update Area in the RDA are to be used.)

These flags are set HIGH when a key is pressed and set LOW when released. Each key status
flag occupies one bit in the controller memory. These bits can be used by the controller to
detect when a particular key has been pressed and then in turn perform a specific operation.

Note: Use the Keyboard Macro Editor to program keys.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 230
Tech-note

Panel

Panel

This reserved area is formatted to contain time and date information from the panel's real time
clock, a current page register, and a two-byte panel status word.

Time

The real time clock contains the time and date information. Depending upon the type of
controller that is being used, this information will be stored in either binary or BCD. A listing
of various PLC's and how the RTC (Real Time Clock) is stored can be found in the back of the
Installation & Operation Guide that came with the panel.

Current Page (CP) Register

The panel writes the number of the currently displayed page into the Current Page (CP)
register whenever the panel is in Page Mode or Data Entry Mode. In all other modes, a zero is
written into this register, indicating that page data is not currently being displayed.

Note: Page numbers are stored in either binary or BCD format, depending on the controller
being used.

Panel Status Word

The panel sets and resets bits S0-S8 and S13-S15 in the Panel Status Word to indicate its
current status. Your application logic can monitor these bits to determine how and when it
should interact with the panel. A brief description of each status bit is provided.

PLC

PLC

The PLC (programmable logic controller) update area allows the controller to access and
control certain aspects of the panel.

All front panel LED's can be controlled from this area to provide feedback to the operator. The
controller may also request a specific page to be displayed by writing the appropriate value
into the Page Request register. The controller control word allows the controller to request the
printing of a page, disable data entry, select an alarm mode, or enable the mailbox function.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 231
Tech-note

All panels include a standard set of dedicated indicators that allow the user to monitor the
status of the panel. Along with these dedicated indicators, certain models include a subset of
user defined LED's that can be monitored and controlled by application logic. The control of
these LED's is carried out through the Controller Update Area. Each of the registers found
there can be copied to bit address contacts so that the status bits can be referenced as control
relays.

Page Request Register

The page to be displayed can be selected either by the operator from the front panel keypad or
by the controller itself. The controller selects the page to be displayed by writing the
corresponding page number into the PR register in the Controller Update Area. When the panel
detects a page request from the controller, it checks the front panel keyboard and the Expanded
Keyboard (if present). If no key has been pressed for the last three seconds, the page selected
by the controller is displayed.

Note: Once the panel has changed to the corresponding page, you need to write a 0 back into
the PR register in order to return control back to the keys on the panel. If this is not done, you
will be "stuck" on that page.

Note: While a controller page request is active (PR not 0), the operator will not be able to
change pages using the arrow keys.

Note: Page numbers are stored in either binary or BCD format, depending on the controller
being used.

LED Control Bits

Bits L1 through L32 control the LED indicators that can be found on various panel models.
The mappings of these bits are provided.

Note: The LED's can be controlled via the Keyboard Macro Editor.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 232
Tech-note

Interlock Mailbox

Interlock Mailbox

The Interlock Mailbox tab lets you enable the Interlock Mailbox, determine the read modes
and the read cycle, and specify the controller address for the Interlock Mailbox.

The UniOP Interlock Mailbox is designed to allow the operator interface panel to interact with
the controller's ladder logic program. The Interlock Mailbox is simply a group of registers in
the controller memory (from a minimum of 2 registers to a maximum of 20).

The Mailbox can be placed anywhere in the controller memory at an address you select. When
the mailbox is enabled, the operator panel cyclically reads the contents of the mailbox from the
controller. The controller can command the UniOP panel to perform certain tasks by placing
data in the memory area used by the mailbox. When the panel detects that the controller has
written data in the mailbox, it interprets the data as a numeric code for a required command. If
the panel recognizes the command, it immediately executes it. If the command requires a
response from the panel, then the panel places the response back into the mailbox itself.

Further information on the Interlock Mailbox is provided.

Note: The Interlock Mailbox offers a powerful way to control the operation of recipes from
the controller.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 233
Tech-note

Enable

To enable the Interlock Mailbox, select the Interlock Mailbox tab from the Panel Controller
Interface dialog box under the Project menu. The Mailbox is disabled by default. To enable it,
simply mark the checkbox entitled Enable.

Read Modes

The Mailbox can be enabled in one of two ways.

Read in cycles

Read in cycles if PCW (PLC Control Word) flag is set

If the Mailbox is read in cycles, you may specify a read cycle time. The faster the read cycle
time, the more often the Mailbox gets checked; however, the slower the rest of the system will
become.

Or, you may set the Mailbox up such that it is only read when bit C15 in the PLC
(programmable logic controller) Control Word is set.

The purpose of this mode is to reduce the overhead of the communication time when there is
no need for the controller to send commands to the panel.

Read Cycle

The Read Cycle time under Project - Panel Controller Interface - Interlock Mailbox specifies
how frequently the operator panel will read the data in the mailbox to check to see if it contains
a new command.

The faster the mailbox Read Cycle, the faster the panel will respond to commands from the
controller.

However, the update of the variables shown on the display will be slower.

Interlock Reference

The Interlock Reference is the address of the first Mailbox register in the controller memory.
The address can be entered directly as a string or via the Data Field Properties dialog box
displayed by clicking on the "…" button.

A memory map of the Mailbox in the controller memory is shown below. The Status Word and
the Command/Response Word are always required for the Mailbox. Parameter 0 - Parameter
17 Words are only used if required by the particular mailbox command.

Offset Item

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 234
Tech-note

0 Status Word
1 Command/Response Word
2 Parameter 0
3 Parameter 1
... ...
19 Parameter 17

Note: When entering the starting address, care must be taken to ensure that the controller
memory used by the Mailbox does not overlap with the memory areas reserved for other panel
functions such as alarms, I/O update, keyboard update, etc.

Panel IO

Panel I/O

UniOP panels with hardware type -0050 are ready to house the local I/O (Input/Output)
module UIM-03. It can be used in conjunction with the internal controller to be part of its I/O,
it can be used as an extension of the external controller that is connected to the UniOP panel,
or it can be used as a stand-alone module.

Note: The UIM05 I/O board cannot be used with Panel I/O.

To configure the Panel I/O, select Panel Controller Interface from the Project menu and click
on the Panel I/O tab.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 235
Tech-note

The digital I/O points of the UIM03 board can be mapped to a free memory area within the
connected controller (either the internal controller or an externally connected controller). The
resident PLC program will read the physical status of the UIM03 inputs from the memory area
dedicated to the input points; the UIM03 outputs are controlled by the PLC user program by
writing to the memory area assigned to the UIM03 output points.

You can enable and set the input and output, and specify which modules are to be connected.

Input

Input

The Input area allows you to specify the configuration parameters for the digital input points of
the UIM03 board. Check to box enable panel input. The frequency of updates and the
Reference location may be specified.

Update Cycle

Specifies the average update cycle time used by the UniOP firmware to update the external
controller memory area assigned to the input points. This memory area can be specified in the
Reference address.

Note: The Update cycle time needs to be selected with care, as the UniOP panel uses the same
communication channel to update the local I/O as it does for communication with the external
controller. If the Update cycle time is set to a value that is too small, communication
performance between the UniOP panel and the external controller could be sacrificed.

Reference

Specifies the starting address for copying the image of the input data. Clicking on the "…"
button brings up the Data Field Properties dialog box, where more detailed PLC
(programmable logic controller) information may be entered.

Note: The panel I/O feature requires a minimum offset between the starting addresses of the
input and output area. The difference between the starting addresses must be at least of 16
bytes. The data format used to specify the initial address can be byte, word or double word
depending on the protocol.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 236
Tech-note

Output

Output

The Output area allows you to specify the configuration parameters for the digital output
points of the UIM03 board. Check the box to enable panel output. The frequency of updates
and the Reference location may be specified.

Update Cycle

Specifies the average update cycle time used by the UniOP firmware to update the status of the
physical output points. The output points are updated by reading them from the external
controller memory area assigned to the output points as specified in the Reference address.

Output Reference

Specifies the starting address for copying the image of the output data. Clicking on the "…"
button brings up the Data Field Properties dialog box, where more detailed PLC
(programmable logic controller) information may be entered.

Note: The panel I/O feature requires a minimum offset between the starting addresses of the
input and output area. The difference between the starting addresses must be at least of 16
bytes. The data format used to specify the initial address can be byte, word or double word
depending on the protocol.

Modules

A list of all the local I/O boards available for use with the Panel I/O feature is provided. Use
the arrow buttons to move modules from the Available list to the Connected list, and vice
versa, and to specify the order of modules in the Connected list.

Note: Current UniOP hardware supports only one local I/O module.

4.8.6 Report on Panel Printer

Report on Panel Printer

It is possible to define the printer device driver and the communication parameters, the report
format and the timetable on which a report is printed, to configure a key or touch cell to print a
report, or to request a printout by using the Interlock MailBox.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 237
Tech-note

Note: In order to use these features, the panel must contain firmware version 4.10 or higher.

Printer Setup

Printer Setup

To log alarms and messages, a serial printer may be connected to the panel.

Note: The same port is used for both programming the panel while in Configuration Mode and
for logging information to a printer during Operation Mode.

To configure a serial printer, select Project - Report on Panel Printer - Printer Setup.

From the Printer Setup dialog box choose a printer and set the communication parameters such
as baud rate, parity, stop bits, data bits, and protocol. It is also possible to define the page size.
See the Printing section for additional information on printing.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 238
Tech-note

Printer

Printer

Select a printer type from the pull-down list. If the printer to be used is not listed, use the Add
button to add a new printer to the list of available printers. Doing so will bring up the Printer
Properties dialog box in which the parameters for the newly added printer can be defined.
Similarly, the Edit button can be used to redefine the parameters for an existing printer. The
Delete button removes the currently selected printer from the list of available printers.

Note: Any new printer must also be supported by the panel firmware. Simply defining a new
printer in the Designer software may not be enough to get the new printer running.

Printer Properties

The Printer Properties dialog box, invoked by clicking on the Add or Edit buttons from the
Printer Setup dialog box, lets you configure a printer. You can enter the printer name, escape
sequences, enable reversing font bitmap after rotation, make automatic linefeed selections,
specify eject parameters, and make selections for graphical printouts.

Printer Name

Enter a name for this printer.

Escape Sequences

The list of escape sequences for text and graphic control. The escape sequences can be freely
assigned.

Reversing Font Bitmap After Rotation

This property allows to specify if the Font Bitmap requires to be reverted after rotation.

Auto Linefeed

Radio buttons allow for a simple carriage return (CR), or a line feed (LF) after carriage return
(CR/LF).

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 239
Tech-note

Eject

Checking the Form feed box instructs the printer to eject a blank sheet of paper following
every report printed. The delay after form feed is indicated in seconds.

Graphics

Checking the Enable box indicates that the current page must be printed in graphic mode.
The printer control code comes from the printer documentation.
The ratio of the character width in text and graphic mode depends on the resolution of the
graphical printout.

Baud Rate

This option specifies the baud rate to be used in communication between the panel and the
printer.

Parity

Specifies the parity to be used in communication between the panel and the printer.

Data Bits

Specifies the number of data bits to be used in communication between the panel and the
printer.

Stop Bits

Specifies the number of stop bits to be used in communication between the target panel and the
controller.

Protocol

The protocol used for the panel and printer to communicate. Xon/Xoff is also known as
software flow control. RTS/CTS is also known as hardware flow control.

Page Size

Specifies the width and height of the print area, in characters.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 240
Tech-note

Note: If reports are to be printed, the paper height must be defined here before the report is
defined. If the paper height is changed after some reports have already been defined, the
previously defined report layouts will not automatically be rearranged.

Reports

Reports

A report is a collection of project file pages (or parts of project file pages).

The Reports dialog box under Report on Panel Printer on the Project menu lets you define the
parameters of each specific report.

There are four tabs in the Reports dialog box: General, Header, Footer, and Advanced. Each
deals with a different section of the report. A list of reports is shown on the left side of the
dialog box. In addition, there are buttons to add a new report, delete an existing report, and
change languages.

Note: More than one report can be created for each project file.

Note: If reports are to be printed, the paper height must be defined in Printer Setup before the
report is defined.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 241
Tech-note

Report List

A list of existing reports, if any, is shown and is available for selection.

New

A report may be added by clicking the New button and giving the report a name.

Delete

Clicking on the Delete button removes the currently selected report from the list.

Languages

Click on the Languages icon to select a language.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 242
Tech-note

General

General tab

All of the pages of a project file are shown within the left-hand box. Pages in the current report
are shown in the right-hand box. Use the buttons between the boxes (Add, Remove, Add all,
Remove all, and Properties) to set up the reports. You can also specify margin measurements.

Add

To add a page to the current report, select a page from within the left-hand box and click on the
Add-> button. Doing so will place the page name into the right-hand box.

Remove

To remove a page from the current report, select the page name from within the right-hand box
and click on the <-Remove button.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 243
Tech-note

Add All

To add all of the pages of your project file to a report, select the Add All>> button.

Remove All

To remove all of the pages from the report, click on the <<Remove All button.

Properties

By selecting a page of interest and pressing the Properties button, you can specify what part of
the project file page to print and the font for printing in the UniOP page Property dialog box.

Panel Page Property

The Panel Page Property dialog box is accessed by clicking on the Properties button under the
General tab from Project - Report on Panel Printer - Reports.

This dialog box lets you set the number of line spaces before and after the report, the starting
row, the total number of lines to print, whether to put a page break after printing the report,
whether to enable graphics printing, and which font to use for printing.

Margins

Set the amount of space, in characters, to be allotted as left, right, top and bottom margins on
the printed reports.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 244
Tech-note

Header

Header

The structure of the header and the footer are the same. The header and footer both remain
consistent throughout the report (i.e., the header on page 1 of a report will be the same header
that appears on page 9 of a report).

You can define the height of the header. A number of predefined fields can be inserted into a
header, such as the time and date, the page number, the report name and a label (which allows
the user to enter static text). It is also possible to specify where the fields are inserted and how
they are positioned.

Height

The height, in inches, of the header or footer.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 245
Tech-note

Fields

Fields

The list of fields to be included in the header or footer, such as the time and date, the page
number, the report name or a label (which lets you enter static text). To add a field to the list,
select an entry from the Field Type list. Add and Delete buttons are available. You can also
specify row, column, alignment, and argument parameters for headers and/or footers.

Field Type

A list of predefined fields available for insertion into a header or footer. Selecting the field type
Label activates the Argument entry box where the label text may be inserted.

Add

Clicking on the Add button inserts the item currently displayed in the Field Type list into the
list of Fields to be included in a header or footer.

Delete

Clicking on the Delete button removes the currently selected item from the list of Fields to be
included in a header or footer.

Row

The number of the row where the currently selected items in the Fields list will be inserted into
the header or footer.

Column

The number of the column where the currently selected items in the Fields list will be inserted
into the header or footer. This option is only available when the alignment is set as Custom.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 246
Tech-note

Align

The alignment for the header or footer. Choices include Left, Center, Right, and Custom. If
Custom is selected then a Column value may be entered.

Argument

Selecting the field type Label activates the Argument entry box where the label text may be
inserted.

Footer

Footer

The structure of the header and the footer are the same.

The header and footer both remain consistent throughout the report (i.e., the header on page 1
of a report will be the same header that appears on page 9 of a report).

It is possible to define the height of the header and the footer. Several predefined fields can be
inserted into a header or footer, such as the time and date, the page number, the report name

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 247
Tech-note

and a label (which allows the user to enter static text). It is also possible to specify where the
fields are inserted and how they are positioned.

Fields

Advanced

Advanced tab

The Advanced tab allows you to select the following parameters, which are common for every
page in the report.

Wrap Lines

Page Separator

Packing

Default Font

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 248
Tech-note

Attribute Transformations

Non-printable characters

Special Formats

Wrap Lines

If wrapping is selected, lines longer than the width of the page will be printed on the next line.
If wrapping is not selected, lines longer than the width of the page will be truncated.

Page Separator

The page separator is a character that can be optionally defined as a placeholder for empty
lines in the printed page.

Packing

If the page width is longer than the display width, it is possible to print two or more rows on a
single line.

Default Font

Specifies the default font to use when a particular font has not been selected in the page
definition dialog box. The list of available fonts depends on the printer driver.

Attribute Transformations

Display attributes such as reverse, underline, or blink, or can be transformed into another
printer attribute, such as normal, underlined, bold or italicized.

Non-printable Characters

Non-printable characters can be printed as blanks or asterisks. If Print Anyway is checked,

corresponding codes are sent to the printer even if the printer cannot correctly interpret them.

Special Formats

The options of printing in condensed or enlarged text are available.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 249
Tech-note

Triggers

Triggers

Triggers let you specify when a report is to be printed. A list of triggers is shown at the left of
the box, with buttons to add and delete triggers. Trigger properties may be set on the right side
of the box.

Note: It is also possible to print a report by using a function key or touch cell programmed via
the Keyboard Macro Editor, or by having the PLC issue a print request by using the Interlock
Mailbox command Start Report Printout.

Note: It is possible to start printing more than one report. Up to ten (10) printer requests can
be stored in a FIFO (first in first out) buffer.

List of Triggers

The report to be printed can be selected from the list of available reports as defined under
Project - Report on Panel Printer - Reports.

Add

Click on the Add button to add a new trigger.

Delete

Click on the Delete button to the selected trigger from the list.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 250
Tech-note

Trigger Properties

Trigger Properties

The trigger Type can be set as cyclic, which will print the Report at certain specified intervals
(up to 99 hours apart), or every day at a specified time. The specified interval or specified time
is set under Time.

Report

The name of the report to which the trigger will apply.

Trigger Time

Any report can be printed cyclically in two different modes:

cyclically after an interval of time

every day at a specific time

Time

For cyclic triggers, this is the number of hours (up to 99) between triggers. For daily triggers,
this is the time of day when the report will be triggered.

4.8.7 Keyboard Macro Editor

Keyboard Macro Editor

The Keyboard Macro Editor lets you configure panel keys to perform application specific
functions. It may be invoked by selecting Keyboard Macro Editor from the Project menu, by
clicking on the Keyboard Macro Editor icon in the toolbar, or by pressing the Shift+Ctrl+M
keys.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 251
Tech-note

Each of the available functions is called an elementary macro command. They can be accessed
by clicking on the proper icon in the Commands toolbar from within the Keyboard Macro
Editor. Advanced commands, called complex macro commands, are composed of two or more
elementary macro commands. For example, "Go to page 2" is an elementary macro command.
"Select field 5, Begin data entry" is a complex macro command composed of two elementary
commands. Complex macro commands function by executing each of the elementary macro
commands in the sequence in which they were entered.

The Keyboard Macro Editor consists of a list of panel keys, buttons for key states, a row of
command icons, a command list window, Append and Insert buttons, and a Delete button.

The above (with varying Commands) are available on tabs for All Pages, Page n (where n is a
number), Data Entry, Alarms, System, Command Menu, Event List, and Time/Date.

Three examples of using the Keyboard Macro Editor are given.

Operating Modes

Operating Modes

The Keyboard Macro Editor has eight different modes of operation, represented by index tabs
across the top of the dialog box. These eight modes are: All Pages, Page n (where n is a
number), Data Entry, Alarms, System, Command Menu, Event List, and Time/Date. The index
tab displayed in the foreground with respect to the other tabs indicates the selected operating
mode.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 252
Tech-note

Note: Not all elementary macro commands are available in each operating mode. The
Keyboard Macro Editor will only display those macros that are available for a particular mode.

Note: Even if a command is present in more than one operating mode, this on-line help shows
its icon only once.

All Pages

Keys that are programmed in this operation mode will be active in all pages of the project. This
means that you need to define (i.e., program) the key only once on one page of the project. The
key will perform its specified function on each and every page of the project, regardless of
what page you are on when the key is programmed.

Note: The relationship between the All Pages mode and Page n mode is particularly important
to understand. A single key can be programmed in different operating modes to perform
different functions. A macro programmed in All Pages mode will be active in all pages of the
project. A macro programmed in Page n mode will be active only when the panel is on page n
(where n is the page number). A macro that is programmed in Page n mode will override a
macro that is programmed in All Pages mode only when the panel is on page n. For example,
suppose you have key F1 programmed to "go to page 2" in All Pages mode, while also having
it programmed for "Begin data entry" in Page n mode (say, page 5). In this case, the only time
that the panel will go into Data Entry Mode when the F1 key is pressed is when the panel is on
page 5. On all other pages of the project, pressing F1 will take the user to page 2.

The following elementary macro commands are normally available on the All Pages tab.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 253
Tech-note

Attribute

Begin Data Entry

Clear Event List

Confirm Recipe Menu Selection

Data Editing

Decrement Contrast

Decrement Contrast

Dimmer_Brightness

Display Object

Enter Command Menu

Go to Page

Go to Recipe Menu

Increment Brighter

Increment Contrast

Hide Object

LED State

Next Page

Passthrough Mode

Password Logout

Password Protect

Passwords

Port Assignment

Previous Page

Print Report

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 254
Tech-note

Recipe and Events Backup

Recipe Control

Return to Initial Page

Scroll Down

Scroll Recipe Menu

Scroll to Line

Scroll Up

Select Data Entry Field

Send Command

Show Alarm List

Show Event List

Step

Step Control Variables

Toggle Relay

Trend Window

Wait

Write to Controller

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 255
Tech-note

Page n

Macros defined in this mode will be active only when the panel is on page n (where n is an
integer).

Note: The relationship between the All Pages mode and Page n mode is particularly important
to understand. A single key can be programmed in different operating modes to perform
different functions. A macro programmed in All Pages mode will be active in all pages of the
project. A macro programmed in Page n mode will be active only when the panel is on page n
(where n is the page number). A macro that is programmed in Page n mode will override a
macro that is programmed in All Pages mode only when the panel is on page n. For example,
suppose you have key F1 programmed to "go to page 2" in All Pages mode, while also having
it programmed for "Begin data entry" in Page n mode (say, page 5). In this case, the only time
that the panel will go into Data Entry Mode when the F1 key is pressed is when the panel is on
page 5. On all other pages of the project, pressing F1 will take the user to page 2.

The following elementary macro commands are normally available on the Page n tab.

Attribute

Begin Data Entry

Clear Event List

Confirm Recipe Menu Selection

Data Editing

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 256
Tech-note

Dimmer_Brightness

Display Object

Decrement Brightness

Decrement Contrast

Enter Command Menu

Go to Page

Go to Recipe Menu

Increment Display

Increment Contrast

Hide Object

LED State

Next Page

Passthrough Mode

Password Logout

Password Protect

Passwords

Port Assignment

Previous Page

Print Report

Recipe and Events Backup

Recipe Control

Return to Initial Page

Scroll Down

Scroll Recipe Menu

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 257
Tech-note

Scroll to Line

Scroll Up

Select Data Entry Field

Send Command

Show Alarm List

Show Event List

Step

Step Control Variables

Toggle Relay

Trend Window

Wait

Write to Controller

Data Entry

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 258
Tech-note

Keys that are programmed in this mode of operation will be active only when the panel is in
the process of data entry.

Panels that contain firmware version 4.07G and greater offer the capability of multiple field
data entry. This feature lets you edit more than one field without exiting Data Entry Mode.

In order to use this feature, you need to create a macro key that is programmed in the following
manner:

In the Pressed state, the key needs to be programmed with the macro Begin
Data Entry.

In the Released state, the key needs to perform the following elementary
macro commands in sequence:

Confirm Data Entry

Begin Data Entry

Go to Next Field

Begin Editing Value

Commands normally available in this mode include:

Begin Data Entry

Cancel

Confirm Data Entry

Data Editing

Erase

Field Down

Field Up

Next Field

Previous Field

Step

Step Control Variables

Toggle Relay

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 259
Tech-note

Wait

Write to Controller

Alarms

Macros defined on the Alarms tab are active only when the panel is in Alarm Mode.

Commands normally available in this mode include:

Acknowledge Alarm

Acknowledge All Alarms

Go to Alarm Page

Go to Page

Page Mode

Print Alarms

Scroll Down

Scroll Up

Step Control Variables

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 260
Tech-note

Toggle Relay

Wait

Write to Controller

System

This operation mode is used for the global setup of toggle keys.

Commands normally available in this mode include:

Set Toggle Key

Allows the key to behave as a toggle push-button. The Data Field Properties dialog box lets
you enter the specific memory location to be toggled.

Note: A key programmed in System mode will function as a toggle push-button in all other
modes as well.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 261
Tech-note

PowerUp

The PowerUp macro commands are execute once at panel start up. This feature does not
require any update in the firmware

Command Menu

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 262
Tech-note

Keys that are programmed in this mode are only active when the panel is in the Command
Menu.

Commands normally available in this mode include:

Confirm

Down

Left

Page Mode

Right

Step Control Variable

Up

Event List

Keys programmed in Event List mode are active only when the panel is in the Event List
Mode.

Commands normally available in this mode include:

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 263
Tech-note

Clear Event List

Page Mode

Password Protect

Scroll Down

Scroll Up

Step Control Variables

Time/Date

Macros defined in the Time/Date mode are active only when the panel is in the Time/Date
Mode

Commands normally available in this mode include:

Next Field

Page Mode

Step Control Variable

Time/Date Decrement

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 264
Tech-note

Time/Date Increment

Panel Keys

At the top of each tab within the Keyboard Macro Editor dialog box is a scrollable toolbar of
panel keys that are available for programming. A sliding bar located beneath the toolbar makes
it easy to maneuver through the panel keys. A key is selected by single clicking on it with the
left mouse button. The selected key will be displayed in a lighter color than the other keys.

Note: Not all keys are available on every panel.

The small circle located in the upper left-hand corner of each panel key is a program indicator.
If the circle is red, this indicates that a key is programmed in that particular operating mode.
Similarly, if the circle is yellow, there are no keys programmed in that particular operating
mode.

Key States

Below the toolbar of panel keys are the Key states radio buttons. The state can be selected by
simply clicking on the proper radio button. You can program a key to be active whenever it is
Pressed, Released, or held down (Fast Autorepeat).

Fast Autorepeat is useful when dramatically changing the value of a register. For example,
suppose you have programmed the F1 key to step a register up by a value of 1. If you want to
change the value in the register from 20 to 200, you would have to press the F1 key 180 times
if it were programmed in the pressed state. However, by programming the key in the Fast
Autorepeat key state, you can press and hold the key until it reaches the value of 200.

Commands

Commands

Located beneath the Key states is the Commands toolbar. Each elementary macro command is
represented by an icon in this toolbar. If there is not enough room to display all of the icons,
left and right arrow keys will be present at the ends of the toolbar, letting you access all of the
elementary macro commands available for a particular mode of operation.

Note: Not all commands are available on all tabs.

Note: Even if a command is present in more than one operating mode, this on-line help shows
its icon only once.

Commands that may be available on various tabs include:

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 265
Tech-note

Acknowledge Alarm

Acknowledge All Alarms

Attribute

Begin Data Entry

Increment Brighter

Cancel

Clear Event List

Confirm

Confirm Recipe Menu Selection

Data Editing

Decrement Brightness

Display Object

Down

Erase

Enter Command Menu

Enter Password if needed

Field Down

Field Up

Go to Alarm Page

Go to Page

Go to Recipe Menu

Increment Contrast

Hide Object

LED State

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 266
Tech-note

Left

Decrement Contrast

Next Field

Next Page

Page Mode

Passthrough Mode

Password Logout

Password Protect

Passwords

Port Assignment

Previous Field

Previous Page

Print Alarms

Print Report

Recipe and Events Backup

Recipe Control

Return to Initial Page

Right

Scroll Down

Scroll Recipe Menu

Scroll to Line

Scroll Up

Select Data Entry Field

Send Command

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 267
Tech-note

Show Alarm List

Show Event List

Step

Step Control Variables

Toggle Relay

Trend Buffer Print

Trend Window

Up

Wait

Write to Controller

Acknowledge Alarm

This command acknowledges an active alarm.

Acknowledge All Alarms

This command acknowledges all active alarms

Attribute

This lets you specify the display attribute of an area on the page. Available attributes are
reverse, highlight, and blink. You must enter the row, column, width, and height of the area
that the attribute is to affect.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 268
Tech-note

Begin Data Entry

This command switches the panel into Data Entry Mode so that you may select a field and
press Enter to begin editing the value.

Dimmer Brightness

Dimming macro works in the same way as Decrease Brightness macro until it reaches the
minimum value. After that it works as Increase Brightness macro, until reaching the maximum
value.

The macro is implemented only in FW38 and FW58 (same as brightness controls).

Cancel

This command cancels the entered value.

Choose Report

In the Choose Report dialog box you can select which report is to be printed when a key (or
touch cell) is pressed.

Clear Event List

This command clears all of the entries from the queue of events.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 269
Tech-note

Confirm

This command confirms the entered value or menu selection..

Confirm Recipe Menu Selection

The Confirm Recipe Menu Selection macro accepts the selected parameter set name and sets
the current recipe parameter set to the new value. It can be assigned to a key together with
Return To Initial Page macro to "close" the Recipe Menu page and return to the page jumped
from with the Go To Recipe Menu macro.

Data Editing

This command allows the panel user to select a digit of the field and begin editing the value,
providing the field is set up as read/write. This functions mainly as an Enter key and should be
used in a complex macro command following Begin data entry.

Decrement Brightness

This command decreases the brightness of a vacuum fluorescent display panel.

Decrement Contrast

This commands decreases the contrast of a LCD display panel.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 270
Tech-note

Display Object

This command is used to display an object. User can select the objects to be displayed from the
Display Object dialog.

Down

This command positions the cursor directly beneath the current position.

Enter Command Menu

This command is used to force the panel to go to command menu page from operation mode.

Enter Password if needed

The ENTER PASSWORD IF NEEDED macro command can be used to block/allow the
execution of the following macro commands depending of the inserted password; the macro
requires one argument, which specifies the accepted passwords. If one of the specified
passwords is already active, the password page is not displayed and the following macro are
immediately executed; otherwise, the password page is displayed asking to enter a password.
When the correct password is entered, the following macro comands are immediately
executed.

The below example shows how to use the macro to block or allow the execution of the toggle
bit; when the password is already active, the toggle macro is executed without entering the
password.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 271
Tech-note

Note:
Firmware 5.30 or greater is need.

Erase

This command erases the entry text.

Field Down

This command positions the cursor on the next available read/write field directly below the
currently selected field. If the data fields are not aligned vertically, this command has no
functionality.

Field Up

This command positions the cursor on the next available read/write field directly above the
currently selected field. If the data fields are not aligned vertically, this command has no
functionality.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 272
Tech-note

Go to Alarm Page

If an alarm page has been specified for the currently active alarm, this macro command takes
you to that specified page.

Go to Page

This command causes the panel to display a specific page. You are asked to input the page
number.

Go to Recipe Menu

This macro lets you indicate the page with the Recipe Menu to which the macro should jump.
The Go To Recipe Menu macro sets the Recipe Page For Selection control variable and jumps
to the specified page.

This is the preferred way of going to a Recipe Menu page (page with Recipe Menu field). The
other way is to set the page number in the Recipe Page For Selection field and then go to the
Recipe Menu page using any other page-changing macros (Go To Page, Next Page, etc.).

Hide Object

This command is used to hide an object. User can select the objects to be hidden from the Hide
Object dialog.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 273
Tech-note

Increment Brighter

This command increases the brightness of a vacuum fluorescent display panel.

Increment Contrast

This commands increases the contrast of a LCD display panel.

LED State

This lets you set the state of any LED that is attached to the keys on the panel. The LED's may
take the value of On, Off, Blink, or Default. The Default state is determined by the value of the
corresponding LED bit in the reserved data area (RDA).

Left

This command positions the cursor directly to the left of the current position.

Next Field

This command will position the cursor on the next read/write field. Fields are sorted left to
right, top to bottom. This directionality defines what is considered to be the next field. If a field
is read only, it will be skipped and the cursor will fall on the next available read/write field.
This is because a field that is read only cannot be edited.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 274
Tech-note

Next Page

This will cause the panel to display the next page of the project, providing you are not on the
last page.

Page Mode

This macro is used to return the panel back to Page Mode.

Passthrough Mode

This lets you enable or disable passthrough mode. This is designed so you can go on-line with
the controller without disconnecting any cables.

Note: Passthrough mode does not work with all protocols and controllers.

Password Logout

When the Password logout macro is executed, the currently active password is logged out. If a
password defined with the ALOGI (Automatic Login) option is present, it will be activated; if
no automatic login password is configured then no password is activated in the system.

Password Protect

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 275
Tech-note

This command allows you to require that a password be entered from the panel before
executing any macros that follow. If the password is not active, the panel will simply not
execute any macro commands that follow. A dialog box will appear, letting you specify which
password(s) must be active.

Note: The panel will not prompt the user to enter the password, rather the user must enter the
password by using the Password selection in the panel command menu.

Passwords

This will request that the panel user enter a password.

Note: If passwords are not defined in the project, this command has no effect.

Port Assignment

UniOP serial ports (PC/Printer and PLC ports) can be assigned for communication with the
iPLC using Port Assignment commands while UniOP is in Operation Mode.

Previous Field

This command positions the cursor on the previous read/write field. Fields are sorted left to
right, top to bottom. This directionality defines what is considered to be the previous field. If a
field is read only, it will be skipped and the cursor will fall on the next available read/write
field. This is because a field that is read only cannot be edited.

Previous Page

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 276
Tech-note

This will cause the panel to display the previous page of the project, providing you are not on
the first page.

Print Alarms

This command prints all of the active alarms.

Print Report

This command lets you print any of the reports that have been configured. The Choose Report
dialog box appears.

Recipe Control

Lets you perform different recipe functions, including downloading a particular parameter set,
uploading a particular parameter set, and selecting a particular parameter set. You must enter
the page number and the parameter set that is to be affected. Entering a 0 for either causes the
current page/parameter set to be chosen.

Recipes and Events Backup

On some UniOP panels it is possible to back up recipe data, as well as the event list, into flash
memory inside the panel. This means that even if the panel loses power and the backup battery
is discharged or missing, the recipe data and event list will be preserved.

Note: Selecting these features uses memory within the UniOP panel that is normally reserved
for the project file. Therefore, the amount of memory available for the project file is reduced
by the amount of memory reserved for the entire backup of both recipe data and the event list,
which is 128 KB.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 277
Tech-note

When this feature is enabled, recipes are copied to flash memory automatically from the
UniOP panel after any recipe backup or recipe upload operation. The event list is copied to
flash memory any time an event happens.

More information on this topic is provided in the Advanced Section: Recipes and Events
Backup in Flash.

Return to Initial Page

This causes the panel to display the page that was displayed before the Go to page macro
command was executed.

Right

This command positions the cursor directly to the right of the current position.

Scroll Down

This command will scroll the display down one line.

Scroll to Line

This command lets you specify the page row that is to be considered the topmost row of the
display. Activating this command scrolls the panel to the "new" topmost row. This is useful
when there are more lines on a page than there are viewable lines on the panel. This macro
functions only when there are enough defined lines to make the selected line the topmost line.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 278
Tech-note

Scroll Recipe Menu

The Scroll Recipe Menu macro is used to move the selection in the Recipe Menu field. This is
the way that a new recipe parameter set name is chosen from the list. Positive values for the
scroll step move the selection down, while negative values move the selection up.

If there are many recipe parameter sets, more than one key can be assigned to Scroll Recipe
Menu macros: two keys with step of 1 (-1) for "fine" scrolling and two other keys with step
greater than 1 for "fast" scrolling.

Scroll Up

This command will scroll the display up one line.

Select Data Entry Field

This command lets you select the field that you wish to edit. This only selects the field; to edit
it you must begin data entry.

Note: Fields are counted from left to right, top to bottom on the panel.

Note: Attributes, time data fields, date data fields and touch cells attached to the controller are
counted as fields.

Note: All references used in this macro are re-indexed as fields are inserted or deleted.

Send Command

This command can be used to send ASCII string commands from the panel to the controller
asking the controller to do a specific action.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 279
Tech-note

Show Alarm List

This command switches the panel to Alarm Mode and displays the currently active alarms.
This is designed for use when you don't want the alarm list to appear every time there is an
active alarm; rather, it enables you to bring up the alarm list on demand. This macro works
only if there are active alarms.

Show Event List

This command displays all of the events that are currently stored in the event list. This macro
works only if there are events in the list.

Step

The Data Field Properties dialog box appears where you can indicate the reference area, then
the Step dialog box appears to let you specify a step up or down, set the step size, set a
minimum or maximum step size, or allow for variable step sizes.

Step Control Variables

The Data Field Properties dialog box appears to let you indicate the reference area, then the
Step dialog box appears to let you specify a step up or down, set the step size, set a minimum
or maximum step size, or allow for variable step sizes.

Time/Date Decrement

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 280
Tech-note

This command decrements the time/date field.

Time/Date Increment

This command increments the time/date field.

Toggle Relay

Allows the key to behave as a toggle push-button. The Data Field Properties dialog box lets
you enter the specific memory location to be toggled.

Note: A key programmed in System mode will function as a toggle push-button in all other
modes as well.

Trend Buffer Print

This macro gives the user the ability to print the trend buffer in alphanumeric format. The
“buffer to print” parameter shows all of the active trend buffers that can be printed.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 281
Tech-note

Trend Window

Trend Window

This macro allows for manipulation for the trend currently being viewed. It offers the
possibility of setting several actions, divided into the following categories:

trend cursor,

trend viewer scrolling, and

trend viewer zooming.

Trend Cursor

On/Off Cursor
This command will enable/disable the graphic cursor. When a graphic cursor is enabled, the
scrolling of the trend is stopped. You can implement the scroll cursor macros to move the
graphical cursor over the curves or to move the entire trend window.

Note: To display values from the Y-axis on the UniOP panel, use the internal panel control
variables. The names of the available Y-cursor variables can be found by looking under Insert -
Trend Window.

Note: To display values from the X-axis, use the Time/Date function.

Action: Scroll Cursor Forward, Scroll Cursor Backward

Use these commands to create buttons that move the cursor forward or backward. The scroll
step parameter defines the scrolling size.

Note: In order to have a smooth cursor movement over the curve, it is helpful to program these
commands in the autorepeat mode.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 282
Tech-note

Trend Viewer Scrolling

Action: Scroll Forward, Scroll Backward

Scroll the entire trend viewer left or right. The scroll step parameter defines the scrolling size.

Action: Automatic Scroll On/Off

Trend viewers are configured to scroll the trend to the left by default. This macro will disable
the automatic scrolling feature.

Trend Viewer Zooming

Action: Zoom X, Zoom Y

The zoom percentage parameter defines the new displayed range of the trend. For example, a
zoom percentage of 200% will show half of the originally displayed trend, while a 50% value
will show an area twice the size of the originally displayed trend.

Reset Trend Wnd. Time

This command resets the axes ranges to their original values.

Up

This command positions the cursor directly above the current position.

Wait

Allows the panel to pause for a specified amount of time (up to ten seconds) before executing
the next macro command. The time entered for this command is in tenths of a second.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 283
Tech-note

Write to Controller

This command lets you write constant values to the controller memory. The Data Field
Properties dialog box appears where you enter the specific memory location.

Command List

Once commands are selected, they are displayed in the list box at the bottom left side of the
Macro Editor dialog box in the sequence in which they are to be executed.

Advanced commands, called complex macro commands, are composed of two or more
elementary macro commands. For example, "Go to page 2" is an elementary macro command.
"Select field 5, Begin data entry" is a complex macro command composed of two elementary
commands. Complex macro commands function by executing each of the elementary macro
commands in the sequence in which they were entered.

Delete

The Delete button removes the selected command from the command list.

Append

If Append is selected, commands are appended to the end of the Keyboard Macro Editor
command list.

Insert

If Insert is selected, commands are inserted in the command list in front of the currently
selected command.

Keyboard Macro Editor Examples

Keyboard Macro Editor Examples

Three examples of using the Keyboard Macro Editor are provided. The first example describes
the steps necessary to create a simple macro. The second example illustrates how to program
panel key F1 to perform a data entry function. The third example explains programming a
touch cell with the Keyboard Macro Editor.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 284
Tech-note

Keyboard Macro Editor Example 1

This example describes the steps necessary to create a simple macro.

Make sure that the panel is connected to the PC, and is in Configuration Mode.

Make sure that the project file is set up to work with the panel you are using.
To do this, select Get Panel Resources from the Transfers menu.

Select the Keyboard Macro Editor from the Project menu or click on the
Keyboard Macro Editor icon in the toolbar.

The Macro Editor dialog box will be displayed. Click on the F12 key to assign
this macro to that key.

Click on Pressed beside Key states.

Click on the All Pages index tab. The macro is now set up to function
whenever the F12 key is pressed on any page of the project.

Click on the leftmost icon in the Commands toolbar. This icon represents the
elementary macro command Go To Page.

The Macro Parameter Value dialog box will pop up. In this case, we want to
have the panel go to page 2 whenever the key is pressed. Therefore, enter a 2
in this box and click on OK.

The list box located at the bottom left hand side of the Macro Editor dialog box
will list the defined macro as shown below. Press OK to confirm the action and
return to the page editor workspace.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 285
Tech-note

Type the text Page 1 in the topmost row of the current page.

Select Insert Page from the Page menu, or press the F7 key to create another
page. Press the Page Down button on the keyboard to move to this page.
Type the text Page 2 in the topmost row of this page.

Select File - Save to save the file.

Select Download from the Transfers menu. The project file will be downloaded
to the panel.

When the download is completed, the panel will go into Operation Mode and
display the text Page 1 that was entered in step 10.

Press the F12 key. The panel will go to the second page of the project and the
text Page 2 will appear on the display.

Keyboard Macro Editor Example 2

If you want to program panel key F1 to perform a data entry function, you would perform the
following steps:

Select the Keyboard Macro Editor from the Project menu or click on the
Keyboard Macro Editor icon in the toolbar.

The Macro Editor dialog box will be displayed. Click on the F1 key to assign

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 286
Tech-note

the macro to this key.

Select Pressed for the Key states.

Click on the All Pages index tab. The macro is now set up to function
whenever the F1 key is pressed on any page of the project.

Click on the Begin data entry icon in the Commands toolbar (this icon shows a
hand pressing a key).

The figure below shows the Macro Editor dialog box after these steps have been completed.

Now we need to program the key for the Released state:

Click on the Released radio button beside Key states.

Click on the Data Entry index tab.

Click on the Confirm Data Entry icon in the Commands toolbar (this icon is a
green check mark).

Click on the Begin data entry icon in the Commands toolbar (this icon shows a
hand pressing a key).

Click on the Next Field icon in the Commands toolbar (this icon has of a yellow
box with a crooked arrow pointing down to a white box).

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 287
Tech-note

The Field selection macro properties dialog box appears. Click OK without
checking the Enable automatic scrolling box.

Click on the Data Editing icon in the Commands toolbar (this icon is a small
box with the numbers 1, 2, and 3 below it).

The following figure depicts the Macro Editor dialog box following the completion of these
steps.

Click the OK button to save this macro for this project.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 288
Tech-note

4.8.8 Passwords

Passwords

This feature lets you password protect the project file so that unauthorized uploads cannot
occur. Four-digit passwords are used.
Once a password is specified, every time a user attempts to upload the project from the panel
onto a computer, the password is requested. If the password entered matches the one that was
defined in the project file, the upload operation will be performed properly. However, if a
password is entered that doesn't match the one that was specified in the project file, the panel
will not start the upload process.

Note: Panels must contain firmware version 4.10 or later to use this feature.

UniOP panels have eight different levels of passwords, enabling supervisors to restrict the
amount of control an operator has over the functionality of the panel.
The person having the highest level password has access to all of the panel functions. This is
done by default so as to allow at least one person the ability to change the project file
contained within the panel.
If a checkbox is selected, the panel user will have access to the respective area providing the
correct password is entered. If an incorrect password is entered, asterisks will be displayed on
the panel and the previous valid password is lost.

An example is provided.

Available password options include:

CONF,

TIME,

ACK,

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 289
Tech-note

PRINT,

PAGE,

ALOGI,

ALOGO, and

Data entry enable.

CONF

Access to Configuration Mode. In this mode, you may choose to alter the project file and re-
download it from the PC.

TIME

Access to the Time & Date Mode. In this mode, you may change the time and date information
that is stored within the panel.

ACK

The ability to acknowledge alarms.

PRINT

The ability to request printouts.

PAGE

Access to Direct Page Selection Mode. In this mode, you can access specific pages of the
project.

ALOGO

Automatic logoff. This is used to automatically disable a specified password in the following
cases:

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 290
Tech-note

inserting another valid password,

inserting a wrong password

using the macro command Password logout

after a specified period of time with no panel activity

It is possible to specify a custom timeout for passwords configured with automatic logout
using Logout timeout.

Data Entry Enable

Access to Data Entry Mode for specific pages. In this mode, you can edit any read/write fields
contained within the specified pages.

ALOGI

ALOGI

Automatic login. This is used to automatically load a specified password whenever there is no
valid password in the system (e.g., when the panel goes from Configuration Mode to Operation
Mode, or when an incorrect password is entered. This option can only be assigned to one
password and will work only if there are no other valid passwords in the system.

The automatic login feature allows users to change any of the user passwords defined in the
project file directly from the panel. In order to do this, there must be at least two passwords
defined, with one of them setup to be automatically logged in. This means that whenever the
panel goes from Configuration Mode to Operation Mode, the specified password is logged in.

Once the passwords are defined in the project file, an ASCII control variable field is needed for
each password that the panel user will be able to change.

An example of the automatic login feature is provided.

Note: In order to use this feature, the panel must be equipped with firmware version 4.10 or
later.

Note: Only one password per project can have the automatic login feature enabled.

Password Automatic Login Example

To program a control variable field to perform the password automatic login function, you
need to perform two basic steps: create the password file, and create control variables to

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 291
Tech-note

manipulate the passwords. The individual steps are as follows:

Select Passwords from the Project menu.

Set up three passwords: 1234, 4321, 6574, and 9809.

Check the ALOGI box for password 6574. The Passwords dialog box will
resemble that shown below. Note that there are eight possible passwords, and
that ALOGI is checked for password number three in the list.

Click OK.

Create an ASCII control variable field by selecting Insert - Data Fields -

Numeric/ASCII, or by clicking on the Numeric Field icon in the toolbar.

Set the Style as ASCII.

Set the Reference as Variable.

Click the "…" button under Reference.

Set the Data Type as Password. (If Password is not available as a data type,
go back to step 6 and set the Style as ASCII.)

In the Password box, enter 3. The arrows can be used to scroll from 2 through
8. That is because there are eight possible passwords, as noted in step 3
above. Automatic login is only available for passwords 2 through 8. Our
example has automatic login set for password 3 (9809). The Data Field
Properties dialog box will resemble that shown in the figure below.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 292
Tech-note

Click OK to close the Data Field Properties dialog box.

Select the Range tab in the Numeric Field Properties dialog box. Select
Read/Write so that you can change the value of this field (the actual
password).

Click OK to close the Numeric Field Properties dialog box.

The automatic login control variable field is indicated on the project page by
"CCCC".

Logout Timeout

The period of inactivity that will trigger an automatic logoff. The valid range is 10-700
seconds.

Password Example

Assume there are three users who will have access to the operator panel. User 1 is to have
access to all areas of the project (at least one user must have this type of access in every
project). User 2 is only allowed to acknowledge alarms and enter data on pages 2, 3, and 4.
User 3 is capable of entering data throughout the project and is allowed into Configuration
Mode. It is also desired to have User 3 automatically logged out of the system after 10 minutes.

Select Passwords from the Project menu. This will bring up a dialog box similar
to the one shown in the figure below in which we will configure our passwords
for the project.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 293
Tech-note

Since User 1 is to be allowed full access to all areas of the panel, we can
assign the highest-level password to him. Simply click in the top password box
and enter a four-digit password for User 1. By default, User 1 has access to all
areas of the project.

User 2 is allowed to acknowledge alarms and enter data on pages 2, 3, and 4.

Click on the second password box and enter a four-digit password for User 2.
To allow access to acknowledge alarms, click on the ACK box. Doing so
places a check mark in the box. To allow data entry from page 2 to page 4,
enter a 2 in the Data entry enable From page box and a 4 in the Data entry
enable To page box.

User 3 can enter data on all pages of the project, will be automatically logged
out after ten minutes, and can access Configuration Mode. Click on the third
password box and enter a four-digit password for User 3. Click in the CONF
box to give User 3 access to Configuration Mode. Check the ALOGO box to
enable automatic logout. The default time in the Logout timeout box at the
bottom of the dialog box is 600 seconds, or ten minutes, so no changes are
necessary. Because User 3 will be allowed data entry throughout the entire
project, set the entries for the Data entry enable From page box and the Data
entry enable To page to span all the pages in the project. For example, if the
project consists of 10 pages leave the default setting of 1 in the Data entry
enable From page box and set the Data entry enable To page to 10.

The passwords should now be configured correctly for this situation. The
dialog box representing this situation is shown below.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 294
Tech-note

4.8.9 Alarms

Overview

Alarms offer a maximum of 1024 alarms, which are broken into 4 blocks (there are some
models which offer 256 total alarms in 4 blocks). The lower the numerical value assigned to
the alarm, the higher its priority. Each block can be addressed to any register within the
controller's memory. Each alarm is referenced to a bit in the controller. Whenever a bit goes
high, the respective alarm message will be displayed.

To use alarms, select Alarms from the Project menu. Instructions on configuring alarms,
alarms and the Keyboard Macro Editor, alarms safety issues, and alarms examples are given.

Note: Old compatibility mode alarms are not supported in Designer.

Note: Beginning with firmware version 4.22, you can define an alarm message up to 40
characters in length for all UniOP operator interfaces that have a 20-character display. In these
cases, the complete message associated with an alarm will take up three (3) lines on the
display. The first line will be for time and date indication, the second and third lines will be for
the alarm message itself.

The following is the existing Alarm page for setting various alarm options.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 295
Tech-note

The following is the Enhanced Alarm Page for setting the alarm options. This feature works
when the right panel and the firmware version is selected.

Note: This feature requires firmware version 5.12 or greater.

For detailed explanations of the Alarm Options please refer the Alarms Main Options page.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 296
Tech-note

Alarms Main Options

Current Alarm Block Options

The Current alarm block options section at the top of the Alarms tab contains settings for the
alarm block, such as the block number, the number of alarms, the update cycle, and the
reference block starting location.

Block No.

The Block No. field lets you choose block 1, 2, 3, or 4.

No. of Alarms

The No. of Alarms field is used to specify how many alarms will be used in a particular block.
The software will automatically round off the specified number to a multiple of 16 because the
alarms are addressed as words of information.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 297
Tech-note

Update Cycle

The Update cycle field lets you specify how often the alarms are updated, from 500 msec up to
127 sec.

Block

The Block start address field lets you specify the starting address of the current block. Clicking
on the "…" button will bring up the Data Field Properties dialog box.

Data Field Properties

This feature can be accessed by selecting the "…" button whenever a PLC, Variable, or Recipe
reference is set. (If Index is selected, a similar box named Indirect Addressing Fields appears.)

The contents of the Data Field Properties dialog box will vary depending upon the type of
controller being used and the type of reference specified. Elements to be configured may
include the File or Data Type, the Data Format, File or Page Number, Element, Offset, and
Left/Right Byte. These options let you configure responses to the controller memory location.

Toolbar

The Alarms tab toolbar contains icons for commands that can be useful when working with
alarms.

These include:

Cut

The familiar Windows Cut feature is available for use in editing messages.

Copy

The familiar Windows Copy feature is available for use in editing messages.

If several alarm messages are similar, the Copy and Paste features may be used to copy
messages. Simply select which messages to copy by highlighting them. If several messages
that are in successive order are to be copied, click on the first one and drag the mouse down
until the last one is highlighted and release the mouse button. If several messages are to be
copied that are not in successive order, hold down the Ctrl key, click on each of the messages
to be copied, and release the Ctrl key. All of these methods will select the text to be copied.
Then click on the Copy icon to copy the messages into the Windows Clipboard.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 298
Tech-note

Paste

The familiar Windows Paste feature is available for use in editing messages.

If several alarm messages are similar, the Copy and Paste features may be used to copy
messages. Highlight the alarm message number where the first message is to be pasted and
click on Paste to copy the messages into their new locations. A Windows-based text editor,
such as Notepad, may also be used to create a list of messages. To do this, place each message
on a separate line. Use the Copy function of the editor to copy the text to the Clipboard and
then use the Paste feature to copy the messages into their new locations.

Delete

The familiar Windows Delete feature is available for use in editing or deleting messages.

Special Characters

Special characters may be added to text by clicking on the Special Characters button. This will
bring up the Special Characters dialog box in which you can select the character(s) to be used
by double clicking on them or by single clicking on them and pressing Insert. The characters
will appear in the last position the cursor was in before entering the special characters dialog
box.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 299
Tech-note

Languages

This feature lets you create a single project file that contains multiple languages. The language
that the project file uses can be selected at run time.

Note: You must type in the text in each language. Designer does not have the ability to
translate from one language to another. In other words, if you enter text in English and then
select Spanish as the language, the text must then be entered in Spanish. By storing the
appropriate text translated into various languages, you can easily change the language as
needed at run time.

Note: The standard ASCII character set is used for all languages. Other symbols may be
inserted using Special Characters.

To set up languages, select Languages from the Project menu. Doing so will bring up the
Configure Languages dialog box where you can define the languages to be used. Insert, Delete,
Move Up, Move Down, and Set As Default icons help you manage the list of languages. A
counter displays the number of languages defined for the project.

A Languages icon is available on many toolbars in Designer to make it easy to switch to

another language.

To change the language that a project file uses once it has been downloaded to the UniOP
panel, you can create a control variable with a data type of Language.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 300
Tech-note

Alarm Messages

You can scroll through the alarm messages using the scroll arrows located to the right of the
alarm message list box. To create or edit a message, click on the desired line and then enter the
message. Special characters may be added to the message by clicking on the Special
Characters button. Alarm messages may be in various Languages.

Current Alarm Options

The Current alarm options section at the bottom of the Alarms tab allow you to set the panel to
go to a certain page upon an alarm, to print the time of acknowledgement, to log the event to
the event list, to require that alarms be acknowledged, the set the alarm print capability to ON
or OFF, and to give an alarm message only status.

On Alarm Go to Page

The On alarm go to page field can be used to make the panel jump to a specified page
whenever the alarm is activated. You will need to program a key in Alarms Mode in the
Keyboard Macro Editor using the following elementary macro commands in sequence:

Acknowledge Alarm (if required)

Go to Alarm Page
Page Mode

Whenever the alarm occurs, the panel will switch to the alarm screen. The user can use the
arrow keys to select the proper alarm and press the key that was programmed in the Keyboard
Macro Editor to take them to the correct page.

Print Time of Acknowledgement

By selecting Print time of acknowledgment, you can have the specific alarm data printed via a
printer.

Enable Log to Event List

The checkbox Enable log to event list lets you send the selected alarm to the historical event
list if desired.

Alarm Requires Acknowledgement

The Alarm requires acknowledgment field can be selected if you wish to have the operator
press a key to acknowledge that the alarm is active. Once the alarm is activated, the panel will
enter Alarm Mode and display the currently active alarms. The operator must acknowledge the
alarm by pressing the Enter key for a few seconds. Pressing the Clear key will return the panel
to Operation Mode.

Note: It is still necessary to reset the proper alarm bit.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 301
Tech-note

Print Alarm On

By selecting Print alarm ON, you can have the specific alarm data printed via a printer.

Print Alarm Off

By selecting Print alarm OFF, you can choose not to have the specific alarm data printed via a
printer.

Message Only

The checkbox Message Only allows the alarm message to be treated strictly as a message and
not a true alarm. If this checkbox is marked for a specific message, the Alarm LED on the
panel will remain off for the specific event and the first row of the message will not contain the
familiar "A", as is the standard for an alarm message. It is possible to require that these
messages be acknowledged, just as for a standard alarm message. These messages can also be
logged to the Event List if the Enable log to event list checkbox is marked.

Note: This feature requires firmware version 4.22 or greater.

Enhanced Mode Alarms Options

Note: This feature requires firmware version 5.11 or greater. This Enhanced mode alarm
options is visible only after selecting the right panel and firmware version.

The Current alarm block options, Toolbar and the Alarm Messages section at the top of the
Alarms tab is same as the earlier Current Alarm Block Options of the Alarms Tab.

Current Alarm Options

The Current alarm options section at the bottom of the Alarms tab allow you to require the
alarms be acknowledged, the text and the background colour of the acknowledged alarm, to set
the Alarm Text and Background colours, to give a alarm message only status, to give an alarm
an event only status, to log the event to the event list, set the panel to go to a certain page upon
an alarm, to log the alarm off, alarm on and acknowledged alarms and to print the alarm off,
alarm on and acknowledged alarms

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 302
Tech-note

Alarm Requires Acknowledgement

The Alarm requires acknowledgment field can be selected if you wish to have the operator
press a key to acknowledge that the alarm is active. Once the alarm is activated, the panel will
enter Alarm Mode and display the currently active alarms. The operator must acknowledge the
alarm by pressing the Enter key for a few seconds. Pressing the Clear key will return the panel
to Operation Mode.

When the Alarm Requires Acknowledgement check box is enabled, the pull down menu's
below is activated and it can be used to set the acknowledged alarms Text and the background
colour.

Note: It is still necessary to reset the proper alarm bit.

Alarm Text and Background

You can set the Alarm Text and the Text background colour using this option.

Message Only

The checkbox Message Only allows the alarm message to be treated strictly as a message and
not a true alarm. If this checkbox is marked for a specific message, the Alarm LED on the
panel will remain off for the specific event and the first row of the message will not contain the
familiar "A", as is the standard for an alarm message. It is possible to require that these
messages be acknowledged, just as for a standard alarm message. These messages can also be
logged to the Event List if the Enable log to event list checkbox is marked.

Note: This feature requires firmware version 4.22 or greater.

Event Only

The checkbox Event Only allows the alarm message to be treated as a Event and not a true
alarm. If this checkbox is marked, the Alarm LED on the panel will remain off for the specific
event and the first row of the message will not contain the familiar }A}, as is the standard for
an alarm message. It is possible to require that these messages be acknowledged, just as for a
standard alarm message. These messages can also be logged to the Event List if the Enable log
to event list checkbox is marked.

Note: This feature requires firmware version 4.22 or greater.

Enable Log to Event List

The checkbox Enable log to event list lets you send the selected alarm to the historical event
list if desired.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 303
Tech-note

On Alarm Go to Page

The On alarm go to page field can be used to make the panel jump to a specified page
whenever the alarm is activated. You will need to program a key in Alarms Mode in the
Keyboard Macro Editor using the following elementary macro commands in sequence:

Acknowledge Alarm (if required)

Go to Alarm Page
Page Mode

Whenever the alarm occurs, the panel will switch to the alarm screen. The user can use the
arrow keys to select the proper alarm and press the key that was programmed in the Keyboard
Macro Editor to take them to the correct page.

Log Alarm Off

By selecting Log Alarm Off, you can disable the specific alarm logging onto the Event list.

Log Alarm On

By selecting Log Alarm On, you can enable the specific alarm logging onto the Event list.

Log Alarm Ack

By selecting Log Alarm Ack, you can enable the specific alarm acknowledgment logging onto
the Event list.

Print Alarm Off

By selecting Print alarm OFF, you can choose not to have the specific alarm data printed via a
printer.

Print Alarm On

By selecting Print alarm ON, you can have the specific alarm data printed via a printer.

Print Alarm Ack

By selecting Print alarm Ack, you can have the specific alarm acknowledgement data printed
via a printer.

Alarms Popup Options tab

Clicking on the Popup Options tab presents options for choosing how an alarm popup window
will appear once an alarm occurs. Options include:

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 304
Tech-note

Default

Alarms are displayed immediately if no keys are pressed and no keys have been pressed within
the last three seconds.

Disable alarm popup

The alarm popup window will not be displayed.

Show immediately on any alarm

The alarm popup window will be displayed as soon as an alarm occurs.

Set delay after last keystroke

You can have the alarm popup window appear at a specified amount of time after the last
keystroke or touch cell press, as set in the Delay time box.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 305
Tech-note

Delay Time

Set the amount of time between the last keystroke or touch cell press and the appearance of an
alarm popup window. The time may be between 1 second and 127 seconds.

Disable time and date display

This option lets you disable the time and date display in the UniOP alarm page. This feature is
for use in cases where the time and date information is not of interest.

Note: The Disable time and date display feature requires firmware version 4.20 or greater.

Alarms Examples

Two alarms examples are given.

The first example assumes a user is using an Allen-Bradley SLC 500 series controller. They
want to use alarms that begin at N7:0 for their particular controller. The steps required to set up
the alarm messages and their respective locations in the controller are as given.

Alarms Example 1

Assume a user is using an Allen-Bradley SLC 500 series controller. They want to use alarms
that begin at N7:0 (a word) for their particular controller. Their alarm messages and their
respective locations in the controller are as follows:

N7:0 - Bit 0 = Pressure too high

N7:0 - Bit 1 = Temperature too high
N7:0 - Bit 2 = Pressure too low
N7:0 - Bit 3 = Temperature too low

Keep in mind that each alarm message is referenced to a BIT in the controller.

Select Configure Controller from the Project menu.

Click on the "..." button under controller. The Select Controller dialog box
appears.

Select A-B DF1 as the controller.

Click the Controller Setup button.

Select SLC500 Modular I/O as the PLC model. (A warning message may
appear. If so, click Yes.)

Click OK.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 306
Tech-note

Click OK to close the Select Controller dialog box.

Click OK to close the Configure Controllers dialog box. (The Select Tag
Dictionary dialog box may appear. If so, click Cancel as it is irrelevant to this
example.)

Select Alarms from the Project menu. The Alarms dialog box, as shown in the
figure below, appears.

Under Current alarm block options, click on the "…" button next to Block. The
Data Field Properties dialog box appears.

Set the Logical Address to N7:0.

Click OK to close the Data Field Properties dialog box.

For alarm #1, enter Pressure too high.

For alarm #2, enter Temperature too high.

For alarm #3, enter Pressure too low.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 307
Tech-note

For alarm #4, enter Temperature too low. The completed Alarms dialog box
should resemble that shown below.

Click on OK to close the Alarms dialog box and return to the project page.

The second example assumes use of a Profibus DP S7 controller, configures a high

temperature alarm and program the panel to go to a certain page whenever the alarm is active.

Alarms Example 2

Assume that we are using a Profibus DP S7 controller. We want to configure a high

temperature alarm, and program the panel to go to page 3 whenever the alarm is active.
Assume that the alarm requires acknowledgment, and that the F1 key is to perform the function
of acknowledging the alarm and going to page 3.

Select Configure Controller from the Project menu and make sure that Profibus
DP S7 is the selected controller.

Select Alarms from the Project menu

.
Make sure that all of the alarm data is entered correctly under the Current
alarm block options.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 308
Tech-note

For alarm #1, enter High Temperature.

Under Current alarm options, in the box beside On alarm go to Page enter 3.

Click in the box beside Alarm requires acknowledgement to select that option.
The completed Alarms dialog box should resemble that shown below.

Click OK to return to the project page.

From the Project menu select Keyboard Macro Editor.

Select the F1 key, and indicate Pressed for the Key states.

From the Alarms tab, select the command Acknowledge Alarm.

Select the command Go to alarm page.

Select the command Page Mode.

The alarm bit must still be reset. To do this, select the command Write to
Controller and to reset the value in the Data Field Properties dialog box to
clear the proper alarm bit.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 309
Tech-note

The figure below shows the completed Macro Editor dialog box.

Click OK to close the Macro Editor box and return to the project page.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 310
Tech-note

4.8.10 Languages

Languages

This feature lets you create a single project file that contains multiple languages. The language
that the project file uses can be selected at run time.

Note: You must type in the text in each language. Designer does not have the ability to
translate from one language to another. In other words, if you enter text in English and then
select Spanish as the language, the text must then be entered in Spanish. By storing the
appropriate text translated into various languages, you can easily change the language as
needed at run time.

Note: The standard ASCII character set is used for all languages. Other symbols may be
inserted using Special Characters.

To set up languages, select Languages from the Project menu. Doing so will bring up the
Configure Languages dialog box where you can define the languages to be used. Insert, Delete,
Move Up, Move Down, and Set As Default icons help you manage the list of languages. A
counter displays the number of languages defined for the project.

A Languages icon is available on many toolbars in Designer to make it easy to switch to

another language.

To change the language that a project file uses once it has been downloaded to the UniOP
panel, you can create a control variable with a data type of Language.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 311
Tech-note

Insert

Use the Insert icon to add a new language. Enter the name of the language to be added. The
language is added to the list of languages, placed at the end of the list.

Delete

The Delete icon is used to remove a language from the list.

Move Up

Click the Move Up icon to move a selected language up one position in the list of languages.

Move Down

Click the Move Down icon to move a selected language down one position in the list of
languages.

Set As Default

Click the Set As Default icon to set the selected language as the default language for the
project. The default language is labeled as such in the list of languages.

List of Languages

Lists the languages that are currently available for the project.

Number of Languages

Indicates the number of languages that have been defined for the project.

4.8.11 Next Language

This option selects the next language from the list of available languages within the project
file. For example, assume that there are three languages defined: Italian, English and German.
If you are currently working with Italian, selecting Next Language will change the working
language to English. Next Language may be selected from the Project menu or by pressing the
Shift+Ctrl+L keys.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 312
Tech-note

4.8.12 Configure Tag Dictionaries

Configure Tag Dictionaries

Tags allow mnemonic reference to PLC variables. Tags in a project can be imported from a
description file outside Designer. A discussion of the use of tags in Designer projects is
provided, along with an example of using tags.

Tag dictionaries are tools integrated with Designer accessible from Project - Configure Tag
Dictionaries once support for an internal controller has been enabled under Configure
Controller. This lets you to switch from one tag dictionary to another tag dictionary without
having to change each field in the project.
Items in the Select Tag Dictionary dialog box include the Enable Tags checkbox, the Database
box, the Refresh Database button, and the Controller List.

Note: When a tag name is selected, the PLC Reference information will be filled in with the
reference information from the tag and the PLC Reference dialog controls will be disabled.
You will only be able to change tag information from the Tag Editor in the Tools menu.

Note: Tag definition for an External Controller is allowed only if the External PLC supports
tag definitions. Please refer to EXOR Technical Documentation for further information about
drivers that support tag definition.

A tag dictionary is associated with each project and defines the model and attributes of the
PLC. You can select a dictionary for your project when you enable the tag feature in the
project for the first time.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 313
Tech-note

You can create multiple tag dictionaries inside a tag database and add tags to each dictionary.
Each dictionary is configured for a specific PLC controller and model name. Each project is
assigned to a dictionary.
You can create multiple dictionaries in a database in order to support a project that has a PLC
Network and/or UniNET Network. To be able to use tags for a project that supports the
UniNET/PLC Network, at least one dictionary must exist in the database for each of the nodes
in the network.

Note: If a project supports a UniNET/PLC network, each UniNET node/ PLC Node must be
tied to a tag dictionary in the database. You will be required to assign a tag dictionary for all
the nodes during the configuration of UniNET/PLC network. Each node must have at least one
dictionary in the database. If PLC network is enabled and you change the PLC Node, the Tag
Name controls will be initialized with the tags from the dictionary tied to the current PLC
Node.

Enable Tags

Checking this box enables the use of tags.

Database

The location of the tag database to be used is listed. Click on the "…" button to select the
location of a tag database file (file format *.mdb). Tag dictionaries are tied to controller brands
and models.

Refresh Database

Click on the Refresh Database button to reset the tag database to the default settings for the
specified controller.

Controller List

Lists the selected brand and model of controller and the matching tag dictionary.

4.8.13 Tag Validation

By using this feature you can switch from one tag dictionary, referring to one set of PLC
addresses, to a different dictionary, referring to different set of PLC addresses in the same
controller, and update all the fields in the project without needing to update the individual PLC
addresses used in the whole project.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 314
Tech-note

Also, you can switch from one tag dictionary, referring to Controller A to a different
dictionary, referring to controller B and update all the fields in the project without updating the
individual PLC addresses used in the whole project.

This feature can also validate the PLC addresses used in a project with respect to the PLC
addresses used in the tag dictionary, and finds and lists any discrepancy items with all details
such as location, etc.

This feature supports updating the tag database (with regard to PLC Address used in the
project) and updating the project field (with regard to PLC Address used in the tag dictionary).

When a dictionary is changed, Designer will scan each field in the project, retrieve the tag
name for the field and then check if the tag name exists in the new dictionary. If the tag name
exists in the new dictionary, the PLC address for the tag will be updated in the project. If the
tag name does not exist, the address information will be set to default address of the PLC.
After all fields have been checked, a dialog box will be displayed listing the tag names that
were not found in the new dictionary and set to default address.

The idea behind changing the tag dictionary is to let you switch tag dictionaries for similar
PLCs or PLCs that use the same tag names. For example, if you have two different PLCs that
use the same PLC program, you can change the tag dictionary in the project and Designer will
automatically update the addresses for the tags in the project.

An example of using the tag validation feature is provided.

4.8.14 Trend Buffers

Trend Buffers

Trending is divided into two main parts: trend acquisition and trend viewer. The acquisition
module is responsible for collecting the data into a database. This is configured using the
Configure Trend Buffers dialog box, accessed by selecting Trend Buffers from the Project
menu. The trend viewer is responsible for displaying the data from this database in a graphical
format. This is configured using the Trend Window command from the Insert menu.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 315
Tech-note

The Configure Trend Buffers dialog box is composed of a list of buffers, a General tab and a
Sampling tab.

The first step in creating a trend is to create a trend buffer. You will need to define two items:

the PLC variable that is to be sampled and

the method in which the variable is to be sampled.

The variable can be sampled from the UniOP panel or the variable can be sampled directly
from the PLC.

If the variable is sampled from the UniOP panel, all of the data from the trend buffer will be
stored within the memory of the UniOP panel. If the variable is sampled directly from the
PLC, the data from the trend buffer will be stored in the memory of the PLC. In the latter case,
the only duty of the UniOP will be to graphically display the trend buffer data from the PLC.

There are two Keyboard Macro Editor commands associated with trending. These are: Trend
buffer print and Trend Window.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 316
Tech-note

Buffers

Buffers

Provides a list of the currently defined trend buffers and statistics on global buffer usage.

This list has two buttons. The first one is used to Insert a new buffer. The second one to Delete
the currently selected one.

Delete

To remove a previously defined trend buffer, select the name of the buffer from the trend
buffer list and click the Delete button.

New (Insert)

Click the New (Insert) button to add a new trend buffer name at the end of the list of trend
buffers. Or, simply type the name of a new trend buffer into the box in the Buffers list.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 317
Tech-note

General

General tab

To activate the General tab, you must first select a buffer from the Buffers list. Then specify
the Size and Type of buffer to be defined and the Reference Variable to be sampled.

Type

Type

Trends can be sampled in three different ways. The first option (All Pages) is to continuously
sample the trend buffer, regardless of whether or not the trend associated with the trend buffer
is being displayed. The second option (Current Page) is to sample the trend buffer only when
the page where the trend associated with the trend buffer is being displayed. The third option
(On Page) is to sample the trend buffer only when a particular page is being displayed.

Note: The number of trends that can be sampled in the background is limited.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 318
Tech-note

All Pages

The trend buffer will be sampled regardless of what page is being displayed.

Current Page

The trend buffer will be sampled only when the page containing the trend associated with the
trend buffer is displayed.

On Page

The trend buffer will be sampled only when the identified page is displayed.

Size

Indicate the buffer size, i.e., the number of samples that will be kept during the background
sampling.

Note: When a trend is sampled in the background (All Pages), the sample size reflects the
number of old samples that will be shown when the page that contains the trend associated
with the trend buffer is displayed. When a trend is sampled in real time (Current Page), you
will never see any old samples because sampling begins when the page that contains the trend
is displayed. In this configuration the sample size is useful only when using the macros to
scroll the trend along the X-axis. If these macros will not be used, you can save UniOP
memory by setting the sample size to 1.

Reference

Reference

The variable to be sampled. This can be a PLC variable or an internal UniOP control variable.
You can scale this variable, if desired.

PLC

If the variable to be sampled is a PLC variable, click on the "…" button to define the Data
Field Properties.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 319
Tech-note

Internal Variable

If the variable to be sampled is an internal variable, pick the type of variable from the list
provided.

Scaling

Allows for a linear transformation of the data being sampled. This lets you scale the data
before storing it inside the trend buffer.

Sampling

Sampling tab

This area lets you define when and how trend samples will be taken. You can set the sampling
circumstances, select to stop sampling when the buffer is full, and determine when to clear the
buffer.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 320
Tech-note

Sampling

Sampling

Sampling selections include sampling on PLC, cyclic sampling, sampling on a control variable
event, or sampling only when the variable is not zero.

On PLC

Samples are collected from the trend buffer and stored inside the memory of the PLC.

Cyclic

Samples are taken from the memory of the UniOP on a cyclical basis. The cycle time, in
seconds, must be defined.

On Control Variable Event

Samples are taken, one a time, when a variable (PLC or internal variable) changes value.
Tip: Use a counter to trigger the sampling: 000->001->002->003....

Only When Variable Not 0

When this checkbox is set, data will be sampled only when the defined variable does not
contain a value of zero. Sampling is suspended when the variable contains a value of zero. This
checkbox can be set with any of the other sampling types.

Stop Sampling

Use the Stop when buffer is full checkbox to stop the sampling when the trend buffer is full.
This is a first-in first-out (FIFO) buffer. Once the buffer is full, older sample values will be
erased to allow the new sample values to be stored.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 321
Tech-note

Clear Buffer

Clear Buffer

This option lets you define when to clear the trend buffer. Choices include no automatic clear,
clear on panel startup, clear on control variable change, and clear when buffer is full.

No Automatic Clear

The trend buffer is never cleared. However, if the Stop when buffer is full checkbox is not
selected, the oldest sample is removed and the newest sample is stored when the buffer is
filled.

On Control Variable Change

The trend buffer is cleared when the selected variable changes value.

On Panel Startup

The trend buffer is cleared upon power-up of the UniOP panel.

When Full

The entire trend buffer is cleared when it becomes full.

4.8.15 Memory Use

You can determine how much memory is used by the current project file by selecting Memory
Use from the Project menu (or by pressing the Ctrl+M keys).

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 322
Tech-note

The Memory used dialog box appears containing information on the amount of memory that is
used by the project file, how many bytes of recipe data are contained within the project file and
the amount of memory used by an SSFDC memory card.

4.8.16 Time Scheduled Triggers

The Time Scheduled Triggers give you the possibility to program the Panel Operator to
execute specific macro sequences cyclically or at specific time. It may be invoked by selecting
Time Scheduled Triggers from the Project menu.

New Triggers can be added as shown in the above figure. Using the Edit Macro button, each
trigger can be assigned macros from the list schedule at specific time as shown below.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 323
Tech-note

Time Tab

From the Time tab it is possible to specify any of the following trigger type.

Yearly
Weekly
Daily
Hourly
Single Shoot
Every (Interval time)

Enable Tab

From the Enabled tab it is possible to define the time window when the trigger is enabled. By
default, the Enable checkbox is not checked, the trigger is always enabled.

When the Enabled check box is checked, the trigger is enabled only inside the time windows
specified inside this dialog box.

After Date - Before Date

When only the “after date” and the “before date” are checked the trigger is active only inside
the two defined days.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 324
Tech-note

After Time - Before Time

hen only the “after time” and the “before time” are checked the trigger is active all days but
only when time is between the two defined time values.

After Date - Before Date - After Time - Before Time

When all four parameters are defined the trigger is active only after the defined After Date and
After Time until the defined Before Date and Before Time.

After Date
When only the single “After date” parameter is defined, the trigger is active all
days after the specified day.

After Time
When only the single “After time” parameter is defined, the trigger is active all days after the
specified time.

Before Date
When only the single “Before date” parameter is defined, the trigger is active all days until the
specified day.

Before Time
hen only the single “Before time” parameter is defined, the trigger is active all days until the
specified time.

After Date - After Time

When “After date” and “After time” parameters are defined the trigger is active all days
starting from the specific time and date.

Before Date - Before Time

When “Before date” and “Before time” parameters are defined the trigger is active all days
until the specific time and date.

Time Scheduler Control Variables.

To be able to edit the trigger parameter values from the panel operator, it is necessary to put
the desired trigger parameters on a panel page using the new Time Scheduler Control variables
as shown in the below figure.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 325
Tech-note

4.9 Transfers Menu

4.9.1 Transfers Menu

This section provides information about the Transfers menu. Options in the Transfers menu let
you set the parameters to communicate with a target system (panel). Control functions that can
be performed from the Transfers menu include:

Download,

Upload,

Download to SSFDC,

Get Panel Resources,

Check Firmware Versions,

Switch to Operation mode,

Remote Passthrough,

Dial, and

Hang Up;

plus various transfer Options may be set.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 326
Tech-note

To communicate with a panel, you must have:

The Designer software installed correctly

The Designer communication cable connected between the PC and the panel

The correct communications parameters set

The panel placed in configuration mode

4.9.2 Download

This lets you transfer the project file from the computer to the operator interface panel. You
can choose this option by selecting Download from the Transfers menu, by clicking on the
Download icon in the toolbar, or by pressing the F2 key.

Note: The panel must be in Configuration Mode in order for the download procedure to work.

4.9.3 Upload

Selecting this option lets you upload an existing application from the target system memory
into PC workstation memory. As this will erase the application that is currently loaded in the
Designer software, you will be prompted to confirm the operation.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 327
Tech-note

You can choose this option by either selecting Upload from the Transfers menu, by clicking on
the Upload icon in the toolbar, or by pressing the F3 key.

4.9.4 Download to SSFDC

Download to SSFDC

This command allows you to download a file to an SSFDC memory card, if one is installed. To
download a file to an SSFDC card, select Download to SSFDC from the Transfers menu, or
press the F6 key.
An explanation of SSFDC error codes is provided.

UniOP SSFDC Error Codes

UniOP SSFDC Error Codes

This section contains a description of the error codes displayed by the UniOP MMI products
when the panel cannot go into Operation Mode for any reason. The Bootstrap module of
UniOP firmware includes a diagnostic system very useful for determining why a UniOP panel
stays in Operation Mode without apparent reason.

Note: This diagnostic service is available only in products with firmware type 38 and 58 with
SSFDC memory card.

Displaying SSFDC Error Codes

During the system start-up phase, the UniOP firmware checks the contents of the flash memory
to verify its integrity. When something goes wrong in this phase and a valid application has not
been recognized, UniOP cannot start Operation Mode and remains in Configuration Mode.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 328
Tech-note

Once the panel is unexpectedly in Configuration Mode, the corresponding error code can be
recalled. The error code will be displayed in the 3rd row of the display, below the text
"Configuration Mode". To display the error code press the Enter key for more than 2 seconds.

List of Error Codes

There are a number of reasons why a panel does not enter normal Operation Mode as expected.
The following table lists the possible the error codes.

All the error codes in the table are in hexadecimal format. If more that one condition is verified
the corresponding code is the sum of the single codes.

Error Code Description Causes

0001 The SSFDC header is missing The format process of the SSFDC card was
not completed successfully. The card should
be reformatted by downloading the project
again or by using the Format Utility with the
SSFDC Programmer software.
0002 Graphic file in the project is missing Graphic information in the downloaded file
is missing. The option Download Graphics
should not be inactivated the first time a
project is downloaded.
0004 Project file is missing Project information in the downloaded file is
missing. The option Download Protocol
Only should not normally be used when
downloading Designer projects.
0008 Application file is missing Communication protocol in the downloaded
file is missing. The project should be
completely downloaded again or the option
Download Protocol Only should be used.
0010 Project and graphic file do not match; The last download was probably done with
they have different time reference the option Download Graphics inactivated,
but the graphic information has changed in
the Designer project. The file should be
completely downloaded again. The
hardware /software consistency should also
be checked.
0020 SSFDC card is not present The memory card is not present or it is not
correctly inserted.
0040 The downloaded project file supports The project is the memory requires different
different hardware type hardware.
0100 The firmware is missing in the panel Only the Bootstrap software module is
loaded in UniOP. The firmware is either
missing or it is damaged.
0200 Communication session is in progress Attempting to go into Operation Mode
during a project file download. This happens
if the Enter key is pressed during the
download process.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 329
Tech-note

0400 Bad checksum in the project The global consistency checks of the
downloaded project failed. The project
should be downloaded again.
0800 Wrong application type or it does not The protocol present in the memory card is
match the project file not consistent with the downloaded project.
This could happen if a project is
downloaded with the option Download
Project Only activated without erasing the
previous protocol still present in the
memory.
1000 MIPS FW code (Graphic Engine) is The MIPS part of the FW code on the card
missing is missing, corrupted, or not compatible with
8051 FW. This error is possible only on
boards using MIPS (T2000 or later).

4.9.5 Options

Options

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 330
Tech-note

Selecting Options from the Transfers menu lets you choose the panel memory location for both
the project and the protocol, and set communication parameters display preferences. Tabs in
the Options Properties dialog box include:

Ports,

Transfer,

Transfer advanced,

Compatibilty with Version 1,

Modem commands, and

Modem messages.

Serial Ports

Ports

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 331
Tech-note

The communications parameters between Designer and the UniOP panel are set during
installation. However, they should be checked by selecting the Ports tab under Transfers -
Options. From this tab you can configure the ports to be used, the parity and stop bits, whether
a modem is used to communicate with the panel, and the baud rate.

Unless otherwise noted, communication is possible with all panel models by setting the
following parameters:

Baud 38400*
Data Bits 8
Parity None
Stop Bits 1

* Not all panels are capable of communicating at this speed.

Ports Available

Indicate the PC port to be used for communication with the panel.

When Designer is started, it first checks to see if the requested COM port is available. If the
requested COM port is currently occupied by some other program, Designer will automatically
switch to the next available port. When this occurs, a message box will appear explaining the
conflict and the action taken.

Use Modem

Check the box if communication with the panel is to be via modem.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 332
Tech-note

Transfer

Transfer

The Transfer tab contains commands pertaining to communications between your PC and the
UniOP panel. These include:

Start Program After Download,

Compress Graphics,

Communications Number of Retries,

External Memory Types,

Update Firmware,

Memory Location for Project, and

Recipe Upload.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 333
Tech-note

Start Program After Download

Automatically starts a program on a panel after download.

Compress Graphics

Compresses graphics during transfer. This makes for faster communications but can have a
detrimental effect on certain types of graphics.

Communications Number of Retries

The number of times Designer will try to establish a connection with a panel.

External Memory Types

Select the type of external memory being used.

Note: This option is only available when external memory is specified under Configure
Controllers in the Project menu.

Update Firmware

It is possible to update the firmware on some panels by checking this box. Some UniOP panels
are able to accept new firmware files through the serial line or through the SSFDC memory
card. For these panel models, the firmware files can be stored in the SSFDC memory card.
The setup procedure installs a firmware subdirectory inside the Designer working directory.
This directory contains all the necessary firmware files used by Designer to check and update
the panel SSFDC memory card. New firmware files have to be copied inside this directory to
be accessible from Designer.

Note: A special key sequence is necessary to complete the firmware update. This special key
sequence ensures that inexpert users cannot update the panel firmware unintentionally.

Note: Designer checks the firmware version before beginning any download operation. When
an old firmware file version is detected inside the panel, a dialog box is displayed to give you a
chance to upgrade the firmware file.

Memory Location for Project

Indicate whether the project will be stored on internal panel memory, such as an SSFDC card,
or on a memory device external to the panel.

Recipe Upload

Indicate whether original or modified data is to be used during recipe upload.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 334
Tech-note

Transfer Advanced

Transfer Advanced

The Transfer Advanced tab lets you select the memory location for the protocol,
download/compress options, and whether to download the project, the protocol, or both.

Memory Location for Protocol

Specify whether the memory location for the protocol is internal or external to the panel, or in
the firmware.

Download

You can choose to download the project, the protocol, or both. If Both is selected, you have the
option to not download the protocol if it already exists in the tar file, as a precaution.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 335
Tech-note

Download Compress Options

Select whether graphics, fonts, tags, and/or object information are to be downloaded, and
whether fonts are to be compressed during downloading.

Compatibility with version 1

The Compatibility with version 1 tab lets you create projects that are compatible with the old
version 1 of the UniOP panels.

In the current UniOP panels the project file and the code handling the communication
protocols are stored in the same memory.

In old UniOP panels it was possible to specify the target memory location for both the protocol
code and the project data. Of course the available options were depending on the actual
hardware configuration.

In the above dialog, internal memory means Battery backed RAM and external memory means
Flash or EPROM.

In particular UniOP models the protocol code was part of the panel firmware and could not be
changed nor modified.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 336
Tech-note

Modem Commands

The Modem commands tab is only visible if Use modem is selected on the Ports tab under
Transfers - Options.

Selecting this feature lets you specify modem settings, such as initialization strings, dial or
hangup strings, etc. Indicate if the DTR signal should be dropped for hangup.

Modem Messages

Modem Messages

The Modem messages tab is only visible if Use modem is selected on the Ports tab under
Transfers - Options.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 337
Tech-note

This tab contains entry boxes for a connection message and no connection messages, plus other
modem options.

Connection Message

Enter any necessary connection messages in the box provided.

No Connection Messages

Enter any necessary messages in the case that no connection is established in the boxes
provided.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 338
Tech-note

Options

Options

Various modem options are available, including the dial timeout, the number of redials, and
whether or hang up upon exiting Designer.

Hangup

Check this box to have the modem hang up when the program is exited. This prevents
unnecessary use of the modem.

Dial Timeout

Set the timeout, in seconds, if a successful dial is not achieved.

Number Redials

Set the number of automatic redials.

4.9.6 Get Panel Resources

Before beginning work on a particular project, you need to specify the type of display that the
target panel contains. The physical size of the screen, as well as its type (backlight LCD,
passive color) must be specified. Failure to do this accurately may result in the loss of text and
data whenever an attempt is made to download a project file to the panel.

The Get Panel Resources feature is provided to help set the parameters for the target panel
quickly or to determine unknown information about the connected panel. This option may be
selected from the Transfers menu, by clicking on the Get Panel Resources icon in the toolbar,
or by pressing the F4 button. In order to use this feature, the target panel must be connected to
the PC and the panel must be in Configuration Mode. Upon selecting this item, Designer will
attempt to retrieve the connected panel's configuration.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 339
Tech-note

When successful the following information is displayed.

Panel Model: The panel model.

Panel FW version: The panel firmware version.
Controller Type: Internal code to identify the type of controller.
FW driver version: Version of the controller driver being used.
Project in panel: Reports if there is a project file in the panel.
Display type: Type of display.
Max num of rows: Number of rows per project page.
External keyboard: Whether or not a keyboard is present.
Internal memory: Amount of memory available for project file.
Recipe memory: Amount of memory available for recipes.
Event list length: Number of events that can be stored in Event list.
Support for graphics: If the panel is capable of supporting graphics.
Color display: If the panel contains a color display.
Touchscreen present (code): If the panel has a touchscreen (and the internal code, if
present).
Pixel/Vector Graphics Support: If the panel is capable of supporting Pixel/Vector Graphics.
Double Protocol Support: If the panel is capable of Double Protocol Support.

You may copy the displayed resource configuration to the current project by pressing the Yes
button. If you do not wish to use the reported parameters, press No.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 340
Tech-note

If for any reason Designer is unable to communicate with the panel, a message box will appear
explaining the problem.

It is also possible to manually configure the software by using Panel Setup from the Project
menu.

4.9.7 Check Firmware Versions

Correctly setting the Firmware Download flag is necessary to give Designer the necessary
information required to correctly calculate the SSFDC memory used, taking into account the
size of the firmware files.

After exchanging information with the panel to detect the version of the firmware files that are
inside the SSFDC memory card, a dialog box is displayed.

The left column displays the versions of the firmware files that are located in the SSFDC
memory card. The right column displays versions of firmware files only if your computer
contains a newer version. If a newer version is not detected, <Do not update> is displayed.

4.9.8 Switch to Operation mode

Selecting this option causes the application in the panel's memory to begin running.

Note: Communication with the panel is interrupted until the panel returns to Configuration
Mode.

4.9.9 Switch to Configuration mode

Selecting this option causes the panel to switch to Configuration mode.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 341
Tech-note

4.9.10 Remote Passthrough

Remote passthrough

This entry lets you select one of three remote passthrough commands: Configuration Mode,
Start or Stop.
This feature lets you remotely put a UniOP panel into either Configuration Mode or Operation
Mode via a modem. In this manner, you can remotely upload or download a project file, start
the panel, or use passthrough mode to access the programming port on the PLC.

Note: The UniOP panel must contain firmware version 4.20 or later to use this feature.

Note: The Remote passthrough commands are active only when Remote Hardware mode has
been selected under the Passthrough tab of Project - Panel Setup.

Configuration Mode

If no project file has been downloaded to the panel, the panel will default to Configuration
Mode when power is applied.

To re-enter Configuration Mode after the panel is in operation, press and hold the Enter key for
a few seconds. The System Menu will appear. Use the arrow keys on the display panel to
highlight the CONFIG selection in the top right-hand corner of the menu and press Enter.

Note: If the Enter key is not available, touch and hold any open space on the touchscreen
panel for several seconds. The System Menu should appear, listing the Configuration Menu as
a selection. Use the arrow keys on the panel to select the Configuration Menu.

Note: If Configuration Mode is locked out, hold down three (3) arrow keys, power the unit
down (continue holding down the three arrow keys), and power the unit back up. Make sure
that the project file is saved before attempting this!

Note: Another method for accessing Configuration Mode from a touchscreen panel is listed
below. Please note that not all touchscreen panels are capable of this "quick fix". Make sure
that the project file is saved before attempting this!

Begin tapping the center of the screen.

Power the unit down and back up (when you power it up continue tapping the
center of the screen).

You should be prompted by the panel to touch a circle on a portion of the

screen. Follow the panel directions. After completing the panel's instructions,
press the Enter key displayed on the panel. (This process is sometimes difficult
to complete, as the touchscreen is particular about the area pressed. You may
have to do this procedure more than once to get it to work.) This should
activate Configuration Mode.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 342
Tech-note

Note: If a project that uses passwords is locked out of Configuration Mode, enter 0007 as the
password. This should allow access to Configuration Mode.

Start

This transfers a start command to the panel.

Stop

This transfers a stop command to the panel.

4.9.11 Dial

This feature lets you enter a phone number and send a dial command to your modem. By using
the Add Entry and Delete Entry buttons, you may add commonly used numbers to a phone
directory for reference, and delete numbers when they are no longer needed. Click on the Start
Dialing button to initiate dialing by your modem.

4.9.12 Hang Up

This feature lets you send a hang-up command to your modem.

4.10 Tools Menu

4.10.1 Tools Menu

The Tools menu contains commands to help you to customize the appearance of the toolbars,
grid, and font that appear on the screen.

Tag Editor

Font Editor

Keypad Designer

Customize

Options

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 343
Tech-note

Advanced

Replace Image(s)

4.10.2 Tag Editor

Tag Editor

Tags allow mnemonic reference to PLC variables. A thorough discussion of the use of tags is
available.

The Tag Editor allows you to easily work with a large number of tags by creating a tag
database for your project. It provides the capability to add, delete and modify tags as well as
assign PLC addresses to each tag, plus it includes import and export capabilities to exchange
tags with external applications. You can create a list of tag names in the Tag Editor and then
assign the tag names to various fields of the Designer project by simply selecting a tag name.

The Tag Editor provides a grid-like user interface where you can enter a tag name, assign a tag
address, a group name for the tag, and enter a comment for the tag.

An example of using tags and the Tag Editor is available.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 344
Tech-note

To open the Tag Editor, select Tag Editor from the Tools menu of Designer. The Tag Editor
application opens. The Tag Editor is a typical Windows application with menus across the
top, a workspace to on the left side, and the currently open file shown on the right.

File Menu

File Menu

The Tag Editor File menu includes commands for managing tag dictionaries, such as:

New

Open

Save As

Import Tags

Export Tags

New Dictionary

New Group

Delete Dictionary

Print

Print Preview

Print Setup

Recently Opened Files

Exit

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 345
Tech-note

New

Selecting New from the File menu of the Tag Editor opens the New Tag Database dialog box.
From this box you can name a new database and specify its location. Click the "…" button
next to Location if you want to store the database file in another folder or drive.

Open

This familiar Windows box allows you to choose a file to open in the Tag Editor. Tag
database files are normally in the format *.mdb. The selected database will appear in the
workspace on the left of the page.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 346
Tech-note

Save As

This familiar Windows box lets you save a file in the Tag Editor. Enter a file name and
specify where the file is to be saved.

Import Tags

Import Tags

It is possible to import tags from external sources such as an ExcelTM database. Select Import
Tags from the File menu of the Tag Editor and the Tag Import Wizard steps you through the
process. <Back and Next> buttons help you navigate through the process. A Cancel button is
available if you want to exit the Tag Import Wizard.

A Help button provides access to help text about the Tag Import Wizard.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 347
Tech-note

Import Tags Step 1

Enter a name for the new tag dictionary in the Tag box. Select a controller driver from the list.
Select a particular driver model, if necessary.

The Refresh Controller List button is available if it is necessary to refresh the list for any
reason.

When you have completed Step 1, click the Next> button to continue to Step 2.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 348
Tech-note

Import Tags Step 2

In Step 2 you will select the file that you wish to import.

If you know the file name you can enter it in the box. Otherwise, click on the "…" button to
browse the system. When you locate the file that you want to import, click on the file name to
select it, the click the Open button. You are returned to the Tag Import Wizard and the selected
file name is entered in the box.

The following file formats are supported.

Excel files (*.xls)

CSV files (Comma delimited) (*.csv)
CSV files (Semicolon delimited) (*.csv)
Text (Tab delimited) (*.txt)

When you have completed Step 2, click the Next> button to continue to Step 3.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 349
Tech-note

Import Tags Step 3

In Step 3 you will configure the columns in your imported files. In the left box are the columns
available in the database being imported.

Specify the value in the edit box of 'Start import at row' in order to specify the first row of the
data user want to import.

You may need to scroll to see all of the available column names. In the right box are the
columns normally available in a tag database. If you want to add columns to this list, you may
do so. Simply click on a column name in the left box and click the Add-> button. The column
name appears in the right box.

Column names are appended to the bottom of the list. Select a column name and use the
Up and Down buttons to rearrange the list order, if necessary. If you change your mind, the
Delete button will remove a column from the list.

When you have completed Step 3, click the Next> button to continue to Step 4.

Import Tags Step 4

(For excel import only)

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 350
Tech-note

If the imported file has more than one worksheet the user is given three choices as shown in
the above dialog. This is applicable only to .xls file format. For all other format this step is
skipped.

When you have completed Step 4, click the Next> button to continue to Step 5.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 351
Tech-note

Import Tags Step 5

The final step of the Tag Import Wizard is to create the dictionary and tag groups, and to
import the tags.

Verify the location from which the tags are being imported, and click the Finish button to
complete the operation.

A confirmation message will appear. Click OK.

Export Tags

Export Tags

It is possible to export tags for use in another application. Select Export Tags from the File
menu of the Tag Editor and the Tag Export Wizard steps you through the process. <Back and
Next> buttons help you navigate through the process. A Cancel button is available if you want
to exit the Tag Export Wizard.

A Help button provides access to help text about the Tag Import Wizard.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 352
Tech-note

Export Tags Step 1

In Step 1 you will configure the columns to be exported. In the left box are the columns
available in the database being exported. You may need to scroll to see all of the available
column names.

In the right box are the columns normally exported. If you want to add columns to this list, you
may do so.
Simply click on a column name in the left box and click the Add-> button. The column name
appears in the right box.

Column names are appended to the bottom of the list. Select a column name and use the
Up and Down buttons to rearrange the list order, if necessary.

If you change your mind, the Delete button will remove a column from the list.

When you have completed Step 1, click the Next> button to continue to Step 2.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 353
Tech-note

Export Tags Step 2

In Step 2, select the dictionary to be exported.

If the selected dictionary has more than one group associated with it then user has the option to
export tags from all groups or to export tags from selected group.

When you have completed Step 2, click the Next> button to continue to Step 3.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 354
Tech-note

Export Tags Step 3

In Step 3, select a name for the exported file. A default name is already entered in the box. If
you wish, enter a different name in the box, or click the "…" button to bring up the Save As
box.

If the user has selected the option 'Export tags from all groups' in the second step of export
wizard then the user is given the option to export each group to a work sheet or export all
groups to a single work sheet. This is applicable only to .xls file format.

When you have completed Step 3, click the Next> button to continue to Step 4.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 355
Tech-note

Export Tags Step 4

In the final step you are asked to confirm the dictionary to be exported. If the information is
correct, click the Finish button the export the tags.

The exported file will be saved in the location and with the file name that you specified.

New Dictionary

The New Dictionary command is available from the Tag Editor File menu if no tag dictionaries
are currently opened. If a tag dictionary is open, then the New Dictionary command is
available under the Dictionary menu.

Selecting New Dictionary from the File or Dictionary menus, clicking on the New icon, or
right clicking on a dictionary in the workspace and selecting New Dictionary, will open the
New Tag Dictionary dialog box. In this box you name your new dictionary and associate it
with a particular controller.

Enter a name for your new dictionary in the Tag Dictionary box. Select the controller driver
that you plan to use from the list provided. If more than one driver model is available with the
selected controller, select the model you plan to use from the list under Driver Model.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 356
Tech-note

New Group

The New Group command is available from the Tag Editor File menu if no tag dictionaries are
currently opened. If a tag dictionary is open, then the New Group command is available under
the Dictionary menu.

The New group dialog box allows you to enter tag information. The particular columns
available may vary, but will normally contain at least the tag name, the logical address for the
tag, the data format for the tag, and any comments necessary.

Type a tag name in the Tag box and any comments in the Comment box. Clicking on the
Logical_address box activates an arrow. Click on the arrow to bring up the Data Field
Properties dialog box. Specify the reference address, data type and format, etc. Click OK to
return to the New group dialog box with the logical address and data format information
completed.

Every time you enter information on one line, an additional line appears below it. Fill in as
many lines as you need. When you have entered all the information in the New group dialog
box, select Save As from the File menu to save the dictionary.

Delete Dictionary

This command deletes the selected dictionary.

Print

The Print command in the File menu allows you to print the currently open Tag Database.

Selecting Print from the File menu (or pressing the Ctrl+P keys) brings up the familiar
Windows Print dialog box.

Print Preview

Selecting Print Preview from the File menu brings up the familiar Windows Print Preview
view, from which the Tag Database may be previewed for printing.

Print Setup

Selecting Print Setup from the File menu brings up the familiar Windows Print Setup dialog
box, from which printer properties may be selected.

Recent Files

The most recently opened files are listed under the File menu as a shortcut. Click on the name
of a file to reopen it.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 357
Tech-note

Exit

The Exit command closes the Tag Editor application.

Edit Menu

Edit Menu

The Edit menu of the Tag Editor contains familiar WindowTM commands for working with
text and objects on the page. These include:

Undo

Redo

Cut

Copy

Paste

Find

Replace

Find

Enter the text for which you are searching into the box. Check the Match case box if you are
looking for an exact match with regard to capitalization. Indicate whether you wish to search
up or down from the current point.

Replace

Enter the text for which you are searching into the Find what box. Enter the text with which
you wish to replace it in the Replace with box. Check the Match case box if you are looking
for an exact match with regard to capitalization. Click the Find Next button to locate the next
occurrence of the text in the Find what box. When the text is located, you can click the Replace
button to replace only that instance, or click the Replace All button to replace every instance.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 358
Tech-note

Dictionary Menu

Dictionary Menu

The Dictionary menu allows you to add a New Dictionary, a New Group, or to Delete a
Dictionary. The commands on the Dictionary menu are available only when a dictionary is
opened within the Tag Editor.

Record Menu

Record Menu

The commands in the Record menu are used to manage the records located in the New group
dialog box. These commands include:

Next Record

Previous Record

First Record

Last Record

Delete Records

Next Record

The Next Record command is used for navigating between cells in the New group dialog box.
This command moves you to the next cell.

Previous Record

The Previous Record command is used for navigating between cells in the New group dialog
box. This command moves you to the previous cell.

First Record

The First Record command is used for navigating between cells in the New group dialog box.
This command moves you to the first cell.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 359
Tech-note

Last Record

The Last Record command is used for navigating between cells in the New group dialog box.
This command moves you to the last cell.

Delete Records

The Delete Records command is used to delete all the records located in the New group dialog
box.

View Menu

View Menu

The View menu allows you to customize the appearance of the Tag Editor. Commands
include:

Workspace

Toolbar

Status Bar

Workspace

The workspace bar is located at the left side of the Tag Editor dialog box and displays any
open tag databases. If Workspace is checked in the View menu, then the workspace is visible.
If it is unchecked, then the workspace bar is hidden.

The workspace can be docked to a side of the Tag Editor or float in the main Tag Editor
window. Right-click on any item displayed in the workspace brings to up a command list that
controls docking. Additional commands provide shortcuts to create a new dictionary or hide
workspace. (To make the workspace visible again, simply check Workspace in the View
menu.)

Toolbar

The toolbar is located under the Tag Editor menu bar and contains icons as shortcuts for
commonly used commands. If Toolbar is checked in the View menu, then the toolbar is
visible. If it is unchecked, then the toolbar is hidden.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 360
Tech-note

Status Bar

The status bar is located at the bottom of the Tag Editor dialog box and displays contextual
information. If Status Bar is checked in the View menu, then the status bar is visible. If it is
unchecked, then the status bar is hidden.

Tools Menu

Tools Menu

The Tools menu contains the commands Customize and Options, which allow you to set the
toolbars and colors of the Tag Editor to your own preferences.

Customize

The commands on the Toolbars tab and the Command tab allow you to customize the
appearance of the toolbars and the commands contained on the various toolbars within the Tag
Editor.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 361
Tech-note

Options

In the Options dialog box you can set text and background colors. To have alternating lines in
different colors for improved readability, check the Alternate Row Color box and set the colors
for the alternating row.

Window Menu

Window Menu

The Window menu contains familiar Window commands for managing multiple windows.
These include:

New Window - opens a new window

Cascade - places each new window slightly below and to the right of the
current window.

Tile - places each new window below the current window.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 362
Tech-note

Arrange Icons - arranges the visible icons in an orderly manner

Close All - Closes all currently open windows.

File Identification - gives the file names of the files in the currently open
windows.

Help Menu

Help Menu

The Help menu contains helpful information about the Tag Editor. You can search the contents
for information about various commands within the tag editor, or you can view information
about the Tag Editor application.

Contents

Lists the contents of the Tag Editor help text.

About TagEdit

Provides basic version and copyright information about the Tag Editor application.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 363
Tech-note

4.10.3 Font Editor

Font Editor

The Font Editor lets you modify the downloadable font of semi-graphical displays. Each font
consists of 256 characters that can be edited or changed. This lets you create any necessary
characters for a particular project. In most cases, you would not want to edit any of the
standard characters such as letters, numbers, large character blocks, or bargraph blocks.

The Font Editor has its own menus and toolbar. The characters of the currently selected font
are displayed across the bottom of the Font Editor screen. Click on a character to display it in
the Font Editor window.

The Font Editor includes the File menu, the Edit menu, the Font menu, the Fill menu, the Row
menu, the Column menu, the Width menu, the Options menu, and the Help menu.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 364
Tech-note

File Menu

File Menu

The Font Editor File menu contains familiar Windows -type commands such as Open, Save,
Save As and Exit.

In addition, the command Install/View installed Panel Fonts lets you view Panel Display Types
and corresponding Installed Fonts with the font width and height.

The Install Font button lets you select the display panels with which this font is to be used. The
font will then be listed in the Installed Fonts box. The Remove Font button lets you delete the
currently highlighted font from the Installed Fonts list.

An example of saving and installing a new font is available.

Open

This familiar Windows box allows you to choose a file to open in the Font Editor. Font files
are normally in the format *.fon.

Save

To save a project, select Save from the File menu.

The cursor may be momentarily replaced with an hourglass while the file is saved.

If the application has not been named, the Save As dialog box will appear instead.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 365
Tech-note

Save As

This familiar Windows box lets you save a file in the Font Editor. Enter a file name and
specify where the file is to be saved.

Edit Menu

The Font Editor Edit menu contains familiar Windows -type commands such as Undo, Copy,
Paste and Refresh.

Font Menu

Font Menu

The Font Editor Font menu lets you see the font size and see, modify, the font header
information.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 366
Tech-note

Font Size

The Font Size dialog box in the Font Editor lets you see the character pixel width and height,
the first and last character, and the pitch for a font.

Font Header

The Font Header dialog box lists the file name used for the selected font, the face name (font
name) for that font, provides a box for entering any necessary copyright information, sets the
external and internal leading values, identifies the character set and the version.

Fill Menu

It is possible to fill the entire character grid with either white or black, or to invert the
displayed colors.
By double clicking on a particular pixel, you can toggle the appearance of that pixel. For
example, if a pixel is initially black, double clicking on it will change its color to white.

An example of editing characters is provided.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 367
Tech-note

Row Menu

The Insert and Delete commands on the Row menu of the Font Editor let you customize a
character by adding or deleting a row of pixels.

Note: The row is added or deleted from the present position of the cursor.

Note: When a row is added all the other rows below it are shifted one pixel down.

Column Menu

The Insert and Delete commands on the Column menu of the Font Editor let you customize a
character by adding or deleting a column of pixels.

Note: The column is added or deleted from the present position of the cursor.

Note: When a column is added all the other columns to its right are shifted one pixel to the
right.

Width Menu

The Font Editor Width menu is currently disabled.

Options Menu

Options Menu

The Font Editor provides a method of editing characters that are used in basic character
formation. These commands are available under the Options menu of the Font Editor.
Commands in the Options menu include:

Rectangles,

Large Characters,

Bargraphs,

Define Symbol, and

Symbol Browser.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 368
Tech-note

Rectangles

By selecting Rectangles from the Options menu of the Font Editor, you can edit the characters
that form each of the two rectangles that are implemented in the Designer software.

The rectangle is composed of eight characters: 4 corner characters and 4 characters that
connect the corners. By selecting any of these characters, you can create the rectangle with a
particular style. Designer comes with two default rectangle styles: single line and double line.

Once you have defined the characters that make up the rectangle, you can draw a rectangle of
any size in any page of your project.

Note: You should launch the Font Editor from within Designer, so that the necessary .INI files
are updated automatically. If the Font Editor is launched outside of Designer, you will need to
enter the character codes that make up the rectangle into the DISPLAYS.INI file manually.
This file is located in the Windows directory. As you scroll through the file, each font will
have a line that begins with BoxChars=. You will need to specify the eight character codes that
make up the rectangle. These codes need to be entered in scanline order - left to right, top to
bottom of the rectangle. So, you would first start with the top, left corner of the rectangle
extending across the top. You would then go to the top, left corner and extend down. Next, go
to the top, right corner and extend down. Finally, you would go to the bottom of the rectangle.

The above dialog box is used to define each of the eight characters that make up a rectangle.
To get an explanation about the function of any part of the dialog box, position the mouse over
the area and click the left mouse button.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 369
Tech-note

Large Characters

The large character set must be kept continuous. The Large Character Start Code dialog box in
the Font Editor identifies the starting character in a large character set.

Note: This starting character is not the same for every font.

Note: The characters in the sequence must have a predetermined shape. Characters that are
larger than the standard panel character set are composed algorithmically from the set of
specially shaped characters shown below. You must maintain this exact sequence of shapes in
order to introduce large characters into your font.

Bargraphs

The Font Editor start code for bargraphs is the first non-blank character within the bargraph
character set. Keep in mind that the bargraph character set must be kept continuous (i.e., the
characters must be kept in numerical order.

Note: The character code will not be the same for each font.

Define Symbol

The Designer software offers you the ability to create your own symbols using the Font Editor.
While still included in the software, this feature has become obsolete with the current graphical
release.

To select symbol mode, select Define Symbol from the Options menu.

Select Symbol Dimensions and enter the height and width of the symbol you
would like to define.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 370
Tech-note

Select OK.

Select Define Symbol - Draw New Symbol from the Options menu.

The display will then change to the symbol dimensions that were selected. The
editor will put the selected number of characters from the font in this symbol
edit box, starting with the character that was highlighted.

Select Define Symbol - Compose Symbol from the Options menu. Double-
click on each character that makes up the symbol. Start with the character is in
the upper left-hand corner and move across. The light gray character box will
automatically move to the next character location. If you make a mistake,
simply single click on the character location to move the cursor box and then
double-click on the correct character in the font bar. When the symbol contains
all the correct characters, click in the small upper box. Give the symbol a name
by typing it in this box and clicking on OK.

Symbol Browser

The Symbol Browser allows browsing among the symbols you have created in the Font Editor.

To create a new symbol use Options - Define Symbols - Symbol Dimensions.

Select the size of the new symbol (in number of characters).

When you select the enabled item Draw new Symbol the Font Editor represents a preview of
the new symbol in a map of 2 by 2 characters.

The preview consists of the current character plus the next 3 characters. Since in our example
we selected a symbol size of 2 by 2 characters we need in fact 4 characters in total.

When the new symbol is modified using the bitmap editor, the Font Editor automatically
changes all the involved characters.

Help Menu

The Help menu is constructed in the typical Windows manner, with a list of the Contents of
the help text, and information about the Font Editor.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 371
Tech-note

Font Editor Example

Font Editor Example

Creating or modifying a font using the Font Editor consists of two parts; editing the
character(s), and then saving the new or modified font.

Editing Characters

Select Font Editor from the Tools menu.

The font will appear on the display in the Font Editor as shown in the figure
below.

(insert figure here)

Select a character to edit by clicking on it from the character list across the
bottom of the window.

By double clicking on a particular pixel, you can toggle the appearance of that
pixel. For example, if a pixel is initially black, double clicking on it will change
its color to white.

To save the changes you have made, see the Saving a Font section.

Saving a Font

When finished modifying the font (see the Editing Characters section) you can
save it by selecting Save or Save As from within the File menu within the Font
Editor. When changing a font, we recommend that you use Save As and give
the font a new name so as not to change the original font. Fonts need to be
saved to the Windows System directory.

The font must then be installed by selecting Install/View installed Fonts under
the File menu within the Font Editor. Select the display panels with which this
font is to be used and click on the Install Font button.

Select File - Exit from the Font Editor to return to your Designer project page.

Now choose Edit - Fonts - Panel Font from within Designer (or press Ctrl+F or
click on the Panel Font icon in the toolbar) and the customized font will be
available from the Font Name pulldown menu in the Select Font dialog box.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 372
Tech-note

4.10.4 Keypad Designer

Keypad Designer

The Keypad Designer utility is a Windows -based application that allows you to design,
manage and download custom keypads to a UniOP panel. It is possible to define customized
floating popup keypads for four different types of fields by using the Keypad Designer utility.
These fields are:

numeric fields with a decimal base,

numeric fields with a hexadecimal base,

ASCII fields, and

message fields.

These popup keypads are dynamic objects that are displayed by the UniOP firmware over the
current page whenever Data Entry is started on a field for which a popup keypad is defined.

Note: Touch Data Entry Keypads are only supported by firmware type 58 starting from
version 4.40.

A Keypad Designer keypad can contain two types of objects:

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 373
Tech-note

Buttons

Value Objects

Buttons can represent any of the keys that are present on a standard keyboard (i.e., F1, Enter).
A Keypad Designer button is merely a button programmed to execute a certain action

Value objects are rectangular areas inside the keypad where the UniOP firmware displays
different information related to the field that is being edited. A value object is a field that is
able to display a value.
To create a new popup keypad, select New from the Keypad Designer File menu. The Keypad
Designer utility presents a blank programming area where the keypad can be designed.

File Menu

Edit Menu

View Menu

Window Menu

Help Menu

Buttons

Value Objects

File Menu

File Menu

The File menu contains familiar Windows commands for managing files and printing.

New

Open

Close

Save

Save As

Print

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 374
Tech-note

Print Preview

Print Setup

Recent Files

Exit

plus the less familiar commands

Export to ROM, and

Download to ROM

New

A new Keypad Designer File may be created by selecting New from the File menu, by
clicking the New Keypad icon, or by pressing the Ctrl+N keys.

The file is created with a default name. You can change this name when saving the file, by
selecting the Save As from the File menu.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 375
Tech-note

Open

To open an existing Keypad Designer File, select Open from the File menu, click the Open
icon on the toolbar, or press the Ctrl+O keys. The Open Keypad dialog box will appear,
providing a list of the file names in each directory.

Enter the name of the file to be loaded or use the list box to select from the existing files. If an
extension is not specified, .kbd is assumed.

Close

To close a currently open file, select Close from the File menu.

Save

To save a Keypad Designer Files, select Save from the File menu, click on the Save file icon
on the toolbar, or press the Ctrl+S keys.

Save As

If a Keypad Designer file to be saved has not been named, the Save As dialog box appears. Or,
you may select Save As from the File menu. This option can also be used to save a Keypad
Designer File under a different name.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 376
Tech-note

The Save As dialog box shows the current directory path and the current file name. A new
name and path may be entered or the ones presented may be accepted.

Print

Selecting Print from the File menu (or pressing the Ctrl+P keys) brings up the familiar
Windows Print dialog box, from which the currently open may be printed.

Print Preview

Selecting Print Preview from the File menu brings up the familiar Windows Print Preview
view, from which the currently open Keypad may be previewed for printing.

Recent Files

The most recently opened files are listed under the File menu as a shortcut. Click on the name
of a file to reopen it.

Exit

Selecting Exit from the File menu can be used to terminate the Designer program. You are
prompted to confirm the operation if the current application has not been saved.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 377
Tech-note

Export to ROM File

This creates a binary file with extension .ROM that can be used to program the memory card
directly using a programmer.

Download to Panel

Floating keypads created with the Keypad Designer software need to be downloaded to the
panel in addition to the standard project file. Once the keypads have been downloaded, the
UniOP panel will use them for editing when in Data Entry mode.

Note: If you created a custom Data Entry screen using the Special Pages section in Designer,
the keypads created in the Keypad Designer software will not be used.

Keypad Designer keypads can be downloaded to the UniOP panel by using the standard
download cable connected to the PC/Printer port.

Selecting the Download icon will start the communication session between the Keypad
Designer utility and the UniOP panel.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 378
Tech-note

When the New File checkbox is marked, this indicates that the keypad being downloaded is a
new object that is not intended to substitute an existing keypad.

The left part of the dialog box shows the keypads that have been downloaded to the UniOP
panel. The right part of the dialog box shows the association between each of the keypads and
the corresponding field types.

When selecting OK, the download procedure will begin and the Transfer dialog box will be
displayed.

This dialog box shows information about the current download process, such as the completion
rate of the process, the estimated time for completion and the average transfer speed.

Once the file download is completed, the next keypad can be downloaded to the UniOP panel.

Edit Menu

Edit Menu

The Edit menu contains many familiar Windows commands for working with text and
objects on the page.

Undo

Redo

Cut

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 379
Tech-note

Copy

Paste, and

Delete,

plus the less familiar commands

Components

Communication Parameters

Keyboard

SSFDC

Components

The Components dialog shows in one single list all the object / components present in a given
page.

Communication Parameters

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 380
Tech-note

The Communication Parameters dialog allows the user to configure the setting of the
communication port.

The communication parameters need to be set as follows in order to perform a successful

keypad download:

Baud rate: 38400 (recommended)

Parity: none

Stop bits: 2

Data Bits: 8

In addition, specify the Com Port to be used.

Keyboard

Keyboard

When you select Keyboard from the Keypad Designer Edit menu (or clicking the Keyboard
Properties icon) the Model Properties dialog box is displayed, allowing you to define the basic
parameters of the keypad. The Model Properties dialog box consists of three tabs:

General

Background

Panel

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 381
Tech-note

General

General tab

Items on the General tab allow you to specify a name, the number of colors, the type of
associated fields, and position information.

Name

The name assigned to the keypad. This is used by Keypad Designer to identify different
keypads.

Number of Colors

Lets you select the number of colors used to represent the keypad.

Associated Fields

Specifies the types of fields that can be edited using the selected keypad.

Note: A field type (i.e., numeric field with decimal base) can have only a single keypad
associated with it.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 382
Tech-note

Position

Position

The Position area contains the controls used to define where the keypad will appear on the
display, including:

Avoid Field

Absolute Coordinates

Horizontal Position

Vertical Position

Avoid Field

When checked, this specifies that the keypad will be displayed in a position such that the field
being edited will not be covered by the keypad. When Avoid field is checked, the Horizontal
and Vertical controls allow you to define the position of the keypad.

Absolute Coordinates

When this checkbox is marked and the Panel Predefined Model has been selected, the keypad
will be placed by the UniOP firmware in the same position as it is displayed in the Keypad
Designer utility. If the Avoid field checkbox is also selected, the firmware will place the
keypad in the specified position only if the field under editing is not covered by the keypad.

Horizontal Position

The Horizontal position can be Left, Center, or Right. This refers to relative position, the
references of which can be specified in the corresponding from list box.

Vertical Position

The Vertical position can be Top, Center or Bottom. This refers to relative position, the
references of which can be specified in the corresponding from list box.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 383
Tech-note

Background

Background

Allows you to specify both Background and Border properties.

Background

You can select a bitmap image to be used as the background of the keypad. The Browse button
allows you to search for an image and select it to be entered in the Bitmap box.

The Color list box allows for selection of the desired background color.

Border

Check the box to include a border. Allows you to specify the color of the border of the keypad.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 384
Tech-note

Panel

Panel

Options on the Panel tab allow you to set the type of panel model or the panel size, and the grid
size.

Predefined Models

Lets you specify the display type of the panel to which the keypad will be downloaded. This is
especially useful when absolute coordinates are used to place the overlapping keypad.

Panel Size

This can be used to set the dimensions of the UniOP panel when the Predefined models option
is not defined. Specify the panel width and height in pixels.

Grid Size

Specifies the character grid size (in pixels) of the panel where the keypad will be downloaded.
Correct values for the grid size can be derived from Designer by selecting one character and
reading the pixel size of the selected area in the Designer Status Bar.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 385
Tech-note

SSFDC

When the UniOP panel is in Configuration Mode, selecting SSFDC from the Edit menu within
the Keypad Designer software will return a list of all the keyboard files currently stored in the
UniOP memory.

To delete a particular keypad, simply select the name of the keypad from the list and click on
the Delete button.

To close the communication session, click on the Close button.

View Menu

This section provides information about the View menu. The View menu lets you set the
screen to view the project in the most comfortable manner for various tasks.

The items Toolbar, Status Bar, and Grid may be checked in the View menu to make them
visible. Uncheck them if you do not want them visible in the current workspace.

Zoom commands on the View menu include:

Zoom Normal - to return to normal viewing

Zoom Percent - to zoom in by a preset percentage of 50%, 75%, 100%, or

200%.

Zoom Custom - to magnify by a percentage that you specify

Zoom to Fit - to zoom to fit the defined viewing space.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 386
Tech-note

Window Menu

The Window menu contains familiar Window commands for managing multiple windows.
These include:

New Window - opens a new window

Cascade - places each new window slightly below and to the right of the
current window.

Tile - places each new window below the current window.

Arrange Icons - arranges the visible icons in an orderly manner

Currently Open File(s) - the filenames of the currently opened files.

Help Menu

The Help menu is constructed in the typical Windows manner, with a list of the Contents of
the help text, and information about the Keypad Designer.

Buttons

Creating Buttons

To create a Button, click the Button icon and click on the screen.

A button appears with its upper left corner at the point where you clicked. Right click on the
button and select Properties to bring up the Uni Button dialog box,

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 387
Tech-note

where you can define the functionality of the button, including Colors, Key Code, and Label.

Colors

The Colors area contains three list boxes that let you select the colors for the button face, the
button shadow and the button line.

Using a proper combination of the three colors will result in a three-dimensional aspect of the
button.

The button can also be made to appear as a "flat button" by assigning the same color to the
Shadow and Line color.

Key Code

The functionality assigned to the button. Each button can be assigned as a standard UniOP key
or as an ASCII character.

The available selections in the list can be fully personalized by modifying a configuration file
in the Keypad Designer installation directory called KeyCodes.txt. This file contains the ASCII
codes and the UniOP key definition used by the Keypad Designer software to build the Key
Code list of available functions and can be modified by any text editor.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 388
Tech-note

Label

Label

The Label area contains the necessary selections required to customize the button label.

Text

The text that will appear on the face of the button.

Font

The font in which the label is displayed. This can be any Windows font that is installed on
the computer that is running the Keypad Designer utility.

Picture

This lets you specify a background bitmap image for the button. Use the Browse button to
select a bitmap image.

Horizontal Align

Specifies the horizontal position of the label (right, center, left).

Vertical Align

Specifies the vertical position of the label (top, center, bottom).

Value Objects

Creating Value Objects

Creating Value Objects is done in much the same manner as creating a Button. Simply click
the Value icon and click on the screen. An object appears with its upper left corner at the point
where you clicked.

Right click on the object and select Properties to bring up the Value Box dialog box.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 389
Tech-note

From the Value Box dialog box you can set the following

Type

Alignment

Font Size

Colors.

Type

The type of value object being created

Edit (current) value

The field is configured for the editing process.

Old value
The field is configured to display the old value of the controller variable being edited.

Min (minimum) value

The field is configured to display the minimum allowable value that has been programmed for
the controller variable being edited.

Max (maximum) value.

The field is configured to display the maximum allowable value that has been programmed for
the controller variable being edited.

Alignment

Specifies the alignment of the different value objects. Possible options are: Left, Center, Right
and Default.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 390
Tech-note

Font Size

Select the font size to be used with the value object.

Colors

The Background and Foreground controls within the Colors area let you specify the
background and foreground colors for the value object.

4.10.5 Customize

Customize

The Customize dialog box (accessible under Tools - Customize or by clicking the Customize
button from View - Toolbars) allows you to customize toolbars, commands, and tools within
Designer.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 391
Tech-note

Toolbars

Toolbars

Lists the various toolbars displayed for the current project. These may include the following:

Primary toolbar - typically provides shortcuts to commonly used Windows -

type commands.

Secondary toolbar - typically provides shortcuts to Designer project-level

commands

Full Screen toolbar - typically provides shortcuts to viewing preferences

Tools toolbar - typically provides shortcuts to user-specified tools

TouchScreen toolbar - typically provides shortcuts to touchscreen-specific

commands

Commands available from the Toolbars dialog box include:

Toolbar Name

Shows the name of the selected toolbar.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 392
Tech-note

Show Tooltips

Provides a short description of a toolbar icon when the cursor pauses above the icon.

Cool Look

Gives the buttons on the toolbars an invisible edge, making for a smoother appearance on the
toolbars.

Large Buttons

Makes the buttons appear twice as large as normal for easier viewing and use.

New

Reset/Delete

The Reset button returns the toolbars to their default state.

If you have added any toolbars, the Reset button becomes a Delete button so that user-added
toolbars can be removed.

Default

Click the Default button to align and dock the toolbars to the installed state. It also reloads all
buttons on the toolbar.

Toolbar Name

Shows the name of the selected toolbar.

Show Tooltips

Provides a short description of a toolbar icon when the cursor pauses above the icon.

Cool Look

Gives the buttons on the toolbars an invisible edge, making for a smoother appearance on the
toolbars.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 393
Tech-note

Large Buttons

Makes the buttons appear twice as large as normal for easier viewing and use.

Reset Delete

The Reset button returns the toolbars to their default state.

If you have added any toolbars, the Reset button becomes a Delete button so that user-added
toolbars can be removed.
Default
Click the Default button to align and dock the toolbars to the installed state. It also reloads all
buttons on the toolbar.

Commands

Commands

This section lets you customize the buttons and descriptions of various categories of items.

Categories

Lists the various toolbars onto which the various commands are grouped.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 394
Tech-note

Buttons

The icons for the currently highlighted toolbar category are shown. Drag a button to any
toolbar.

Description

Displays a description of the activity performed by each button on a toolbar. Select a category,
then click a button to see its description.

Tools

Tools

The tools tab allows you to have the possibility to launch external applications from within
Designer.

Commands in this tabinclude:

Menu Contents,

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 395
Tech-note

Command,

Arguments, and

Initial Directory.

New

Inserts a new tool into the list of Menu Contents and the Tools menu.

Delete

Deletes a tool from the list of Menu Contents and the Tools menu.

Move Up

Rearranges the list of Menu Contents and the Tools menu so that the selected tool is moved up
one position.

Move Down

Rearranges the list of Menu Contents and the Tools menu so that the selected tool is moved
down one position.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 396
Tech-note

Menu Contents

This section of the dialog allows you to define New Tools, to Delete already existing ones, to
move one tool up (Move Up) or down (Move Down) in the tools list.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 397
Tech-note

Command

This area of the dialog allows the user to specify the full file name of the application to be
launched. Press the "..." button to look in the file system for the application executable file.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 398
Tech-note

Arguments

Use this line to enter the optional parameters (command line parameters) that have to be passed
to the application.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 399
Tech-note

Initial Directory

Use this optional field to specify the initial working directory (folder) in which the application
is to be launched. Press the "..." button to look in the file system for a suitable directory.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 400
Tech-note

4.10.6 Options

Options

Selection Options from the Tools menu brings up the Layout Options dialog box. This dialog
box contains two tabs, General and Layout.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 401
Tech-note

General

The General tab allows you to specify if the if the page names have to be displayed or not by
the panel.

The "Show page names in panel font" option allows you to show the page names with the
panel font inside the Page Options dialog.

The "Draw button shading..." option allows you to control if buttons inside bitmaps or custom
touch cells have to be shaded or not.

The "Interpolate character shapes..." option controls how the character shapes created with
previous version of Designer are to be converted into the new graphic format. By default the
option is on, if you get a bad conversion, try to disable it and repeat the operation.

The "Enable all languages..." controls how the multilanguage texts created with previous
version of Designer are to be converted into the new graphic format. By default the option is
on, i.e. all languages are enabled, otherwise disables the text object for languages with empty
texts.

When the “On Designer Startup open the last used project” option is checked Designer will
load at at start up the last used project automatically.

Using the “Select default project directory” you can specify the default project directory where
the Designer files are stored

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 402
Tech-note

Layout

Layout

The Layout tab allows you to control the Grid and the Text Entry behaviours.

Grid

Grid

The options under the Grid section let you display a grid on the screen, align items with the
grid, and set the spacing of the grid.

Show Grid

Check this box to display a grid on the screen for the current project.

Snap to Grid

Check this box if project items are to align with the grid.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 403
Tech-note

Spacing

The grid spacing may be based on character size, or you may set a custom grid size by setting
the number of pixels for the grid in both the X and Y directions.

Text Entry

Check the Word Wrap box under Tools - Options to enable word wrapping, which
automatically continues a sentence on additional lines if it does not fit on the current line. If
word wrapping is not selected, then the portion of any lines that are too long for the display
will not be viewable.

4.10.7 Advanced

Advanced

Commands in the Advanced submenu on the Tools menu include:

Format SSFDC

Erase Protocols in Panel

Erase NiceFonts in Panel

FW Rescue Mode

Validate Project Data

Connect to Tags

Swap Protocols

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 404
Tech-note

Format SSFDC

The SSFDC card comes formatted for use inside of a UniOP panel. If it becomes necessary to
format the SSFDC card, the Format SSFDC command can be used.

This refers to a special feature that allows you to format the panel memory card using the
UniLOD programmer. It is an external device for memory card programming via PC parallel
port.

Erase Protocols in Panel

From the point of view of the UniOP panel a project consists of:

project data

graphics (optional)

enhanced fonts (optional)

Keypad Designer keyboards (optional)

protocol or communication driver

This command allows to you to delete, via the serial line link, ONLY the protocol part of the
project. Without the protocol a panel cannot start in Operation Mode.

Erase NiceFonts in Panel

From the point of view of the panel Nice Fonts consist of files downloaded to the panel
memory card. This command allows you to delete them via the serial line link.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 405
Tech-note

FW Rescue Mode

UniOP panels use the boot file that resides inside the internal FLASH memory to load
firmware code. When the internal boot file is corrupted or missing, the firmware file cannot be
loaded and the UniOP panel display will remain off.

In this condition, it is necessary to use the FW Rescue Mode command to download a new
copy of the boot file.

Note: Make sure that the Firmware Download flag on the Settings index tab within the Panel
Setup dialog box is enabled. Otherwise the FW Rescue Mode command will be hidden.

After connecting the serial line of the UniOP panel to the computer, simply click on the FW
Rescue Mode command from the Tools menu and follow the instructions that will appear on
the computer.

The rescue procedure will ask you to turn the UniOP panel off, then back on.

When communication is established, the rescue procedure will check the boot files that are
inside the firmware directory on the computer and prompt you to begin downloading the most
recent version.

After completing these operations, the UniOP panel will restart.

Validate Project Data

Validate Project Data is a command introduced to verify the consistency of a Designer project
file and automatically fix any known problem. When a not valid object is found and there is no
way for an automatic fix, the object is deleted from the project. A detailed log file with the list
of the changes applied to the project is also generated and stored as "ProjectFix.log" into the
working folder.

Warning:
Be sure to save a backup copy of your project before run this command.

Connect to Tags

The Connect to Tags command connects the active project with the selected tags database.
This command checks the controller reference of each field in the project and compare it with

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 406
Tech-note

the logical addresses from the selected tag dictionary linking the first hit in the tag database. If
the controller reference is not found in the tags database, then the field will not be tied to any
tag. If the same controller reference is found in the tags database twice, the second instance
will never be tied.

Note:
This command is active only when no tags database is already linked to the active project.

Swap Protocols

Swap Protocols command is available only when the current project is double protocol
enabled. Using this command you can swap the order of the Primary and Secondary drivers.
This will phisically resutl in a port swap on the panel between the two channels.

4.10.8 Replace Images

The Replace Image dialog box provides an easy way to work with the images of the currently
opened project.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 407
Tech-note

The user is provided with three toolbar buttons (i.e. Replace image, Replace all images, Edit
Image) in order to manipulate/replace the images in the project. All the three commands can
be invoked via context sensitive menu as shown below.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 408
Tech-note

Replace image

When only one image of the project has to be replaced with another image Replace image
command can be used. Once this command is invoked the open file dialog is shown from
which the user can select the new image.

Replace all images

By using this command the user can change all the images of the project at a single stretch.
The Replace All command first gets the image directory and once the directory is selected by
the user the below Confirm Images dialog is shown.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 409
Tech-note

If there any discrepancy in images the concerned image can be individually replaced using
Replace Image command.

Note :- By checking the Des5 compatibility dithering option user can simulate the Des5
dithering in Designer.

4.11 Window Menu

4.11.1 Window Menu

This chapter provides information about the Window menu. The Window menu provides
choices in the appearance of project windows.

New Window

Cascade

Tile Horizontally

Tile Vertically

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 410
Tech-note

4.11.2 New Window

The New Window command opens a new, blank window. This option is currently disabled.

4.11.3 Cascade

Selecting Cascade from the Window menu displays all open windows in an overlapping
fashion, with each new window opening lower and to the right of the previous window.

4.11.4 Tile Horizontally

Choosing Tile Horizontally from the Window menu displays all open windows simultaneously
on the same screen, with each new window displayed below the other open windows.

4.11.5 Tile Vertically

Choosing Tile Vertically from the Window menu displays all open windows simultaneously on
the same screen, with each new window displayed beside the other open windows.

4.12 Application Menu

4.12.1 Application Menu

This section provides information on the Application menu. The Application menu is the one
appearing when the user right-clicks on the title area and provides access to familiar
Windows commands for management the application itself.

Restore

Move

Size

Minimize

Maximize

Close

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 411
Tech-note

4.12.2 Restore

The Restore command on the Designer menu restores the project page to a previous
appearance.

4.12.3 Move

The Move command on the Designer menu makes it possible to move the Designer project
screen for placement on the overall Designer screen.

4.12.4 Size

The Size command on the Designer menu lets you easily resize the Designer project screen
within the overall Designer screen.

4.12.5 Minimize

The Minimize command on the Designer menu makes it possible to minimize the Designer
project screen to an icon within the overall Designer screen. Minimize buttons in the top right
corners of screens perform the same action.

4.12.6 Maximize

The Maximize command on the Designer menu lets you maximize the Designer project screen
to take up all possible space within the overall Designer screen. Maximize buttons in the top
right corners of screens perform the same action.

4.12.7 Close

The Close command on the Designer menu closes the current Designer project. You will be
prompted to save the project if necessary. Close buttons in the top right corners of screens
perform the same action, as does simultaneously pressing the Ctrl+F4 keys.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 412
Tech-note

5 Workspace

5.1 Workspace

The status bar to the left of the main Designer screen provides information on project pages
and lists various graphics and objects that can be placed in a project.

If Workspace is checked in the View menu, the workspace will be visible. The Workspace is
composed of three tabs: Graphics, Objects, and Project.

The default position of the workspace is to the left of the main Designer screen, however the
workspace can be moved anywhere on the Designer screen. To hide the workspace, uncheck it
under the View menu. To make it visible again, simply check it again.

Note: Right-clicking in the frame of the workspace box brings up a number of options for
viewing the workspace. Select Allow Docking to dock the workspace against any of the four
sides of the application. If the check box is removed, then the workspace will act as a mini-
window, which can be placed anywhere and resized. On the other hand, clicking Float in main
window causes the workspace to occupy the entire application window and minimize the
graphics view.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 413
Tech-note

5.2 Graphics

The project workspace can display commonly used bitmap graphics that can be easily imported
into a project.

Click on the Graphics tab at the bottom of the workspace to view the graphics selections.
Select a category of graphic (blowers, pipes, tanks, etc.) from the pull-down list at the top of
the workspace. Commonly used graphics for that class of item will be shown in the workspace.
Simply click on the selected item and drag it over to the place on the project page where it is to
be inserted.

As the graphic is dropped into place the Bitmap Settings dialog box appears so that any
necessary changes can be made to the graphic. Upon clicking OK, the graphic will appear on
the project page. Should any further changes be necessary, click on the graphic once to select it
(if it is not already selected), then right-click on the graphic and select Edit to go to the Bitmap
Editor.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 414
Tech-note

5.3 Objects

The project workspace can display commonly used objects that can be easily imported into a
project. Click on the Objects tab at the bottom of the workspace to view various objects. Select
a category of graphic (custom touch cells, dynamic graphics, meters, buttons, etc.) from the
pull-down list at the top of the workspace.

Commonly used objects for that class of item will be shown in the workspace. Simply click on
the selected item and drag it over to the place on the project page where it is to be inserted.
Should any changes to the object be necessary, click on the graphic once to select it (if it is not
already selected), then right-click on the graphic to go to the appropriate Properties dialog box.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 415
Tech-note

5.4 Project

5.4.1 Project

The project workspace can be used to display a tree of the currently open project.

Click on the Project tab at the bottom of the workspace to view various all the pages in that
project. All pages are listed by title. To open a page in the project, simply double-click on that
page in the project workspace.

5.4.2 Data Transfer

The Data Transfer feature lets you exchange data between two controllers or between registers
within a single controller. A job refers to one complete data transfer. The data transfer
configuration allows you to set the job execution mode, the source and destination references,
the number of words to transfer.

Right click on Data Transfer item to add a new Data Transfer Job

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 416
Tech-note

Destination Reference
Clicking the "..." button under Destination Reference brings up the Data Field Properties
dialog box where you can specify the register to be written to.

Job Execution Mode

The Job Execution Mode box lets you select how the data is transferred, either On Request or
In Cycles.

Number of Words to Transfer

The maximum number of words for each job is 30.

Source Reference
Clicking the "..." button under Source Reference brings up the Data Field Properties
dialog box where you can specify the register to be read.

To Delete a Data Transfer Job simply right click on Data Transfer item and select Delete Job
from the contextual menu.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 417
Tech-note

6 Basics

6.1 Basics

This section provides:

a Quick-Start tutorial,

a description of the Designer screen,

instructions on how to configure Designer to create a project,

instructions on how to create a new project using simple U/I elements and
simple I/O fields,

instructions on setting up your project to generate a printed report, and

how to upload and download your project.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 418
Tech-note

6.2 Designer Screen

6.2.1 Designer Screen

The Designer software presents a screen that has elements familiar to anyone used to
Windows -based software.

A title bar across the top of the screen shows the program, file name, and page number. Below
the title bar is a menu bar with pull-down menus. Below the menu bar are toolbars with various
icons that are shortcuts to commonly-used commands. A workspace in the lower left provides
a project overview. The project screen in the lower right is the working area where project
pages are viewed during development.

As is common for Windows -based software, there are Minimize, Maximize and Close
buttons in the top right corner.

The appearance of Designer may be customized to your particular needs by using the
commands in the View menu.

Menu Bar

Toolbars

Workspace

Project Screen

Status Bar

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 419
Tech-note

Right-Click Menus

Tooltips

Getting Help

6.2.2 Menu Bar

The menu bar across the top of the Designer screen lists the pull-down menus available in
Designer.

These include File, Edit, View, Insert, Page, Project, Transfers, Tools, Window, and Help.
Each of these menus and the commands contained under them are described in the reference
material.

A Designer menu may also be present on the toolbar. Depending upon the selections made
under the Windows menu, the Designer menu may appear at the top of the individual project
screen rather than with the other menu selections across the top of the Designer screen.

Various features will be enabled/disabled depending on the panel model and firmware version
of the panel that you have selected for the project. When you start a new project the previously
used panel (in the previous Designer session) is used as default.
Basically, menu items reflect the available functionality of the current panel for which you are
defining a project.

6.2.3 Toolbars

Various toolbars may be displayed on the application area (in proximity of the borders).

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 420
Tech-note

These may include the following:

Primary toolbar

Typically provides shortcuts to commonly used Windows -type commands.

Secondary toolbar

Typically provides shortcuts to Designer project-level commands.

Full Screen toolbar

Typically provides shortcuts to viewing preferences.

Tools toolbar

Typically provides shortcuts to user-specified tools.

TouchScreen toolbar

Typically provides shortcuts to touchscreen-specific commands.

The appearance of the toolbars may be changed using commands under View - Toolbar.
As is normal with Windows applications, toolbars can float or be docked. To undock a
toolbar, click on the double bars on one edge of the toolbar (or simply double-click on the
toolbar) and drag the toolbar to any position on the screen. To dock the toolbar, drag the
toolbar so that the double bars on one edge touch the edge of the screen.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 421
Tech-note

6.2.4 Project Screen

The project screen is the main work area where project pages are created and modified.

6.2.5 Right-Click Menus

Right-click menus are available to keep commonly-used commands conveniently close at

hand. Simply left-click on an item or object on a page to select it, then right-click to activate
the right-click menu for that item or object. Menus are customized for the particular item or
object selected, but common menu items include:

Cut

The Cut command removes the selected item from the current page and places it on the
Windows clipboard. This action can also be activated by pressing the Ctrl+X keys.

Copy

The Copy command makes a copy of the selected item from the current page and places it on
the Windows clipboard. This action can also be activated by pressing the Ctrl+C keys.

Paste

The Paste command places items from the Windows clipboard onto the current page at the
current position of the cursor. This action can also be activated by pressing the Ctrl+V keys.

Select Covered Object

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 422
Tech-note

If one object is on top of another, this command selects the object underneath. This is handy if
it is difficult to left-click on the bottom item to select it.

Order

Sets the position of an object in relation to other objects that are covering it and/or covered by
it

Align

If there are two or more currently selected objects/items, this command allows to align them.

Group / Ungroup

If there are two or more currently selected objects/items, these command allow to respectively
group / un-group them. Group will always be created in the current layer. The current layer
name is always displayed in the edit control part of the active layer combo box.

Edit

Brings up the Bitmap Editor.

Properties
Brings up the Properties dialog box appropriate for that type of object or item, where settings
for the object or item can be changed.

6.2.6 Tooltips

As part of the Designer software's help system, help prompts are available to identify the
various icons. These help prompts are called tooltips.

To view a tooltip, simply place your cursor over an icon and hold it there for a few seconds
without clicking. A small box will appear with a brief description of the icon.

Tooltips are enabled by default. If you should need to disable or enable tooltips you may do so
under Tools - Customize. On the Toolbars tab is a checkbox for Show Tooltips.

6.2.7 Getting Help

If you are unsure about the meaning of an item or unsure what to do next, help is never far
away. Many dialog boxes include a Help button, which you can press to read information
about that dialog box.

Help text is also always available under the Help menu.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 423
Tech-note

6.3 Designer Setup

6.3.1 Designer Setup

The first thing you should do upon starting the Designer software is to configure Designer to
work with your particular panel and controller.

In Panel Setup you input all the parameters such as panel model, firmware version, available
memory, etc., before creating any projects. Then use Configure Controller to specify the type
and model of controller to be used.

Note: The panel must be in Configuration Mode in order to communicate with the PC.

6.3.2 Transfer Settings

To verify the transfer settings between the PC and your panel, check under Transfers - Options
- Serial ports for communication parameters between Designer and the panel.

All UniOP panels are capable of communicating with a PC at a speed of at least 9600 baud.
However, several panels will communicate at speeds of 19,200 baud and 38,400 baud. With
some Pentium-based computers, a speed of 19200 baud may prove to work more efficiently
than 38400 baud.

Set the baud rate, parity, data bits and stop bits to be used in communication between the panel
and the PC. To change the settings, click on the selection arrows and pick a different setting
from the pull-down lists For further information on these options, see the Port Settings section.

Note: The communication parameters that you set up here need to match the communication
parameters of your modem.

Note: Check the Use modem check box under Transfers - Options - Serial ports ONLY if you
are using a modem to communicate between your PC and the panel. This is not necessary if
you have a cable between the PC and panel, thus the Use modem box should not be checked.

Note: Sometimes other programs will "take up" your PC communications port. For example, if
you have a Palm Pilot, it automatically loads some files upon power up of your computer that
"take up" the communications port. In the bottom right hand corner of your computer monitor,
make sure that all programs that may take up a communication port are closed.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 424
Tech-note

6.3.3 Controller Selection and Setup

Controller Selection and Setup

Before creating your first project using the Designer software, it is worth checking the
controller setup to make sure that it reflects the controller that you will be using.

Using the Get Panel Resources command from the Transfers menu will most likely set the
controller settings to be compatible with your system, but sometimes changes are necessary.

Configure Controller

Controller Setup

Configure Controller

Different controllers require different parameters in order to communicate properly with the
operator interface panel.

Verify that the controller family (i.e., Allen Bradley, Mitsubishi, etc.) matches that of your
selected controller by choosing Configure Controller from the Project menu. Make sure that
the listed controller is the type of controller driver that you will be using. If it is not, click the
"..." button to select a different driver from a list.

Controller Setup

After selecting a controller by clicking the "..." button under Project - Configure Controller,
you should verify that the controller model is correctly specified. This can be accomplished by
clicking the Controller Setup button from the Select Controller dialog box. This will bring up
the Controller Setup dialog box where you can select the specific controller model that is being
used.

The communication parameters are set automatically when the controller selection is made.
However, if there is a need to change the default settings, you may press the Comm button in
the Controller Setup dialog box (available for certain controllers). This will bring up the
Communications Parameters Setup dialog box where you can check the parameters used in
panel-to-controller communication, including baud rate, parity and stop bits. To change the
settings, click on the selection arrows and pick a different setting from the pull-down lists.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 425
Tech-note

6.3.4 Panel Selection and Setup

Panel Selection and Setup

Before you begin working on a particular project, you need to specify the type of display that
your panel contains. The physical size of the screen, as well as its type (backlight LCD, passive
color) must be specified.

Failure to do this may result in the loss of text and data when you attempt to download the
project file into the panel. This can be done automatically using the Get Panel Resources
command from the Transfers menu, or manually using Panel Setup from the Project menu.

Get Panel Resources

The easiest way to set up Designer to work with your panel is to use the Get Panel Resources
command in the Transfers menu. This command prompts the Designer software to
automatically retrieve the configuration of the connected panel. This includes the physical size
of the screen, as well as its type (backlight LCD, passive color).

Note: In order to use the Get Panel Resources feature, the target panel must be connected to
the PC, the transfer parameters must be correctly set, and the panel must be in Configuration
Mode.

Panel Setup

Panel Setup

After using the Get Panel Resources feature, it is a good idea to verify the panel settings. Select
Panel Setup from the Project menu (or click on the Panel Setup icon in the toolbar). This
brings up the Panel Setup dialog box where you can configure the software for the panel that
you are using.

You can verify the panel model, memory, and firmware version, specify the time and date
format that the panel will display, identify the address of an Ethernet board if one is in use,
specify communication settings, set the panel up for remote passthrough, set time out periods,
and set panel upload protection, if necessary.

Panel Model

Panel Time/Date Settings

Passthrough Settings

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 426
Tech-note

Miscellaneous Panel Settings

Panel Model

If the correct panel model is not shown, you can choose a different panel model from the Panel
Setup dialog box on the Project menu.

From the Panel Model tab click on the down arrow located to the right of the Panel Model
window. A drop-down list will appear that shows the available panels that can be selected.
Single-click the left mouse button on the name of the panel that you will be using. The page
editor workspace will change in order to reflect the available screen area on the selected
model. Similarly, you can change the specified panel memory and firmware if necessary.

Panel Time/Date Settings

Click on the Settings tab in the Panel Setup dialog box to set the time and date formats. Pick
the format that you prefer to use in your project from the pull-down lists.

Passthrough Settings

If you wish to be able to put your UniOP panel remotely into either Configuration Mode or
Operation Mode via a modem, under Mode on the Passthrough tab (under Project - Panel
Setup) click on the button for Remote Hardware passthrough. Otherwise select Hardware
passthrough.
In the Request boxes enter any commands necessary to start or stop remote passthrough mode,
or to put the panel into Configuration Mode. Likewise, you can enter the response that you will
receive back from the panel in the Response boxes.

Note: Your UniOP panel must contain firmware version 4.10 or later to use the Remote
Hardware feature.

Note: Configuring Remote Hardware passthrough under Panel Setup enables the Remote
passthrough command on the Transfers menu.

Note: When remote passthrough mode has been activated, the UniOP panel does not
communicate with the controller and the dynamic data displayed on the screen may no longer
be correct. It may be useful to inform the user when the passthrough option is active. To do so,
create a numeric/ASCII, bargraph, or message data field under Insert - Data Fields. Set the
Reference type as Variable, click the "..." button, and select the Control Variable Data Type as
Passthrough Status. This variable can take on two values; zero meaning that passthrough is not
active, one meaning that passthrough is active.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 427
Tech-note

Miscellaneous Panel Settings

Under the Miscellaneous tab of the Panel Setup dialog box (in the Project menu) you can
configure several different panel parameters. Selecting any of the checkboxes enables the entry
boxes associated with those selections.

The Panel Upload Protection feature lets you password protect the project file so that
unauthorized uploads cannot occur. You can enter a case-sensitive password of up to eight
characters.

6.4 Creating a Project

6.4.1 Creating a Project

Before starting a new file for a new panel, please make sure that you have configured Designer
to work with the particular panel and controller that you will be using. See the sections on
Transfer Settings, Controller Selection / Set Up, and Panel Selection / Set Up for instructions
on performing these tasks.

Creating a New File

Selecting a Font

Inserting Page Objects

Saving a Project File

Memory Used by the Project File

6.4.2 Creating a New File

To create a new project, select New from the File menu, click on the New icon in the toolbar,
or press the Ctrl+N keys.

This opens the New File dialog box. Enter a name for the new project and select the file
location on the PC where the project file is to be stored. Click on an icon to identify the type of
project file to be created. Click OK.

Note: Unless otherwise specified, Designer files are assumed to have the .dpr extension.

6.4.3 Selecting a Font

To choose a new panel font, select the Panel Font icon from the toolbar or choose Edit - Fonts
- Panel Font.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 428
Tech-note

The Select Font dialog box appears with a drop-down list showing the available fonts for the
current panel. Click on name of the font to be used. Select a font size.

Note: When the area defined for a text box is small, only the sizes that can fit inside the
selected area are enabled.

6.4.4 Inserting Page Objects

Insert text on the page by clicking on the screen and typing the text.

Data fields, touch cells, etc., can be placed on the page by using the commands on the Insert
menu.

Graphics and objects may be easily placed on the page by dragging them from the workspace.
Simply click on a tab in the workspace, click on a graphic or object, and drag it onto the page.
Once placed on the page, you may move it, align it, resize it using the "handles" around it, or
edit it.

6.4.5 Saving a Project File

To save your new project, select Save from the File menu (or click on the Save icon in the
toolbar).

The cursor will be momentarily replaced with an hourglass while the file is being saved. If the
application has not been named, the Save As dialog box will appear.

The Save As dialog box can also be used to save your project under a different name. This
dialog box shows the current directory path and the current filename. A new name and path
may be entered, or the default parameters may be accepted. If the extension is omitted, ".dpr"
is assumed. If a file of the same name already exists in the selected directory, you will be
prompted to confirm the Save As operation in order to overwrite the existing file.

6.4.6 Memory Used by the Project File

You can determine how much memory is used by the current project file by selecting Memory
Use from the Project menu.

A dialog box will appear that contains information on the amount of memory that is used by
the project file, how many bytes of recipe data are contained within the project file and the
amount of memory used by the graphic information (bitmaps and touch cells) in the project
file.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 429
Tech-note

6.5 Printing

You can use Designer to configure your UniOP panel to print reports either cyclically or upon
a trigger event. You can define report formats and timetables upon which a report is printed,
configure a key or touchcell to print a report, or request a printout by using the Interlock
Mailbox.

Note: In order to use these print features, your panel must contain firmware version 4.10 or
higher.

Information on setting up a new printer, printing reports, and a printer setup example are
provided.

6.6 Project Upload and Download

When your project is completely designed, you need to transfer it from your PC to your UniOP
panel. A data transfer from your PC to a UniOP panel is termed a download.

To download data, select Download from the Transfers menu, click on the Download icon in
the toolbar, or press the F2 key.

Note: The panel must be in Configuration Mode in order for the download procedure to work.

It is also possible to download a project to an SSFDC memory card, if you have such a card
installed in your system. To download to an SSFDC card, select Download to SSFDC from the
Transfers menu or press the F6 key.

From time to time, you may wish to transfer an existing application from a UniOP panel to
your PC. This is termed an upload. To upload data, select Upload from the Transfers menu,
click on the Upload icon in the toolbar, or press the F3 key.

6.7 Simple Data Fields

Data fields are those items that the Designer software uses to display information from the
controller. These dynamic data items come in the form of numeric fields (which can be
displayed in numeric format or in ASCII format), bargraphs, message fields, attributes,
dynamic graphics, time, and date fields.

These fields can be created by either selecting one of the seven types of fields from the Data
Fields submenu in the Insert menu or by clicking on the various data field icons in the toolbar.
This brings up the data Field Properties dialog box for the appropriate data field type.

For most data fields it is possible to specify the size and style of the data field, as well as the
controller reference location. Depending upon the type of data field, it may be possible to
specify the data format, the range, and whether not to apply scaling to the data.
Designer uses placeholders to indicate the presence of data fields on a project page. These
placeholders include:

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 430
Tech-note

Data Field Type Placeholder

Numeric 9's
ASCII A's
Bargraphs sample bargraph
Message Fields M's
Attributes None
Dynamic Graphics sample graphic
Time Fields 24:00:00 (depending on time format)
Date Fields dd/mm/yy (depending on date format)
A number of examples are available to help you better understand the data field creation
process.

Numeric Data Field Example

ASCII Data Field Example

Bargraph Example

Message Field Example

Attribute Example

Dynamic Graphics Example 1

Dynamic Graphics Example 2

Time Data Field Example

Date Data Field Example

6.8 Simple Touch Cells

A touch cell allows a panel user to interact with the panel. The user is able to touch a panel in
an indicated position and receive a visual cue. The various types of touch cells available and
their functionality are:

Panel Key Button: Used for creating a touch cell as a panel key (i.e., Enter).
Panel keys represent all of the function keys, numeric keys, and arrow keys, as
well as the help key, the clear key, the enter key, the +/- key, and the decimal
point key. An example of creating a panel key button is provided.

ASCII Key Button: Used for creating a touch cell as an ASCII character. An
example of creating an ASCII key button is provided.

Push Button: Used for creating a touch cell as a push button. These push
buttons mimic mechanical push buttons in that one logic value represents open
contacts and another logic value represents closed contacts. An example of
creating a push button is provided.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 431
Tech-note

Illuminated Push Button: Used for creating a touch cell as an illuminated push
button. The only difference between an illuminated pushbutton and a
pushbutton is that the face of the illuminated pushbutton can reflect the status
of a bit in the PLC. An example of creating an illuminated push button is
provided.

Selector Switch: Used for creating a touch cell as a 2, 3 or 4 position selector

switch. An example of creating a selector switch is provided.

Indicator Light: Used for creating an indicator lamp. An example of creating an

indicator light is provided.

Generic Command Button: Used for creating a touch cell as a panel key (i.e.,
Enter), macro command (i.e., show alarm list), or ASCII character. An example
of creating a generic command button is provided.

A touch cell can be used to write to a controller. Keyboard Macro Editor

commands make this an easy task. An example of doing this is provided.

To insert a touch cell click the appropriate touch cell icon on the toolbar or select a type of
touch cell from the Touch Cells submenu in the Insert menu, then use the cursor to define the
area in which the touch cell is to be placed. A dialog box will appear where the touch cell may
be configured.

7 Advanced

7.1 Alarms

7.1.1 Alarms

Enhanced Mode alarms offer a maximum of 1024 alarms, which are broken into 4 blocks
(there are some models which offer 256 total alarms in 4 blocks). The lower the numerical
value assigned to the alarm, the higher its priority. Each block can be addressed to any register
within the controller's memory. Each alarm is referenced to a bit in the controller. Whenever a
bit goes high, the respective alarm message will be displayed.

To use alarms, select Alarms from the Project menu. Instructions on configuring alarms,
alarms and the Keyboard Macro Editor, alarms safety issues, and alarms examples are given.

Note: Compatibility Mode alarms are not supported in Designer.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 432
Tech-note

Note: Beginning with firmware version 4.22, you can define an alarm message up to 40
characters in length for all UniOP operator interfaces that have a 20-character display. In these
cases, the complete message associated with an alarm will take up three (3) lines on the
display. The first line will be for time and date indication, the second and third lines will be for
the alarm message itself.

7.1.2 Configuring Alarms

Alarms are configured using the Alarms command from the Project menu.

The Alarms dialog box allows you to set the alarm block options, enter alarm messages, and
set alarm options.

Each alarm is associated with a message and a trigger. You can specify whether alarms need to
be acknowledged, displayed, or printed.

7.1.3 Alarms and the Keyboard Macro Editor

Alarm behaviour may be set using the Keyboard Macro Editor from the Project menu.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 433
Tech-note

From the All Pages and Page n tabs the command Show Alarm List is available.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 434
Tech-note

The Alarms tab contains the following commands:

Go to page

Write to Controller

Toggle relay

Wait

Page Mode

Acknowledge alarm

Scroll Up

Scroll Down

Print alarms

Go to alarm page

Step Control Variables

Acknowledge all alarms

7.1.4 Alarms Safety Issues

Alarms notify the panel user that a trigger event has occurred. This trigger event may also be
linked to other control sensors or monitors. The following considerations should be kept in
mind when dealing with alarm issues.

Warning: The Designer alarm system should not be the primary warning system for
circumstances that could result in physical injury or machine damage.

Warning: Care must be exercised so that alarm messages do not cover important areas of the
panel and impede the user's understanding of the situation.

Warning: Emergency stop buttons and controls critical for safe operation of a system should
not be placed on a screen where they may be inaccessible during emergency situations. These
controls should always be hard-wired.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 435
Tech-note

7.2 Automatic Firmware Upgrade Procedure

7.2.1 Automatic Firmware Upgrade Procedure

New UniOP panels that contain the T2000 board (FW58 units) are able to accept new firmware
files through the serial line or through the SSFDC memory card.

For these panel models, the firmware files can be stored in the SSFDC memory card. There
are four kinds of firmware files that can be stored in the SSFDC memory card. They are called
“Boot”, “Firmware”, “MIPS Code” and “MIPS service” files.

A copy of the Boot and the Firmware files is also stored inside the internal panel FLASH
memory. Storing a copy of these files inside the SSFDC card is not mandatory, but it is
necessary when the internal FLASH memory must be updated.

A copy of the MIPS Code file must always be stored in the SSFDC memory card. In fact, this
code is always loaded from the SSFDC memory card when the UniOP panel switches from the
Configuration Mode” state to the Operating Mode state.

MIPS Service is not necessary for normal panel operation. It is necessary only for running in
Service Mode.

Information is provided on the following topics:

Procedure to Upgrade the Internal Flash Memory

Check Firmware Versions

Firmware Files Directory

FW Rescue Mode

7.2.2 Procedure to Upgrade the Internal Flash Memory

To check the firmware versions that are stored inside the panel memory, it is necessary to put
the panel in Configuration Mode and hold the Up-Arrow key for 2 seconds. A table similar to
the one shown below will appear:

RELEASE.VERSION UPGRADE
FLASHSSFDC
Boot04.30W04.35D.0001
Fw04.35D04.35D
Press Enter to continue...
The FLASH column shows the active firmware version. The column SSFDC shows the
version stored inside the SSFDC card. After pressing the ENTER key, the message shown
below will appear.
Press Up Arrow to Update...
...or wait to leave unchanged

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 436
Tech-note

Pressing the Up Arrow key will cause the firmware upgrade procedure to start. Waiting for 2
seconds without pressing any keys will cause the procedure to abort without substituting the
active firmware files.

7.2.3 Check Firmware Versions

Designer will enable the download features, accessible from the Transfers menu, when a panel
model with the T2000 board (FW58 unit) is detected. Note that this menu item is not visible
when the selected panel does not support the download features.

Download features can be enabled manually from the Settings index tab within the Panel Setup
dialog box. Manual settings are necessary when a real panel is not physically connected to the
PC and a Get Panel Resources command cannot be executed.

Correct setting of the Firmware Download flag is necessary to give Designer the necessary
information required to correctly calculate the SSFDC memory used, taking into account the
size of the firmware files.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 437
Tech-note

After exchanging information with the panel to detect the version of the firmware files that are
inside the SSFDC memory card, the above dialog box is displayed. The left column displays
the versions of the firmware files that are located in the SSFDC memory card. The right
column displays versions of firmware files ONLY if the user’s computer contains a newer
version. If a newer version is not detected, <Do not update> will be displayed.

Update
This will start the download procedure. It does nothing when all of the Designer fields
contains the <Do not update> strings. Please note that after updating the firmware files inside
the panel SSFDC memory, it will be necessary to upgrade the panel’s FLASH memory as
previously described.

Do not update
Use this button to exit from this dialog box without updating the firmware files.

Note: Designer checks the firmware version before beginning any download operation. When
an old firmware file version is detected inside the panel, the above dialog box is displayed to
give the user a chance to upgrade the firmware file.

7.2.4 Designer Firmware Files Directory

The setup procedure installs a Firmware subdirectory inside the Designer working directory.
This directory will contain all the necessary firmware files used by Designer to check and
update the panel SSFDC memory card.

New firmware files have to be copied inside this directory to be accessible from Designer.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 438
Tech-note

7.3 Double Protocol

7.3.1 Double Protocol

A single UniOP panel can communicate with Controllers simultaneously using different
communication protocols. Configuring UniOP panels to support such operation is easy.

Multi-protocol support is provided by the Designer software, and is natural and easy to learn
and use.

Different controllers are connected to the UniOP panel in different ways. Some are connected
through a serial line (either RS232, RS422, RS485 or current loop), other through an Ethernet-
based LAN using UDP/IP or TCP/IP protocol stack, and still other can be connected to the
UniOP only after a custom communication module is plugged into it.

Most UniOP models are delivered with two serial ports. The PLC port supports RS232, RS422,
RS485 and current loop communication. The PC/Printer port supports only RS232
communication.

The AUX port can be used for various purposes, depending on the type of the communication
module plugged into the UniOP. If this is one of the Ethernet modules (TCM10, SCM11), the
AUX port is used as the Ethernet port. But other communication modules can be plugged in,
enabling connecting the UniOP to a wide diversity of controllers.

Of course, except for the necessary hardware needed to establish communication to a particular
controller, an adequate Controller Driver has to be present in the Designer for Windows
software. In the multi-protocol configuration case, drivers for both communication protocols
will have to be available.

When the UniOP communicates with one or more controllers using only one communication
protocol (single-protocol configuration), then, if this protocol is a serial protocol, the
controllers are connected to the PLC port of the UniOP panel. Of course, if the protocol is a
non-serial protocol (e.g. Ethernet), an adequate communication module must be plugged into
UniOP and then the controllers must be connected to the AUX port.

When configuring the UniOP to communicate with controllers using simultaneously two
communication protocols (multi-protocol configuration), distinction must be made between the
First Communication Driver (used to communicate using the First Protocol) and the Second
Communication Driver (used to communicate using the Second Protocol). It is important to
remember the following rules for serial drivers:

First Driver always communicates with the controllers over the PLC port

Second Driver always communicates with the controllers over the PC/Printer
port.

Of course, if any of the protocols is a non-serial protocol, its Driver will use the AUX port
instead.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 439
Tech-note

Although not many, it can be seen that there must be some restrictions due to hardware reasons
when two communication protocols are used:

If the Communication Driver is alone using both serial communication ports -

the PLC and the PC/Printer port - it cannot be used in multi-protocol
configurations.

If two Communication Drivers are both serial, there will be no ports left to
connect the serial UniNET network. (You can still use the Ethernet-based
UniNET, of course.)

Since only one communication module can be plugged into the Panel, a
combination of two Communication Drivers, each requiring such a module,
cannot be supported.

As the Ethernet protocol is also supported by a communication module, a

combination of one Ethernet-based Communication Driver and a Driver
requiring any other communication module cannot be supported either.

Note: Two Ethernet-based Communication Drivers can normally be used simultaneously

because they will both communicate through the same Ethernet communication module.
Ethernet-based UniNET can also be used in addition to one or two Ethernet-based
Communication Drivers.

Information is provided on the following topics:

Enabling Multiple-Protocol Configuration

Controllers Setup

Placing Fields on a Page

Downloading Uploading and Getting Panel Resources

Configuring UniNET Networks

7.3.2 Enabling Multiple-Protocol Configuration

After choosing the "Configure Controller..." menu option in the Designer software, the
Configure Controllers Dialog Box will pop up. It is used for selecting the communication
drivers both in single protocol and multi-protocol configurations.

To select the Second Driver check the “Enable Double Protocol” check box. A new text box
and a button are shown. After selecting particular Driver from the list below, you simple click

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 440
Tech-note

at the adequate “Set” button to set the First or the Second Driver. (To go back to the single
protocol configuration case, simply uncheck the “Enable Double Protocol” check box.)

It can be noted that once the “Enable Double Protocol” check box is checked, the contents of
the list box showing all available drivers may be somewhat changed. After checking the check
box, only drivers that have the multi-protocol capability enabled are shown in the list box.
Thus, if there are such drivers installed that do not allow combining with other drivers into
multi-protocol configurations, these will be excluded from the list and the list will be
shortened. After un-checking the check box, all the drivers will be re-displayed in the list box.

By pressing the “OK” button the configuration is accepted. The Designer will issue a warning
if an illegal combination is chosen and will not close the Dialog Box until an allowed
configuration is selected.

After the multi-protocol application is successfully configured, the status line of the Designer
main window shows the “Double protocol” string in the place where the driver name string is
displayed in the single protocol case. (Limited space does not allow displaying both names.)

If at least one of the drivers is a serial driver, the decision which Driver will be set as the First,
and which one the Second is not completely unimportant.

The First Driver will use the PLC port, and the Second Driver will use the PC/Printer port. So
if one of drivers is using the current loop, it will be necessary to make it the First Driver and so
ensure it uses the PLC port, because the current loop capability is only implemented on this
serial port. Also, as the PC/Printer and the PLC port connectors are of different genders,
selecting the First and the Second Driver smartly can make cabling easier and less expensive.

7.3.3 Controllers Setup

The "Configure Controller..." menu option always displays the Configure Controllers Dialog
Box.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 441
Tech-note

When pressing the "...” button associated to a given controller, the Designer will show a list of
controllers, with the associated controller in pre-selected status.

From this list it is possible to open the Controller Setup Dialog Box, by pressing the Controller
Setup button.

It can be noted, that it is allowed to have PLC networks configured for both drivers (naturally,
if both communication drivers are able of supporting PLC networks). Therefore, two
independent PLC network branches can be connected to a single Panel.

7.3.4 Placing Fields on a Page

When the user in the Designer chooses to put a field onto a page, the "Field Properties" dialog
box is displayed.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 442
Tech-note

When selecting "PLC" in the "Reference Section" and pressing the "..." button, the "Data Field
Properties" dialog box is displayed. In the "Network" tab the user can specify which controller
is to be referred by the data field.

This offers the user a very flexible approach. It is possible to put fields from all controllers
next to each other on a single UniOP page, irrespective of the communication protocol they are
using. Moreover, it is possible to scale a value from one controller with a value from the other.
It also enables you to keep parts of RDA and recipes in different controllers. The same is with
alarm triggers. The best of all, you can program data transfers from two totally different types
of controllers or controller networks.

7.3.5 Downloading Uploading and Getting Panel Resources

There is almost no difference between downloading and uploading single protocol projects and
multi-protocol projects. Only, as can be expected, first downloads of multi-protocol projects
will last longer because two drivers must be downloaded instead of one.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 443
Tech-note

The “Controller type” section of the Panel Resources Dialog Box is now two lines wide. In the
first line there will be the name of the First Driver, and in the second one the name of the
Second Driver. In the case of single protocol configuration, the second line will be empty.

7.3.6 Configuring UniNET Networks

There is no major difference in configuring UniNET network for single protocol applications
and for multi-protocol applications.

First two steps, choosing the network media and the network type, are the same. However, if
one of the network types “Single Server, Multiple Clients” or “Multiple Server, Multiple
Clients” is selected, it is worth noticing that all the UniOP network server nodes will inherit the
current configuration of the project. In other words, if the project in which the network is being
setup is currently configured for single protocol, all the UniOP node servers in the UniNET
network will be configured to use only this protocol. If the project is configured for multi-
protocol, all the UniOP node servers will again be configured to use both protocols.

If the “Mixed Multiple Servers, Multiple Clients” network type chosen, the Designer will pop
up the “Network Configuration” Dialog Box. This is the way to configure the UniNET
network completely freely. It is possible to configure UniOP nodes in different ways. Some
UniOP nodes may stand for bare client network nodes having no controllers connected to
them. Other nodes (server nodes) can be configured to communicate over one protocol (single-
controller configuration) or two protocols (multi-protocol configuration), where any UniOP
server be configured to support any allowed combination of drivers.

The “Network Configuration” Dialog Box looks as in the illustration below. (Minor
differences are possible depending on the selected network type.)

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 444
Tech-note

By selecting a node and requesting its properties (i.e. by pushing the "Properties") it is possible
to have access to the Double Protocol configuration of that node.

7.4 Interlock Mailbox

7.4.1 Interlock Mailbox

The UniOP Interlock Mailbox is designed to allow the operator interface panel to interact with
the controller's ladder logic program.

The Interlock Mailbox is simply a group of registers in the controller memory (from a
minimum of 2 registers to a maximum of 20). The mailbox can be placed anywhere in the
controller memory at an address you select. When the mailbox is enabled, the operator panel
cyclically reads the contents of the mailbox from the controller.

The controller can command the UniOP panel to perform certain tasks by placing data in the
memory area used by the mailbox. When the panel detects that the controller has written data

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 445
Tech-note

in the mailbox, it interprets the data as a numeric code for a required command. If the panel
recognizes the command, it immediately executes it. If the command requires a response from
the panel, then the panel places the response back into the mailbox itself.

Note: The Interlock Mailbox offers a powerful way to control the operation of recipes from
the controller.

In general, the Interlock MailBox works by writing a command into the Command/Response
Word.

Available commands can be seen in the table of available mailbox commands. Depending
upon the command, certain parameters may have to be entered. Once the parameters are
entered, a code needs to be written to the Status Word. When the command written into the
Command/Response Word is attempted/executed, a Response Word will be written into the
Command/Response Word, indicating the status of the command.

If you have the mailbox set up to be cyclically read, this is all that needs to be done.

If bit C15 is active, then one additional step is necessary. Since this bit must be a logic high in
order for the mailbox to be read, you need to write a value of 1 to this bit. Once it is "set", a "1"
needs to be written to the Status Word to indicate a pending request in the mailbox.

Details of enabling the Interlock Mailbox, the structure of the mailbox, Interlock Mailbox
commands, and mailbox programming are provided.

7.4.2 Enabling the Internet Mailbox

Enabling the Internet Mailbox

To enable the Interlock Mailbox, select the Interlock Mailbox tab from the Panel Controller
Interface dialog box under the Project menu.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 446
Tech-note

The mailbox is disabled by default. To enable it, simply mark the checkbox entitled Enable.

Details about the read cycle modes and the interlock reference are provided.

7.4.3 Structure of the Mailbox

Structure of the Mailbox

The controller can issue different commands depending upon the values written to the mailbox.

Some commands require parameters (which have a binary numeric format) to be included with
the command, while other commands require the panel to respond with data.

The structure of the mailbox in the controller memory is shown below. The Status Word and
the Command/Response Word are always required for the mailbox. Parameter 0 - Parameter
17 Words are only used if required by the particular mailbox command.

You can determine the controller memory addresses of all the data elements in the mailbox by
using the starting address of the mailbox area (set under Project - Panel Controller Interface -
Interlock Mailbox) and the memory map shown below.

The Interlock Reference is the address of the first Mailbox register in the controller memory.
The address can be entered directly as a string or via the Data Field Properties dialog box
displayed by clicking on the "…" button.

Offset Item
0 Status Word

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 447
Tech-note

1 Command/Response Word
2 Parameter 0
3 Parameter 1
... ...
19 Parameter 17

Note: When entering the starting address, care must be taken to ensure that the controller
memory used by the Mailbox does not overlap with the memory areas reserved for other panel
functions such as alarms, I/O update, keyboard update, etc.

Status Word

The Status Word is the main handshaking register of the mailbox. Both the controller and the
panel can write to this register. The status word contains a binary number, the meaning of
which is described below.

Code Status Written by

0 No request, Mailbox is available Controller
1 Pending request Controller
2 Mailbox busy Panel
3 Error code: Illegal command Panel
4 Command completed Panel
5 Panel restart Panel

Command Response Word

The controller specifies which mailbox command it wants to execute by placing the command
code of the desired command in the Command/Response Word.

The available mailbox commands and their command codes are given.

The UniOP panel writes a binary value to the Command/Response Word when it has executed
the command requested by the controller to indicate the result of the operation.

Parameters

The Parameter Words are used only when required by a specific command.

Some commands do not require any parameters at all. The Interlock Mailbox Commands
section describes how to use Parameter Words and which are required for each Command
Word.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 448
Tech-note

7.4.4 Interlock Mailbox Commands

Interlock Mailbox Commands

Command Description
1 Recipe Status
2 Start Recipe Download
3 Start Recipe Upload
4 Set Parameter Set Number
5 Get Parameter Set Number
6 Get Recipe Transfer Priority
7 Set Recipe Transfer Priority
17 Request Data Entry Mode
21 Request Masked Data Entry Mode
33 Password Status
49 Start Controller to Controller Transfer With No Confirmation
50 Start Controller to Controller Transfer With Confirmation
81 Set the Real Time Clock (RTC)
97 Clear Event List
113 Start Report Printout
114 Stop Report Printout
129 Get Current Language
130 Set Current Language
145 Start Screen Saver
146 Stop Screen Saver
147 Enable Screen Saver Function in Alarm Mode
148 Disable Screen Saver Function in Alarm Mode

Recipe Status

The controller can use this command to request information on the status of the recipes in the
panel.

Command code: 1

No parameters are required by this command. The panel will respond with a code in the
Command/Response Word. The possible codes are listed below.

Code Description
0 OK, Recipes contain valid data
1 Error: Recipes contain default data as defined in the project file
2 Error: There are no Recipes defined
3 Error: Error in project file

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 449
Tech-note

Start Recipe Download

The controller can use this command to start a recipe download from the panel memory to the
controller memory.

Command code: 2

Two parameters are required by this command:

Parameter 0 Page number of required recipe (1 - max. page number in project file)
Parameter 1 Parameter set number(1 - max. number of pre-defined parameter sets)

The panel will respond back to the Command/Response Word with one of the codes listed
below after performing the operation.

Note: A recipe transfer may take several seconds, depending mainly on the number of bytes
that have to be transferred.

Code Description
0 OK, Transfer completed successfully
1 Error: Recipes contain default data
2 Error: There are no Recipes defined
3 Error: Error in project file
4 Error: Illegal Page number has been requested
5 Error: Illegal number of parameter set has been requested
6 Error: The requested parameter set is locked (that is, it is being used by the
operator panel for a data entry operation)
7 Error: A communication error occurred during the transfer

Start Recipe Upload

The controller can use this command to start a recipe upload from the controller memory to the
panel memory.

Command code: 3

Two parameters are required by this command:

Parameter 0 Page number of required recipe (1 - max. page number in project file)
Parameter 1 Parameter set number(1 - max. number of pre-defined parameter sets)

After performing the operation, the panel will respond back to the Command/Response Word
with one of the codes listed below.

Note: A recipe transfer may take several seconds, depending mainly on the number of bytes
that have to be transferred.

Code Description
0 OK, Transfer completed successfully

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 450
Tech-note

2 Error: There are no Recipes defined

3 Error: Error in project file
4 Error: Illegal Page number has been requested
5 Error: Illegal number of parameter set has been requested
6 Error: The requested parameter set is locked (that is, it is being used by the operator
panel for a data entry operation)
7 Error: A communication error occurred during the transfer

Set Parameter Set Number

The controller can use this command to select a given recipe parameter set.

Command code: 4

Two parameters are required by this command:

Parameter 0 Page Number(1 - max. number of pages in the project file)

Parameter 1 Parameter Set Number(1 - max. number of pre-defined parameter sets)

After performing the operation, the panel will respond back to the Command/Response Word
with one of the codes listed below.

Code Description
0 OK
2 Error: Recipes not defined in project file
3 Error: Error in project file
4 Error: Illegal page number requested
5 Error: Illegal record number requested
6 Error: Requested record locked

Get Parameter Set Number

The controller can use this command to get the current recipe parameter set number.

Command code: 5

Only one parameter is required by this command:

Parameter 0 Page Number(1 - max. number of pages in the project file)

After performing the operation, the panel will respond back to the Command/Response Word
with one of the codes listed below.

Code Description
0 OK
2 Error: Recipes not defined in project file

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 451
Tech-note

3 Error: Error in project file

4 Error: Illegal page number requested

Get Recipe Transfer Priority

The controller can use this command to get the current recipe transfer priority level.
Command code: 6

This command requires no parameters.

After performing the operation, the panel will respond back to the Command/Response Word
with one of the codes listed below.

Code Description
0 Normal
1 Highest
2 Error: Recipes not defined in project file

Set Recipe Transfer Priority

The controller can use this command to set the current recipe transfer priority level.
Command code: 7

Only one parameter is required by this command:

Parameter 0 Priority Level (0=Normal, 1=Highest)

After performing the operation, the panel will respond back to the Command/Response Word
with one of the codes listed below.

Code Description
0 OK
2 Error: Recipes not defined in project file
3 Error: Illegal priority setting requested

Request Data Entry Mode

The controller can use this command to switch the operator panel to Data Entry Mode.

Command code: 17

Two parameters are required by this command:

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 452
Tech-note

Parameter 0 Index Number of required Page(1 - max. page number in project file)
Parameter 1 Index Number of required Data Field (1 - max. number of data fields in the
page)

After performing the operation, the panel will respond back to the Command/Response Word
with one of the codes listed below.

Code Description
0 OK
1 Error: Illegal page number has been requested
2 Error: Illegal field number has been requested
3 Error: Panel is not ready for Data Entry Mode

Request Masked Data Entry Mode

The controller can use this command to switch the operator panel to Data Entry Mode using
masked data entry. This is similar as Request Data Entry command (Paragraph 1,
CommandWord 0x0011), but Numeric Keypad is shown if touch panel is used.

Command code: 21

Two parameters are required by this command:

Parameter 0 Index Number of required Page(1 - max. page number in project file)
Parameter 1 Index Number of required Data Field (1 - max. number of data fields in the
page)
Parameter 2 Flags:
B0: masked data entry
B1-B15: reserved (0)

After performing the operation, the panel will respond back to the Command/Response Word
with one of the codes listed below.

Code Description
0 OK
1 Error: Illegal page number has been requested
2 Error: Illegal field number has been requested
3 Error: Panel is not ready for Data Entry Mode
4 Error: Panel is not a touch
5 Error: Illegal/unsupported/reserved flags are set

Password Status

The controller can use this command to request information about the current password status.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 453
Tech-note

Command code: 33

The command requires no parameters.

After performing the operation, the panel will respond back to the Command/Response Word
with one of the codes listed below.

Code Description
0 No passwords are defined in the project file
1 No valid password has been entered
2 A valid password has been entered
3 The system default password (0007) has been entered

If Code 2 is returned, the Parameter Words will contain additional information as follows:

Parameter 0 Current password level

Parameter 1 First character (ASCII coded) of the current password
Parameter 2 Second character (ASCII coded) of the current password
Parameter 3 Third character (ASCII coded) of the current password
Parameter 4 Fourth character (ASCII coded) of the current password

Start Controller to Controller Transfer with No Confirmation

This feature allows the user to transfer data in two different manners:

Between two controllers. In this case, the controllers can be connected by

a controller network or with the UniNET network.

Between two registers located within the same controller.

Note: Deleting a job changes the position of subsequent jobs (if job 2 is deleted, then job 3
will become job 2).

We will call one complete data transfer a "job". When the controller requests a job to be
executed, the panel responds immediately back to the controller and executes the job as soon
as possible. Therefore, the controller does not know when, or if, the requested job will be
executed.

To set up a transfer, select Project - Panel Controller Interface - Data Transfer. The Job No.
field is used to select between the different jobs. Click on the Source Reference button to
specify the register to be read.

The fields will be slightly different depending on the controller that is being used. Use the
fields to specify the type of data, format, and address of the register that is to be read. Once this
information is entered, press OK to return to the Panel Controller Interface dialog box. Enter
the number of words to be transferred in the appropriate box. Click on the Destination button
brings up a dialog box in which you can enter the address to which the data is to be written.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 454
Tech-note

If the Job Execution Mode is set to In Cycles, the panel will automatically transfer the data on
each cycle. The cycle period can be set between 1 second and 127 seconds. Remember that the
faster the cycles, the faster the panel will transfer data, but this will slow down the rest of the
system. If the Job Execution Mode is set to On Request, the controller must send a request to
the Interlock Mailbox before the data will be transferred. After completely setting up the dialog
box, click on OK. Now select the Interlock Mailbox tab from Project - Panel Controller
Interface. Set up the mailbox as described within the section entitled Enabling the Interlock
Mailbox. When the controller sends a request to the mailbox, the mailbox will read the
command word and the parameter. The panel will then send a response word back to the
controller and execute the command.

Command code: 49

This command requires only one parameter:

Parameter 0 Job Number (1-255)

After performing the operation, the panel will respond back to the Command/Response Word
with one of the codes listed below.

Code Description
0 OK
1 Error: Controller to Controller not defined at all
2 Error: Illegal job number
3 Error: Queue is full

Start Controller to Controller Transfer with Confirmation

This command is set up in the same manner as the command Start Controller to Controller
Transfer With No Confirmation.

Command code: 50

This command requires only one parameter:

Parameter 0 Job Number (1-255)

After performing the operation, the panel will respond back to the Command/Response Word
with one of the codes listed below.

Code Description
0 OK
1 Error: Controller to Controller not defined at all
2 Error: Illegal job number
3 Error: Not used
4 Error: Communication error while reading source data
5 Error: Communication error while writing destination data

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 455
Tech-note

Set RTC (Real Time Clock)

This command enables the controller to set the Real Time Clock (RTC) located within the
panel.

Command code: 81

This command requires six parameters:

Parameter 0 Day (1-31)

Parameter 1 Month (1-12)
Parameter 2 Year (94...99, 00....)
Parameter 3 Hour (0-23)
Parameter 4 Minute (0-59)
Parameter 5 Second (0-59)

After performing the operation, the panel will respond back to the Command/Response Word
with one of the codes listed below.

Code Description
0 OK
1 Error: RTC error
2 Error: Requested setting out of range

Clear Event List from Controller Mailbox

The controller can use this command to request that the UniOP panel clear its event list.

Command code: 97

The command requires no parameters.

After performing the operation, the panel will respond back to the Command/Response Word
with a 0, indicating that the event list has been cleared.

Start Report Printout

This command is used to start a report printout.

Command code: 113

This command requires only one parameter:

Parameter 0 Report Number

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 456
Tech-note

After performing the operation, the panel will respond back to the Command/Response Word
with one of the codes listed below.

Code Description
0 OK
1 Error: Printer process already active (if START command is issued more than
once)Error: Printer process already inactive (if CANCEL command is issued more
than once)
2 Error: Illegal report number
3 Error: Activation queue is full

Stop Report Printout

This command is used to stop a report printout.

Command code: 114

This command requires no parameters.

After performing the operation, the panel will respond back to the Command/Response Word
with one of the codes listed below.

Code Description
0 OK
1 Error: Printer process already inactive

Get Current Language

The controller can use this command to get the number of the currently active language from
the panel.

Command code: 129

This command requires no parameters.

After performing the operation the panel will respond back to the Command/Response Word
with one of the codes listed below.

Code Description
0 OK
1 Error, the project is not multilanguage.

If Code 0 is returned, the Parameter Word 0 will contain the number of the active language.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 457
Tech-note

Set Current Language

The controller can use this command to change the language in the operator panel.

Command code: 130

Parameter 0 Language number

After performing the operation the panel will respond back to the Command/Response Word
with one of the codes listed below.

Code Description
0 OK
1 Error, the project is not multilanguage.
2 Error, illegal language number requested

Start Screen Saver

It is possible to activate the screen saver from the controller using this command.

Command code: 145

No parameters are required by this command. The panel will respond with a code in the
Command/Response Word. The possible codes are listed below.

Code Description
0 OK
1 Error: screen saver not enabled in the project

Stop Screen Saver

It is possible to deactivate the screen saver from the controller using this command.

Command code: 146

No parameters are required by this command. The panel will respond with a code in the
Command/Response Word. The possible codes are listed below.

Code Description
0 OK
1 Error: screen saver not enabled in the project

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 458
Tech-note

Enable Screen Saver Function in Alarm Mode

The controller can use this command to enable the default behaviour of the screen saver in
Alarm Mode.

If UniOP is in Alarm Mode and the time for screen saver activation has elapsed, the screen
saver function will start. Simply touch a key to stop screen saver activity. This command code
can be used following command 148 to go back to the default setting.

Command code: 147

No parameters are required by this command. The panel will respond with a code in the
Command/Response Word. The possible codes are listed below.

Code Description
0 OK

Disable Screen Saver Function in Alarm Mode

It is possible to automatically reactivate the screen whenever an alarm has to be displayed.

The controller can use this command to disable the screen saver function when UniOP is in
Alarm Mode.

If UniOP panel has the screen saver activated because of the elapsed programmed time and an
alarm is activated, the UniOP panel will automatically turn off the screen saver and display the
alarm page. The alarm page will be displayed until at least one alarm condition is active.

Use command code 147 to go back to the default behaviour.

Command code: 148

No parameters are required by this command. The panel will respond with a code in the
Command/Response Word. The possible codes are listed below.

Code Description
0 OK

7.4.5 Mailbox Programming

To use the mailbox successfully, the panel and the controller must interact tightly.

The interaction between the panel and the controller can be thought of as a short conversation
between two people.

The first person (the controller) tries to start a conversation with the second person (the UniOP
panel) on a particular topic (the mailbox command code). After the first person has introduced
himself and the topic of the conversation, the second person decides whether he feels

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 459
Tech-note

competent enough to join in. If the second person decides not to join in the conversation, he
politely informs the first person that he feels he does not know enough about that particular
topic to make an informed comment and waits for a change in the topic of the conversation. If
the second person does decide to enter into the conversation, he ponders the topic and then
expresses his well-considered opinion.

The vital ingredient in a successful conversation is that nobody is interrupted while they are
talking.

The flow chart below describes the program sequences that must be executed in parallel by
both the UniOP panel and the controller ladder logic program to ensure a successful Mailbox
session.

The following important notes should be kept in mind:

At system start-up, the UniOP panel writes the special Status Code Panel
Restart to inform the controller that the panel itself has been reset.

Both the panel and the controller can write to the Status Word and the
Command/Response Word; however, they must not write at the same time to
the same memory location. Proper operation of the mailbox is ensured if the
sequence described in the figure is followed.

The controller program must always wait for the completion of the current
Mailbox session before attempting to start a new one.

The controller program should always check the status returned by the UniOP
panel on completion of a session.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 460
Tech-note

7.5 Networks

7.5.1 UniNET Networks

The UniNET network is a feature of the operator panels that enables them to be connected
together and to communicate with each other.

This offers the ability to display on one panel either the data from the controller attached to the
panel itself, or data from other controllers attached to other panels on the network.

First the General Characteristics are introduced. Then the various, possible, Network
Configurations and the two supported Network Types. Later detailed instructions on

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 461
Tech-note

Connecting Panels to the Network and on the Network Setup are given. Finally a Network
Example is given.

7.5.2 General Characteristics

General Charatceristics

This section presents the concepts of Clients and Servers and the common Technical Data of
all Uninet Networks. The reader should be comfortable with the Graphic Symbols used
throughout the chapter.

Clients and Servers

The operator panels attached to the UniNET Network can be classified in two categories,
depending on the type of communication that they can support once they are placed in the
network: Server type panels and Client type panels.

A panel is a Server when it is connected directly to a controller. It makes

available to other panels in the network the data in the controller. It makes
available to other panels in the network the data in the controller to which its
attached.

A panel is a Client when it requests data from a controller attached to a Server

on the network.

Note: Some UniOP panel have only one serial connection (they do not have a PC/Printer port).
So you can attach the panel via this serial connection either to a PLC or, as a client, to a
UniNET Network. In case the panel has an optional communication module and is connected
to the PLC via the Aux port of this communication module, then the panel can use its serial
connection to become a UniNET Network server.

A panel can be, in certain cases, both a Server and a Client. This means that the panel both
satisfies the requests from other panels that require access to the data in the controller to which
it is attached, and also requests data from the controllers attached to other Servers.

The UniNET Networks supports two types of connectivity:

RS485 Connectivity

Ethernet Connectivity

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 462
Tech-note

The Single Server Configuration, using either the Serial Connectivity or the Ethernet
Connectivity, allows many panels to access data from a single controller via a panel acting as
the single Server. The client panels can perform all of the normal operations as if they were
connected directly to the controller, including: displaying of variables, modifying of variables,
handling of Recipes, handling of the Reserved Data Area, etc.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 463
Tech-note

In the Multiple Servers Configuration, which may use Serial or Ethernet Connectivity, many
controllers are accessed. The panels that are connected to a controller can function both as
Servers and Clients. Therefore, they can read data from the controller to which they are
directly attached and also from the controllers attached to other Servers. The Client panel can
also read data from the controllers attached to the Servers. In this way, every single panel in
the network has access to every single controller attached to the Servers in the network.

Note: in the Serial Connectivity an external RS-232 to RS-485 converter is required for each
panel used as a Server. This is because Servers must be connected to the network using their
PC/Printer port which, in the current hardware version, only has an RS-232 interface. The
Client panels do not need an external converter to be attached to the UniNET network because

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 464
Tech-note

they can be attached to the network using their PLC port which has an RS-485 interface as well
as an RS-232 interface.

The TSI01 Bus Terminal and Converter provides additional optical isolation between the panel
and the UniNET network. If you are using a Client panel attached to the network through a
simple TSI02 Bus Terminal, there is no optical isolation. Optical isolation is recommended
whenever panels are to be operated in a noisy environment or powered by different power
sources. A completely optically isolated network can be obtained using a TSI01 Bus Terminal
and Converter for each panel attached to the network.

Note: The network configuration shown in the above figure works even if the controllers are of
different model types or if they are of different manufacturer brands. Designer allows the user
to specify the addresses of the data items added to the project file using controller-specific
addressing.

It is also possible to transfer data from one controller to another using the 'Data Transfer'
feature supported by the operator panels. The transfer of data can be performed even if the
controllers are of different manufacturer brands. The panels act as bridges connecting different
controller worlds.

UniNET Technical Data

The UniNET network has been designed to pass information between operator interface panels
operating on the plant floor.

The UniNET network features are the following:

interconnection of up to 32 operator panels

multi-master capability

token-passing capability

All operator panels connected to the network may initiate a message transfer. The network
protocol uses a token passing algorithm to determine which initiator has the right to transmit.
A node holding the token is allowed only one transmission each time it receives the token.
After a node sends one message packet, it attempts to give the token to its successor by
sending a "token pass" message. If no network activity occurs, the initiator will attempt to find
a new successor.

One of the main benefits of the token passing method is that every station on the network gets
the chance to communicate, even in conditions of heavy communication load.

The maximum node address that the initiator will search before wrapping to zero is the value
of the configurable parameter Maximum Node Number.

The main technical features of the UniNET Network are shown in the table below:

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 465
Tech-note

Characteristic Serial Connectivity Ethernet Connectivity

Maximum speed 19200 baud 10 Mbps
Physical interface RS-485 Half Duplex as per 10BaseT
Connection cable Shielded twisted pair Standard RJ45 Cable
Maximum length 1200 m as per 10BaseT
Access control / protocol Token Passing UDP/IP
Maximum number of stations 32 32

Graphical Symbols

The following symbols are used in this chapter.

Bus Terminal and RS-232 to RS-485 converter without termination resistor

Bus Terminal and RS-232 to RS-485 converter with termination resistor

Bus terminal without termination resistor

Bus terminal with termination resistor
10BaseT Ethernet Adapter

Network cable

7.5.3 Network Configurations

Network Configurations

You may choose between three network configurations:

Single Server, Multiple Clients

Multiple Servers, Multiple Clients (same controller types)

Mixed Multiple Servers, Multiple Clients (different controller types)

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 466
Tech-note

Single Server Multiple Clients

This network type consists of a single panel that is attached to a controller (the server) and one
or more panels that are not attached to any controller (the clients). In this type of network, all
of the clients and the server can read and write data to and from the single controller (attached
to the single server).

You will be prompted to enter the number of clients. The network is automatically configured
based on the default settings for the type of network. In general, these default settings should
be sufficient for most needs. However, if it is necessary to modify these default settings, you
may do so by clicking the Configure button to access the Network Configuration dialog box.

Multiple Servers Multiple Clients

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 467
Tech-note

This network type consists of several panels that are attached to controllers of the same
manufacturer brand (the servers) and several panels that are not attached to a controller (the
clients). In this type of network, all of the clients and all of the servers can read and write data
from and to every controller that are attached to a server in the network. You are prompted for
the number of clients and servers.

The network is automatically configured based on the default settings for the type of network.
In general, these default settings should be sufficient for most needs. However, if it is
necessary to modify these default settings, you may do so by clicking theConfigure button to
access the Network Configuration dialog box.

Mixed Multiple Servers Multiple Clients

This advanced network type consists of more than one panel that is attached to controllers of
different manufacturer brands (the servers) and one or more panels that are not attached to a
controller (the clients). In this type of network, all of the clients and all of the servers can read
and write data from and to every controller attached to a server in the network.

With this type of network, you have full control and flexibility over the network configuration
using the Network Configuration dialog box. This allows you to make full use of the powerful
capabilities of the network such as adding multiple servers for different controller
manufacturer brands. This complete control over the network is gained at the expense of
having to explicitly specify all of the configuration parameters for the network.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 468
Tech-note

7.5.4 Network Types

Network Types

The Designer software supports two types of UniNET network: an RS485 network, or an
Ethernet-based network.

Ethernet

TCM10 Board

UniOP panels require an additional hardware module to connect to Ethernet networks. In an

Ethernet network, panels are connected to a hub using standard UTP Ethernet patch cables.
This network type is only available if the optional TCM10 board is built into the panel.

When the TCM10 communication module is used to extend the UniNET connectivity
capabilities, the network setup follows the basic concepts of a normal UniNET network.

In addition, with the optional TCM10 card, you can implement a UniNET-over-Ethernet
connection. The UniOP panel still communicates serially to the control device, but the
communications between each UniOP are over a 10Base-T Ethernet connection.

TCM10 is intended for connection to 10Base-T networks (10 Mbit, twisted-pair cables). The
TCM10 requires an external network adapter. The network adapter must be plugged into the
Aux port of the UniOP panel. The TCM10 external network adapter is equipped with a
standard RJ45 connector. The TCM10 can be directly connected to a hub using standard
Ethernet twisted-pair patch cables.

The TCM10 external network adapter is equipped with a standard RJ45 connector. The
TCM10 can be directly connected to a hub using standard Ethernet twisted-pair patch cables.

The TCM10 external network adapter has two diagnostic LED indicators:

LED Description
RED - Link When ON indicates that Ethernet link is missing. In this condition the
GREEN LED is normally OFF.
GREEN - Activity ON - No network activity for the UniOP panel
Blink - Network activity detected for the UniOP panel

Compatibility information for the TCM10 module is available, as is information on

configuring an Ethernet network.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 469
Tech-note

Compatibility Information

Model FW Type Ethernet

MD00R-02 32 X
MD00R-04 32 X
MD00G-04 32 X
MD03R-02 32 X
MD03R-04 32 X
MD02F-02 32 X
MD02R-04 32 X
CP01R-04 32 X
CP02R-04 32 X
CP01F-02 32 X
CP02F-02 32 X
CP04F-04 32 X
CP10G-04 32 X
CP11G-04 32 X
CP12G-04 32 X
CP13G-04 32 X
EF-02 32 X
EF-04 32 X
ER-04 32 X
MKDF-02 32 X
MKDF-04 32 X
MKDR-04 32 X
MKDR-05 32 X
MKDG-06 32 X
MKDG-07 32 X
ePALM10 32 X
ER-16 33
EL-16N 33
ER-25 33
ER-VGA 38 X
EL-25 33
EL-VGA 38 X
BKDR-16 33
BKDC-16 37
BKDL-16 33
BKDR-16T 33
BKDC-16T 33
BKDL-16T 33
MKDR-16 33
MKDL-16N 33
MKDR-25 33
MKDL-25 33
MKDR-VGA 38 X
MKDC-VGA 38 X
MKDL-VGA 38 X
MKDT-VGA 38 X

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 470
Tech-note

ERT-16 33
ECT-16 37
ELT-16 33
ER-25T 33
EL-25T 33
ERT-VGA 38 X
ECT-VGA 38 X
ELT-VGA 38 X
ETT-VGA 38 X
MKDR-VGA-T 38 X
MKDC-VGA-T 38 X
MKDL-VGA-T 38 X
MKDT-VGA-T 38 X
eTOP10 58 X
eTOP11 38 X
eTOP12 38 X
eTOP30 58 X
eTOP31 58 X
eTOP32 58 X
eTOP40 58 X

Configuring Ethernet

When a TCM10 communication module is used to connect a UniOP panel to an Ethernet-

based PLC network, the Designer configuration is fully dependent on the protocol type used
over the network. From the Designer point of view, the project needs to know the IP address of
the TCM10 card and the IP addresses of the devices connected on the network with which the
panel has to exchange information.

Configure Controller from the Project menu will normally allow configuration of the IP
address of the communication partners of the UniOP that are connected over the Ethernet
network. The Access Multiple Controllers checkbox in the Controller Setup dialog box
(accessed by clicking the "..." button in the Configure Controllers dialog box then clicking on
the Controller Setup button from the Select Controller dialog box) can be used when
connection to more than one device is required.

Because the UniOP panel is a partner of the Ethernet network like all of the other devices, a
proper IP address must be assigned to the panel. An IP address can be assigned to an Ethernet
board from the External Devices tab in Panel Setup from the Project menu.

The IP address used in Configure Controller and in Panel Setup - External Devices has to be
chosen according to the overall Ethernet configuration.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 471
Tech-note

7.5.5 Connecting Panels to the Network

Connecting Panels to the Network

The way panels are connected to the network depends on the connectivity adopted by the
UniNET Network, i.e. if panels are to be connected via an RS485 UniNET Network or via an
Ethernet UniNET Network.

RS485

Connecting Panels to an RS485 Network

The following sections describe how to connect panels to an RS485 UniNET Network.

Pinout for the PLC Communications Port

Pinout for the PC/Printer Communications Port

The TSI01 Bus Terminal with RS-232 to RS-485 Converter

The TSI02 Bus Terminal

RS-232 Cable to TSI01 Bus Terminal with Converter (Printer Port)

RS-232 Cable to TSI01 Bus Terminal with Converter (PLC Port)

RS-485 Cable to TSI02 Bus Terminal

Information is also provided on installing the network cable.

Pinout for the PLC Communications Port

The PLC Communications port is used to connect client panels to the network using a bus
terminal unit. The pinout of the PLC port is shown here for easy reference.

Note: Panels to be used as servers must have a dedicated PC/Printer port.

Pin # Description Pin # Description

1 Frame Ground 9
2 RXD 10 RTS
3 TXD 11 CTS
4 +5V 12
5 Signal Ground 13

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 472
Tech-note

6 CHA- 14 CHA+
7 CHB- 15 CHB+
8

Pinout for the PC/Printer Communications Port

Use the PC/printer communications port to connect server panels to the network using a bus
terminal unit with an RS-232 to RS-485 converter. The pinout of the printer port is shown
below.

Pin # Description Pin # Description

1 Frame Ground 9
2 RXD 10 RTS
3 TXD 11 CTS
4 +5V 12
5 Signal Ground 13
6 14
7 15
8

RS232 Cable to TSI01 Bus Terminal with Converter (Printer Port)

Use the cable CA74 to connect the Printer port of a Server panel to the TSI01 bus terminal
with converter. The maximum length of the cable is 12m.

Panel connector: D-type 15P

TSI02 connector: D-type 15S

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 473
Tech-note

RS-232 Cable to TSI01 Bus Terminal with Converter (PLC Port)

Use the cable CA73 to connect the PLC port of a client panel to the TSI01 bus terminal with
converter. The maximum length of the cable is 12m.

Panel connector: D-type 15S

TSI01 connector: D-type 15S

RS485 Cable to TSI02 Bus Terminal

Use the cable CA75 to connect the PLC port of a client panel to the TSI02 bus terminal. The
maximum length of the cable is 1 m.

Panel connector: D-type 15S

TSI02 connector: D-type 15P

TSI01 Bus Terminal with RS-232 to RS-485 Converter

The TSI01 bus terminal is a special module designed for use in the UniNET network. It is an
optically isolated RS-232 to RS-485 converter that can be directly connected to the Printer port

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 474
Tech-note

of an operator panel. The power supply is derived from the panel connector; an on-board
isolated DC/DC converter provides the power for the RS-485 section of the converter. The
converter additionally provides the possibility of properly terminating the line with a simple
switch.

The pinout of the RS-232 connector of the converter is shown below. The connector type is D-
type 15 pin male.

Pin # Description Pin # Description

1 Frame Ground 9
2 TXD 10 CTS
3 RXD 11
4 +5V external 12
5 Signal Ground 13
6 14
7 15
8

The pinout of the RS-485 terminal block of the converter is shown in the following table.

Pin # Description
1 Frame Ground
2 A (-)
3 B (+)
4 Shield

TSI02 Bus Terminal

The TSI02 bus terminal is a special module designed for use in the UniNET network. The use
of the TSI02 bus terminal makes it easier to wire a panel to the network and additionally
provides the possibility of properly terminating the line by means of a switch. The TSI02 has
been designed for connection to the PLC port of an operator panel equipped with RS-485
interface.

The pinout of the RS-485 connector of the converter is shown below. The connector type is D-
type 15 pin female.

Pin # Description Pin # Description

1 Frame Ground 9
2 10
3 11
4 12
5 Signal Ground 13
6 CHA- 14 CHA+
7 15
8

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 475
Tech-note

The pinout of the RS-485 terminal block of the converter is shown in the following table.

Pin # Description
1 Frame Ground
2 A (-)
3 B (+)
4 Shield

Installing the Network Cable

The UniNET communication cable consists of a number of cable segments daisy-chained

together connecting all the network nodes. The total length of the cable segments cannot
exceed 1200 m. It is recommended to use a shielded cable with one twisted pair.

Note: Only a daisy-chained network is recommended. Other connections, for example a star-
like connection, are not recommended.

The bus terminals at both ends of the networks must have the termination resistance connected
with the switch. This connects the termination impedance (120 Ohms) that is built in each bus
terminal. Intermediate bus terminals must not have the termination connected.

Ethernet

Connecting Panels to an Ethernet Network

To connect a Panel, including the TCM10 module, the Ethernet Adapter ETAD01 is needed as
shown in the following picture.

The second picture here below shows the ETAD01 wire connections.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 476
Tech-note

The ETAD01 Adapter connects on one site to the Panel AUX Port and provides on the other
site a standard RJ45 8 way connector.

The following table shows the Pinout configuration.

Pin Signal
1 TD out +
2 TD out -
3 RX in +
6 RX in -

7.5.6 Network Setup

Network Setup

It is easy to configure a UniNET network using Designer.

The configuration entails determining the type of network (RS-485 or Ethernet), specifying the
number of clients and/or servers on the network, etc. The Network Protocol, Network
Selection, and Network Configuration sections describe the steps necessary to configure the
UniNET network.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 477
Tech-note

Select Network Setup from the Project menu (or click the Network Setup icon on the toolbar)
to configure or modify the network for your application. If a network is not yet defined for the
project, this brings up the Network Media & Protocol Selection dialog box. If a network is
already defined for your project, selecting Network Setup takes you directly to the Network
Configuration dialog box.

Network Protocol

The first step in configuring the network is selecting the network type. The Designer software
supports two types of UniNET network: an RS-485 network, or an Ethernet-based network.

Select the type of network, click the Next> button, and the Network Selection dialog box
appears.

Network Selection

Select the appropriate network configuration for your project. Choices include:

Single Server, Multiple Clients

Multiple Servers, Multiple Clients

Mixed Multiple Servers, Multiple Clients

Once you have made your selection, click the Next> button.
If you choose Single Server, Multiple Clients or Multiple Servers, Multiple Clients, you will be
prompted to enter the number of clients and/or servers for your project. You will then be
prompted to click on the Configure button to bring up the Network Configuration dialog box,
configured for the number of clients and servers specified. Check and set the remaining
configuration parameters for the network.

If you choose Mixed Multiple Servers, Multiple Clients you will be prompted to click on the
Configure button to bring up the Network Configuration dialog box and specify all of the
configuration parameters for the network.

Network Configuration

The parameters for the network are automatically configured if it is selected to be of either the
Single Server, Multiple Client type or of the Multiple Server, Multiple Client (same controller
types) type. However, Designer lets you make modifications to the network parameters by
using the Network Configuration dialog box.

If you chose Mixed Multiple Servers, Multiple Clients, you must specify all of the
configuration parameters for the network.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 478
Tech-note

You can use the Import and Export buttons to share network configurations between multiple
project files designed for the same network.

7.5.7 Advanced Network Programming

Advanced Network Programming

The UniNET network fully supports the use of all panel Reserved Data Areas (RDA),
including alarms and mailboxes. Recipes may be used in a UniNET network system.

This section also provides information on Extending the Extending the Connectivity with the
UniNET OPC Server.

Reserved Data Area

The UniNET network fully supports the use of all panel Reserved Data Areas (RDA),
including alarms and mailboxes. These Reserved Data Areas can be placed in any controller
attached to any server on the network. This is especially helpful since the RDA concept offers
a simple and efficient method to have the controller program interact with the operator panel.

Note: Most RDA activities are carried out on a cyclical basis, so even with a small number of
nodes in the network most of the network traffic may be for RDA updates. This may cause an
exceedingly slow update time for displayed variables.

Network and Recipes

Recipes may be used in a UniNET network system. A single recipe may contain data items for
different controllers attached to different servers on the network.

The following considerations should, however, be taken into account:

Recipe transfers may be considerably slower when they contain data items for
controllers attached to other servers in the network than when they only
contain data items for the controller attached directly to the operator panel.

The panels in the network can be configured so that they each store copies of
the same recipe parameter set. In this case, special care must be taken to
ensure the consistency of the parameter sets stored in the different nodes. It is
recommended that in a network configuration, only one node be assigned for
the storage of the recipe data.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 479
Tech-note

UniNET OPC Server

Extending the connectivity with the UniNET OPC Server

The implementation of the UniNET network using Ethernet technology allows for an easy
extension of the connectivity options of the system. One of the most important advantages of
the Ethernet based technology is the availability of a UniNET Client for a computer.

The UniNET Client for a computer consists of a software component designed to work as a
Client in the network. The software component is a program based on the OPC technology
(OLE for Process Control) working as OPC Server. Once the software component is installed
on the computer, all of the OPC Client programs will have full access to data coming through
the UniNET Network. They can also fully interact with the Controllers connected to the
UniNET Server panels.

This section provides information on the UniNET OPC Server and shows how this server can
be accessed via OPC Automation Clients.

UniNET OPC Server

The UniNET OPC Server is a program that is distributed separately from Designer. The
UniNET OPC Server program has the following minimum requirements:

Microsoft Windows 98, NT, ME or XP

15MB of free hard disk space

Ethernet card

The installation procedure of the UniNET OPC Server software components will automatically
provide the registration of the Server at the system level. It will make the server visible to all
of the OPC Clients that are already installed. Likewise, any OPC clients that are installed after
the UniNET OPC server software is installed will also “see” the server.

The UniNET OPC Server main window appears as is shown here below.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 480
Tech-note

The OPC Server has to be properly configured in order to collect data coming from the UniOP
panels working as UniNET servers on the network. The software uses the concepts of Device
and Tag to identify the controllers connected to the server panels and the variables requested
by them. These variables will be available to any OPC Client that may require their values.
Please refer to specific OPC documentation for any additional detail regarding the theory of
OPC technology.

Note: OPC Client programs installed on the computer will only have access to the Data Sets
configured in the OPC Server application.

To create a new Device, select Add/New Device or click on the New Device icon. The Device
Properties dialog box will be displayed as is shown in the next figure.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 481
Tech-note

Name
Represents a mnemonic description of the Device.

Device
The list box contains the list of all available drivers for the different controller types. Because
OPC Server is a UniNET Client, the application needs to know the data structure of the
controller connected to the UniOP UniNET Server panels.

Timeout
Period of time that the OPC server will wait to receive requested information before reporting
a timeout error for the Device.

TCP/IP Access
Specifies if the UniNET network is Ethernet based. When the TCP/IP checkbox is not marked,
the OPC server can be used to prepare a configuration file usable with the Windows CE OPC
Server. Please refer to the specific documentation for further details.

IP Address
Represents the IP Address assigned to the UniOP Panel, working as UniNET Server, that is
connect to the controller specified by the Device item. Please refer to the Networking with
Ethernet section for a detailed description.

Socket Port
Represents the number of the socket port used by the UniOP panel to relay requests coming
through the Ethernet network.

When the Device setup is completed, the OPC Server program has to be configured to read a
certain amount of specific data from the UniNET network. Only this data will be available to

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 482
Tech-note

an eventual OPC Client connected to the UniNET OPC Server. Required data from UniNET
can be specified by inserting the Tags definition for the Device. To insert a Tag for the
specific Device, use the Add/New tag menu or click on the New tag icon. The figure here
below shows the Tag Properties dialog box.

Name
The mnemonic name used by the OPC Server to uniquely identify the variable.

Description
Allows for the user to explain exactly to what the Tag refers.

Address
The tag address in terms of the native data types of the controller specified in the Device list
box of the Device Properties dialog box.

Numeric Data
When marked, this specifies that the tag is to be treated like a numeric variable. When
unmarked, it specifies that the variable is to be interpreted as the starting point of an ASCII
string. The ASCII data length specifies the length of the ASCII string. If the ASCII
representation is selected, the OPC Server program will retrieve an amount of bytes equal to
the number of ASCII characters specified by the ASCII data length parameter from the
UniNET network.

The UniNET OPC Server program has a monitor function useful when a check of the Ethernet
connection link is required. Once the Device and the Tags are configured, select
View/Monitor to activate the debug function. The Value column of the main window (see
Figure 39) displays the current value of each configured tag. If the OPC Server program
cannot retrieve the value from the network, it displays the string Bad.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 483
Tech-note

Interfacing Microsoft Excel with the UniNET OPC Server

As an application example, it is important to consider a typical use of the UniNET OPC

Server. The program Microsoft Excel can be easily equipped with the OPC Automation
software components that will allow connection to any OPC Server installed on the computer.

EXOR has successfully tested a solution provided by FactorySoft that is downloadable free of
charge from the following web site: http://www.factorysoft.com. The Excel interface to the
OPC Server consists in software components called OPC 2.0 Data Access Components.
FactorySoft provides an Automation interface and a Server browser service.

Automation
FactorySoft wrote the Automation interface sample code for the OPC Foundation. They
provide a standard Automation component based on this code for redistribution. An OPC
Server vendor may use these components to provide its server.

Server Browser
This COM server returns OPC Servers by Component Category. It can be used to find Data
Access 1.0 or 2.0 servers, in addition to future OPC servers. Because this is a COM server that
can be run remotely, clients can get access to remote servers without local registry entries.

The FactorySoft OPC Data Access Components downloadable will install the Server Browser,
the Data Access 2.0 proxy DLLs and the Automation DLL in the System directory.

This installation is used to install the OPC components needed for the server and can be freely
distributed with your products.

Once the required software components are correctly installed, the VBA (Visual Basic for
Application) interface available in Excel can be easily used to give access to the UniNET OPC
Server.

The read operation can be implemented using a simple form where a button is programmed to
perform the following “Get OPC Data” subroutine.

Private Sub GetOpcData_Click()

'Get OPC Automation Reference

Set opcauto = CreateObject("OPC.Automation.1")

'Connect to the server

opcauto.Connect ("EXOR.UniNETOPC")

'Plays with groups and items

Set groups = opcauto.OPCGroups
Set group = groups.Add("Device1.Group")
group.IsActive = True
Set Items = group.OPCItems
Set Item = Items.AddItem("Device1.Group.tag1", 1)
Item.Read (1)
value = Item.value

'Display value

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 484
Tech-note

Sheet1.Range("a1").value = value
End Sub

A working sample program is available on request.

7.5.8 Network Examples

Network Example

Most of the features of the UniNET Network can be tried by using a very simple configuration.
This example will describe the steps required to set up a simple UniNET network composed of
a single server operator panel connected to a controller and two client operator panels that will
access the controller data via the server through the network services.
The complete network system is composed of three operator panels. Thus, we will have to
create individual project files for each of the three panels. All three project files must include
the same network configuration information in order for the three panels to exchange
information. To ensure that the project files contain the same network configuration
information, we will define the network configuration once in the first project file and save the
configuration. Then we will import the configuration into the other two project files.

The example is broken down into the following steps:

Setting Up the Network Configuration

Creating the Project File for the Server

Creating the Project File for the First Client

Creating the Project File for the Second Client

Running the Network

Setting Up the Network Configuration

Select New from the File menu and create a new file.

Select the Configure Controller from the Project menu and choose the
controller type required for the server.

Select Network Setup from the Project menu.

Select RS485 as the type of network.

Click Next>.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 485
Tech-note

Choose the option Single Server, Multiple Clients.

Click Next>.

Enter 2 for the number of clients.

Click Next>.

Click Configure to change the default node settings and complete the network
configuration.

The Network Configuration dialog box appears, showing the network

configuration with the list of nodes.

Click on the Enable UniNET Network checkbox.

A checkmark appears next to node number 1 indicating that it is the server.

Select node number 2.

Click Properties.

The Edit Panel Node dialog box opens. Select the controller for panel node 2
(a client), and set the other parameters as necessary.

Click OK.

A cautionary message appears. Click Yes.

Repeat steps 14-18 for panel node number 3.

Click on the Export button.

Give the network configuration file a name with the .net extension in a
convenient folder. Click Save to save the file and return to the Network
Configuration dialog box.

Click OK to close the Network Configuration dialog box.

Click the Finish button to complete the network setup process and close the
Network Selection dialog box.

(Continued in Creating the Project File for the Server)

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 486
Tech-note

Creating the Project File for the Server

(Continued from Setting Up the Network Configuration)

Create a page for the application. Type some text on the page, then insert a
numeric data field by selecting Insert - Data Fields - Numeric/ASCII.

Use the cursor to outline an area for the data field.

In the Numeric Field Properties dialog box click on the Range tab. Set the
Access as Read/Write.

Click OK.

Save the file by selecting Save from the File menu.

Close the file by selecting Exit from the File menu.

Connect the computer to the operator panel that is designated as the server
and download the project. When the transfer is complete, detach the cable
from the PC/Printer port of the panel and connect the RS-232/RS-485
converter.

Note: Since the PLC port is used on the server to connect to the controller, the only available
port for the network connection is the PC/Printer port (the AUX port cannot be used). The
PC/Printer port only has a 232 interface, but the UniNET network is 485. Thus, the converter is
required.

(Continued in Creating the Project File For the First Client)

Creating the Project File for the First Client

(Continued from Creating the Project File for the Server)

Repeat steps 1 through 11.

Click on the Import button in the Network Configuration dialog box.

Select the file created in step 21 and click Open.

The controller information is copied into this new file.

Check the Enable UniNET Network button.

Click OK to close the Network Configuration dialog box.

Click the Finish button to complete the network setup process and close the

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 487
Tech-note

Network Selection dialog box.

Create a page for the application. Type some text on the page, then insert a
numeric data field by selecting Insert - Data Fields - Numeric/ASCII.

Use the cursor to outline an area for the data field.

In the Numeric Field Properties dialog box click on the Range tab. Set the
Access as Read/Write.

Click OK.

Save the file by selecting Save from the File menu.

Close the file by selecting Exit from the File menu.

Connect the computer to the operator panel that is designated as the first client
and download the project.

Note: The panel may need to be attached to the network through its PLC port, depending upon
the network port selected for the client in the project.

(Continued in Creating a Project File for the Second Client)

Creating the Project File for the Second Client

(Continued from Creating the Project File for the First Client)

Repeat steps 1 through 11.

Click on the Import button in the Network Configuration dialog box.

Select the file created in step 21 and click Open.

The controller information is copied into this new file.

Check the Enable UniNET Network button.

Click OK to close the Network Configuration dialog box.

Click the Finish button to complete the network setup process and close the
Network Selection dialog box.

Create a page for the application. Type some text on the page, then insert a
numeric data field by selecting Insert - Data Fields - Numeric/ASCII.

Use the cursor to outline an area for the data field.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 488
Tech-note

In the Numeric Field Properties dialog box click on the Range tab. Set the
Access as Read/Write.

Click OK.

Save the file by selecting Save from the File menu.

Close the file by selecting Exit from the File menu.

Connect the computer to the operator panel that is designated as the second
client and download the project.

Note: The panel may need to be attached to the network through its PLC port, depending upon
the network port selected for the client in the project.

(Continued in Running the Network)

Running the Network

(Continued from Creating the Project File for the Second Client)

Once all three panels are in Operation Mode they should display the variable on the screen. In
the case of the client panels, the variable is read from the controller after the server receives a
request from the client to read the data.

Verify that none of the three panels report any communication errors.

The variable itself may be modified using the Data Entry Mode. Changing the
value of the data from any operator panel will change the display on the other
panels.

7.6 Panel Fonts

7.6.1 Panel Fonts

It is possible to have up to 4 different panel fonts on certain UniOP panels. The Select Font
dialog box lets you select a font from a pull-down list.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 489
Tech-note

Note: If a project file contains panel font components, switching to a standard font (not an
enhanced font) will erase all of the panel font components in the project.

Installing New Panel Fonts

Downloading Panel Fonts

Compressing Panel Fonts

7.6.2 Installing New Panel Fonts

Installing New Panel Fonts

Panel fonts, as all of our standard fonts, are associated with the various display types. To add a
new font, copy the .FON file inside the working directory that contains the Designer.EXE file.
You must also modify the DISPLAYS.INI file as described below.

DISPLAYS.INI
[DTYPE25]
...
CharHeight=16
CharWidth=8
...
[DTYPE25 Fonts]
ERL25X80=ERL25X80.FON
UniCOMIC=UniCOMIC.fon
Uni7SEG=Uni7SEG.fon
[Uni7SEG Font]
BargraphStart=226

BoxChars=218,191,192,217,196,179,196,179,180,194,193;201,187,200,188,205,186,205,186,
0,0,0
BigCharStart=128

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 490
Tech-note

Character Size

Panel Font Character Size

Some panels use an 8x16 character size and other panels use an 8x15 character size. A font
that has an 8x16 character size cannot be used on a UniOP that supports only an 8x15 character
size and vice versa.

The panel characters size can be found inside the [DTYPEnn] section. The DTYPE code used
for a particular panel can also be found by reading the panel database file.

All new fonts must be declared inside the [DTYPEnn Fonts] section and a new [<Font Name>
Font] section with
the necessary graphic character codes must be added. The necessary graphic character codes to
be used are shown below.

Uni7Seg Font

UniComic Font

UniComic Font

Normal: Courier New (only first 127 characters)

Double: Comic Scans MS
Large: Comic Scans MS
Extra Large: Comic Scans MS
Basic font for 8x16 panel type: ERL25x80.FON
[UniComic Font]
BargraphStart=226

BoxChars=218,191,192,217,196,179,196,179,180,194,193;201,187,200,188,205,186,205,186,
0,0,0
BigCharStart=128
Basic font for 8x15 panel type: SH164015.FON
[UniComi5 Font]
BargraphStart=226

BoxChars=218,191,192,217,196,179,196,179,180,194,193;201,187,200,188,205,186,205,186,
0,0,0
BigCharStart=128

Uni7Seg Font

Normal: Courier New (only first 127 characters)

Double: Ni7Seg

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 491
Tech-note

Large: Ni7Seg
Extra Large: Ni7Seg
Basic font for 8x16 panel type: ERL25x80.FON
[Uni7SEG Font]
BargraphStart=226

BoxChars=218,191,192,217,196,179,196,179,180,194,193;201,187,200,188,205,186,205,186,
0,0,0
BigCharStart=128
Basic font for 8x15 panel type: SH164015.FON
[Uni7SEG5 Font]
BargraphStart=226

BoxChars=218,191,192,217,196,179,196,179,180,194,193;201,187,200,188,205,186,205,186,
0,0,0
BigCharStart=128

7.6.3 Downloading Panel Fonts

Designer automatically downloads panel fonts along with the project file whenever panel fonts
have been used. These fonts will be downloaded to the UniOP panel each time the project file
is downloaded.

If these fonts have already been downloaded, it is not necessary to re-download them. To save
time, from the Transfer menu select Options. Click on the Transfer Advanced tab.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 492
Tech-note

Uncheck the Download Fonts checkbox, and the panel fonts will not be downloaded.

7.6.4 Compressing Panel Fonts

In order to save memory in the UniOP panel, Designer automatically compresses the panel font
files that it downloads.

If necessary, you can disable this optimization by selecting Transfer - Options.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 493
Tech-note

Click on the Transfer Advanced tab and uncheck the Compress Fonts checkbox.

Note: Font optimization will be automatically disabled when PLC references in ASCII format
are used.

7.7 Printing

7.7.1 Printer Setup

To set up a serial printer, select Project - Report on Panel Printer - Printer Setup. This will
display the Printer Setup dialog box.

From this dialog box, you can choose the printer you will be using, set the communication
parameters, and define the page size.

If you will be using a printer that is not listed, you can use the Add button to add a new printer
to the list of available printers. Doing so will bring up the Printer Properties dialog box in
which you can define the parameters for the newly added printer. Similarly, you can use the
Edit button to redefine the parameters for an existing printer.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 494
Tech-note

Note: If you will be printing reports, the paper height should be defined here before the report
is defined. If you change the paper height with some reports already defined, the report layouts
that have already been defined will not automatically be rearranged.

7.7.2 Reports

Reports

A report is a collection of project file pages (or parts of project file pages). Each report is
divided into two parts. One is a common part, such as the header and footer. These will be
common to each and every page of the report. The second is the display page that is the body
of the report.

Creating a New Report

Setting Up Report Headers & Footers

Advanced Report Parameters

Triggering a Report Printout

Creating a New Report

To define a report, select Project - Report on Panel Printer - Reports. Add a report by clicking
the New button. You can rename the report with a more descriptive name if you wish by
single-clicking on the report name, then typing in a new name.

All of the pages of your project file will be shown on the General tab in an "Available Pages"
box on the left. To add a page to the report you are creating, select the page and click on the
Add-> button. Doing so will place the page name into the "Report Pages" box on the right.

By selecting a page from the "Available Pages" box and pressing the Properties button, you
can specify what part of the project file page to print and where to start printing on the page.

Setting Up a Report Header and/or Footer

The structure of the header and the footer are the same. It is possible to define the height of the
header and the footer, and several predefined fields that can be inserted into the header or
footer.

Under the Header and Footer tabs you can specify the height of the header/footer, the fields
that are inserted into the header/footer, where they are inserted at and how they are positioned.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 495
Tech-note

Fields that can be inserted include the time and date, the page number, the report name and a
label (which allows you to enter static text).

Advanced Report Parameters

Under the Advanced tab you can set up various parameters that are common for every page in
the report.

These include whether or not to wrap lines, the default font, how to transform various
attributes, what to do with non-printable characters, etc.

Triggering a Report Printout

A report printout can be triggered in three different ways:

With a macro that is associated to a function key or a touch cell.

Cyclically at a specified time.

From a PLC request issued through the Interlock Mailbox.

To set up a report to be printed when a function key or touch cell (use commands from the
Insert menu to create the touch cell), select Keyboard Macro Editor from the Project menu. In
the Macro Editor dialog box there is a macro command entitled Print Report.

Select a tab to correspond to the page where you want the trigger to be placed. From the
Commands toolbar, select the Print Report icon. The Choose Report dialog box appears, where
you can select which report is to be printed when this key (or touch cell) is pressed.

Any report can be printed cyclically in two different modes: any day at a specific time or
cyclically after an interval of time.

You can set a cyclical trigger by selecting Project - Report on Panel Printer - Triggers.

The third way to start a report printout is to use the Interlock Mailbox. This can be accessed
from Project - Panel Controller Interface, then selecting the Interlock Mailbox tab and using
the mailbox command Start Report Printout.

Use the command Stop Report Printout to stop printing.

7.7.3 Printer Setup Example

In this example we will add a new printer and set up a print sequence using the Keyboard
Macro Editor.

Select Project - Report on Panel Printer - Printer Setup.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 496
Tech-note

Initially only a generic printer is listed, so we will add a new printer to the list.
Press the Add button and the Printer Properties dialog box appears.

Enter a name for the new printer in the Printer name box.

Enter an escape sequence for the new printer in the Escape sequences box.

Click OK.

Enter a file name for the printer file.

Click OK.

Verify the communication parameters.

Set the page size.

Click OK.

Now we need to define a report to print. Select Project - Report on Panel

Printer - Reports.
Add a report by clicking the New button.

Single-click on the report name, then type in a new, more descriptive, name.

Click on a report page on the left side of the General tab to select it. Press
Add-> to add that page to the report list on the right side of the tab.

Click on the page name in the right-hand list and click on Properties.

Set the page properties such as spacing, fonts, etc.

Click OK.

Click on the Header tab.

Select several fields under Field Type to include on the page header.

Click on the Footer tab.

Select several fields under Field Type to include on the page header.

Click on the Advanced tab.

Verify the print settings, then click OK.

Next we program a macro to print the report when function key F22 is pressed.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 497
Tech-note

Select Keyboard Macro Editor from the Project menu.

In the Macro Editor dialog box on the All Pages tab select panel key F22.

Under Commands, select Print Report.

Choose the report to be printed when key F22 is pressed.

Click OK to return to the Macro Editor.

Click OK to close the Macro Editor.

The project is now set up to print the selected report whenever panel key F22
is pressed.

7.8 RDA

7.8.1 RDA

The UniNET network fully supports the use of all panel Reserved Data Areas (RDA),
including Alarms and Mailboxes.

These Reserved Data Areas can be placed in any controller attached to any server on the
network.

The RDA concept offers a simple and efficient method to have the controller program interact
with the operator panel.

See the RDA Setup section for additional information on the use of the RDA in Designer.

Note: Since most RDA activities are carried out on a cyclical basis, even with a small number
of nodes in the network the result may be that most of the network traffic will be for RDA
updates. This may cause an exceedingly slow update time for displayed variables.

Each UniOP panel may use up to three small reserved areas of controller memory to establish
an interface with the controller. These three reference areas are: Keys, Panel, and PLC. You
can select the starting address of each of these areas.

The figure below illustrates the flow of communication for each of the reserved data areas.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 498
Tech-note

A memory map of the entire reserved data area is shown below.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 499
Tech-note

As shown in the two previous pictures, the four Reserved Data Areas are:

Keyboard Update Area

Panel Status Area

Controller Update Area

7.8.2 Keyboard Update Area

This reserved area is formatted to contain flags for each key on the panel and extended
keyboard. These flags are set HIGH when a key is pressed and set LOW when released. Each
key status flag occupies one bit in the controller memory. These bits can be used by the
controller to detect when a particular key has been pressed and then in turn perform a specific
operation. It is recommended to use the Keyboard Macro Editor to program keys. This method
is easier and more efficient than programming a key using ladder logic.

Note: In the Keyboard Update Area of the RDA, the ENTER key is mapped to K1, the CLEAR
key is mapped to K16, and the HELP key is mapped to K15.

7.8.3 Panel Status Area

7.8.4 Panel Status Area

This reserved area is formatted to contain time and date information from the panel’s Real
Time Clock, a two-byte Panel Status Word, and a Current Page Register.

Real Time Clock

The real time clock contains the time and date information. Depending upon the type of
controller that is being used, this information will be stored in either binary or BCD. A listing
of various PLCs and how the RTC is stored can be found in the UniOP Installation &
Operation Guide

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 500
Tech-note

Panel Status Word

Panel Status Word

The panel sets and resets bits S0-S8 and S13-S15 in the Panel Status Word to indicate its
current status. Your application logic can monitor these bits to determine how and when it
should interact with the panel. The following table has a brief description of each status bit.

Bit # Function
S0 Link status monitor flag
S1 Data entry active
S2 Printing in progress
S3 Printer status
S4 Date and time update in progress
S5 Attempt to access protected function
S6 Battery low
S7 Alarm active
S8 Unacknowledged alarm active
S12 Recipe and event backup in progress
S13 Recipe upload in progress
S14 Recipe download in progress
S15 Recipe file status

S0 Link Status Monitor Flag

Bit S0 in the Panel Status Word can be used by the controller to monitor the communication
status between the panel and the controller. The value of this bit is changed by the panel with a
cycle time of approximately one second. If a transition is not detected within one second, the
controller should consider that the panel is either not connected or not operating properly.

Note: If the cycle time of the controller program is longer than one second or if there are
numerous communication errors, one transition of the Link Status flag can go undetected.

S1 Data Entry Active

Bit S1 is set whenever the panel is in Data Entry Mode.

S2 Printing in Progress

Bit S2 is set whenever the panel is in the course of sending data to the printer.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 501
Tech-note

S3 Printer Status

Bit S3 of the Panel Status Word contains the current logic state of the CTS (clear to send) line.
This line is being driven by the printer and indicates the printer's readiness to accept data.

S4 Date and Time Update in Progress

Bit S4 in the Panel Status Word is used to synchronize access to the panel's real time clock
(RTC).

Before writing a new time and date record, the panel sets bit S4 in the Panel Status Word to
indicate that it is about to update this data. The panel then writes the time and date information
to the Reserved Data Area (RDA) and resets bit S4. The controller program should always
check the update flag before reading the time and date record. If the bit is set, the controller
should not use the time and date information.

Note: This bit is not set when the panel updates only the "seconds" field.

S5 Attempt to Access Protected Function

Bit S5 of the Panel Status Word is set when the panel user tries to access a function that is not
accessible with the current password. Since in this case no message is displayed by the panel
itself, the controller can be used to check this status bit and notify the user that the function
they are trying to access is protected.

S6 Battery Low

Bit S6 of the Panel Status Word is set when the backup batteries become weak. These batteries
maintain recipe data as well as time and date information, which is stored in RAM.

S7 Alarm Active

Bit S7 of the Panel Status Word is set when at least one alarm is active. Bit S7 is reset when all
alarm bits are reset to zero.

S8 Unacknowledged Alarm Active

Bit S8 of the Panel Status Word is set whenever there is at least one active alarm that requires
acknowledgment. It is reset when all alarms have been acknowledged.

Note: Enabling the Operator ACK Required attribute when creating alarm messages
guarantees that bit S8 will remain set until the alarm is acknowledged. It does not guarantee

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 502
Tech-note

that the bit associated with the alarm in the RDA will remain set. Those alarm bits are
controlled by application logic, not by the panel.

S13 Recipe Upload in Progress

Bit S13 is set whenever a recipe is being uploaded from the controller into the panel. It is reset
whenever the upload process is complete.

S12 Recipe and event backup in progress

The S12 bit of the RDA area is used to communicate to the controller when a backup operation
to flash memory is in process. The UniOP will set this bit to 1 just before the backup operation
begins. When the backup operation is complete, UniOP will set this bit to 0.

Recipe/Event Backup:

0 = Standby
1 = Backup operation in progress

S14 Recipe Download in Progress

Bit S14 is set whenever a recipe is being downloaded from the panel into the controller. It is
reset whenever the download process is complete.

S15 Recipe File Status

Bit S15 displays the Recipe File Status. A "0" indicates that the recipes contain valid data. A
"1" indicates that the recipe data is corrupt or still contains the default values defined in the
project file.

Current Page Register

The panel writes the number of the currently displayed page into the CP register whenever the
panel is in Page mode or Data Entry Mode. In all other modes, a zero is written into this
register, indicating that page data is not currently being displayed.

Note: Page numbers are stored in either binary or BCD format, depending on the controller
being used.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 503
Tech-note

7.8.5 Controller Update Area

Controller Update Area

The Controller Update Area allows the controller to access and control certain aspects of the
panel. All front panel LED’s can be controlled from this area to provide feedback to the
operator. The controller may also request a specific page to be displayed by writing the
appropriate value into the Page Request Register. The Controller Control Word allows the
controller to request the printing of a page, disable data entry, select an alarm mode, or enable
the mailbox function.

All panels include a standard set of dedicated indicators that allow the user to monitor the
status of the panel. Along with these dedicated indicators, certain models include a subset of
user defined LED’s that can be monitored and controlled by your application logic. The control
of these LED’s is carried out through the Controller Update Area. Each of the registers found
there can be copied to bit address contacts so that the status bits can be referenced as control
relays.

LED Control Bits

LED Control Bits

Bits L1 through L32 control the LED indicators that can be found on various panel models.
The mappings of these bits are listed below

Two tables show how LED's are mapped, the LED Map for All Panels Except Eight User
LED's and the LED Map for Eight User LED's. For example, the F1 key is mapped to L1 and
the 0 numeric key is mapped to L17. All of the panels except those that have eight user LED's
are mapped according to this table.

LED Map for All Panels

LED Key
L1 F1
L2 F2
L3 F3
L4 F4
L5 F5
L6 F6
L7 F7
L8 F8
L9 F9
L10 F10

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 504
Tech-note

L11 F11
L12 F12
L13 F13
L14 F14
L15 F15
L16 F16
L17 0
L18 1
L19 2
L20 3
L21 4
L22 5
L23 6
L24 7
L25 8
L26 9
L27 .
L28 +/-

LED Map for Eight User LEDs

The mapping in the following table represents panels that have eight user LED's.

LED KEY
L1 F1
L2 F2
L3 F3
L4 F4
L5 F5
L6 F6
L7 F7
L8 F8
L9 F9
L10 F10
L11 F11
L12 F12
L13 F13
L14 F14
L15 F15
L16 F16
L25 USER LED 0
L26 USER LED 1
L27 USER LED 2
L28 USER LED 3
L29 USER LED 4
L30 USER LED 5
L31 USER LED 6

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 505
Tech-note

L32 USER LED 7

Page Request Register

The page to be displayed can be selected either by the operator from the front panel keypad or
by the controller itself.

The controller selects the page to be displayed by writing the corresponding page number into
the PR register in the Controller Update Area. Note that once the panel has changed to the
corresponding page, the user needs to write a 0 back into the PR register in order to return
control back to the keys on the panel. If this is not done, the user will be ‘stuck’ on that page.
When the panel detects a page request from the controller, it checks the front panel keyboard
and the Expanded Keyboard (if present). If no key has been pressed for the last three seconds,
the page selected by the controller is displayed.

While a controller page request is active (PR not 0), the operator will not be able to change
pages using the arrow keys.

Note: Page numbers are stored in either binary or BCD format, depending on the controller
being used.

Controller Control Word

Controller Control Word

The bits of the Controller Control Word are set and reset by the controller according to the
application logic. The panel responds to these bits as shown in the following table.

Bit # Function
C0 Print Screen
C1 Disable Data Entry
C2 Select Alarm Mode
C15 Enable Mailbox

C0 Print Screen

When bit C0 in the Controller Control Word is set, the panel sends the currently displayed
page to the printer. The bit must be reset to 0 before another print request can be processed.

Note: If the current password enables the user to request printouts, the currently displayed page
can be printed directly from the front panel by pressing the "Prt Scr" or "9 / PRT" keys
(depending on the panel model).

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 506
Tech-note

C1 Disable Data Entry

When bit C1 in the Controller Control Word is set, the operator cannot enter the Data Entry
Mode on the panel, even if the password otherwise enables them to do so. In this way, the
controller can temporarily or permanently inhibit modification of variable values in a way
defined by its program.

C2 Select Alarm Mode

When C2 is set, the display will NOT switch to Alarm mode automatically. Instead, the
operator will have to select ALARM from the Panel Command menu with the proper keyboard
actions. Once inside the ALARM menu, the user will be able to view and acknowledge any
active alarms (If there are no pending alarms, the user will not be able to enter the ALARM
menu). When the bit is reset to zero, the display will automatically switch to Alarm mode
when at least one alarm is active.

Note: Bit C2 only disables the automatic display of the alarm screen. Any alarm attributes that
were set during project development remain active.

C15 Enable Mailbox

Setting bit C15 enables the panel to cyclically read the data in the Mailbox. Note that the
Mailbox must be configured prior to setting this bit (see Chapter 8). When this bit is not set,
the panel will not read the data in the Mailbox, thus reducing communication time and
increasing system performance.

Buzzer handling

The PLC Control Word of RDA block, bit C6 & C7 are used for buzzer control through PLC.
By setting C6, buzzer control is given to PLC and the PLC switches the buzzer on/off using C7
bit.

Two bits are used for this i.e.

Enable bit:

bit = 0 buzzer standard,

bit = 1 control from PLC

Control bit:

if Enable bit = 1, then

bit = 0 buzzer off,

bit = 1 buzzer on

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 507
Tech-note

7.9 Recipes

7.9.1 Recipes

Data may be stored inside a panel in data retentive memory. The available amount of data
retentive memory varies depending on the UniOP model. This data retentive memory can be
used to permanently store data for use by an attached controller. This data can be written to the
controller, and, conversely, the data can be read from the controller and then placed in the data
retentive memory. This concept is termed "Recipes" and offers a powerful way to extend the
capabilities of the controller. This is especially true for controllers that have a limited amount
of internal memory.

Recipes are configured by adding the required controller data items to a page as recipe data
fields. A recipe can be associated with a particular page and is composed of all the recipe data
items on that page. Recipe data items contain all the information associated with normal
controller data fields, but rather than the data being read and written directly to the controller
during the course of normal operation, the data is instead read from and written to the UniOP
memory that is reserved for the data item. Only when the UniOP panel is explicitly asked to
write the data to the controller is the data sent to the controller. Similarly, only when the
UniOP panel is explicitly asked to read the data from the controller is the data actually read
from the controller.

Working with Recipes

Inserting Recipe Data Fields

Configuring Recipe Parameter Sets

Recipes and Control Variables

Recipes and the Keyboard Macro Editor

Recipe Menu

Recipes and the Interlock Mailbox

Multipage Recipe Support

Recipes and Events Backup in Flash

Recipe Examples

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 508
Tech-note

7.9.2 Working with Recipes

Setting up a recipe, although not particularly complex, does involve several steps. These
include:

Inserting recipe data fields

Configuring recipe data fields

Creating a Recipe Menu

Programming the Recipe Menu using the Keyboard Macro Editor

Downloading the recipe to the panel

7.9.3 Inserting Recipe Data Fields

Before any other recipe actions can take place, a recipe data field must exist in a project. To
add a recipe data field, use Insert - Data Fields to add a Numeric/ASCII, Bargraph, or Message
Data Field and set the Reference type as Recipe.

Before a recipe can be configured, a recipe data field must be inserted into a project. Recipe
data fields can be added to a page from the Data Fields submenu under the Insert menu. From
the Data Fields submenu, select either Numeric/ASCII, Bargraph, or Message.

From the Data Field Properties dialog box, you can specify that the data field be of Reference
type PLC, a panel Control Variable, Recipe data, or Index. The Control Variable offers a
means of controlling and monitoring recipes.

Once a data field identified as a recipe type has been added to a project page, you can work
with other recipe commands.

7.9.4 Configuring Recipe Parameter Sets

A recipe is associated with a particular page and is composed of all the recipe data fields on
that page. However, there can be a number of different parameter sets for a recipe.

A parameter set is a specific block of data within a recipe. A recipe parameter set is created by
assigning particular values to the recipe data fields on a page. With Designer, it is possible to
create many different parameter sets within a single recipe. Depending upon the panel model,
there can be up to 1024 parameter sets of a single recipe. Not only is a block of memory in the
panel reserved for every recipe; separate blocks of memory are also reserved for each of the
parameter sets contained within a particular recipe. All the parameter sets of a particular recipe
always contain the same recipe data items but the values of these recipe data items vary
between the different parameter sets.

These different recipe parameter sets can control different processes. One set may be used to
configure the controller to control the production of 2 mm screws, another set may be used to

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 509
Tech-note

configure the controller to control the production of 5 mm screws, and yet another to control
the production of 7 mm screws. Each set of parameters is stored in a different parameter set
within the same recipe.

You can specify the number of parameter sets to be contained within a recipe, as well as assign
the initial values to the different parameter sets of a recipe. From the Page menu select Recipe
Configuration. This brings up the Recipe Configure dialog box where initial values may be
entered for recipe data items. These initial values will be in the format that was specified for
that data field in the Data Field Properties dialog box. For example, if a numerical format of
hexadecimal was entered in the Data Field Properties dialog box for a recipe data item, then all
the subsequent values entered in the Recipe Configuration dialog box for this recipe data item
will also be in hexadecimal. If you specify a numeric data format of hexadecimal for a recipe
data item, and then enter a value of 10 in the Recipe Configuration dialog box, the 10 will be
interpreted as 10 hexadecimal (base 16).

Note: Recipe data items must be defined on the current page before the Recipe Configuration
dialog box can be activated. To do so, insert a Numeric/ASCII, Bargraph, or Message data
field and select Recipe as the Reference.

Note: The recipe values section is in the form of a spreadsheet. Each row is associated with a
particular recipe data field. The controller address of the recipe data item is displayed at the far
left hand side of the row, enabling you to tell which row is associated with which recipe data
item. Each column is associated with a particular parameter set of the recipe. Each parameter
set is identified by a number. The first column corresponds to parameter set 1, the second
column to parameter set 2, and so on.

7.9.5 Recipes and Control Variables

Recipes and Control Variables

Control variables offer a means of controlling and monitoring the Recipes. Control variables
are special data fields that are stored in the UniOP panel memory. You can control certain
operations of the panel by modifying the values held in these internal variables.

There are six types of control variables that affect recipes: Recipe File Status, Recipe
Parameter Set Selection, Recipe Action, Data Entry Status, Data Entry Field Number, Recipe
Page for Selection, and Recipe Key.

Control variables can be added to the project in the same way as other data fields. Control
variable data fields can be added to a page from the Data Fields submenu under the Insert
menu. From the Data Fields submenu, select either Numeric/ASCII, Bargraph, or Message. In
the Properties dialog box, set the Reference type as Variable. Click the "…" button to set the
reference location, data type and format, page number, etc. in the Data Field Properties dialog
box.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 510
Tech-note

7.9.6 Recipes and the Keyboard Macro Editor

The Keyboard Macro Editor provides a way to configure panel keys to perform recipe
functions. When doing so, use Page n mode (where n is the page on which the recipe of
interest is located).

Keyboard Macro Editor commands that pertain to recipes include:

Recipe Control - can be used to download, upload, or select a parameter set.

Go to Recipe Menu - can be used to jump to a page with a Recipe Menu.

Scroll Recipe Menu - can be used to scroll to a selection in the Recipe Menu.

Confirm Recipe Menu Selection - can be used to accept the selected

parameter set name.

Recipes and Events Backup - can be used to back up recipe data, as well as
the event list, into flash memory inside the panel.

Step Control Variables - can be used to assign a key or touch cell to toggle
through the different parameter sets.

7.9.7 Recipe Menu

Recipe Menu

The Recipe Menu is a feature that simplifies recipe parameter set selection on UniOP panels
through a user-friendly interface. It provides a menu-like field that can contain names to
describe the parameter set instead of using numbers. Each name represents one recipe
parameter set.

Note: A Recipe Name field must be defined to enable Recipe Menu support.

Recipe Names

Recipe Menu Support Fields

Creating a Recipe Menu Field

Recipe Menu Keyboard Macros

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 511
Tech-note

Recipe Names

Recipe Names

A Recipe Name should be defined for all of the pages containing recipes that are going to be
handled using the Recipe Menu, and also for pages that are referred to by Recipe Key fields.

This is done by adding a Numeric/ASCII data field with an ASCII display style and Recipe
type Reference on the page where the recipe is located and filling the Recipe Item values in the
Recipe Configuration box with an ASCII name for each parameter set.

This ASCII field is called a "Recipe Name" field. (This field is not a field type name; it only
describes the field's purpose.) If the referred page has no Recipe Name field defined, the
Recipe Key field will display asterisks ("*").

Note: This ASCII field is not an internal variable in the panel memory. It needs to be
addressed to a physical location in the PLC memory. The amount of memory required depends
on the length of the ASCII string: one byte per character.

A Recipe Name Example is provided.

Recipe Name Example

This example of creating a Recipe Name assumes that the current page is the page with defined
recipes and that it is the page for which you want to add a Recipe Name.

Create a new project file by selecting New from the File menu, or by clicking on
the New icon on the toolbar. Name the new file and click OK.

Insert an ASCII data field by selecting Insert - Data Fields - Numeric/ASCII, or

clicking on the Numeric Field icon on the toolbar.

Use the cursor crosshairs to define a data box on the page.

Select the data field style as ASCII, and set the Reference to be Recipe.

Click on the "…" button to set the Reference value. Verify the Data Field
Properties settings, or change if necessary. Click OK.

Click on the Range tab. Select Read/Write to make recipe names editable.

Click OK. A data field placeholder will appear using "R" as a placeholder for
the actual recipe values.

From the Page menu choose Recipe Configuration.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 512
Tech-note

Set the Number of Parameter Sets as appropriate. (For example, set to 4 to

define four recipe parameter sets if you also plan to also enter four numeric
style recipe data fields on the page.)

Find the Recipe Item with the location of the Recipe Name field. (This will
normally be the row with empty boxes.) Fill in the boxes in the row for that
Recipe Item with ASCII names for the recipe parameter set.

Select this Recipe Item by clicking on the button with the record number. The
entire row highlights to indicate that it is selected.

Click on the Set As Recipe name button to set this Recipe Item to be the
Recipe Name. An asterisk ("*") appears to the right of the Recipe Item to
identify it as the Recipe Name.

Click on the OK button to accept the changes.

Recipe Menu Support Fields

There are three specific fields that support the Recipe Menu. They are the:

Recipe Menu field,

Recipe Page For Selection field, and

Recipe Key field.

The Recipe Menu field is the actual field that displays the menu with recipe names. The
currently selected recipe parameter set is indicated using user defined attribute combinations
(blink, highlight, reverse).

The Recipe Page For Selection field shows the number of the page containing the actual recipe
data referred to by the Recipe Menu.

The Recipe Key field is not directly connected with Recipe Menus. It is a less user-friendly
way of selecting a recipe parameter set by name. In order to choose a recipe parameter set, you
have to edit the field and type the desired recipe name (instead of being able to select it from a
menu). It can also be used to show the currently selected Recipe Parameter Set name for a
specific page. The Recipe Key field must refer to a specific page with a defined Recipe Name.

These fields do not depend on each other and can be freely put on any page in the project in
any combination.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 513
Tech-note

Creating a Recipe Menu Field

Creating a Recipe Menu Field

The Recipe Menu field is the field that displays the menu with the parameter set names. It
displays recipe names for the page number specified by the Recipe Page For Selection internal
UniOP variable. The value of this variable can be displayed and changed using the Recipe
Page For Selection field. Its value can be automatically set by the Go To Recipe Menu macro
command.

The currently selected recipe name is indicated with a user-defined attribute combination
(blink, highlight, reverse).

Note: A Recipe Name field must be defined to enable Recipe Menu support.

Note: The only field on the page needed for displaying a Recipe Menu is the Recipe Menu
field. Other fields can show additional information but are not necessary.

Note: If Recipe Page For Selection contains the page number of a page without a Recipe
Name field defined, the Recipe Menu field will display asterisks ("*").

A Recipe Menu example is provided.

Recipe Menu Example

The following procedure describes how to add a Recipe Menu field.

Create a new project file by selecting New from the File menu, or by clicking on
the New icon on the toolbar. Name the new file and click OK.

Insert a numeric data field by selecting Insert - Data Fields - Numeric/ASCII, or

clicking on the Numeric/ASCII icon on the toolbar.

Use the cursor crosshairs to define a data box on the page.

Select the data field style as Numeric, and set the Reference to be Recipe.

Click on the "…" button to set the Reference value. Verify the Data Field
Properties settings, or change if necessary. Click OK.

Click OK again. A data field placeholder will appear using "R" as a placeholder
for the actual recipe values.

Select Insert - Recipe Menu, or click on the Recipe Menu icon on the toolbar.

Use the cursor crosshairs to define a box on the page. This area will contain

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 514
Tech-note

the Recipe Menu field.

The Recipe Menu dialog box appears.

Adjust the Width and Height of the Recipe Menu field if necessary.

Choose the attribute combination (blink, highlight, and/or reverse) for indicating
the selected recipe name.

Check Show Record Numbers if you want to show the record number (which is
just the parameter set number) along with the recipe name.

Click on the OK button.

Recipe Menu Keyboard Macros

Three special keyboard macros support Recipe Menus. They are:

Go to Recipe Menu - can be used to jump to a page with a Recipe Menu.

Scroll Recipe Menu - can be used to scroll to a selection in the Recipe Menu.

Confirm Recipe Menu Selection - can be used to accept the selected

parameter set name.

7.9.8 Recipes and the Interlock Mailbox

The Interlock Mailbox offers a powerful way to control the operation of recipes from the
controller. There are seven mailbox commands available to function with recipes:

Start Recipe Download

Start Recipe Upload

Recipe Status

Get Parameter Set Number

Set Parameter Set Number

Get Recipe Transfer Priority

Set Recipe Transfer Priority

The mailbox commands allow the choice of the recipe page and also of the parameter set. All
mailbox commands related to recipes return a completion code describing the results of the

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 515
Tech-note

operation. The mailbox interface to recipes is particularly useful if it is necessary to transfer a

sequence of recipes to and/or from the panel.

7.9.9 Multipage Recipe Support

Multipage Recipe Support

Data which are logically part of a single recipe can be scattered over several project pages and
still be selected, downloaded or uploaded with a single command. A recipe spanning several
pages is called "Multipage Recipe".

Note: Multipage recipes are supported by UniOP firmware versions 4.20 and later.

Multipage Organization

Multipage Configuration

Recipe Menu for Multipage Recipes

Multipage Organization

You can define one multipage recipe and as many standard, single-page recipes as you wish
per project. The multipage recipe can contain any number of pages, even all the pages in the
project.

Multipage Configuration

To enable the Multipage recipe feature in the Designer software, define the desired number of
single page recipes in your project and for each of these pages check the Multipage recipe
checkbox in the Recipe Configuration dialog box.

Marking the checkboxes links all multipage recipe pages together and any recipe-related action
(parameter set selection, upload and download) done in run-time (i.e., on the UniOP panel) on
any linked page will result in the same action being done for all the pages. In other words,
parameter set selection, upload, and download process can be done by referring to any page
contained in the multipage recipe.

The Multipage recipe checkbox must be checked for all pages belonging to the multipage
recipe. For any recipe page not contained in the multipage recipe, simply leave the checkbox
unchecked, as it is by default.

The recipe name should be defined in only one page of the multipage recipe. If you want to
display names in the recipe menu for the multipage recipe, the Recipe Page for Selection field
must refer to the page that contains the ASCII field declared as the Recipe Name.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 516
Tech-note

Note: The definition of parameter set numbers and values for a multipage recipe is still done
one page at a time, as it is for standard, single-page recipes.

Note: An equal number of parameter sets in all pages belonging to the multipage recipe should
be defined, otherwise recipe upload and/or download may be aborted in the middle. In
addition, make sure that the variables on the pages of a multipage recipe are different.
Otherwise, you could have problems in data integrity during download and upload operations.

Recipe Menu for Multipage Recipes

Recipe Menu features are enabled on multipage recipes in the same way as single page recipes.

Make sure that the recipe name is defined in only one page of the multipage recipe. If you want
to display names in the recipe menu for the multipage recipe the Recipe Page for Selection
field must refer to the page that contains the ASCII field declared as the Recipe Name.

7.9.10 Recipes and Events Backup in Flash

Recipes and Event Backup in Flash

On some of the UniOP panels, it is now possible to back up recipe data, as well as the event
list, into flash memory inside the UniOP. This means that even the UniOP loses power AND
the backup battery is discharged or missing, the recipe data and the event list will be preserved.

To use this feature, select the two checkboxes entitled Recipe Backup and Events Backup by
selecting Project – Panel Setup and clicking on the Settings index tab. Please note that
selecting these features uses memory within the UniOP that is normally reserved for the
project file. Therefore, the amount of memory available for the project file is reduced by the
amount of memory reserved for the entire backup of both recipe data and the event list, which
is 128 KB.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 517
Tech-note

Panel Startup Sequence

With this feature enabled, the following sequence is performed on power-up of the UniOP:

Check the data inside RAM. If the data is valid, it will be used.

If the data inside RAM is invalid, the data in flash memory is checked. If the
data inside the flash memory is valid, it will be used.

If the data in the flash memory is not valid, the recipe memory and the event
list will be initialized with no data.

Recipes and Events Run-Time Backup

Recipes and Events Run-time Backup

Recipes and Events backup implementation is slightly different depending on the UniOP
Firmware version.

Using UniOP Firmware version V4.40, when this feature is enabled, recipes
are copied to flash memory automatically from the UniOP after any recipe
field modification or after any controller recipe upload operation. The event list is copied to
flash memory any time one event happens. A new macro command can be used to perform a
manual backup operation.

Using UniOP Firmware version V4.44 or higher, the memory backup is activated
only by the manual of the corresponding macro command or after any controller recipe upload
operation (recipe field modification on panel doesn’t force an automatically recipe backup to
flash memory).

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 518
Tech-note

If the Recipes&Events backup flags in Panel Setup are disabled, the macro command does not
have any effect.

If the flags are enabled, the data backup is performed.

For the duration of the write operation to the Flash memory the panel LED #65 will be on to
indicate that a write operation is in progress. Some UniOP models do not have this LED. For
those UniOP panels that do not have this LED, the control variable Recipe/Event Backup can
be used to give feedback to the operator on the status of the backup operation. This control
variable takes the values listed below.

Recipe/Event Backup:

0 = Standby
1 = Backup operation in progress

The S12 bit of the RDA area is used to inform the controller that a backup operation to Flash
memory is in progress. The UniOP will set this bit to 1 just before the backup operation
begins. When the backup operation is complete, UniOP will reset the bit to 0.

Note: When UniOP goes from Configuration Mode to Operation Mode, the content of the
Event List stored in RAM is erased. Using the “Events Run-time Backup” feature when UniOP
goes back to Operation Mode if a valid list is stored in Flash, this is retrieved and copied to
RAM; if the Flash memory does not contain any valid data, the Event list will be empty.

The use of the “Clear Event List” macro commands erases the content of the Event list stored
in RAM and in Flash memory.

7.9.11 Recipe Example

Recipe Examples

Two examples are provided to experiment with recipes. One is a straightforward example of
defining and downloading a simple recipe, while the other uses a more complex configuration.

Simple Recipe Example

It is not necessary to create a complex project to try recipes. This example will illustrate how
to define a very simple recipe.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 519
Tech-note

Make sure that the panel is in Configuration Mode.

Connect the panel to the PC and the controller using the correct cables.

Start the Designer software.

Create a new project file by selecting New from the File menu, or by clicking on
the New icon on the toolbar. Name the new file and click OK.

Click on the page and insert text (PLC Data, Recipe, Temperature and
Pressure) to resemble the figure below.

Select Insert - Data Fields - Numeric/ASCII, or click on the Numeric Field icon
on the toolbar.

Use the cursor crosshairs to define a data box under "PLC Data" for
"Temperature".

Select the data field style as Numeric, and set the Reference to be PLC.

Click on the "…" button to set the Reference value. Verify the Data Field
Properties settings, or change if necessary. Click OK.

Click OK again. A numeric data field placeholder will appear using "9" as a
placeholder for the actual numeric values.
Repeat steps 6 through 10 for "Pressure" under "PLC Data".

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 520
Tech-note

Select Insert - Data Fields - Numeric/ASCII, or click on the Numeric Field icon
on the toolbar.

Use the cursor crosshairs to define a data box under "Recipe" for
"Temperature".

Select the data field style as Numeric, and set the Reference to be Recipe.

Click on the "…" button to set the Reference value. Verify the Data Field
Properties settings, or change if necessary. Click OK.

Click OK again. A recipe data field placeholder will appear using "R" as a
placeholder for the actual recipe values.

Select Recipe Menu from the Insert menu and click OK.

Select the option Recipe Configuration from the Page menu. This will bring up
the dialog box shown in below.

Enter 4 for the Number of Parameter Sets.

Enter the recipe values as shown above. Note that the Recipe Item addresses
are the reference addresses of the fields that were defined earlier.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 521
Tech-note

Click OK to confirm the operation.

From the Project menu select the Keyboard Macro Editor.

On the Page 1 tab, click on F1. It will display a different color from the other
keys to show that it is selected.

For Key States select Pressed.

From the Commands bar select the command Recipe Control. (Click the arrow
to view additional commands if this command is not visible on the command
bar.)

In the Recipe Upload / Download / Select parameter set dialog box, click
Download. For Parameter set insert 1.

Repeat steps 24 and 25 for Parameter sets 2, 3, and 4.

Click OK.

Download the project to the panel by pressing the F2 key on the computer
keyboard, by selecting the Download icon on the toolbar, or by choosing
Download from the Transfers menu.

When the download is finished, the panel will go into Operation Mode. The
variables in the left column represent the content of the controller memory. The
column on the right will represent the content of the first recipe parameter set
once the F1 key is pressed.

Press the F1 key to make the panel start downloading the current recipe
parameter set (which is parameter set 1). After a few seconds, the operation
will be completed and the content of the controller memory will show the same
values as those that are stored in parameter set 1.

Complex Recipe Example

Create a new project file by selecting New from the File menu, or by clicking on
the New icon on the toolbar. Name the new file and click OK.

Insert a numeric data field by selecting Insert - Data Fields - Numeric/ASCII, or

clicking on the Numeric Field icon on the toolbar.

Use the cursor crosshairs to define a data box on the page.

Select the data field style as Numeric, and set the Reference to be Recipe.

Click on the "…" button to set the Reference value. Verify the Data Field

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 522
Tech-note

Properties settings, or change if necessary. Click OK.

Click OK again. A data field placeholder will appear using "R" as a placeholder
for the actual recipe values.

Insert an ASCII data field by selecting Insert - Data Fields - Numeric/ASCII, or

clicking on the Numeric Field icon on the toolbar.

Use the cursor crosshairs to define a data box on the page.

Select the data field style as ASCII, and set the Reference to be Recipe.

Click on the "…" button to set the Reference value. Verify the Data Field
Properties settings, or change if necessary. Click OK.

Click on the Range tab. Select Read/Write to make recipe names editable.

Click OK. A data field placeholder will appear using "R" as a placeholder for
the actual recipe values.

From the Page menu choose Recipe Configuration.

Set the Number of Parameter Sets to 4 to define four recipe parameter sets.

Enter parameter set values as shown below.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 523
Tech-note

Select the Recipe Item for the second row by clicking on the button with the
record number 2. The entire row highlights to indicate that it is selected.

Click on the Set As Recipe name button to set this Recipe Item to be the
Recipe Name. An asterisk ("*") appears to the right of the Recipe Item to
identify it as the Recipe Name.

Click on the OK button to accept the changes.

Select Insert Page from the Page menu.

From the new page, select Insert - Recipe Menu, or click on the Recipe Menu
icon on the toolbar.

Use the cursor crosshairs to define a box on the page. This area will contain
the Recipe Menu field.

The Recipe Menu dialog box appears.

Adjust the Width and Height of the Recipe Menu field if necessary.

Choose the attribute combination (blink, highlight, and/or reverse) for indicating
the selected recipe name.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 524
Tech-note

Check Show Record Numbers if you want to show the record number (which is
just the parameter set number) along with the recipe name.

Click on the OK button.

Select Project - Keyboard Macro Editor, or click on the Keyboard Macro Editor
icon.

From the Page 1 tab select the command Scroll recipe menu.

Specify the step size as 1 in the Scroll recipe menu dialog box.

Select the command Confirm recipe menu selection.

Click OK.

Go back to Page 2 (the first page that you created).

From Page 2, select Project - Keyboard Macro Editor, or click on the Keyboard
Macro Editor icon.

Repeat steps 32 and 33 for Parameter sets 2, 3, and 4.

Click OK.

Make sure that the panel is in Configuration Mode.

Download the project to the panel by pressing the F2 key on the computer
keyboard, by selecting the Download icon on the toolbar, or by choosing
Download from the Transfers menu.

When the download is finished, the panel will go into Operation Mode. The
variables represent the content of the first recipe parameter set once the F1
key is pressed.

Press the F1 key to make the panel start downloading the current recipe
parameter set (which is parameter set 1). After a few seconds, the operation
will be completed and the content of the controller memory will show the same
values as those that are stored in parameter set 1.

7.10 Tags

7.10.1 Tags

Tags allow mnemonic reference to PLC variables. Tags in a project can be imported from a
description file generated outside Designer.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 525
Tech-note

To use tags, the Enable Tags box must be checked under Project - Configure Tag Dictionaries.

Once enabled, you can select a tag name instead of filling in the PLC address for a field in the
project. When a tag name is selected, the PLC Reference information will be automatically
filled in with the reference information associated with the tag name.

Discussions about tag dictionaries, using the Tag Editor, using tags in Designer, and tag
validation are provided, as is a tag example.

Note: When a tag name is selected, the PLC Reference information will be filled in with the
reference information from the tag and the PLC Reference dialog controls will be disabled.
You will only be able to change tag information from the Tag Editor in the Tools menu.

Note: Tag support is available for internal controllers as selected under Project - Configure
Controller. Tag definition for an external controller is allowed only if the external PLC
supports tag definitions. Please refer to EXOR Technical Documentation for further
information about drivers that support tag definition.

7.10.2 Tag Dictionaries

Tag Dictionaries

A tag dictionary is a database of file format *.mdb. These databases may be imported to or
exported from Designer.

The file to be used as the project tag dictionary is set under Project - Configure Tag
Dictionaries. (This is also where you can set the Enable Tags checkbox.) Click on the "…"
button to select the location of the tag database file of choice. Tag dictionaries are tied to
controller brands and models. If you do not have a tag dictionary, the Tag Editor in the Tools
menu allows you to create one.

A tag dictionary is associated with each project and defines the model and attributes of the
PLC. You can select a dictionary for your project when you enable the tag feature in the
project for the first time.

You can create multiple tag dictionaries inside a tag database and add tags to each dictionary.
Each dictionary is configured for a specific PLC controller and model name. Each project is
assigned to a dictionary.

You can create multiple dictionaries in a database in order to support a project that has a PLC
Network and/or UniNET Network. To be able to use tags for a project that supports the
UniNET/PLC Network, at least one dictionary must exist in the database for each of the nodes
in the network.

Note: If a project supports a UniNET/PLC network, each UniNET node/ PLC Node must be
tied to a tag Dictionary in the database. You will be required to assign a tag dictionary for all
the nodes during the configuration of UniNET/PLC network. Each node must have at least one

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 526
Tech-note

dictionary in the database. If PLC network is enabled and you change the PLC Node, the Tag
Name controls will be initialized with the tags from the dictionary tied to the current PLC
Node.

Additional information is available on:

Tags and the UniNET & PLC Networks

Multiple Project Support

Tags and the UniNET and PLC Networks

With the UniNET network and a PLC network, different PLC drivers can be assigned to
different fields in the project. Because of this, Designer must support multiple tag dictionaries
for a project. When assigning a tag name to a network field, Designer will query the tag
database for the tag dictionary associated with the network node's PLC driver. You will then be
able to select the tag name from the list of tags in the associated tag dictionary.

Note: You will only be able to select a tag from a dictionary that is assigned to the given PLC
node. This is necessary since the format of the address associated with a tag is dependent on
the PLC.

Multiple Project Support

Typically, one tag database file will be used for each Designer project. The tag database
resides in the same directory as the project file. If you want to copy the project data, you must
also copy the tag database with the project.

In some instances, however, you may want to create a tag database that contains tags for
multiple projects. As a result, the tag database has been designed such that multiple projects
can exist in the same database. For these situations, you can set the location of the tag database
in Designer (if it is not in the same directory as the project file) and Designer will access only
the tags that are associated with the active project.

7.10.3 Tag Editor

Tag Editor

Use the Tag Editor to create dictionaries and tags in databases that can be used in one or more
projects. The Tag Editor allows you to easily work with a large number of tags by creating a
tag database for your project. It provides the capability to add, delete and modify tags as well
as assign PLC addresses to each tag, plus it includes import and export capabilities to exchange
tags with external applications. You can create a list of tag names in the Tag Editor and then
assign the tag names to various fields of the Designer project by simply selecting a tag name.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 527
Tech-note

The Tag Editor uses a grid-like user interface. Features of the Tag Editor include:

Add, delete and edit tags.

Enter the name, address, data type and a comment for each tag.

Create one or more Tag Dictionaries for tags associated with a PLC.

Assign group names to tags.

Import and export tags to and from external data sources.

Cut/copy/paste tags using the Windows clipboard.

Drag and drop tags between the Tag Editor and other applications.
Import project-specific information using a network file and assign dictionaries to each node.

You can create a list of tag names in the Tag Editor and then assign the tag names to the fields
of your project by simply selecting a tag name in the Data Field Properties dialog box.

Using the Tag Editor, you can assign a tag name to fields such as Numeric, Text, Alarm
blocks, etc. When the Data Field Properties dialog box is displayed, a box is included listing
the available tag names. You can select a tag name from the box and the field address will
automatically be set to the PLC address associated with the tag.

When a tag is displayed in the Define Field dialog box, the tag data is retrieved from the tag
database. As such, if you change the PLC reference for a tag in the Tag Editor, the PLC
reference information displayed in the Define Field dialog box will be up to date.

You can also change the tag dictionary for the project. When the tag dictionary is changed, the
address for the tags in the project will be automatically updated based on the new tag
dictionary information.

Additional information is available on the following topics.

Tag Groups

Tag Editor Synchronization

Importing and Exporting Tags

Tag Groups

A Group field is provided for categorizing tags. The group name is assigned when creating the
tag and used to more easily manage large groups of tags. For example, you may want to group
tags according to a PLC program. The program name can be inserted into the Group field and
you will be able to sort tags by program name.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 528
Tech-note

Tag Editor Synchronization

At start up, after a project upload and before a project download, Designer will synchronize the
project tag data with the tag database. To perform the synchronization, Designer will scan the
fields of the project and verify that the tag addresses in the project file match the tag addresses
in the tag database. If there are any differences between the project data and the tag database, a
dialog box will be displayed. This dialog box will include a list of the tags that are different
between the tag database and the project data and provide options to update the project data,
update the tag database, or leave the tag information unchanged.

The tag data between Designer and the tag database is also synchronized when the Define
Field dialog box is displayed. When the Define Field dialog box is displayed for fields that
have tag names, the tag database will be queried to retrieve the field address information. The
address information for the database is then updated in the field and displayed in the dialog
box.
Using this approach, the latest information in the tag database will always be displayed in the
Designer project.

Importing and Exporting Tags

The Tag Editor provides the capability to import and export tags to and from external data
sources. When the Import menu item is selected, an "Open File" type dialog box is displayed
and you can select the desired data source from which to import tags. After the tags are
imported, the tag names and logical addresses are displayed in the Tag Editor grid. When the
Export menu item is selected, a Save As dialog box is displayed and you can select the desired
export format and enter the file name to which to export the tag data.

The Import and Export operations are dependent on the format of the data being imported or
exported.

7.10.4 Using Tags in Designer

Once you have a tags dictionary set up for a project, there are a few additional steps necessary
to configure the project to work with the tags. The controller for the project (Project -
Configure Controller) should be the same controller specified in the tag dictionary.

From the Project menu select Configure Tag Dictionaries. Click the Enable Tags box and
select the tag database you created for this project.

Then, for any applicable field (Numeric/ASCII data field, meter instrument, etc.) click "…"
under Reference to bring up the Data Field Properties dialog box. In the Data Field Properties
box check Enable Tags and select the tag dictionary to be associated with the reference.
You may wish to use the Tag Validation feature in the Project menu before downloading the
project.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 529
Tech-note

7.10.5 Tag Validation

Tag Validation

Tag Validation allows you to switch from one tag dictionary, referring to one set of PLC
addresses, to a different dictionary, referring to different set of PLC addresses in the same
controller, and update all the fields in the project without needing to update the individual PLC
addresses used in the whole project.
Also, you can switch from one tag dictionary, referring to Controller A to a different
dictionary, referring to controller B and update all the fields in the project without updating the
individual PLC addresses used in the whole project.

This feature can also validate the PLC addresses used in a project with respect to the PLC
addresses used in the tag dictionary, and finds and lists any discrepancy items with all details
such as location, etc.
This feature supports updating the tag database (with regard to PLC Address used in the
project) and updating the project field (with regard to PLC Address used in the tag dictionary).

See also Changing PLC Drivers.

Changing PLC Drivers

A tag name represents an address for a particular PLC. As such, when the PLC Driver is
changed in the project, the tag dictionary and the tag names must be invalidated. To minimize
the impact of changing the PLC driver, Designer will attempt to match the tag names from the
previous dictionary to the tag names in the new dictionary associated with the new PLC driver.

When the PLC Driver is changed, you will be required to assign a new tag dictionary for the
new PLC driver. Designer will then iterate through the list of tags in the project and replace the
field address associated with the tag with the address information found from the new
dictionary. The field address associated with each tag will then be validated based on the new
dictionary. If the tag name does not exist in the new dictionary, the address information for the
tag will be set to a default address of the new PLC.

With this approach, it is possible to change from one PLC driver to another PLC driver without
having to reset the tag name for each field, as long as the tag dictionaries for each driver
contain the same tag names.

7.10.6 Tag Example

Tag Example

This tag example is composed of four parts:

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 530
Tech-note

Setting Up a Tag Dictionary

Configuring a Project to Use Tags

Tag Validation, and

Testing Tag Validation

Setting Up a Tag Dictionary

Note: If you already have a tag database and dictionary you may skip to step 4.

Select Tag Editor from the Tools menu. The Tag Editor application opens.

Select File - New from the Tag Editor to create a new tag database. Enter a
name for the new database, specify its location, and click OK.

The database you just created appears in the Tag Editor workspace. Right-
click on the new database and select New Dictionary, or select New Dictionary
from the File menu.

Enter a name for the new tag dictionary in the Tag Dictionary box.

Select the controller driver to be used from the list under Controller Driver.

Select the particular model of that controller driver from the list under Driver
Model.

Click OK.

The New group dialog box appears. Fill in the grid with tag names, comments,
and any other necessary information.

To specify the logical addresses associated with the various tags, click on the
Logical_address box and an arrow appears. Click on the arrow to bring up a
Data Field Properties dialog box. Complete this box for the particular reference
address and click OK. The information appears in the Logical_address box.
The Data_Format box will also be automatically completed.

When the grid is completed, select Save As from the File menu to save the
dictionary.

Close the New group dialog box and select File - Exit to close the Tag Editor.

(Continued in Configuring a Project to Use Tags)

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 531
Tech-note

Configuring a Project to Use Tags

(Continued from Setting Up a Tag Dictionary)

From the Project menu, select Configure Controller. Make sure that the
controller specified for the project is the same as the controller specified for the
tag dictionary. Click OK.

Select Configure Tag Dictionaries from the Project menu if the Change/Select
Tag Dictionary dialog box does not automatically appear.

Click in the Enable Tags box.

Under Database click on the "…" button. Select the tag database you created
and click Open.

Click OK to confirm the tags and controller information and close the
Change/Select Tag Dictionary dialog box.

Create a field or object on the project page, such as a Numeric/ASCII data

field, a push button, or a meter instrument.

Set the Reference as PLC and click the "…" button to bring up the Data Field
Properties dialog box where you can specify the PLC address for the field or
object as per the tags from the tag dictionary. Click the Enable Tag checkbox.
(Note: If the Enable Tag checkbox does not appear in a Data Field Properties
dialog box when you wish to use tags, start again from step 12 to ensure that
the controller is properly set and that tags are enabled in the Tag Dictionary
dialog box.)

Select the group and tag. To change any tag information, click on the Edit
Tags button. Make the necessary changes and click OK to return to the Data
Field Properties dialog box.

Click OK to close the Data Field Properties dialog box.

Click OK to close the field or object properties box.

Save the project by selecting Save from the File menu.

(Continued under Tag Validation)

Tag Validation

(Continued from Configuring a Project to Use Tags)

Select Tag Validation from the Project menu.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 532
Tech-note

If the data field PLC addresses in the project match the PLC addresses used in
the dictionary, then the message "All the tags match with the field address
values" will appear. Click OK. You may safely download your project.

(Continued under Testing Tag Validation)

Testing Tag Validation

(Continued from Tag Validation)

If the data field PLC addresses in the project do not match the PLC addresses
used in the dictionary, the tag validation dialog box appears with a list of the
tags having a discrepancy.

To test this feature, simulate the following changes.

Select Project - Configure Tag Dictionaries. Click on the entry under

Dictionary. A list of dictionaries will appear. Select a different dictionary. Click
OK.

Select Project - Tag Validation. A list of address discrepancies appears.

To modify the PLC addresses, right click on an item. A menu appears allowing
you to choose to update the field with database values, update the database
with field values, or copy to a clipboard.

Select Update Field or Update Database, then click OK.

Select Project - Tag Validation again to verify that all tags match. Save the
project and it may be safely downloaded.

7.11 Trends

7.11.1 Trends

Trending is divided into two main parts: trend acquisition and trend viewing. Trend acquisition
(Project - Trend Buffers) collects the data into a database. The trend viewer (Insert - Trend
Window) displays the data from this database in a graphical format.

Trend Buffer

Trend Window

Internal Panel Control Variables

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 533
Tech-note

Trend Macros

Trend Printing

Mailbox

Trend Limitations

7.11.2 Trend Buffer

Trend Buffer

The first step in creating a trend is to create a trend buffer.

For this, you need to define two items: the PLC variable that is to be sampled, and the method
by which the variable is to be sampled.

The variable can be sampled from the UniOP panel or directly from the PLC. If the variable is
sampled from the UniOP panel, all of the data from the trend buffer will be stored within the
memory of the UniOP panel. If the variable is sampled directly from the PLC, the data from
the trend buffer will be stored in the memory of the PLC. In the latter case, the only duty of
the UniOP will be to graphically display the trend buffer data from the PLC.

Configuring a Trend Buffer

Sampling Methods

Configuring a Trend Buffer

Configuring a Trend Buffer

Trend buffers are configured under Project - Trend Buffers. Click the New (Insert) icon to
define a new trend buffer name. Give the trend buffer a name, then select the Reference that is
to be sampled.

To remove a previously defined trend buffer, select the name of the buffer from the trend
buffer list and click the Delete icon.

Buffer Types

Scaling

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 534
Tech-note

Buffer Types

Under the General tab of the Configure Trend Buffers dialog box you should select the size
(number of samples that will be kept during the background sampling) and type of buffer to be
defined. Trends can be sampled in three different ways. The first option (All Pages) is to
continuously sample the trend buffer, regardless of whether or not the trend associated with the
trend buffer is being displayed. The second option (Current Page) is to sample the trend buffer
only when the page where the trend associated with the trend buffer is being displayed. The
third option (On Page) is to sample the trend buffer only when a particular page is being
displayed.

Note: The number of trends that can be sampled in background is limited.

Note: When a trend is sampled in the background (All Pages), the sample size reflects the
number of old samples that will be shown when the page that contains the trend associated
with the trend buffer is displayed. When a trend is sampled in real time (Current Page), you
will never see any old samples because sampling begins when the page that contains the trend
is displayed. In this configuration the sample size is useful only when using the macros to
scroll the trend along the X-axis. If these macros will not be used, you can save UniOP
memory by setting the sample size to 1.

Scaling

Scaling allows for a linear transformation of the data being sampled. This allows you to scale
the data before storing it inside the trend buffer.

Sampling Methods

The Sampling tab in the Configure Trend Buffers dialog box allows you to define when the
trend samples will be taken, and the buffer is cleared.

Samples may be collected from the trend buffer stored inside the memory of the PLC, from the
memory of the UniOP on a cyclical basis, or one a time, when a variable changes value. Or,
data can be sampled only when the defined variable does not contain a value of zero.

Use the Stop Sampling checkbox to stop the sampling when the trend buffer is full. This is a
first-in first-out (FIFO) buffer. Once the buffer is full, older sample values will be erased to
allow the new sample values to be stored.

You can choose to clear the trend buffer upon panel startup, when the trend buffer becomes
full, or when the selected variable changes value. You can also choose to never automatically
clear the trend buffer. However if the Stop when buffer is full checkbox is not selected, the
oldest sample is removed and the newest sample is stored when the buffer is filled.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 535
Tech-note

7.11.3 Trend Window

Trend Window

The trend window is the area used to display the trend buffer. To create a trend window, select
Insert - Trend Window or click on the Trend Window icon on the toolbar. Click and drag to
define an area on the project screen. The Trend Window Properties dialog box will appear.

Note: A trend buffer must be defined under Project - Trend Buffers before you can access the
Trend Window Properties dialog box. If a trend buffer has not already been established, you
will be prompted to create one.

Y-Axis

X-Axis

Layout

Y-Axis

The Y-Axis index tab of the Trend Window Properties dialog box allows you to select the
trend buffers (curves) to be displayed. Use the Add and Delete buttons to add or remove trend
buffers.

For any curve, you can choose visualization properties such as line type, style, size and color.

Note: Once a curve is added to the trend viewer, you will only be able to add additional curves
of the same sampling method to that particular trend window.

Designer creates three new variables for every curve defined. These variables are internal
panel control variables that can be used to display properties of the trend on the UniOP in
alphanumeric format.

The Y-cursor displays the value of the curve at a point on the Y-axis. Use the trend macros to
activate the trend cursor.

The Y-axis minimum and Y-axis maximum variables contain the minimum and maximum
values of the defined Y-axis. On the right of the dialog box, you can define the default value
(Y-axis range) that will be used when the trend window is displayed. If these internal panel
control variables are on the UniOP as read/write fields, their values can be modified on-line,
allowing you to dynamically change the Y-axis range.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 536
Tech-note

X-Axis

X-Axis

Under the X-Axis index tab you can define the X-axis properties of the trend window. The
format of the X-Axis (Time, Samples or On PLC) is defined from the curves that are inside the
trend window. When no curves are defined, all of these radio buttons are disabled. After
adding one or more curves, only the appropriate radio button is enabled.

Note: A single X-Axis exists for all of the curves that have been inserted inside the same trend
viewer window.

The X-axis range can be defined three different ways.

Time defined - when the trend buffers inside the trend viewer are sampled
cyclically from the UniOP.

Defined by a maximum number of samples - enabled when the trend buffers

inside the trend viewer are sampled on PLC events.

Defined on the PLC - the number of samples must be defined inside the PLC
memory.

Automatic scroll control is available so that a trend window can shift when it becomes full.
How much the trend viewer will be shifted upon each scroll operation can be a fixed amount of
time or a fixed number of samples. The scroll direction defines the direction of the curve. The
curve can be drawn Left to Right, Right to Left, Up to Down or Down to Up.

The X-cursor displays the value of the curve at a point on the X-axis. Use the trend macros to
activate the trend cursor.

The X-axis minimum and X-axis maximum variables contain the minimum and maximum
values of the defined X-axis.

Trend Buffers on PLC

PLC Memory Area

Trend Buffers on PLC

Samples can be collected and stored inside the trend buffer of the UniOP panel or in the
memory of the PLC. This section describes how to set up and organize trend buffers that are
sampled inside the PLC.

Note: Trend buffers on PLC are available only on a few selected communication drivers.
Please enquire for availability.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 537
Tech-note

To enable a trend buffer in PLC memory, select the On PLC radio button on the X-Axis tab of
the Trend Window Properties dialog box.

PLC Memory Area

To properly sample and store the data in the PLC, the trend buffer needs to be defined as a
consecutive number of words with the following structure:

Word 00 Trend buffer identify (counter). Identification number of the trend buffer being
displayed. The UniOP will erase its internal copy of samples when it detects a change
in the value of this word.
Word 01 Max number of samples (size of the trend window). Size of the trend window displayed
on the UniOP as a number of samples. The uses this information each time a page of
the project file is initialized.
Word 02 Number of samples available to be displayed in the PLC memory. Number of active
samples inside the PLC memory. The UniOP will draw a trend based on the number of
samples entered in this memory location. When this value is increased, a new piece of
the trend will be drawn. Likewise, when this value is decreased, a portion of the trend
will be removed. If you want to "freeze" the trend, enter a value of zero in this memory
location. To erase the entire trend from the UniOP, this value must be set to zero AND
the value of Word 00 must be changed.
Word 03 Sample #01
Word 04 Sample #02
Word 05 Sample #03
Word 06 Sample #04
Word nn Sample #(nn-2)

The address of the first PLC word (Word 00) needs to be entered in the Reference field under
Project - Configure Trend Buffers.

The settings to initialize the PLC operation mode are:

Initialization

Word 00 0
Word 01 <Buffer width in samples>
Word 02 0

Sampling (loop)

Word 03/nn Add samples

Word 02 Update the number of ready samples

New trend

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 538
Tech-note

Word 02 Set to 0 to invalidate the PLC trend

buffer (UniOP can continue to use and
display the samples already displayed,
but it cannot display new samples)
Word 03/nn Add new samples
Word 00 +1 (UniOP detects this change and
erases the trend)
Word 02 Update the number of ready samples

Layout

From the Layout index tab of the Trend Window Properties dialog box you can define the
main trend viewer properties such as the title, colors, border, grid, etc. Options in the Title
section define the visual appearance of the trend viewer window title. Options in the Window
section define the appearance of the trend viewer window.

7.11.4 Internal Panel Control Variables

Internal panel control variables associated with trending can be defined and used from the
trend viewer. Alphanumeric values of these variables can be displayed on the UniOP. To
access these variables, it is necessary to switch Designer into Control Variables mode and
create a numeric field. You will need to select a UniOP variable from Insert - Data Fields. The
Variable name control will show the list of variables that have already been defined. The
meaning of these variables can be found inside the trend window.

7.11.5 Trend Macros

There are two icons in the Macro Editor (under Project - Keyboard Macro Editor) that are
associated with trending.

The first macro, Trend buffer print, gives you the ability to print the trend buffer in
alphanumeric format. The "buffer to print" parameter shows all of the active trend buffers that
can be printed. This macro can be defined as a global macro and is thus defined on the All
Pages index tab.

The second macro, Trend window, can be defined only on a local basis and must be defined
from the Page n index tab. This macro allows for manipulation of the trend currently being
viewed.

7.11.6 Trend Printing

Trend buffers can be printed in either alphanumeric format or in graphic format. To print a
trend buffer in alphanumeric format use the Trend buffer print macro (under Project -

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 539
Tech-note

Keyboard Macro Editor - All Pages). To print in graphic mode, use Designer's report features
(under Project - Report on Panel Printer - Reports). To do this, it is necessary to first create a
page that contains the trend window.

7.11.7 Mailbox

You can start a trend buffer printout by issuing a mailbox command.

The Mailbox command used to print a trend buffer is 0x00A1. The first mailbox parameter is
the trend ID number. You can find the ID number assigned to the trend buffer by looking
under Project - Trend Buffers.

The mailbox command response codes are:

0 OK Command executed successfully

1 ERROR Printer is busy (another print job in execution)
2 ERROR Invalid trend buffer ID

An example of using a mailbox command to start a trend buffer print is shown below:

DB10, DB01 <- 161 (0x00A1) Write the mailbox command code
DB10, DB02 <- 1 Write the trend ID
DB10, DB00 <- 1 Start the mailbox command

7.11.8 Trend Limitations

Some limitations of using trends are listed below. In addition, the available memory area in the
PLC that can be used to store trend buffers is limited to 60 bytes.

Max number of trend windows inside the same page 10

Max number of curves inside the same trend window 10
Total number of curves that can be use inside the same page 20
Max number of global trend buffers sampled in background 20
Cyclical sampling period 1-9999 sec
The total memory reserved for trend buffer 20 KB

7.12 Working with Graphics

7.12.1 Working with Graphics

This section provides information on the new Designer graphics features.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 540
Tech-note

These features can be divided into three major categories:

Simple Shapes

Graphics Libraries

Object Libraries

Additional information is provided on using Color Boxes.

7.12.2 Simple Shapes

Designer enables its user to insert in their project simple vector graphics, simple shapes.

Once these simple shapes are created, it is possible to change their properties by right-clicking
on them.

Alignment
When two or more simple shapes are selected, it is possible to align them.
To activate this function, select the Align command from the Edit menu.

Size Adjustment
In the same way it is possible to alter the size of a group of shapes.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 541
Tech-note

To activate this function, select the Make Same Size command from the Edit menu.

Grouping
Finally when two or more simple shapes are selected, it is possible to group them.
To activate this function, right-click on the shapes and select the Group command.

7.12.3 Graphics Libraries

Designer is distributed with a rich set of predefined graphic symbols.

To use these symbols just select one of them from the right category (e.g. Arrows, Banners,
Blowers, Callouts, FlowMeters, etc...) and drag-and-drop it on the Project Screen.

If necessary a BitMap Settings dialog box will pop up and allow you to adjust the symbol's
graphic attributes to the panel currently selected inside the project.

By right-clicking on the "Graphics" area a set of commands are displayed. They are divided
into the following categories:

EDIT COMMANDS

Copy
Allows to copy the graphic symbol into the clip-board so that it can be pasted into the Project
Screen.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 542
Tech-note

Remove
Removes the graphic symbol from the catalogue.

Rename
Changes the name of the graphic symbol.

CATALOGUE COMMANDS

New Catalogue
Creates a new catalogue

Open Catalogue
Opens an already existing catalogue

Close Catalogue
Closes the currently selected catalogue

IMAGE COMMANDS

Export
Exports the currently selected graphic symbol into a file (a picture) on the system.

Import
Imports a file (a picture) in the currently selected catalogue.

ICON COMMANDS

View
Allows to select how the graphic symbols are represented inside the catalogue (icons and
names, icons only, names only)

Icon
Allows to change or to edit the icon of the currently selected graphic symbol.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 543
Tech-note

7.12.4 Objects Libraries

Designer is distributed with a rich set of predefined objects.

Objects are a something more than graphic symbols. Contrary to plain graphic symbols,
objects may contain behaviour, objects may respond to user actions. Example of objects are
Buttons, Lights, Switches, etc...

To use these objects just select one of them from the right category and drag-and-drop it on
the Project Screen.

If necessary a BitMap Settings dialog box will pop up and allow you to adjust the symbol's
graphic attributes to the panel currently selected inside the project.

Once the object has been put in the Project Screen area, if the object is active and possess a
given behaviour, by right-clicking on the standard properties dialog box is displayed, as shown
here below.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 544
Tech-note

By right-clicking on the "Objects" area a set of commands are displayed. They are divided into
the following categories:

EDIT COMMANDS

Copy
Allows to copy the currently selected object into the clip-board so that it can be pasted into the
Project Screen.

Paste
Allows to paste into the currently selected catalogue an object previously copied into the clip-
board.

Note: this feature is not available for graphics libraries.

Note: The union, via grouping, of one or more entities in the Project Screen is considered an
Object.

Remove
Removes the object from the catalogue.

Rename
Changes the name of the object.

CATALOGUE COMMANDS

New Catalogue
Creates a new catalogue

Open Catalogue

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 545
Tech-note

Opens an already existing catalogue

Close Catalogue
Closes the currently selected catalogue

IMAGE COMMANDS

Export
Exports the currently selected object into a file on the system.

Import
Imports a file in the currently selected catalogue.

ICON COMMANDS

View
Allows to select how the objects are represented inside the catalogue (icons and names, icons
only, names only)

Icon
Allows to change or to edit the icon of the currently selected object.

7.12.5 Color Boxes

By selecting the icon shown here below

the user can insert a Color Box in the Project Screen area.

By right-clicking on the Color Box it is possible to change its properties.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 546
Tech-note

Color Box are useful to create backgrounds of a given color.

7.13 Multilanguage

7.13.1 Overview

Multilanguage (Code Page support) features are available for Designer 6.03 or higher.

The Multilanguage feature can handle different code pages for the different languages. A code
page (or a script file) is a collection of letter shapes used inside each language.

The tables below, for example, show the different letter shapes for the Cyrillic and the Greek
character sets used in various European languages.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 547
Tech-note

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 548
Tech-note

Setting the appropriate code page for each language you can have the correct character set
(Cyrillic, Hebrew, etc.) available inside the Touch Cell objects.

Note: The letter shapes collection for a particular code page defined inside a font file is called a
script. In this document we use indifferently the terms “code page” and “script file”.

7.13.2 Code Pages

The Code Page selection can be done from the Configure Language dialog box. For each
language you can define the associated script file (character set) and the font file that will
contain the selected script.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 549
Tech-note

If you are defining new languages for an existing project file and you want to update all touch
cell objects as for the new Multilanguage definition, you can set the “Update all Object with
Multilanguage Font” checkbox. When you confirm the command with the OK button,
Designer will set the Multilanguage font parameter inside each touch cell in the project file
(the check box is automatically reset after completing the operation).

Please, note that you are not forced to use the same script file defined globally for all your
touch cells. If necessary you can associate a different font and script file to a specific touch
cell. This can be useful, for example, when the Symbol font is used.

The Layout panel of all Touch Cell types includes the Multilanguage radio button. Please, note
that when the Multilanguage option has been selected the font dialog box does not give you the
possibility to change the Font and the Script file selection because global parameters are used
instead.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 550
Tech-note

Note: When you select the Fixed or Custom radio buttons, the same font and the same script
file is used for all the languages defined (you cannot have Cyrillic for one language and Greek
for another). These choices can be useful for symbol fonts. Using the Multilanguage selection,
instead, the different font and script files defined inside the global Configure Language dialog
box are used.

7.14 Ethernet Connectivity

7.14.1 Assigning IP Address to Panel

Every device in an Ethernet Network must have a unique IP address.

A UniOP operator panel with Ethernet connection capability must be assigned an IP address
before it can communicate with a computer running the Designer software. UniOP is providing
the users with the maximum flexibility in the assignment of the IP address. In fact there are
several methods to do it and some well defined priority rules to sort which way will be the one
active at a certain time.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 551
Tech-note

The available methods to assign an IP address to a panel are:

Manual definition of the address when the panel is in Configuration Mode

Definition of IP address from Designer and UniDataExchanger when the panel
is in Configuration Mode
Automatic assignment of IP address from DHCP server
Definition of IP address in the project file

The IP address is a number in the usual form nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn where nnn is a number from 0
to 255.

Two parameters need to be defined by the user in addition to the IP address:

Subnet Mask: it is a number in the form nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn where nnn is a number with value
either 0 or 255

Gateway IP: it is the address of the router that allows connection to other network segments. It
is a number in the usual form nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn where nnn is a number from 0 to 255.

A detailed description of these address input methods is given below.

The UniOP show the IP address and the other Ethernet settings when it is in Configuration
mode.

The following is the information shown in panel when in Configuration Mode.

Manual Definition of IP Address

When the panel is in the Configuration Mode, the user can manually enter the value of the IP
address and other network parameters. The activation of the manual address entry procedure
depends on the type of the HMI.

Touchscreen
If the HMI has a touchscreen, just touch the address you want to edit. The
HMI will show the address entry page. When the introduction is complete,
confirm with the Enter button. The procedure can be aborted pressing the
Clear button.

Keypad
If the HMI has a keypad, you can enter the address entry mode pressing the
two arrow keys Up and Down at the same time. Pressing the two arrow keys

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 552
Tech-note

multiple time will cycle the data entry focus through all the available
parameters. When the introduction is complete, confirm with the Enter key.
The procedure can be aborted pressing the Clear key

The new IP address (or Subnet Mask or Gateway IP) becomes immediately effective when the
data entry is confirmed with Enter.

The address assigned defined manually in Configuration Mode is persistent, once the IP
address has been defined, it will be used by the panel until a new address is defined by the
user. To remove a manually defined IP address, define the IP address 0.0.0.0.

Note: Before assigning an IP address to the panel, make sure it is a unique address in the
network. Duplicate IP addresses will cause network errors.

Address Definition with Keypad

The procedure to define manually an IP address using the keypad is the following:

Digits must be entered one by one

Use Up/Down arrow keys to select the value of each digit
Use Left/Right arrow keys to move from one digit to next

Please remind that the maximum value for each element of the IP address is 255. There is no
address consistency check in the manual IP address definition procedure.

Definition of IP Address using Pick Panel in Designer

You can modify the IP address of the panel also using Designer.

Open the Pick Panel dialog box (you can use either the icon in the toolbar or the item Pick
Panel in the Transfer menu) and select the Change IP Address Properties icon.

Please refer Pick Panel: The Ethernet Control Panel for the detailed description of Pick Panel.

The address assigned defined using Pick Panel in Configuration Mode is persistent: once the IP
address has been defined, it will be used by the panel until a new address is defined with an
higher priority address definition method.

To remove an address defined with Pick Panel, enter the IP address 0.0.0.0 with Pick Panel or
manually from the panel touchscreen/keypad.

Assignment of IP Address from DHCP Server

UniOP contains an implementation of the DHCP client protocol and can receive its IP address
from a DHCP server, if this is present in the network.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 553
Tech-note

The panel will use the IP address assigned by the DHCP server unless another address has
been defined using a method having higher priority than DHCP assignment.

The address assigned by DHCP is persistent, that is, once the IP address has been assigned, it
will be used by the panel even id the DHCP server is no longer present in the network. An IP
address assigned by DHCP can be canceled either defining an address using a method that has
higher priority.

Definition of IP Address in the Project File

You can define the IP address of the panel in the project file. To define the IP address open
Panel Setup and select the External Devices tab.

The Ethernet Settings dialog box is shown in the figure below.

Note that the IP address defined in the project file will be active only when the panel is in
Operation Mode.

When the panel will switch to Configuration Mode, it may change its IP address depending on
previous settings.

IP Address
The current IP address of the panel. You can enter here an IP address in the
form nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn where nnn is a number from 0 to 255.

Subnet Mask
It is a number in the form nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn where nnn is a number with value
either 0 or 255.

Default Gateway
it is the address of the router that allows connection to other network
segments. It is a number in the usual form nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn where nnn is a
number from 0 to 255.

If you do not want to define an IP address in the project file, enter the IP Address 0.0.0.0 in the
Ethernet Settings dialog box. If you do so, when the panel will be in Operation Mode, it will
use either the address assigned by DHCP or the address defined manually by the user.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 554
Tech-note

Priority of IP Address Definition Methods

There is a fixed priority scheme defining which IP address will be valid under all conditions.
This priority scheme is necessary because there are multiple independent methods to define the
IP address in the panel.

The UniOP panel will use the address that has been defined by the method with the highest
priority, if present.

Example 1

A brand new panel with Ethernet interface is connected to a network that has a DHCP server.
While the panel is in Configuration Mode it will receive the IP address by DHCP. The IP
address assigned by DHCP will be shown on the display.

If the user wants to change this address, or the Subnet Mask, can activate the IP address edit
mode and enter the new address manually.

Once the IP address has been defined manually, it will be persistent and will be maintained
even when the power is cycled.

The only way to reset the manual definition and return to DHCP is to enter the IP address
0.0.0.0.

Example 2

A brand new panel with Ethernet interface is connected to a network that has no DHCP server.
While the panel is in Configuration Mode it will show the on the display the IP address 0.0.0.0.

Start Designer and recall the Pick Panel dialog box.

The Pick Panel dialog box will show one panel in the list, the Physical Address will be present
but there will be no IP Address.

Select Change IP Address Properties and enter a valid IP Address. The new address will be
define in the panel when you will press the confirmation button.

Once the IP address has been defined by Designer, it will be persistent and will be maintained
even when the power is cycled.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 555
Tech-note

The only way to reset the manual definition and return to DHCP is to enter the IP address
0.0.0.0.

7.14.2 Selecting Ethernet Communication in Designer

To select Ethernet communication in Designer, select Transfer/Options and choose Ethernet

Port as shown in the figure below.

You can enter manually the IP address of the panel you want to connect to Designer. If you do
not know the IP address of the panel, open the Pick Panel dialog box and select one of the
panels in the list.

Note: If you want to communicate with a certain panel you must enter its IP address. Unlike
the normal serial communication between Designer and panels, Ethernet connectivity allows
you to have multiple panels networked with Designer and you need to select the one you want
to program.

7.14.3 Pick Panel: The Ethernet Control Panel

Pick Panel is the tool provided by Designer to efficiently manage UniOP panels connected to
an Ethernet network. Using Pick Panel you can:

Select one panel in the network

Change the IP address, the Subnet Mask and the Default Gateway of the
panel you have selected
Change the mode of the panel from Configuration to Operation or from
Operation to Configuration

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 556
Tech-note

Selecting Panels in the Ethernet Network

Pick Panel will search the network for UniOP panels and will show them in a list. Note that
Pick Panel will not show all network nodes but only UniOP panels.

For each panel in the list, Pick Panel will show:

IP Address
It is the IP address assigned to the panel. If no IP address has been assigned
to the panel, this field will show 0.0.0.0

Physical Address
It is the MAC identification number of the Ethernet interface in the panel. This
is a fixed parameter and it is unique for each panel.

Hw
Hardware type of the panel. This is not enough to identify the panel model but
it is a useful information.

Mode
Current operating mode of the panel. It can be either Configuration or
Operation.

Changing the Operating Mode of Panels

Using Pick Panel you can change the operating mode of the panel you have selected. You can:

Switch to Configuration Mode

If the panel is in Operation Mode, it will be changed to Configuration Mode.
This command is only available using Ethernet and is not available using serial
communication with the panel. Changing the panel to Configuration Mode may
take a few seconds.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 557
Tech-note

Switch to Operation Mode

If the panel is in Configuration Mode and if it contains a valid project file, it will
be changed to Operation Mode. Changing the panel to Operation Mode may
take a few seconds.

Warning: Please note that the Switch to Configuration Mode command will work whatever is
the current status of the panel. The panel will change to Configuration Mode even if it is
showing alarms or even if it is in the middle of a data entry session. Special care is needed if
the panel connected via Ethernet is not visible from the operator using the Designer software
and it all cases it is operating any kind of machinery.

Definition of IP Address

Pick Panel allows you to change online the IP address and its properties. From the Pick Panel
dialog box, select the Change IP Address Properties icon. The dialog box shown in the figure
below will appear.

The dialog box includes the following elements:

Physical Address
MAC ID of the Ethernet hardware in the panel. This number cannot be
changed by the user.

IP Address
The current IP address of the panel. You can enter here a new IP address in
the form nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn where nnn is a number from 0 to 255.

Subnet Mask
it is a number in the form nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn where nnn is a number with value
either 0 or 255.

Default Gateway
it is the address of the router that allows connection to other network
segments. It is a number in the usual form nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn where nnn is a
number from 0 to 255.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 558
Tech-note

If you want to reset an IP address that has been defined manually in the pane, enter the IP
Address 0.0.0.0 in the IP field in the dialog box. If you do so, the panel will use the IP address
assigned by DHCP (if available) or the IP address eventually defined in the project file.

The address assigned defined using Pick Panel in Configuration Mode is persistent: once the IP
address has been defined, it will be used by the panel until a new address is defined with an
higher priority address definition method.

To remove an address defined with Pick Panel, enter the IP address 0.0.0.0 with Pick Panel or
manually from the panel touchscreen/keypad.

7.14.4 Clock Synchronization with the SNTP Protocol

UniOP supports the standard SNTP protocol for clock synchronization.

If the network contains a time server, the panel will connect to the server and will synchronize
its real time clock with the server.

This is a simple and powerful method to ensure that all the clocks of the panels in the network
are synchronized.

7.14.5 Using UniDataExchanger

UniDataExchanger is a simple but powerful tool that allows you to access data in the panels as
well as downloading firmware updates.

UniDataExchanger supports both Ethernet and serial communication, please note, however,
that some options are only available if the panel is connected via Ethernet.

Download Recipe Data

This command is available both with serial and Ethernet connection. When the panel is
connected via Ethernet, however, the command has been enhanced and recipe data can be
transferred also when the panel is in Operation Mode.

Upload Recipe Data

This command is available both with serial and Ethernet connection. When the panel is
connected via Ethernet, however, the command has been enhanced and recipe data can be
transferred also when the panel is in Operation Mode.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 559
Tech-note

Upload Trend Data

This command is available both with serial and Ethernet connection. When the panel is
connected via Ethernet, however, the command has been enhanced and trend data can be
transferred also when the panel is in Operation Mode.

Upload Event List

The command Upload Event List allows UniDataExchanger to retrieve the Event List from the
panel.

This command is available only with the Ethernet connection.

The Event List data will be saved to a disk file in .csv format.
The content of the file will be as shown in the figure below.

Upload Alarm List

The command Upload Alarm List allows UniDataExchanger to retrieve the Alarm List from
the panel.

This command is available only with the Ethernet connection.

The Alarm List data will be saved to a disk file in .csv format.
The content of the file will be as shown in the figure below.

The following is the meaning of the various fields.

Static Flags
Attribute of alarms as defined in the project file.

ALUSED
Alarm Enabled

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 560
Tech-note

ALCLR
Alarm requires acknowledgement

ALPRON
Print Alarm on Event

ALPROF
Print Alarm off Event

ALPRAC
Print Alarms Acknowledgement.

ALWARN
"Message Only Alarm" (does not turn on Alarm LED)

ALLOGEV
Events for this alarm

Dynamic Flags
Current Status of the alarm at the moment of the upload.

ALON
Alarm is ON

ALACK
Alarm requires Acknowledgement.

ALSILENT
Silent Alarm (set for "events only" alarms)

On time
Time when the alarm went on.

Off time
Time when the alarm went off.

Value
Not used

Link Flags
Specifies if the alarm is linked to an help screen.

0
Alarm non linked to alarm page

1
Alarm linked to alarm page

Log Flags
Not used

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 561
Tech-note

Fg/Bg Colors
Foreground/Background colors defined for the alarm, 00/00 means no colors used.

Fg/Bg ACK colors

Foreground/Background colors defined for the alarm when acknowledge is required, 00/00
means no colors used.

Selecting Ethernet Communication in UniDataExchanger

To select Ethernet communication in UniDataExchanger, select Options > Communication and

choose Ethernet Port as shown in the figure below.

You can enter manually the IP address of the panel you want to connect to UniDataExchanger.
If you do not know the IP address of the panel, open the Pick Panel dialog box and select one
of the panels in the list.

Note: If you want to communicate with a certain panel you must enter its IP address. Unlike
the normal serial communication between UniDataExchanger and panels, Ethernet
connectivity allows you to have multiple panels networked with UniDataExchanger and you
need to select the one you want to connect.

7.14.6 Basic Ethernet Diagnostic with Ping

UniOP supports the Ping protocol as a very simple network diagnostic method.

Just enter the Ping command, followed by the IP address of the panel, from any node in the
network. If the panel can be reached, it will respond to Ping.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 562
Tech-note

7.15 Getting Started with B Series Panels

7.15.1 The New Hardware Platform for UniOP Panels

The new “B” series of panels is a completely new hardware platform called “T2003”. The
T2003 CPU board uses a new 200 MHz 4131 MIPS processor.

The B series uses a new Firmware Type called FW60.

New Features Available in the T2003 Platform

The new hardware platform brings up to the product a set of interesting new features:

Support for 64K color systems on panels with TFT display

Support for 256 colors on panels with STN display
Support for 8 levels of gray on panels with monochrome display
32MB Internal Memory Card and optional SSFDC External card
Video Input Option for panels with TFT displays
Backlight dimming for panels with TFT display

7.15.2 Support for 64K Colors

The support for 64K colors is available only on B units with TFT display.
To enable the 64K colors support select the “High Colors” option into the “Settings” tab from
“Panel Setup”.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 563
Tech-note

Selecting 64K color support in Panel Setup

The High Colors option can be used only in the following screen objects:

Dynamic graphics
Bitmap editor
Imported images
Video input windows

All the other screen objects, such as text and touch objects, support 256 colors.

7.15.3 The FW60 Memory Architecture

The memory organization of the T2003 hardware platform is shown in the block diagram of
below figure.

The picture shows the relation between the internal user memory, the external SSFDC memory
card contents and the system-level memory storage in the panel.

The reference to this picture may be useful to understand the subsequent chapters of this
document, with particular reference to the chapter on Internal Memory.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 564
Tech-note

T2003 Memory Organization

7.15.4 The Internal Memory

The B series units have 32 MB internal Flash memory dedicated to project file components and
firmware files in the same way as the SSFDC card is used on the T2000 platform.

This memory will be the standard storage location for both user application and firmware files.

The SSFDC socket is still present in the T2003 CPU and can hold an additional SSFDC
memory card.

Note: B-series units are delivered without the SSFDC card in the external socket.

The Firmware Type 60 includes some new controls to handle the two memory locations.

At any time only one memory can be considered “active”. The run-time software will run the
project and the firmware components only from the active memory.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 565
Tech-note

The memory selection can be done using a special memory setup menu activated in
Configuration Mode by pressing and holding down for 2 seconds the right arrow key.

The menu is shown in below figure:

When the menu is activated a cursor will blink over one of the four available options: Select,
Format, Copy and Exit.

Select
selection the active memory

Format
formatting the active memory

Copy
copy from the active memory to the other one

Exit
exit from the Memory Setup menu to Configuration Mode

To Select a memory type, place the blinking cursor over he “Select” option and confirm with
OK; the blinking cursor will move the memory indicator represented with the arrow symbol;
the cursor can be moved using the up/down keys; once selected the desired memory type,
confirm with OK.

When doing a Copy process all the contents of the source memory will be copied to the
destination memory. The currently active memory location is always considered as the source.

Firmware 60 Files

Firmware Type 60 has only three components; please note this is different from the older
FW58:

Boot
Firmware
MIPS

The MIPS file is the only one that must always be present in the active user memory either this
is the internal memory either it is the flash card.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 566
Tech-note

The Firmware Upgrade menu will only show the Boot and the Firmware components; they are
the only two components the system will need to copy from the active user memory to the
internal System Flash.

7.15.5 Video Input Option

The Video Input option is available using the VMO10 module that is delivered as a separate
product and requires installation by the user. Please refer to the product datasheet Tn209 and to
the installation guide for specific information about specification and installation.

How to Create a Video Input Object

To create a video input object just select “Insert\Video Input” or use the icon available in the
toolbar:

Figure 4 – Creating Video Input Objects

The menu item and the icon are active only if the project has been configured for a panel
model that supports the Video Input Option. Please remind that icons layout can be restored to
the default settings using the “Default” button in the “Tools\Customize” dialog box.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 567
Tech-note

Video Input Type

The video module is provided of 1 VGA input and 3 PAL inputs; the source of the video input
object placed in the Designer project page can be selected using the related list box in the
“Video Input Properties” dialog box shown in the below figure.

Property Sheet for Video Input Objects

Note: The Video Input Type can be selected also from the panel screen using the appropriate
Control variable.

Display Mode

Display Mode defines how video input objects are initialized.

Two options are available for the Display Mode:

On
Off

Display Mode can be set in the “Video Input Properties” dialog box as shown in the below
figure.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 568
Tech-note

On
makes the input image immediately visible in the Video Object after project download

Off
the image from the video channel is not shown in the “Video Object” and needs later to be in
case enabled using the dedicated Control Variable

Note: The Display Mode can be selected also from the panel by using the apposite Control
variable.

Color and Video Options

The “Layout” tab of the Video Input Properties dialog box contains several options for video
objects as shown in the below figure.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 569
Tech-note

Note: Video Options can be changed at run time using the proper Control variables

Fill error conditions

It is the color used to fill the video object in case, for instance, no signal is detected at the
video input

Border
The color of the border of the Video Input window.

Transparent
The parts of the image filled with the selected transparent color will be transparent.

Brightness
Brightness level. The range is from –128 to 127, with zero as a normal level.

Contrast
Contrast level. The range is from –128 to 127, with zero as a normal level.

Scale
The picture can be scaled belong both dimensions. The value is measured in per-mills of the
original video stream, meaning that a value of 1000 returns the image in the original size;
values greater than 1000 will zoom in, while values smaller than 1000 will zoom out. Scaling
limits are resolution dependent; the scale values will be anyhow forced to allowed limits.
Additionally, the hardware interface will round off the specified scaling factors to match its
internal calculation capabilities; this will result in a picture on panel slightly smaller than
programmed one.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 570
Tech-note

Offset
The top-left position of a window within the video stream that will be displayed. Into the
Video Object the input stream will be displayed starting from the specified position and
cropped on right/bottom borders.

Fixed aspect ratio

Scaling will be performed in a way that original stream’s aspect ratio is preserved; vertical
scaling factor will be ignored.

Fit to scale
If set, all offset and scaling parameters will be ignored; a stream will be scaled in a way that it
is completely visible.

Control Variables

Video Input parameters can be adjusted also at run time using the dedicated Control Variables;
to select a Control Variable select “Variable” in the “Numeric Field Properties” dialog box as
shown in the below figure.

Then select “Internal variable” for the Data Type as shown in the below figure.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 571
Tech-note

The following Control Variables are available for use with Video Input objects:

VDOx.XOffsetV
DOx.YOffset
Specify the top-left position of a window within the video stream that will be displayed. Only
positive values are allowed.

VDOx.XScale
VDOx.YScale
The picture can be scaled belong both dimensions. The value is measured in per-mills of the
original video stream, meaning that a value of 1000 returns the image in the original size;
values greater than 1000 will zoom in, while values smaller than 1000 will zoom out. Scaling
limits are resolution dependent; the scale values will be anyhow forced to allowed limits.
Additionally, the hardware interface will round off the specified scaling factors to match its
internal calculation capabilities; this will result in a picture on panel slightly smaller than the
one that has been programmed.

VDOx.VdoInput
Selection of the Video Input channel to be displayed in the Video Input object; valid values are
the following:

0 – Video Input 1 (CVBS)

1 – Video Input 2 (CVBS)
2 – Video Input 3 (CVBS)
3 – RGB Input

VDOx.VdoFlag
This variable contains some status flags to identify the status of the Video Input object:

bit 0 (0x01) – do not reload internal variables (if not set, video object’ state will be saved
across page changes)

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 572
Tech-note

bit 1 (0x02) – fixed aspect ratio (scaling will be performed in a way that original stream’s
aspect ratio is preserved; vertical scaling factor will be ignored)
bit 2 (0x04) – turn off (if set, video object will not display a video stream)
bit 3 (0x08) – reserved (do not use)
bit 4 (0x10) – reserved (do not use)
bit 5 (0x20) – fit to scale (if set, all offset and scaling parameters will be ignored; a stream will
be scaled in a such way that it will be completely visible in the window)

VDOx.Brightness
Brightness level. The range is from –128 to 127, with zero as a normal level.

VDOx.Contrast
Contrast level. The range is from –128 to 127, with zero as a normal level.

VDOx.VdoStatus
Read only register containing some information related to the Video Input object status:

bit 0 (0x01) – VGA signal displayed

bit 1 (0x02) – PAL signal displayed
bit 2 (0x04) – signal is valid

VDOx.Hres
Read-only register containing the horizontal resolution of an object’s video stream.

VDOx.Vres
Read-only register containing the vertical resolution of an object’s video stream.

VDOx.VFreq
Read-only register containing a vertical frequency of an object’s video stream.

7.15.6 Backlight Dimming

The T2003 platform for units with TFT display adds the possibility to use the dimming
function for the display backlight.

The brightness of the backlight can be controlled using the macro commands shown in the
below figure.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 573
Tech-note

The brightness can be decreased, increased and changed in cycle with steps using the macro
“Dimming”. The display brightness can be reduced up to 2% of the maximum value.

7.15.7 Compatibility Issues

The “B generation” units are delivered without removable memory card; user memory is the
internal 32MB Flash memory as a factory setting.

From the point of view of transferring a new project file to the panel, there are no differences
in handling the download whether you use internal memory or Flash card. The memory
selection is done in Configuration Mode and no settings are required at Designer level.

The “Copy” option of the Memory Setup menu can be used to transfer the entire contents of an
external SSFDC card to the internal flash. The external card must be of course prepared with
proper firmware files, Type 60, and correct project matching the hardware type, according to
the Designer Panel Setup selection.

SSFDC cards already programmed for units with firmware type 58 are not compatible with
“B” series panels.
In the same way, memory cards prepared for units with firmware type 60 are not compatible
with units using T2000 hardware platform.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 574
Tech-note

The project stored on a memory card suitable for use with firmware 58 units cannot be copied
to the internal memory of a “B” series unit. The copy option operates only for the entire
memory contents.

Any “B” series unit to be used as a replacement of existing Firmware 58 panels must be
completely prepared at early stage and must be sent to site ready for installation.

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 575
Tech-note

8 Index

A
About TagEdit........................................................................................................................364
Absolute Coordinates .............................................................................................................384
Access ......................................................................................................................................80
Access Protected Function .....................................................................................................503
S5 Attempt.......................................................................................................................503
ACK .......................................................................................................................................290
Acknowledge Alarm ..............................................................................................................268
Acknowledge All Alarms.......................................................................................................268
Action.....................................................................................................................................127
Add.........................................................................................................................................243
Add All...................................................................................................................................244
Add Page ................................................................................................................................190
Advanced................................................................................................................................405
Advanced Network Programming..........................................................................................480
Advanced Report Parameters .................................................................................................497
Advanced tab..........................................................................................................................248
Alarm Page.....................................................................................................................198, 273
Alarms ............................................................................................................................260, 434
Configuring......................................................................................................................434
Alarms Safety Issues ..............................................................................................................436
Align.......................................................................................................................................247
Align Bottom............................................................................................................................34
Align Horiz Center ...................................................................................................................33
Align Left .................................................................................................................................33
Align Right...............................................................................................................................33
Align Top .................................................................................................................................33
Align Vert Center .....................................................................................................................34
Alignment...............................................................................................................................391
All Pages ................................................................................................................................253
All Panels ...............................................................................................................................505
LED Map .........................................................................................................................505
ALOGI ...................................................................................................................................291
ALOGO..................................................................................................................................290
Appearance.............................................................................................................................154
Append ...................................................................................................................................284
Arc Colors ..............................................................................................................................172
Arguments ......................................................................................................................247, 400
ASCII Data Field Example ......................................................................................................84
ASCII Key Button..................................................................................................................125
ASCII Key Button Touch Cell Example................................................................................127
Assign.....................................................................................................................................144
Associated Fields ...................................................................................................................383
Assumptions.............................................................................................................................15
Attribute Data Fields ................................................................................................................96
Attribute Example ..................................................................................................................105
Attribute Transformations ......................................................................................................249

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 576
Tech-note

Attributes........................................................................................................................123, 268
Auto Linefeed.........................................................................................................................239
Automatic Clear .....................................................................................................................322
Automatic Firmware Upgrade Procedure...............................................................................437
Available Alarms ...................................................................................................................209
Avoid Field.............................................................................................................................384
B
Background ............................................................................................................................161
Background Color ..................................................................................................................161
Background tab ......................................................................................................................385
Bargraph Data Fields................................................................................................................85
Bargraph Example....................................................................................................................88
Bargraph Preview.....................................................................................................................86
Bargraphs ...............................................................................................................................371
Basics .....................................................................................................................................419
Baud Rate ...............................................................................................................................203
Begin Data Entry....................................................................................................................269
Bitmap Editor ...........................................................................................................................50
Blur.........................................................................................................................................189
Border.....................................................................................................................................385
Brighter Display .....................................................................................................................274
Brightness...............................................................................................................................189
Broadcast Periodic Clock .......................................................................................................224
Buffer Types...........................................................................................................................536
Buffers....................................................................................................................................317
Buttons ...........................................................................................................................388, 396
Creating ...........................................................................................................................388
Buzzer ....................................................................................................................................208
C
C0 Print Screen ......................................................................................................................507
C1 Disable Data Entry ...........................................................................................................508
C15 Enable Mailbox ..............................................................................................................508
C2 Select Alarm Mode...........................................................................................................508
Cancel.....................................................................................................................................269
Cascade ..................................................................................................................................412
Categories...............................................................................................................................395
Center .....................................................................................................................................173
Center Color ...........................................................................................................................173
Cfg Mode ...............................................................................................................................215
Changing ................................................................................................................................531
PLC Drivers .....................................................................................................................531
Characters...............................................................................................................................373
Editing .............................................................................................................................373
Check Firmware Versions......................................................................................................438
Choose Report........................................................................................................................269
Clear Buffer............................................................................................................................322
Clear Event List......................................................................................................................269
Clients ....................................................................................................................................463
Close.......................................................................................................................................377
Code .......................................................................................................................................389
Color Boxes............................................................................................................................547
Colors .....................................................................................................................................392

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 577
Tech-note

Column...................................................................................................................................246
Column Menu.........................................................................................................................369
Comm Port .............................................................................................................................227
Network ...........................................................................................................................227
Comm Time Out ....................................................................................................................227
Command List........................................................................................................................284
Command Menu.....................................................................................................................262
Command Response Word.....................................................................................................449
Commands......................................................................................................................265, 399
Communication Parameters ...................................................................................................381
Communications Number ......................................................................................................334
Retries..............................................................................................................................334
Communications Parameters Setup........................................................................................203
Compatibility..........................................................................................................................337
Complex Recipe Example......................................................................................................524
Components............................................................................................................................381
Compress Graphics ................................................................................................................334
Compressing...........................................................................................................................494
Panel Fonts ......................................................................................................................494
CONF .....................................................................................................................................290
Configuration Mode ...............................................................................................................343
Configure Controller ..............................................................................................................199
Configure Tag Dictionaries....................................................................................................313
Configured Nodes ..................................................................................................................225
Configuring ....................................................................................434, 445, 472, 510, 533, 536
Alarms .............................................................................................................................434
Ethernet............................................................................................................................472
Project..............................................................................................................................533
Recipe Parameter Sets .....................................................................................................510
Trend Buffer ....................................................................................................................536
UniNET Networks ...........................................................................................................445
Confirm ..................................................................................................................................270
Confirm Recipe Menu Selection ............................................................................................270
Confirmation ..........................................................................................................................456
Connecting ...............................................................................................................18, 473, 477
Panel ..................................................................................................................................18
Panels.......................................................................................................................473, 477
Connection Messages.............................................................................................................339
Connectivity ...........................................................................................................................481
Extending.........................................................................................................................481
Contents..........................................................................................................................177, 398
Contrast ..................................................................................................................................189
Control Variable Change........................................................................................................322
Control Variable Event...........................................................................................................321
Control Variables ...................................................................................................................511
Controller .......................................................................................................................201, 284
Write ................................................................................................................................284
Controller Control Word ........................................................................................................507
Controller Driver....................................................................................................................225
Controller List ........................................................................................................................314
Controller Mode .....................................................................................................................200
Controller Model....................................................................................................................225

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 578
Tech-note

Controller Selection ...............................................................................................................426

Controller Update Area ..........................................................................................................505
Controllers Setup............................................................................................................426, 442
Conventions..............................................................................................................................15
Converter PLC Port................................................................................................................475
Converter Printer Port ............................................................................................................474
Cool Look...............................................................................................................................394
Copy .........................................................................................................................................93
Count ......................................................................................................................................166
Creating ................................................................74, 75, 77, 388, 390, 429, 488, 489, 496, 515
Buttons.............................................................................................................................388
New File ..........................................................................................................................429
New Report......................................................................................................................496
Pressure Indexed Field.......................................................................................................75
Project..............................................................................................................................429
Project File...............................................................................................................488, 489
Recipe Menu Field...........................................................................................................515
Stage Numeric Data Field..................................................................................................74
Temperature Indexed Field................................................................................................74
Time Indexed Field............................................................................................................77
Value Objects ..................................................................................................................390
Current Page...........................................................................................................................319
Current Page Mode ................................................................................................................198
Current Page Register ............................................................................................................231
Cursor.....................................................................................................................................154
Cursor Color...........................................................................................................................158
Curves ....................................................................................................................................154
Custom ...................................................................................................................................149
Customize...............................................................................................................................362
Cut ............................................................................................................................................32
Cyclic .....................................................................................................................................321
D
Data Bits.................................................................................................................................240
Data Editing ...........................................................................................................................270
Data Entry ......................................................................................................................217, 258
Time Out..........................................................................................................................217
Data Entry Enable ..................................................................................................................291
Data Entry Field Number .........................................................................................................64
Data Entry Screen ..................................................................................................................197
Data Entry Status......................................................................................................................63
Data Field Properties................................................................................................................58
Data Fields ...............................................................................................................................52
Database .................................................................................................................................314
Date ........................................................................................................................................198
Date Data Field ......................................................................................................................114
Date Data Field Example .......................................................................................................115
Date Format............................................................................................................................210
Date Settings ..........................................................................................................................428
Decimal Hexadecimal Base .....................................................................................................56
Default....................................................................................................................................395
Default Font ...........................................................................................................................249
Define Symbol .......................................................................................................................371

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 579
Tech-note

Delete .....................................................................................................................................250
Delete Dictionary ...................................................................................................................358
Delete Page.............................................................................................................................190
Delete Records .......................................................................................................................361
Description .............................................................................................................................396
Designer .................................................................................................................................530
Designer Print Setup ................................................................................................................26
Designer Screen .....................................................................................................................420
Designer Setup .......................................................................................................................425
Dial.........................................................................................................................................344
Dial Timeout ..........................................................................................................................340
Dictionary Menu ....................................................................................................................360
Dimmer Display .....................................................................................................................270
Direct Access .........................................................................................................................197
Direct Page Selection .............................................................................................................197
Direction.................................................................................................................................170
Disable Battery LED ..............................................................................................................208
Disable Screen Saver..............................................................................................................460
Disable Undeclared Client Access .........................................................................................223
Disk ..........................................................................................................................................46
Display Page on Communication Error .................................................................................217
Displaying ......................................................................................................................181, 329
SSFDC Error Codes.........................................................................................................329
Dither......................................................................................................................................189
Double Protocol .....................................................................................................................440
Down ......................................................................................................................................271
Download .......................................................................................328, 336, 379, 431, 445, 493
Panel ................................................................................................................................379
Panel Fonts ......................................................................................................................493
SSFDC .............................................................................................................................328
Uploading ........................................................................................................................445
Download Compress Options.................................................................................................336
Dynamic Attributes ..................................................................................................................97
Dynamic Graphics Data Fields ..............................................................................................105
Dynamic Graphics Example...........................................................................................110, 111
E
Edit Dynamic Graphics ..........................................................................................................109
Edit Menu...............................................................................................................................367
Editing ....................................................................................................................................373
Characters ........................................................................................................................373
Eight User LEDs ....................................................................................................................506
LED Map .........................................................................................................................506
Eject .......................................................................................................................................240
Enable Auto Scroll Control ....................................................................................................158
Enable Double Protocol .........................................................................................................200
Enable Indicator .....................................................................................................................149
Enable RDA ...........................................................................................................................230
Enable Screen Saver...............................................................................................................460
Enable Tags............................................................................................................................314
Enable UniNET Network .......................................................................................................224
Enabling .................................................................................................................234, 441, 447
Interlock Mailbox ............................................................................................................447

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 580
Tech-note

Multiple-Protocol Configuration .....................................................................................441

Erase.......................................................................................................................................272
Erase NiceFonts .....................................................................................................................406
Erase Protocols.......................................................................................................................406
Error Codes ............................................................................................................................329
Escape Sequences...................................................................................................................239
Ethernet ..........................................................................................................................220, 472
Configuring......................................................................................................................472
Ethernet Network ...................................................................................................................477
Event List ...............................................................................................................................263
Event List Size .......................................................................................................................210
Event Page..............................................................................................................................198
Events Backup........................................................................................................208, 277, 518
Events Run-time Backup........................................................................................................519
Example..............................................................................................................................82, 83
Scaling .........................................................................................................................82, 83
Exit .........................................................................................................................................378
Export.............................................................................................................................225, 379
ROM File.........................................................................................................................379
Export Strings...........................................................................................................................29
Export Tags Step ............................................................................................354, 355, 356, 357
Exporting Tags ...............................................................................................................353, 530
Extending ...............................................................................................................................481
Connectivity.....................................................................................................................481
External Devices tab ..............................................................................................................210
External Memory Types.........................................................................................................334
F
Field Down.............................................................................................................................272
Field Selection........................................................................................................................217
Time Out..........................................................................................................................217
Field Type ..............................................................................................................................246
Field Up..................................................................................................................................272
Fields ..............................................................................................................................246, 443
Placing .............................................................................................................................443
Fill Menu................................................................................................................................368
Find ........................................................................................................................................359
Firmware Download...............................................................................................................208
Firmware Files Directory .......................................................................................................439
Firmware Version...................................................................................................................206
First Client..............................................................................................................................488
First Record............................................................................................................................360
Fit ...........................................................................................................................................189
Size ..................................................................................................................................189
Fixed Point Placement..............................................................................................................57
Flash .......................................................................................................................................518
Flip .........................................................................................................................................189
Font ..................................................................................................................35, 160, 373, 429
Saving ..............................................................................................................................373
Selecting ..........................................................................................................................429
Font Editor .............................................................................................................................365
Font Editor Example ..............................................................................................................373
Font Header............................................................................................................................368

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 581
Tech-note

Font Menu ..............................................................................................................................367

Font Size.................................................................................................................................368
Footer .....................................................................................................................................247
Foreground .............................................................................................................................161
Format ......................................................................................................................................55
Format SSFDC .......................................................................................................................406
Frame......................................................................................................................................161
Frames tab ..............................................................................................................................108
Full .........................................................................................................................................322
Full Screen ...............................................................................................................................42
FW Rescue Mode...................................................................................................................407
G
Gauge .....................................................................................................................................170
Gauge X .................................................................................................................................168
Gauge Y .................................................................................................................................168
General ...................................................................................................................................138
General Characteristics ..........................................................................................................463
General tab .............................................................................................................................243
Generic Command Button......................................................................................................146
Generic Command Button Touch Cell Example....................................................................149
Get Current Language ............................................................................................................458
Get Panel Resources.......................................................................................................340, 445
Get Parameter Set Number.....................................................................................................452
Get Recipe Transfer Priority ..................................................................................................453
Getting....................................................................................................................................424
Help .................................................................................................................................424
Graphical Symbols .................................................................................................................467
Graphics .........................................................................................................................415, 542
Graphics Library ..............................................................................................................43, 543
Grid ........................................................................................................................................404
Snap .................................................................................................................................404
Grid Size.................................................................................................................................386
H
Hang Up .................................................................................................................................344
Hangup ...................................................................................................................................340
Hardware ................................................................................................................................214
Header ....................................................................................................................................245
Height.....................................................................................................................................245
Help ........................................................................................................................................424
Getting .............................................................................................................................424
Help Menu..............................................................................................................................364
Horizontal Align.....................................................................................................................390
Horizontal Position.................................................................................................................384
I
Illuminated Push Button.........................................................................................................132
Illuminated Push Button Example..........................................................................................135
Image......................................................................................................................................110
Import.....................................................................................................................................225
Import Bitmap Graphics.........................................................................................................182
Import Bitmap Graphics Example..........................................................................................185
Import Strings...........................................................................................................................30
Import Tags ............................................................................................................................348

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 582
Tech-note

Import Tags Step ....................................................................................................349, 350, 351

Index.........................................................................................................................................72
Indexed Addressing Example...................................................................................................73
Indicator Light........................................................................................................................141
Indicator Light Touch Cell Example......................................................................................145
Indirect Addressing Fields .......................................................................................................72
Initial Directory ......................................................................................................................401
Initial Page .............................................................................................................................278
Return ..............................................................................................................................278
Input .......................................................................................................................................236
Insert.......................................................................................................................284, 430, 510
Page Objects ....................................................................................................................430
Recipe Data Fields...........................................................................................................510
Insert Menu ..............................................................................................................................49
Insert Page..............................................................................................................................190
Installation................................................................................................................................14
Installation Problems................................................................................................................19
Solving...............................................................................................................................19
Installing.........................................................................................................................477, 491
Network Cable .................................................................................................................477
New Panel Fonts ..............................................................................................................491
Interfacing ..............................................................................................................................485
Microsoft Excel ...............................................................................................................485
Interlock Mailbox...................................................................................................233, 447, 516
Enabling...........................................................................................................................447
Interlock Mailbox Commands................................................................................................450
Interlock Reference ................................................................................................................234
Internal Flash Memory ...........................................................................................................437
Internal Panel Control Variables ............................................................................................540
Internal Variable.....................................................................................................................320
Invert ......................................................................................................................................189
IP Address ..............................................................................................................................227
K
Keep RDA Continuous ..........................................................................................................229
Keyboard ................................................................................................................................382
Keyboard Macro Editor..........................................................................................251, 434, 512
Keyboard Macro Editor Example ..........................................................................284, 285, 286
Keyboard Update Area...........................................................................................................501
Keypad Designer....................................................................................................................374
Keys .......................................................................................................................................230
L
Label...............................................................................................................................168, 390
Label section ..........................................................................................................................390
Labels Color ...........................................................................................................................169
Labels Font.............................................................................................................................169
Languages ................................................................................................................64, 242, 312
Number ............................................................................................................................312
Large Buttons .........................................................................................................................395
Large Characters ....................................................................................................................371
Last Record ............................................................................................................................361
Layers.......................................................................................................................................46
Layout ....................................................................................................................................540

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 583
Tech-note

Layout Toolbar.......................................................................................................................167
LCD Screen Saver..................................................................................................................217
LED Control Bits ...................................................................................................................505
LED Map........................................................................................................................505, 506
All Panels.........................................................................................................................505
Eight User LEDs..............................................................................................................506
LED State ...............................................................................................................................274
Left .........................................................................................................................................274
Length ....................................................................................................................................173
Library......................................................................................................................................45
Light .......................................................................................................................................134
Line ................................................................................................................................151, 278
Scroll................................................................................................................................278
Link ........................................................................................................................................192
Lock Active Layers ..................................................................................................................49
Logout Timeout......................................................................................................................293
M
Mailbox ..........................................................................................................................448, 541
Structure...........................................................................................................................448
Mailbox Programming ...........................................................................................................460
Major ......................................................................................................................................171
Make Same Size .......................................................................................................................34
Make Same Size Both ..............................................................................................................34
Make Same Size Height ...........................................................................................................34
Make Same Size Width ............................................................................................................34
Margins ..................................................................................................................................244
Maximize................................................................................................................................413
Maximum ...............................................................................................................................166
Maximum Node Number .......................................................................................................223
Memory Location...........................................................................................................335, 336
Project..............................................................................................................................335
Protocol............................................................................................................................336
Memory Type.........................................................................................................................209
Memory Use...........................................................................................................................322
Memory Used.........................................................................................................................430
Message Data Fields ................................................................................................................88
Message Example.....................................................................................................................96
Message Table..........................................................................................................................92
Message Toolbar ......................................................................................................................92
Messages ..................................................................................................................................91
Number ..............................................................................................................................91
Messages tab ............................................................................................................................91
Meter Instrument ....................................................................................................................163
Meter Instrument Example.....................................................................................................174
Methods..................................................................................................................................536
Sampling..........................................................................................................................536
Microsoft Excel ......................................................................................................................485
Interfacing........................................................................................................................485
Minimize ................................................................................................................................413
Minimum..................................................................................................................................91
Minor......................................................................................................................................171
Mirror .....................................................................................................................................189

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 584
Tech-note

Miscellaneous Panel Settings .................................................................................................429

Miscellaneous tab...................................................................................................................216
Mixed Multiple Servers Multiple Clients...............................................................................469
Mode ..............................................................................................................................214, 252
Operating .........................................................................................................................252
Modem Commands ................................................................................................................337
Modem Messages...................................................................................................................338
Modules..................................................................................................................................237
Move ......................................................................................................................................413
Move Down............................................................................................................................312
Move Item Down .....................................................................................................................48
Move Item Up ..........................................................................................................................48
Move Up.................................................................................................................................397
Multipage Configuration ........................................................................................................517
Multipage Organization .........................................................................................................517
Multipage Recipe Support......................................................................................................517
Multipage Recipes..........................................................................................................194, 518
Recipe Menu....................................................................................................................518
Multiple Project Support ........................................................................................................528
Multiple Servers Multiple Clients ..........................................................................................468
Multiple-Protocol Configuration............................................................................................441
Enabling...........................................................................................................................441
N
Name ..............................................................................................................................383, 394
Needle ....................................................................................................................................172
Needle Color ..........................................................................................................................173
Net Comm ..............................................................................................................................224
Network..........................................................................................................227, 473, 480, 490
Comm Port.......................................................................................................................227
Running ...........................................................................................................................490
Network Cable .......................................................................................................................477
Installing ..........................................................................................................................477
Network Configuration ..........................................................................................222, 467, 486
Network Example...................................................................................................................486
Network Protocol ...................................................................................................................219
Network Selection ..................................................................................................................479
Network Setup........................................................................................................................218
Network Types .......................................................................................................................470
New ........................................................................................................................................397
New Dictionary ......................................................................................................................357
New File .................................................................................................................................429
Creating ...........................................................................................................................429
New Group .............................................................................................................................358
New Insert ..............................................................................................................................317
New Panel Fonts ....................................................................................................................491
Installing ..........................................................................................................................491
New Report ............................................................................................................................496
Creating ...........................................................................................................................496
New Window .........................................................................................................................412
Next Field...............................................................................................................................274
Next Language .......................................................................................................................312
Next Page ...............................................................................................................................275

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 585
Tech-note

Next Record ...........................................................................................................................360

Node Number .........................................................................................................................225
Nonprintable Characters.........................................................................................................249
Num Colors ............................................................................................................................383
Num Comm Retries................................................................................................................227
Number.....................................................................................................................91, 194, 312
Languages........................................................................................................................312
Messages............................................................................................................................91
Parameter Sets .................................................................................................................194
Number Redials......................................................................................................................340
Numeric ASCII Data Fields .....................................................................................................53
Numeric Data Field Example...................................................................................................84
O
Objects....................................................................................................................................416
Objects Font .............................................................................................................................36
Objects Font Effects .................................................................................................................37
Objects Font Font.....................................................................................................................37
Objects Font Sample ................................................................................................................37
Objects Font Script...................................................................................................................37
Objects Font Size .....................................................................................................................37
Objects Font Style ....................................................................................................................37
Objects Libraries ....................................................................................................................545
Old Panel Models...................................................................................................................204
Recognition......................................................................................................................204
Only Show Active Layers ........................................................................................................49
Only When Variable Not........................................................................................................321
Open .........................................................................................................................................23
Operating................................................................................................................................252
Modes ..............................................................................................................................252
Options ...................................................................................................................................331
Options Menu.........................................................................................................................369
Origin .....................................................................................................................................171
Output.....................................................................................................................................237
Output Reference ...................................................................................................................237
Oval ........................................................................................................................................151
P
PAGE .............................................................................................................191, 290, 319, 443
Page List.................................................................................................................................192
Page Menu..............................................................................................................................190
Page Mode......................................................................................................................196, 275
Page n .....................................................................................................................................256
Page Objects...........................................................................................................................430
Inserting ...........................................................................................................................430
Page Options ..........................................................................................................................191
Page Request Register............................................................................................................507
Page Separator........................................................................................................................249
Page Size ................................................................................................................................240
Panel.................................................................................................18, 187, 379, 406, 473, 477
Connecting.........................................................................................................18, 473, 477
Download.........................................................................................................................379
Panel Controller Interface ......................................................................................................228
Panel Font.........................................................................................................35, 490, 493, 494

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 586
Tech-note

Compressing ....................................................................................................................494
Downloading ...................................................................................................................493
Panel Font Character Size ......................................................................................................492
Panel Font Name ......................................................................................................................35
Panel Font Size.........................................................................................................................36
Panel IO..................................................................................................................................235
Panel Key Button ...................................................................................................................119
Panel Key Button Touch Cell Example .................................................................................124
Panel Keys..............................................................................................................................265
Panel Memory ........................................................................................................................206
Panel Menu.............................................................................................................................217
Time Out..........................................................................................................................217
Panel Model ...........................................................................................................................428
Panel Model tab......................................................................................................................205
Panel Node .............................................................................................................................226
Panel Page Property ...............................................................................................................244
Panel Selection .......................................................................................................................427
Panel Setup.............................................................................................................................427
Panel Size ...............................................................................................................................386
Panel Startup ..........................................................................................................................322
Panel Status Area ...................................................................................................................501
Panel Status Word ..................................................................................................................502
Panel tab .................................................................................................................................386
Panel Time .............................................................................................................................428
Panel Upload Protection.........................................................................................................217
Parameter Sets........................................................................................................................194
Number ............................................................................................................................194
Parameters ..............................................................................................................................449
Parity ......................................................................................................................................240
Passthrough Mode..................................................................................................................275
Passthrough Settings ..............................................................................................................428
Passthrough Status ...................................................................................................................66
Passthrough tab ......................................................................................................................213
Password Automatic Login Example .....................................................................................291
Password Example .................................................................................................................293
Password Logout....................................................................................................................275
Password Protect ....................................................................................................................275
Password Status......................................................................................................................455
Passwords.........................................................................................................................65, 276
Paste .......................................................................................................................................195
PC.............................................................................................................................................18
PC Printer Communications Port ...........................................................................................474
Pinout...............................................................................................................................474
PC Printer Port Mode ...............................................................................................................70
PC Printer Port Module Number..............................................................................................69
Picture ....................................................................................................................................390
Pinout .............................................................................................................................473, 474
PC Printer Communications Port.....................................................................................474
PLC Communications Port ..............................................................................................473
Placing....................................................................................................................................443
Fields ...............................................................................................................................443
PLC ..................................................................................................................................58, 157

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 587
Tech-note

PLC Communications Port.....................................................................................................473

Pinout...............................................................................................................................473
PLC Drivers ...........................................................................................................................531
Changing..........................................................................................................................531
PLC Memory Area .................................................................................................................539
PLC Port Mode ........................................................................................................................68
PLC Port Module Number .......................................................................................................69
PLC Reference .......................................................................................................................105
Port Settings ...........................................................................................................................213
Ports Available .......................................................................................................................333
Position...................................................................................................................................384
Precision.................................................................................................................................166
Predefined Models .................................................................................................................386
Pressure Indexed Field .............................................................................................................75
Creating .............................................................................................................................75
Preview.....................................................................................................................................89
Previous Field.........................................................................................................................276
Previous Page .........................................................................................................................191
Previous Record .....................................................................................................................360
Previous Versions.....................................................................................................................16
Print ........................................................................................................................................378
Print Alarms ...........................................................................................................................277
Print Preview............................................................................................................................25
Print Report ............................................................................................................................277
Print Setup..............................................................................................................................358
Printer.....................................................................................................................................239
Printer Name ..........................................................................................................................239
Printer Properties....................................................................................................................239
Printer Setup...........................................................................................................................238
Printer Setup Example............................................................................................................497
Printout Node .........................................................................................................................227
Procedure................................................................................................................................437
Upgrade ...........................................................................................................................437
Progress ..................................................................................................................502, 503, 504
Project ..............................................................................................................44, 335, 429, 533
Configuring......................................................................................................................533
Creating ...........................................................................................................................429
Memory Location ............................................................................................................335
Project File .............................................................................................................430, 488, 489
Creating ...................................................................................................................488, 489
Saving ..............................................................................................................................430
Project Memory......................................................................................................................209
Project Menu ..........................................................................................................................198
Project Screen.........................................................................................................................423
Project Upload........................................................................................................................431
Properties................................................................................................................................187
Protocol ..........................................................................................................................240, 336
Memory Location ............................................................................................................336
Push Action ............................................................................................................................130
Push Button ............................................................................................................................129
Push Button Touch Cell Example ..........................................................................................131

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 588
Tech-note

Q
Quick Start Tutorial Introduction...............................................................................................7
Quick Start Tutorial#Enter_Text................................................................................................8
R
Range........................................................................................................................................80
Range tab..................................................................................................................................80
RDA .......................................................................................................................................499
RDA References.....................................................................................................................230
RDA Setup .............................................................................................................................229
Read Cycle .............................................................................................................................234
Read Modes............................................................................................................................234
Real Time Clock ....................................................................................................................501
Recent Files............................................................................................................................358
Recipe Action...........................................................................................................................62
Recipe Backup .......................................................................................................................209
Recipe Configuration .............................................................................................................193
Recipe Control .......................................................................................................................277
Recipe Data Fields .................................................................................................................510
Inserting ...........................................................................................................................510
Recipe Event Backup ...............................................................................................................67
Recipe Examples ....................................................................................................................520
Recipe File Status.....................................................................................................................61
Recipe Item ............................................................................................................................195
Recipe Key ...............................................................................................................................66
Recipe Menu ..........................................................................................................178, 273, 518
Multipage Recipes ...........................................................................................................518
Recipe Menu Example ...........................................................................................................515
Recipe Menu Field .................................................................................................................515
Creating ...........................................................................................................................515
Recipe Menu Keyboard Macros.............................................................................................516
Recipe Menu Support Fields ..................................................................................................514
Recipe Name Example ...........................................................................................................513
Recipe Names.........................................................................................................................513
Recipe Page..............................................................................................................................65
Selection ............................................................................................................................65
Recipe Parameter Set Selection................................................................................................61
Recipe Parameter Sets....................................................................................................195, 510
Configuring......................................................................................................................510
Recipe Size.............................................................................................................................209
Recipe Status..........................................................................................................................450
Recipe Upload........................................................................................................................335
Recipe Values.........................................................................................................................195
Recipes .............................................................70, 277, 480, 509, 510, 511, 512, 516, 518, 519
Recognition ............................................................................................................................204
Old Panel Models ............................................................................................................204
Record Menu..........................................................................................................................360
Rectangle........................................................................................................................151, 370
Redo .........................................................................................................................................32
Reference................................................................................................................................166
Refresh ...................................................................................................................................202
Refresh Database....................................................................................................................314
Remote Hardware...................................................................................................................215

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 589
Tech-note

Remote Passthrough...............................................................................................................343
Remove ..................................................................................................................................243
Remove All ............................................................................................................................244
Replace...................................................................................................................................359
Report Header Footer .............................................................................................................496
Report List..............................................................................................................................242
Report on Panel Printer ..........................................................................................................237
Report Printout .......................................................................................................................497
Triggering ........................................................................................................................497
Reports ...........................................................................................................................251, 496
Request Data Entry Mode ......................................................................................................453
Reserved Data Area................................................................................................................480
Reset.......................................................................................................................................189
Reset Delete ...........................................................................................................................395
Restore....................................................................................................................................413
Retries ....................................................................................................................................334
Communications Number................................................................................................334
Return.....................................................................................................................................278
Initial Page.......................................................................................................................278
Right.......................................................................................................................................278
Right-Click Menus .................................................................................................................423
Rim.........................................................................................................................................169
ROM File ...............................................................................................................................379
Export ..............................................................................................................................379
Rotation ..................................................................................................................................170
Row ........................................................................................................................................246
Row Menu..............................................................................................................................369
RS232.....................................................................................................................................475
RS485 ..............................................................................................................................475
TSI01 Bus ........................................................................................................................475
RS232 Cable...........................................................................................................................474
TSI01 Bus ........................................................................................................................474
RS485.............................................................................................................................221, 475
RS232 ..............................................................................................................................475
RS485 Cable...........................................................................................................................475
TSI02 Bus ........................................................................................................................475
RS485 Network......................................................................................................................473
Running ..................................................................................................................................490
Network ...........................................................................................................................490
S
S0 Link Status Monitor Flag ..................................................................................................502
S1 Data Entry Active .............................................................................................................502
S13 Recipe Upload.................................................................................................................504
S14 Recipe Download............................................................................................................504
S15 Recipe File Status ...........................................................................................................504
S2 Printing..............................................................................................................................502
S3 Printer Status.....................................................................................................................503
S4 Date ...................................................................................................................................503
S5 Attempt .............................................................................................................................503
Access Protected Function...............................................................................................503
S6 Battery Low ......................................................................................................................503
S7 Alarm Active.....................................................................................................................503

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 590
Tech-note

S8 Unacknowledged Alarm Active........................................................................................503

Samples ..................................................................................................................157, 320, 536
Methods ...........................................................................................................................536
tab ....................................................................................................................................320
Save As.....................................................................................................................................24
Saving.....................................................................................................................366, 373, 430
Font..................................................................................................................................373
Project File.......................................................................................................................430
Scaling..................................................................................................................81, 82, 83, 166
Example .......................................................................................................................82, 83
tab ......................................................................................................................................81
Scroll ..............................................................................................................................192, 278
Line..................................................................................................................................278
Scroll Direction ......................................................................................................................157
Scroll Down ...........................................................................................................................278
Scroll Recipe Menu................................................................................................................279
Scroll Up ................................................................................................................................279
Second Client .........................................................................................................................489
Select All..................................................................................................................................32
Select Controller.....................................................................................................................202
Select Data Entry Field ..........................................................................................................279
Select Language .......................................................................................................................95
Selecting.................................................................................................................................429
Font..................................................................................................................................429
Selection...................................................................................................................................65
Recipe Page .......................................................................................................................65
Selector Switch.......................................................................................................................136
Selector Switch Touch Cell Example.....................................................................................140
Serial ports .............................................................................................................................332
Servers............................................................................................................................463, 488
Set As Default ........................................................................................................................312
Set As Recipe Name...............................................................................................................194
Set Current Language.............................................................................................................459
Set Parameter Set Number .....................................................................................................452
Set Recipe Transfer Priority...................................................................................................453
Set RTC..................................................................................................................................457
Setting ....................................................................................................................486, 496, 532
Up ....................................................................................................................486, 496, 532
Settings List............................................................................................................................208
Settings tab .............................................................................................................................207
Setup...............................................................................................................................426, 427
Shapes ....................................................................................................................................150
Sharpen...................................................................................................................................189
Show.........................................................................................................................................49
Show Alarm List ....................................................................................................................280
Show Event List .....................................................................................................................280
Show Grid ..............................................................................................................................404
Show Tooltips ........................................................................................................................394
Signed Unsigned ......................................................................................................................56
Simple Data Fields .................................................................................................................431
Simple Recipe Example .........................................................................................................521
Simple Shapes ........................................................................................................................542

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 591
Tech-note

Simple Touch Cells ................................................................................................................432

Single Server Multiple Clients ...............................................................................................468
Size.................................................................................................................................172, 189
Fit.....................................................................................................................................189
Smooth ...................................................................................................................................189
Snap........................................................................................................................................404
Grid..................................................................................................................................404
Software Installation ................................................................................................................16
Solving .....................................................................................................................................19
Installation Problems .........................................................................................................19
Special Characters ..................................................................................................................182
Special Formats......................................................................................................................249
Special Pages..........................................................................................................................196
SSFDC ...........................................................................................................................328, 387
Download.........................................................................................................................328
SSFDC Error Codes ...............................................................................................................329
Displaying........................................................................................................................329
Stage Numeric Data Field ........................................................................................................74
Creating .............................................................................................................................74
Start ........................................................................................................................................171
Start Program After Download ..............................................................................................334
Start Recipe Download ..........................................................................................................451
Start Recipe Upload ...............................................................................................................451
Start Report Printout ..............................................................................................................457
Start Screen Saver ..................................................................................................................459
Start Transfer..........................................................................................................................456
Start Transfer No Confirmation .............................................................................................455
States ......................................................................................................................................265
Static Attributes........................................................................................................................97
Status Bar ...............................................................................................................................362
Status Word............................................................................................................................449
Step.........................................................................................................................................280
Step Control Variables ...........................................................................................................280
Stop ........................................................................................................................................344
Stop Bits .................................................................................................................................203
Stop Report Printout...............................................................................................................458
Stop Sampling ........................................................................................................................321
Stop Screen Saver ..................................................................................................................459
Structure .................................................................................................................................448
Mailbox............................................................................................................................448
Style .........................................................................................................................................97
Symbol Browser.....................................................................................................................372
System ....................................................................................................................................197
System Requirements...............................................................................................................15
T
Tab ...................................................................................................................................81, 320
Sampling..........................................................................................................................320
Scaling ...............................................................................................................................81
Tag Dictionary ...............................................................................................................527, 532
Tag Editor...............................................................................................................................529
Tag Editor Synchronization ...................................................................................................530
Tag Example ..........................................................................................................................532

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 592
Tech-note

Tag Groups.............................................................................................................................530
Tag Validation................................................................................................................531, 534
Testing .............................................................................................................................534
Tags ........................................................................................................................................527
Tags UniNETand PLC Networks...........................................................................................528
Tail .........................................................................................................................................173
TCM10 Board ........................................................................................................................470
Temperature Indexed Field ......................................................................................................74
Creating .............................................................................................................................74
Testing....................................................................................................................................534
Tag Validation .................................................................................................................534
Text ..........................................................................................................................................50
Text Entry...............................................................................................................................405
Text tab.....................................................................................................................................79
Thickness................................................................................................................................173
Ticks.......................................................................................................................................171
Tile Horizontally ....................................................................................................................412
Tile Vertically ........................................................................................................................412
Time ...............................................................................................................................198, 251
Time Data Field......................................................................................................................113
Time Data Field Example ......................................................................................................114
Time Date...............................................................................................................................264
Time Format...........................................................................................................................210
Time Indexed Field ..................................................................................................................77
Creating .............................................................................................................................77
Time Out ................................................................................................................................217
Data Entry........................................................................................................................217
Field Selection .................................................................................................................217
Panel Menu ......................................................................................................................217
Time Update...........................................................................................................................503
Time/Date Decrement ............................................................................................................280
Time/Date Increment..............................................................................................................281
Title ........................................................................................................................................160
Title Color ..............................................................................................................................168
Title Font................................................................................................................................168
Title X ....................................................................................................................................168
Title Y ....................................................................................................................................168
Toggle Relay ..........................................................................................................................281
Toolbars..................................................................................................................................421
Tools.......................................................................................................................................396
Tools Menu ............................................................................................................................344
Tooltips ..................................................................................................................................424
Touch Cell Keyboard Macro Editor Example........................................................................117
Touch Cell Preview Window .................................................................................................116
Touch Cells ............................................................................................................................116
Touch Screen..........................................................................................................................209
Transfer ..................................................................................................................................333
Transfer Advanced .................................................................................................................335
Transfer Settings ....................................................................................................................425
Transfers Menu ......................................................................................................................326
Trend Buffer...........................................................................................................315, 535, 536
Configuring......................................................................................................................536

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 593
Tech-note

Trend Buffer Print ..................................................................................................................281

Trend Buffers on PLC ............................................................................................................539
Trend Cursor ..........................................................................................................................282
Trend Limitations...................................................................................................................541
Trend Macros .........................................................................................................................540
Trend Printing ........................................................................................................................541
Trend Time Field....................................................................................................................175
Trend Time Field Example ....................................................................................................178
Trend Viewer Scrolling..........................................................................................................283
Trend Viewer Zooming..........................................................................................................283
Trend Window .......................................................................................................................151
Trend Window Example ........................................................................................................162
Trend Window Limitations ....................................................................................................152
Trends.....................................................................................................................................535
Trigger Properties...................................................................................................................251
Trigger Type...........................................................................................................................251
Triggers ..........................................................................................................................250, 497
Report Printout ................................................................................................................497
TSI01......................................................................................................................................475
TSI01 Bus.......................................................................................................................474, 475
RS232 ..............................................................................................................................475
RS232 Cable ....................................................................................................................474
TSI02 Bus...............................................................................................................................475
RS485 Cable ....................................................................................................................475
TSI02 Bus Terminal ...............................................................................................................476
Type .......................................................................................................................................391
U
Undo.........................................................................................................................................32
Uni7Seg Font .........................................................................................................................492
UniComic Font.......................................................................................................................492
UniNET Networks .........................................................................................................445, 462
Configuring......................................................................................................................445
UniNET OPC Server......................................................................................................481, 485
UniNET TCPIP ......................................................................................................................224
UniNET Technical Data.........................................................................................................466
UniOP SSFDC Error Codes ...................................................................................................328
Up
Setting..............................................................................................................486, 496, 532
Update Cycle..........................................................................................................................237
Update Firmware....................................................................................................................334
Update PLC References .........................................................................................................209
Upgrade ..................................................................................................................................437
Procedure .........................................................................................................................437
Upload ............................................................................................................................327, 445
Downloading ...................................................................................................................445
Use Modem ............................................................................................................................333
Use Tags.................................................................................................................................533
Using Tags .............................................................................................................................530
V
Value Objects .........................................................................................................................390
Creating ...........................................................................................................................390
Version ...................................................................................................................................337

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 594
Tech-note

Vertical Align.........................................................................................................................390
Vertical Position.....................................................................................................................384
View Menu...............................................................................................................................38
W
Wait ........................................................................................................................................283
Welcome ....................................................................................................................................6
Width......................................................................................................................................161
Width Menu ...........................................................................................................................369
Workspace..............................................................................................................................414
Wrap Lines .............................................................................................................................249
Write.......................................................................................................................................284
Controller.........................................................................................................................284
X
X Axis ....................................................................................................................................156
X Axis Maximum...................................................................................................................158
X Axis Minimum ...................................................................................................................158
X Cursor .................................................................................................................................158
X Grid.....................................................................................................................................161
X Grid Color ..........................................................................................................................162
X Grid Marks .........................................................................................................................162
Y
Y Axis ....................................................................................................................................153
Y Axis Maximum...................................................................................................................155
Y Axis Minimum ...................................................................................................................155
Y Cursor .................................................................................................................................155
Y Grid.....................................................................................................................................162
Y Grid Color ..........................................................................................................................162
Y Grid Marks .........................................................................................................................162
Z
Zoom In....................................................................................................................................38
Zoom Out .................................................................................................................................39

Tn179-03.doc - 4.10.2005
Designer Manual 595